VOLUME 2 AIR OPERATOR AND AIR AGENCY CERTIFICATION … history... · 2010. 11. 24. ·...

04/16/08 FY08 THIRD QUARTER EDITORIAL UPDATES 8900.1 CHG 0

1 UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED

Check with FSIMS to verify current version before using

VOLUME 2 AIR OPERATOR AND AIR AGENCY CERTIFICATION AND APPLICATION PROCESS

CHAPTER 3 THE CERTIFICATION PROCESS—TITLE 14 CFR PART 121

Section 1 General Information

2-296 OVERVIEW. A Certification Project Team (CPT), composed of inspectors from the certificate-holding district office and Flight Standards Certification and Surveillance Division, AFS-900, accomplishes certification of new Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 121 air carriers.

A. Before issuing an air carrier Operating Certificate, the CPT will verify that an applicant is capable of operating safely and is in compliance with the regulations and standards prescribed by the Administrator. To do this, the CPT will follow a structured process that uses a system safety-based approach to thoroughly assess the design and performance of the system the applicant proposes. Air Transportation Oversight System (ATOS) processes and tools form the basis for part 121 air carrier certification.

B. Refer to Volume 10, Chapter 6, The Certification Process of 14 CFR Part 121 Air Carriers, for guidance.

RESERVED. Paragraphs 2-297 through 2-315.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



VOLUME 3 GENERAL TECHNICAL ADMINISTRATION

CHAPTER 18 OPERATIONS SPECIFICATIONS

Section 5 Part C Operations Specifications—Airplane Terminal Instrument Procedures and Airport Authorizations and Limitations

3-871 GENERAL. Part C is issued to operators who conduct Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 121 or part 135 operations with fixed wing airplanes. It is not issued to part 135 operators who conduct only helicopter operations. Instrument flight rules (IFR) helicopter operators are issued Part H. Part C is not usually issued to part 135 on-demand operators who are restricted to visual flight rules (VFR) only operations. In rare situations operations specification (OpSpec) C070, of Part C is issued to part 135 VFR only operators who are authorized to conduct commuter operations.

OPSPEC/MSPEC C049, DESTINATION AIRPORT ANALYSIS.

A. OpSpec C049 is an optional authorization for part 135 certificate holders that have been issued OpSpec A057 as an eligible on-demand operator for reducing effective runway length requirements for turbine engine-powered large transport category airplanes that must be met prior to a flight’s release, provided certain requirements are met by the operator. Management Specification (MSpec) C049 is an optional authorization for 14 CFR part 91 subpart K (part 91K) Fractional Ownership Operations program managers to reduce effective runway length requirements for turbine engine-powered large transport category airplanes that must be met prior to a flight’s release, provided certain requirements are met by the program manager.

B. Destination Airport Analysis. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations governing operations under part 91K and part 135 provide for reducing effective runway length requirements for turbine engine-powered large transport category airplanes that must be met prior to a flight’s release, provided certain requirements are met by the operator. For destination airports, normal landing distance requirements for parts 91 subpart K and 135 operations are 60 percent of the available runway length. For alternate airport landing distance requirements, part 91 subpart K remains at 60 percent, while part 135 allows for 70 percent of the effective runway length. If an operator desires to reduce such requirements below 60 percent of the available runway length, that operator must meet regulatory requirements in two areas:

1) Part 135 Eligible On-demand Operator (OpSpec A057 must be issued) or part 91K program experience; and

2) FAA-approved Destination Airport Analysis Program (DAAP). The DAAP must address specific regulatory requirements and be approved for use through that operator’s MSpecs or OpSpecs, as applicable.

C. Experience Requirements. An eligible on-demand operator is defined in part 135, § 135.4. Fractional ownership programs must meet the same requirements and are identified in part 91K, §§ 91.1053 and 91.1055. The requirements include:

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



1) An on-demand or fractional ownership program operation that meets the following requirements:

a) Two-pilot crew. The flightcrew must consist of at least two qualified pilots employed or contracted by the certificate holder.

b) Flightcrew experience. The crewmembers must have met the applicable requirements of 14 CFR part 61 and have the following experience and ratings:

1. Total flight time for all pilots:

• Pilot in command (PIC)—A minimum of 1,500 hours. • Second in command (SIC)—A minimum of 500 hours.

2. For multi-engine turbine-powered fixed-wing and powered-lift aircraft, the following FAA certification and ratings requirements:

• PIC—Airline transport pilot and applicable type ratings. • SIC—Commercial pilot and instrument ratings.

3. For all other aircraft, the following FAA certification and rating requirements:

• PIC—Commercial pilot and instrument ratings. • SIC—Commercial pilot and instrument ratings.

c) Pilot operating limitations. If the SIC of a fixed-wing aircraft has fewer than 100 hours of flight time as SIC flying in the aircraft make and model and, if a type rating is required in the type aircraft being flown, and the PIC is not an appropriately qualified check pilot, the PIC shall make all takeoffs and landings in any of the following situations:

1. Landings at the destination airport when a Destination Airport Analysis is required by § 135.385(f); and

2. In any of the following conditions:

• The prevailing visibility for the airport is at or below 3/4 mile. • The runway visual range (RVR) for the runway to be used is at or

below 4,000 feet. • The runway to be used has water, snow, slush, ice, or similar

contamination that may adversely affect aircraft performance. • The braking action on the runway to be used is reported to be less than

“good.” • The crosswind component for the runway to be used is in excess of

15 knots. • Wind shear is reported in the vicinity of the airport.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



• Any other condition in which the PIC determines it to be prudent to exercise the PIC’s authority.

d) Crew pairing. Either the PIC or the SIC must have at least 75 hours of flight time in that aircraft make or model and, if a type rating is required for that type aircraft, either as PIC or SIC.

D. Deviations. The Administrator may authorize deviations from the total flight time requirements of § 91.1053(a)(1) or crew pairing requirements of § 91.1055(b) if the FAA office that issued the OpSpecs or MSpecs, as applicable, finds that the crewmember has comparable experience, and can effectively perform the functions associated with the position in accordance with the requirements of this chapter. The Administrator may, at any time, terminate any grant of deviation authority issued under this provision. Grants of deviation may be authorized after consideration of the size and scope of the operation, the qualifications of the intended operating pilots and the following circumstances:

1) A newly authorized certificate holder does not employ any pilots who meet the minimum requirements of § 91.1055(b).

2) An existing certificate holder adds to its fleet a new category and class aircraft not used before in its operation.

3) An existing certificate holder establishes a new base to which it assigns pilots who will be required to become qualified on the aircraft operated from that base.

E. Destination Airport Analysis Program (DAAP) Requirements. DAAP requirements are found in § 91.1025 and § 135.23. Specifically, if required by § 91.1037(c) or § 135.385, as applicable, the Destination Airport Analysis establishing runway safety margins must include the following elements, supported by aircraft performance data supplied by the aircraft manufacturer for the appropriate runway conditions at the airport(s) to be used, if a reduction below 60 percent of the available runway length is planned:

1) Pilot qualifications and experience. The operator is responsible for including all applicable regulatory requirements to establish a pilot’s eligibility to reduce effective runway planning requirements below 60 percent of the available runway length. Experience requirements address pilots with less than 100 hours flight time in type (high minimum), total flight time, and crew pairing limitations (less than 75 hours in type).

2) Aircraft performance data to include normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures as supplied by the aircraft manufacturer. Landing distance calculations should be completed using FAA-approved procedures and data. Consideration must be given to abnormal and emergency procedures, as some of these procedures may increase approach speeds and consequently, landing distance requirements. Additionally, planned takeoff weight for the departure from that airport should be evaluated before operating into that airport.

3) Airport facilities and topography. Consider what services are available at the airport. Services such as communications, maintenance, and fueling may have an impact on operations to and from that airport. Terrain features may figure prominently in or near a

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



particular airport. High, fast-rising terrain may require special approach or departure procedures (DP), which may impact performance requirements. For example, an aircraft certification criterion uses a 3.5-degree glideslope angle in computing landing distance data. Glideslope angles of 2.5 to 3 degrees are common and have the effect of lengthening actual landing distance. Airports that sit on top of hilly terrain or downwind of mountainous terrain may occasionally experience conditions that include gusty conditions or winds shifting from a headwind to a tailwind. Such conditions are an important consideration during the landing maneuver, particularly during the flare, and increase landing distance requirements.

4) Runway conditions (including contamination). Runway features, such as slope and surface composition, can cause the actual landing distance to be longer than the calculated landing distance. Wet or slippery runways may preclude reductions from being taken and, in fact, require 115 percent of the distance derived from calculations, whether a reduction was used or not. This distance is calculated by increasing the distance required under dry conditions by an additional 15 percent (i.e., if Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) data shows the actual landing distance will be 2,000 feet, the effective runway length required is 3,334 feet using 60 percent in this example. If the runway is expected to be wet or slippery upon arrival, the effective runway length required is 3,834 feet). Braking action always impacts the landing distance required as it deteriorates. Always consider the most current braking action report and the likelihood of an update prior to the flight’s arrival at a particular airport.

5) Airport or area weather reporting. Some airports may not have current weather reports and forecasts available for flight planning. Others may have automated observations for operational use. Still others may depend on a nearby airport’s forecast for operations. Area forecasts are also very valuable in evaluating weather conditions for a particular operation. Comparing forecasted conditions to current conditions will lend insight to changes taking place as weather systems move and forecasts are updated. Longer flight segments may lean more heavily on the forecast for the estimated time of arrival (ETA), as current conditions may change significantly as weather systems move. For example, if a flight is planned for five hours en route, the current conditions may not provide as much insight as a forecast for the arrival time, if a cold front is expected to pass through the area while a flight is en route.

6) Appropriate additional runway safety margins, if required. Displaced thresholds, airport construction, and temporary obstacles (such as cranes and drawbridges) may impact runway length available for landing. Notices to Airmen (NOTAMS) must be consulted prior to conducting a flight and are a good source of information on items such as these.

7) Airplane inoperative equipment. Thrust reversers, on airplanes so equipped, provide some effect of reducing landing rollout distance. However, they are not considered in landing distance performance requirements and data provided by airplane manufacturers during certification. Rather, they provide an added margin of safety when used. If thrust reversers are inoperable or not installed, that additional safety margin does not exist. Also, their effectiveness is directly related to many factors, including pilot technique, reverser deployment rates, engine speeds, and environmental conditions (e.g., wet or contaminated runways in conjunction with crosswinds). Their actual effectiveness varies greatly. Other airplane systems that directly impact landing distance requirements include antiskid and ground spoilers (if installed), brake and tire condition, and landing flap selection, to name a few.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



8) Environmental conditions. Many environmental conditions directly and indirectly affect actual landing distance requirements. Frontal passage usually causes winds to shift, sometimes causing a tailwind component. Tailwinds generally have a significantly greater impact on landing distance than headwinds. Thunderstorms in the vicinity of airports can introduce wind gusts from different directions, including wind shear, to varying degrees that are difficult to predict in advance or during the actual landing maneuver itself. Density and pressure altitudes also directly impact landing distance requirements. Landing distance tables may take these factors into account. However, variations from planned conditions and actual conditions at time of landing can vary and impact actual landing distance requirements. Stronger than forecasted tailwinds en route can cause the airplane to weigh more than projected, causing the actual landing distance to be longer than planned. If icing conditions were encountered while en route and temperatures above freezing are not reached prior to landing, any ice remaining behind removal devices or on areas that are not protected add additional weight and drag to the airplane, which in turn requires higher airspeeds and longer landing distances.

9) Other criteria that affect aircraft performance. Many other variables have an effect on landing distance. Approach speed, flap configuration, airplane weight, tire and brake condition, airplane equipment, and environmental conditions, to name a few, all directly impact required landing distance. With these and many other factors considered, it is the pilot who must apply their application through the use of procedures and technique, the latter being highly variable. While specific additives are provided by manufacturer’s landing data, a pilot usually applies techniques acquired through experience in dealing with similar circumstances. Pilots may opt for an especially smooth landing on longer runways by “floating” in ground effect, prior to touchdown. While possibly yielding a smooth landing, this technique will add to the landing distance requirement, as landing data provided by manufacturer’s data through the certification process assumes a touchdown rate of descent of eight feet per second. The following tables provide additional insight into factors that affect landing distance requirements and policies and procedures addressing them should be included in the operator’s FAA-approved DAAP.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



Table 3-16, Reduction of Landing Distance Planning Requirements

GENERAL OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS CERTIFICATION CRITERIA

OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATION

EFFECT ON SAFETY MARGIN

3.5 degree glideslope angle.

2.5 to 3 degrees typical. Actual landing distance will be longer than calculated landing distance.

8 ft./sec touchdown rate of descent.

2 to 4 ft./sec typical. Actual landing distance will be longer than calculated landing distance.

Assumes all approach speed additives bled off before reaching the 50-foot height.

5 to 10 knots exceedances not uncommon.

Actual landing distance will be longer than calculated landing distance.

Longer flare distance (“float”). Actual landing distance will be longer than calculated landing distance.

Less than full braking effort. Actual landing distance will be longer than calculated landing distance.

Delays in obtaining full braking configuration.


Higher temperatures not accounted for (temperature accountability not required).


Downhill runway slope not accounted for (runway slope accountability not required).


Icy, slippery, or contaminated runway surface.


Airplane heavier at time of landing than predicted at time of dispatch.


Airplane higher than 50 feet over the threshold.


Airport pressure altitude higher than predicted at time of dispatch.


5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



OTHER VARIABLE CONSIDERATIONS STEADY-STATE VARIABLES

NON STEADY-STATE VARIABLES

ACTUAL OPERATIONS VS. FLIGHT TEST

ACTUAL VS. FORECAST CONDITIONS

Runway slope Wind gusts/turbulence

Flare technique Runway or direction (affecting slope)

Temperature Flight path deviations

Time to activate deceleration devices

Airplane weight

Runway surface condition (dry, wet, icy, texture)

Flight path angle Approach speed

Brake/tire condition Rate of descent at touch down

Environmental conditions (for example, temperature, wind, pressure altitude)

Speed additives Approach/touchdown speed

Engine failure

Crosswinds Height at threshold

Speed control F. Operators are responsible for preparing their Destination Airport Analysis program if

they desire to reduce landing distance planning requirements below 60 percent of the effective runway length. Operators must ensure that their policies and procedures reflect at least minimum regulatory requirements and adequate policies and procedures prior to submitting their program to the FAA for approval.

G. Checklist. The checklist is available electronically in the guidance subsystem of the automated Operations Safety System (OPSS) in association with OpSpec/MSpec C049. The checklist should be used to ensure that the operator and its DAAP meets minimum regulatory requirements. This checklist should be completed by the operator and be provided to the FAA office having approval authority, along with the DAAP and request for approval and issuance of OpSpec C049 or MSpec C049, as applicable.

OPSPEC C050, SPECIAL PILOT-IN-COMMAND AIRPORT QUALIFICATIONS.

A. OpSpec C050 is used to authorize part 121 air carrier certificate holders to conduct IFR operations into special airports requiring special airport qualification in accordance with the provisions and limitations of the OpSpec and part 121, § 121.445. For detailed information refer to Volume 4, Aircraft Equipment and Operational Authorizations, Chapter 3, Airplane Performance and Airplane Data, Section 5, Selected Practices, paragraph 602, Special Airports Requiring Special PIC Qualification.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



B. Air carriers conducting domestic, flag, and supplemental operations require PIC to be qualified for operations into special PIC qualification airports. These PICs must be qualified in accordance with § 121.445.

1) OpSpec C050, Special PIC Airport Qualification, is used to authorize special PIC qualification airports for domestic, flag, and supplemental part 121 air carriers.

2) The list of Special Qualification Airports can be found in the OPSS guidance subsystem in association with OpSpec C050 and on the http://www.opspecs.com Web site.

C. If both the ceiling and the visibility minima are not satisfied as detailed in § 121.445(c), then the qualification requirements of § 121.445(b) apply. Section 121.445(b) specifies that for a pilot to serve as PIC on a flight to a special qualification airport, the PIC must have the benefit of one of the following:

1) The PIC, within the preceding 12 calendar-months, has made a takeoff and landing at that airport while serving as a pilot flight crewmember;

2) The SIC, within the preceding 12 calendar-months, has made a takeoff and landing at that airport while serving as a pilot flight crewmember; or

3) Within the preceding 12 calendar-months, the PIC has qualified by using pictorial means acceptable to the Administrator for that airport.

D. The operator assesses the nature and complexity of certain factors associated with the airport (i.e., high altitude, foreign airport, specific terrain features, unique weather patterns may be present singly or in combination). This assessment determines whether the airport should be included in the air carrier’s airport listing in OpSpec paragraph C067, Special Airports or the provisions of OpSpec C050, Special PIC Qualification Airports apply. For instance, an airport with an approved IFR and or VFR approach/departure procedure and an unusual characteristic such as a nearby politically sensitive international boundary, or high terrain may require designation as a special PIC qualification airport. In this case, the airport would need to be listed in OpSpec C067 and the provisions of OpSpec C050 also apply. Refer to Volume 4, Chapter 3, Section 5, paragraph 602, and paragraph 3-871 OpSpec C067 in this section.

E. The air carriers, in conjunction with the Air Transportation Division (AFS-200), will determine any airport additions or deletions from the Special Airport Qualification list. These changes will be made on a quarterly basis.

OPSPEC/MSPEC C051, TERMINAL INSTRUMENT PROCEDURES. C051 is issued to all airplane operators who conduct any flight operations under IFR. FAA Order 8260.31B, Foreign Terminal Instrument Procedures, provides direction and guidance on acceptance of foreign terminal instrument procedures. Additional information concerning terminal instrument procedures is in Volume 4, Chapter 2, All-Weather Terminal Area Operations, Section 3, Factors Affecting All-Weather Terminal Area (AWTA) Operations. For helicopter authorization, see OpSpec H101.

http://www.opspecs.com/�

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



OPSPEC/MSPEC/LOA C052—BASIC INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE AUTHORIZATIONS—ALL AIRPORTS.

A. Applicability. OpSpec/MSpec/letter of authorization (LOA) C052 applies to operators conducting operations under parts 91K, 121, 125 (including those operators conducting operations under a part 125 Letter of Deviation Authority (LODA)), and 135. OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C052 specifies the types of instrument approaches the operator is authorized to conduct under IFR and prohibits the use of other types of instrument approaches.

1) Before authorizing a type of instrument approach procedure (IAP), the principal operations inspector (POI) must ensure the operator has established the aircraft system eligibility and the flightcrew training and checking requirements, and has revised the training and operations manuals, as applicable, for the types of approaches to be authorized.

2) Refer to Volume 4, Chapter 2, Section 1, Introduction to and Evolution of All-Weather Terminal Area Operations, for information on required training for various types of approaches.

3) All the approaches approved by OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C052 must be published in accordance with 14 CFR part 97 or the foreign state authority.

4) For part 135 operations, if the visibility and ceiling are below minimums, the reported RVR may be used if that RVR is at or above the minimums for the instrument procedure being used and authorized for that certificate holder.

B. Authorization. Three types of IAPs may be authorized in OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C052. (If the certificate holder/program manager/operator is authorized to conduct global positioning system (GPS) and/or GPS wide-area augmentation system (WAAS) instrument approach operations using the approved GPS and/or GPS WAAS equipment with “…. or GPS”, GPS, or Area Navigation (RNAV) (GPS) or RNAV Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) listed in table 1 of OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C052, the aircraft and equipment must be listed in table 1 of paragraph/LOA B034.)

1) Column one of OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C052 provides for the authorization of nonprecision IAPs without vertical guidance. Nonprecision approaches must be trained and conducted in accordance with an approved procedure that ensures descent will not go below minimum descent altitude (MDA), unless the required visual references for continuing the approach, as specified in part 91, § 91.175, are present.

2) Column two of OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C052 provides for the authorization of approach procedures with vertical guidance (APV). These approaches provide vertical guidance, but do not meet the same standards as precision approach systems (e.g., instrument landing systems (ILS) and microwave landing systems (MLS)) as defined by the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO). These APVs are trained using an approved method that allows descent to a published decision altitude. The column heading agrees with the ICAO acronym, APV.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



3) Column three of OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C052 provides for the authorization of precision APVs from an electronic glideslope.

4) “*RNAV ILS” is a selectable for column 3 in table 1 of the C052 template. For example, the United Arab Emirates publishes approach plates for Dubai titled, “RNAV ILS” or “ILS RNAV.” The RNAV portion of the approach constitutes an RNAV standard terminal arrival route (STAR) which must be authorized through the issuance of OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C063, in accordance with guidance for RNAV departure procedures and RNAV STARs.

C. Global Positioning System and GPS Wide Area Augmentation System Authorization. Volume 4, Chapter 1, Section 2, Air Navigation Approval Requirements, paragraphs 4-31 and 4-32, provide more extensive guidance on GPS and GPS WAAS equipment. The applicant must show that it has the ability to safely conduct GPS operations. The demonstration of GPS (using equipment certified under Technical Standard Order (TSO) C-129a) and/or GPS WAAS (using equipment certified under TSO C-145a/C 146a) instrument approaches may be credited for other equivalent types of required approaches (e.g., nonprecision approaches). Foreign approach procedures may be labeled as “RNAV (GNSS)” (instead of “RNAV (GPS)”) which is provided as a selectable in OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C052.

1) For the certificate holder/program manager/operator using aircraft other than those equipped with a multisensor flight management system (FMS), the flightcrew must have successfully completed the certificate holder’s/program manager’s/operator’s (approved-See subparagraph C5)h) below) training program curriculum segments for GPS and/or GPS WAAS operations, as applicable, and the PIC and the SIC must be checked for competency by an authorized check airman or FAA inspector for instrument approach operations using the GPS in each aircraft type and GPS combination. (Single-pilot operators conducting operations under part 135 and issued OpSpec A040 that do not have an approved training program must be checked for competency by an FAA inspector for instrument approach operations using GPS/GPS WAAS, as applicable, in each aircraft type and GPS combination.)

2) For operators whose aircraft are equipped with multisensor FMS RNAV systems that include a GPS/GPS WAAS sensor, the requirement to demonstrate a GPS approach during initial qualification checks as described below does not apply (although an inspector or check airman always has the authority to see one demonstrated).

3) Operators with various types of stand-alone IFR GPS navigation equipment and databases (other than aircraft equipped with a multisensor FMS) are required to demonstrate a GPS approach during initial qualification checks and should continue to be checked to ensure continued proficiency and understanding of the applicable GPS navigation equipment and database performance, limitations and procedures.

a) During the initial 6 months of operation with a particular aircraft type and GPS combination, the certificate holder/program manager/operator must not use IFR approach and landing minimums lower than 200 feet and 1/2 statute mile above the lowest authorized MDA and visibility/RVR minimums using GPS or GPS WAAS, as applicable.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



b) The demonstration of any other nonprecision approaches may not be credited toward the authorization requirement to demonstrate at least one nonprecision approach utilizing GPS and/or GPS WAAS equipment during the competency check required by part 135 § 135.297 and the proficiency check required by part 121 § 121.441(a)(1) and part 125 § 125.291.

4) Pilots may plan to use any instrument approach authorized for use with WAAS avionics at a required alternate if the aircraft is equipped with GPS WAAS equipment certified in accordance with TSO C-145a/C-146a. When using WAAS at an alternate airport, flight planning must be based on flying the RNAV (GPS) lateral navigation (LNAV) minimums line, or minimums on a GPS approach procedure, or conventional approach procedure with “or GPS” in the title. Upon arrival at an alternate, when the WAAS navigation system indicates that LNAV/vertical navigation (VNAV) or localizer performance with vertical guidance service is available, then vertical guidance may be used to complete the approach using the displayed level of service. The FAA has begun removing the “NA” (alternate minimums not authorized) symbol from select RNAV (GPS) and GPS approach procedures so they may be used by approach approved WAAS receivers at alternate airports. Some approach procedures will still require the NA for other reasons (e.g., no weather reporting), so it cannot be removed from all procedures. Because every procedure must be individually evaluated, removal of “NA” from RNAV (GPS) and GPS procedures will take some time.

5) Regarding application for approval to conduct GPS and/or GPS WAAS IFR operations:

a) The operator must apply in accordance with Volume 3, Chapter 29, Proving and Validation Tests; revise its manuals, procedures, and checklists; and alter the flight training curriculums to include segments on GPS operations.

b) The discussion in the following paragraphs provides specific direction and guidance related to GPS/GPS WAAS and is to be used in conjunction with existing area/long range navigation guidance and instrument approach guidance contained in Volume 4, Chapter 1, Air Navigation, Communications, and Surveillance. The operator’s authorizations must specify these conditions.

c) The application must also provide documentation which validates approval of the installed GPS airborne receiver in accordance with current editions of Advisory Circular (AC) 20-138, Airworthiness Approval of Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Equipment; and AC 20-130, Airworthiness Approval of Navigation or Flight Management Systems Integrating Multiple Navigation Sensors.

6) When it has been established that the airborne system has been certified for the appropriate GPS IFR operations, the following criteria should be used to determine the operational suitability of airborne systems for GPS/GPS WAAS IFR operations in flight operations:

a) The operator must ensure that the equipment is properly installed and maintained. No special requirements, other than the standard practices currently applicable to

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



navigation or landing systems, have been identified as unique to GPS/GPS WAAS (Airworthiness Directives, Service Bulletins, etc.).

b) The operator’s manuals, policies, and procedures as described in Volume 3, Chapter 32, Manuals, Procedures, and Checklists for 14 CFR Parts 91K, 121, 125, and 135, must incorporate the manufacturer’s instructions for continuing airworthiness of the applicable GPS system.

c) Operators should revise their minimum equipment list and operations and maintenance procedures to incorporate the installed GPS/GPS WAAS equipment.

d) Operators that conduct operations under parts 121 and 135 must ensure that service difficulties are reported in accordance with approved procedures under parts 121 and 135. Operators conducting operations under part 125 must include GPS service difficulty reporting procedures in the manual required by part 125, § 125.73(f).

e) The applicant must document the proposed pilot training and qualification program. This program must at least address the following training and qualification requirements:

1. Crew training and qualification for GPS instrument approach operations should be consistent with the qualifications required for the use of ILS, VHF omnidirectional range station/distance measuring equipment (VOR/DME), RNAV, and multisensor RNAV FMS in Volume 3, Chapter 19, Training Programs and Airman Qualifications; AC 120-53, Crew Qualification and Pilot Type Rating Requirements for Transport Category Aircraft Operated under FAR Part 121; 14 CFR parts 61, 91, 121, 125, 129, and 135; and Advanced Qualification Program requirements, if applicable. Although these standards do not specifically address GPS/GPS WAAS systems, the principles are equivalent and these criteria can be used to evaluate crew knowledge, procedures, checking, and recency of experience until other criteria are available. No special crew qualification requirements, other than those necessary for RNAV and ILS instrument approach qualification are currently specified for GPS/GPS WAAS operations.

2. Ground training must assure that each flight crewmember has the knowledge required for the GPS/GPS WAAS procedures to be flown. Operators must successfully complete the approved (for parts 91K, 121, and 135 operators) training curriculum segment for GPS/GPS WAAS operations, as applicable. The ground training should include at least the following subjects:

• The principals of GPS and/or GPS WAAS, as applicable, navigation; • Hardware operation and integration with other navigation equipment; • Software use including updating; • Human factors issues (e.g., displays, charts, and approach plates); • The limitations of the GPS/GPS WAAS, as applicable, equipment; and • The specific operating techniques and procedures to be used with the

applicable GPS/GPS WAAS equipment, including maintenance and dispatch procedures, and the contents of the operator’s authorizations.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



f) Initial qualification, recurrent qualification, and requalification flight training must ensure that each flight crewmember has the skills and abilities necessary to safely conduct the proposed operations. Flight crewmembers must successfully complete that operator’s approved (for parts 121, 135, and 91K operators) flight training program for GPS/GPS WAAS. Operators conducting operations under part 125 (including those conducting operations under a LODA) must show they have completed the required training for the applicable equipment.

g) The operator must provide written procedures which are specific for its GPS and/or GPS WAAS operations, as applicable. The procedures must be consistent with manufacturer’s recommended procedures for the use of the installed GPS/GPS WAAS equipment.

h) The operator must provide a validation program that ensures the GPS/GPS WAAS airborne system is operationally accurate and reliable.

i) The operator must incorporate into its maintenance program the GPS/GPS WAAS manufacturer’s requirements for maintenance and Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.

D. Barometric Vertical Navigation (baro-VNAV). Approach systems utilizing baro-VNAV may be used to fly APVs to the LNAV/VNAV line of minimums. The use of baro-VNAV to fly APVs may be authorized for all applicable certificate holders and operators in accordance with the guidance in Volume 4, Chapter 2, Section 5, All-Weather Terminal Area Approach and Landing Operations, paragraphs 4-291F and 4-293C

1) Air Carrier Aircraft/Commercial Operator Approval. Once an operator that conducts operations under part 121, 125, 135, or 91K, has established the aircraft system eligibility, the flightcrew training and checking requirements, and has revised the training, maintenance, and operations manuals, as applicable; the POI may give approval using this RNAV equipment to fly to the LNAV/VNAV DA as shown on the published IAPs.

2) To authorize approach procedures with vertical guidance, select “RNAV (GPS)” (for part 97 approaches) or “RNAV (GNSS)” (for foreign approaches) for insertion into column two of the OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C052 template.

E. Precision Runway Monitoring (PRM). The FAA began the Multiple Parallel Approach Program to research whether ILS approaches to parallel runways would improve capacity. The objective was to achieve improvements in airport arrival rates through the conduct of simultaneous, closely spaced parallel approaches. That objective is being met using PRM.

1) ILS/PRM and Localizer-Type Directional Aid (LDA)/PRM Approaches. Where parallel runway centerlines are 4,300 feet apart or less, but no less than 3,000 feet, simultaneous ILS approaches may be conducted. Similarly, where parallel runway centerlines are 3,000 feet apart or less, but no less than 750 feet, simultaneous offset instrument approaches (SOIA) may be conducted with ILS approaches. Those approaches are labeled “ILS/PRM” and “LDA/PRM,” respectively, on instrument approach charts. Air traffic control (ATC) provides an air traffic controller using special PRM radar during these approaches. That controller is known as the final monitor controller.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



2) The Breakout Maneuver. Working with industry, the FAA conducted extensive analysis of simulation data and determined that the implementation of PRM and SOIA approach operations to closely spaced parallel runways requires additional crew training. The primary focus of this training is to raise each pilot’s situational awareness in ILS/PRM and LDA/PRM operations. The breakout maneuver must be flown manually.

a) Traffic Alert. One important element of the additional training is the pilot’s understanding of the difference between a normal missed approach initiated by a pilot, and a breakout initiated by a PRM final monitor controller. It must be clear to flightcrews that the words “Traffic Alert,” when used by the final monitor controller, signal critical instructions that the pilot must act on promptly to preserve adequate separation from an airplane straying into the adjoining approach path.

b) ATC Breakout Maneuver Command to Turn and/or Descend, Climb, or Maintain Altitude. The flightcrew must immediately follow the final monitor controller’s vertical (climb/descend/maintain altitude) and horizontal (turn) commands. If the flightcrew is operating the Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) in the traffic advisory (TA)/resolution advisory (RA) mode and receives a TCAS RA at any time while following the final monitor controller’s command, the flightcrew will simultaneously continue to turn to the controller’s assigned heading and follow the vertical guidance provided by the TCAS RA.

c) Time-to-Turn Standard. Regardless of airplane type, tests and data analysis revealed that pilots normally passed through an angle of bank of at least 3 degrees while rolling into a breakout turn, within 10 seconds of receiving a breakout command. (Bank angles of between 20 and 30 degrees were normally achieved during the breakout.) The operator must show that its pilots can readily meets this time-to-initiate-turn standard prior to the POI authorizing ILS/PRM or LDA/PRM approaches in OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C052. Flightcrews are required to manually fly the breakout maneuver unless otherwise approved by AFS-200 (AFS-200 must have concurrence from Flight Technologies and Procedures Division, AFS-400 to approve breakout in auto modes). The air carrier should demonstrate its ability to meet this standard by having representative pilots perform the breakout maneuver while the POI or the POI’s designated representative observes. The demonstration should conform to procedures contained in the air carrier’s approved operating manual for its flightcrews. The commercial operator should submit procedures to its POI for this authorization.

NOTE: In a breakout, ATC will never command a descent below the applicable minimum vector altitude, thus assuring that no flight will be commanded to descend below 1,000 feet above the highest obstacle during a breakout.

3) ILS/PRM, LDA/PRM, and the Use of TCAS. TCAS may be operated in TA/RA mode while executing ILS/PRM or LDA/PRM approaches. However, when conducting these operations, pilots must understand that the final monitor controller’s instruction to turn is the primary means for ensuring safe separation from another airplane. Pilots must bear in mind that TCAS does not provide separation in the horizontal plane; TCAS accomplishes separation by commands solely in the vertical plane. Therefore, during final approach only the final monitor controller has the capability to command a turn for lateral separation. Flightcrews are expected to follow any ATC instruction to turn.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



a) ATC Command to Turn with TCAS RA. In the unlikely event that a flightcrew should simultaneously receive a final monitor controller’s command to turn and a TCAS RA, the flightcrew must follow both the final monitor controller’s turn command and the TCAS RA’s climb or descent command.

b) TCAS RA Alone. In the extremely unlikely event that an RA occurs without a concurrent breakout instruction from the final monitor controller, the pilot should follow the RA and advise the controller of the action taken as soon as possible. In this instance, it is likely that a breakout command would follow.

c) TCAS Not Required. An operative TCAS is not required to conduct ILS/PRM or LDA/PRM approaches.

4) Pilot Training. Refer to Volume 4, Chapter 2, Section 5, paragraph 4-293C for information on pilot training required prior to authorizing PRM approaches.

1. ILS/PRM and LDA/PRM Authorizations. Operators will be authorized ILS/PRM and/or LDA/PRM approaches in the OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C052 templates. Definitions of ILS/PRM and LDA/PRM have been added to the A002 template.

OPSPEC/MSPEC C053, STRAIGHT-IN CATEGORY I APPROACH PROCEDURES OTHER THAN ILS, MLS, OR GPS AND IFR LANDING MINIMUMS—ALL AIRPORTS. C053 specifies the lowest minima which can be used for Category (CAT) I nonprecision approach procedures other than ILS, MLS, or global positioning system (GPS) and IFR landing minima at all airports It also provides special limitations and provisions for these IAPs at foreign airports. “Category I Approach Procedures and IFR Landing Minimums-All Airports,” (original title) was revised as follows:

A. C074 authorizes straight-in CAT I precision approach procedures and IFR landing minima at all airports; C075, authorizes circling maneuvers; and C076, authorizes contact approaches. See Volume 4, Chapter 2 for information on required training for circling maneuvers and contact approaches.

B. The previous nonprecision approach table now refers to CAT I nonprecision approaches as “approaches other than ILS, MLS, or GPS Landing System (GLS).”

C. For helicopter authorization, see OpSpec/MSpec H103.

OPSPEC/MSPEC C054, SPECIAL LIMITATIONS AND PROVISIONS FOR INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURES AND IFR LANDING MINIMUMS.

A. C054 is issued to all operators conducting operations under part 121. It is also issued to operators who conduct turbine-powered airplane operations under parts 91 subpart K and 135. It is not issued to part 135 operators who do not operate turbine-powered airplanes unless that operator also conducts operations under part 121. C054 specifies the RVR landing minimum equivalent to the published RVR landing minimum which must be used by high minimum pilots (less than 100 hours in aircraft type). It also specifies that before a PIC of a turbojet can conduct an instrument approach with visibility conditions reported to be below 3/4 mile or RVR 4000

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



(basic turbojet landing minima), the pilot must be specifically qualified and authorized to use standard landing minima. See Volume 4, Chapter 2 for information on the qualification and authorization requirements to use the standard landing minima.

B. RVR 3000 and its correlation of RVR 5000 for high minimum pilots was added to the RVR landing minimum table to recognize the medium intensity approach lighting system with runway alignment indicator lights/simplified short approach lighting system (MALS/SSALS) visibility credit given in C053.

OPSPEC/MSPEC C055, ALTERNATE AIRPORT IFR WEATHER MINIMUMS. C055 is issued to all parts 121 and 135 operators, and part 91K program managers who conduct IFR operations with airplanes. This paragraph provides a two part table from which the operator, during the initial dispatch or flight release planning segment of a flight, derives alternate airport IFR weather minima in those cases where it has been determined that an alternate airport is required.

A. The first part of the table is for airports with at least one operational navigational facility providing a straight-in nonprecision approach procedure, or a straight-in precision approach procedure, or, when applicable, a circling maneuver from an IAP. The required ceiling and visibility is obtained by adding 400 feet to the CAT I height above touchdown (HAT) or, when applicable, the authorized height above airport (HAA) and by adding 1 statute mile to the authorized CAT I landing minimum.

B. The second part of the table is for airports with at least two operational navigational facilities, each providing a straight-in nonprecision approach procedure or a straight-in precision approach procedure to different suitable runways. The required ceiling and visibility is obtained by adding 200 feet to the higher CAT I HAT of the two approaches used and by adding 1/2 statute mile visibility to the higher authorized CAT I landing minimum of the two approaches used.

C. In some cases, it is possible to have higher alternate minima when using two operational navigational facilities than when using one. For example, an airport with one straight-in nonprecision approach procedure with a HAT of 400 feet and 1 statute mile visibility would have alternate minima of 800 feet and 2 statute mile visibility (400 feet + 400 feet and 1 statute mile + 1 statute mile). On the other hand, an airport with two straight-in approaches, one a straight-in precision approach with a HAT of 200 feet and 1/2 statute mile visibility and the other a straight-in nonprecision approach with a HAT of 700 feet and 1 statute mile visibility, would have alternate minima of 900 feet and 1 1/2 statute mile visibility (200 feet + 700 feet and 1/2 statute mile + 1 statute mile). Since the operations specifications require that the higher ceiling and visibility be used, the minima for the airport with two straight-in approaches are higher than for the airport with only one straight-in approach. When this situation exists, the operator may elect to consider the airport as having only one straight-in approach procedure and may add the higher buffer requirement (400 feet and 1 statute mile) to whichever straight-in approach procedure provides for the lowest possible ceiling and visibility minima.

D. Except for Extended Range Operations (ER-OPS), two suitable runways may be the different ends of the same physical runway surface (such as, runway 4 and runway 22 are two

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



different runways). When using an airport as an alternate in ER-OPS operations in accordance with OpSpec B042, two separate physical surfaces must be used. The word suitable is defined in the latest version of Advisory Circular (AC) 120-42, Extended Range Operation with Two-Engine Airplanes (ETOPS).

E. OpSpec/MSpec paragraph C055 (see revision history in the OPSS guidance subsystem) now allows credit for alternate minima based on CAT II or CAT III capability. This change is located in the Alternate Airport Table in row three. Flightcrews having that capability may take credit for CAT II/III-qualified aircraft and adjust minima accordingly. The alternate minima are based on CAT III engine inoperative requirements. The following are some but not all of those requirements. See criteria in AC 120-28, current edition, for further engine inoperative requirements.

1) Aircraft is capable of engine inoperative CAT III.

2) Appropriate procedures are established.

3) Performance and obstruction clearance information is provided to the flightcrew.

4) Appropriate aircraft configuration, wind limits, and other appropriate information is provided to the flightcrew.

F. Question: “Does the FAA consider an ILS facility which contains a single transmitter frequency for an ILS, but with two different ILS identifications (depending on which runway is being used) as one or two navigational facilities?”

1) The words “two operational facilities” have always meant that in the event there is a single failure of one facility, the other would be operational. In the situation where both ILS facilities share a single transmitter, it would be considered “one operational navigational facility,” since both ILSs would become inoperative in the event of a single transmitter failure.

2) The two ILS identifiers would have to be different even though the ILS transmitter frequency is the same for both. The charts should tell pilots whether there is one frequency or two. Thus, one or two navigational facilities.

G. For helicopter authorizations, see OpSpec/MSpec H105.

OPSPEC C056, IFR TAKEOFF MINIMUMS, PART 121 OPERATIONS—ALL AIRPORTS. C056 is issued to all operators who conduct operations under part 121.

A. C056 did not change in policy but was split into two paragraphs for programming purposes in the new OPSS: C056, IFR Standard Takeoff Minimums, 14 CFR Part 121 (125) Airplane Operations-All Airports and C078, IFR Lower Than Standard Takeoff Minimums, 14 CFR Part 121 (125) Airplane Operations-All Airports.

B. If an operator is not authorized to use lower than standard takeoff minima, C078 will not be issued. See Volume 4, Chapter 2 for information concerning requirements an operator must meet before being authorized to use lower than standard takeoff minima. If an operator

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



conducts operations under both parts 121 and 135, C056 and C057 may need to be issued. For more information, see the following:

• Part 121, § 121.649. • Part 121, § 121.651(a)(1). • Part 91, § 91.175(f). • Volume 4, Chapter 2, All-Weather Terminal Area Operations. • Flight Standardization Board (FSB) Report for specific aircraft.

C. This is not available or applicable to part 91K program managers. See part 91, § 91.1039(e).

OPSPEC C057, IFR TAKEOFF MINIMUMS, PART 135 OPERATIONS—ALL AIRPORTS. C057 is issued to all part 135 operators who conduct IFR airplane operations to authorize an operator to use takeoff minima equal to the lowest straight-in landing minima (part 135, § 135.225(h)).

A. C057 is issued for conducting IFR standard takeoff minima which are defined as 1 statute mile visibility or RVR 5000 for airplanes having 2 engines or less and 1/2 statute mile visibility or RVR 2400 for airplanes having more than 2 engines. RVR reports, when available for a particular runway, shall be used for all takeoff operations on that runway. All takeoff operations, based on RVR, must use RVR reports from the locations along the runway specified in this paragraph.

B. The POI, principal maintenance inspector (PMI), and principal avionics inspector (PAI) must coordinate the issuance of OpSpec paragraphs A046, Single-Engine IFR (SEIFR), C057, and D071, Additional Maintenance Requirements, once the operator has met the requirements for SEIFR operations. All three OpSpec paragraphs must be issued for SEIFR authorization.

1) OpSpec paragraph A046, Single Engine IFR (SEIFR) Passenger-Carrying Operations under CFR Part 135, contains specific maintenance and operational limitations and provisions necessary for authority to operate under IFR while carrying passengers in a single-engine airplane.

2) The standard OpSpec paragraph C079, 14 CFR Part 135 Operations Lower Than Standard Takeoff Minimums, is not authorized for SEIFR operations. Single-engine IFR Part 135 passenger-carrying operations are not authorized lower than standard takeoff minima at any airport without concurrence and authorization from FAA headquarters. Thus for SEIFR operations there is no automatic relief from the requirements of § 135.225(e).

3) OpSpec paragraph D071, Additional Maintenance Requirements, contains requirements for airplanes operated in SEIFR operations.

C. The following subparagraph is selectable for issuance in C057, if applicable:

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



NOTE: “c. When takeoff minimums are equal to or less than the applicable standard takeoff minimum, the certificate holder is authorized to use a takeoff minimum equal to the lowest authorized straight-in CAT I IFR landing minimum applicable to the certificate holder for that particular airport. The Touchdown Zone RVR report, if available, is controlling.”

D. The following subparagraph is selectable for issuance in C057 for turbine-powered singled engine airplanes only:

NOTE: “d. Notwithstanding the requirements of the “NOTE” in subparagraph b above, the certificate holder is authorized lower than standard takeoff minimums for its part 135 single engine passenger-carrying operations in its turbine-powered single engine airplanes only per the limitations and provisions of C057 including subparagraph c.”

E. OpSpec C079 is applicable for authorizing the part 135 operator to use takeoff minima lower than 1/2 mile or RVR 1800. See AC 120-29, Criteria for Approval of Category I and Category II Weather Minimums for Approach (current edition), for information concerning requirements an operator must meet before being authorized to use lower than standard takeoff minima.

F. C057 is not applicable nor available for part 91K program managers. See § 91.1039(e). For helicopter authorizations, see OpSpecs H106 and H116.

OPSPEC C058, SPECIAL RESTRICTIONS FOR FOREIGN TERMINAL INSTRUMENT PROCEDURES.

A. C058 is issued only when the POI (or region responsible for the geographic area where a foreign airport is located) finds it necessary to place special restrictions on a foreign terminal instrument procedure.

B. These special restrictions to foreign terminal instrument procedures are applicable to U.S. air carriers (parts 121 and 135) and program managers (part 91K). The purpose of these special restrictions is to establish an equivalency between the foreign terminal instrument procedure and the ICAO Procedures for Air Navigation Services Aircraft Operations (PANS-OPS) or Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS) criteria.

C. FAA Order 8260.31, Foreign Terminal Instrument Procedures (current edition), provides direction and guidance on how to place restrictions on foreign instrument procedures. This order also contains a list of foreign terminal instrument procedures that are currently restricted. If an operator conducts flights to any airport listed in the appendices of this order, the POI must issue C058 with the name of the airport, airport identification, procedure identification, and special restrictions listed.

D. On July 6, 1998, Hong Kong’s new airport (Chek Lap Kok) opened; at the same time, Hong Kong’s old airport (Kai Tak) closed. Since there has been no revision to the appendices of Order 8260.31, we recommend removing the reference to Kai Tak airport from C058 reference

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



the Chek Lap Kok airport. Consideration and procedures shall be established for the following at the new Chek Lap Kok airport:

1) Loss of navigation capability;

2) Severe reduction of aircraft climb performance due to engine or aircraft system failures; and

3) Escape paths for the above situations.

E. For helicopter authorization, see OpSpec/MSpec H107.

OPSPEC/MSPEC C059, CATEGORY II INSTRUMENT APPROACH AND LANDING OPERATIONS.

A. CAT II operations are approved by issuance of OpSpec C059 to certificate holders/operators and MSpec MC059 to program managers for part 91K fractional ownership operations.

B. All initial CAT II operations for each operator/program manager and each airplane type used by that operator/program manager require Regional Flight Standards Division and AFS-400 review and concurrence before issuing OpSpec/MSpec C059. CAT II operations are evaluated for approval in accordance with the following:

1) AC 120-29.

2) Volume 4, Chapter 2.

3) An acceptable lower landing minimums (LLM) maintenance program in accordance with Volume 4, Chapter 2, Section 11, Maintenance/Inspection Programs for Low Approach Landing Minimums, in coordination with the principal avionics and maintenance inspectors.

4) Concurrence of the Regional Flight Standards Division and AFS-400 is also required before amending OpSpec/MSpec C059 to include an airplane make/model/ series new to the operator/program manager.

C. Detailed guidance for helicopter CAT II/III operations can be found in, Volume 4, Chapter 2, Section 4, Approve/Authorize Category I/Category II/Category III Operations for a 14 CFR Part 91/125 Operator.

D. In addition to the standard CAT II operations authorized by OpSpec/MSpec C059, nonstandard domestic CAT II operations can be authorized to qualifying runways that do not meet the performance or equipment requirements normally associated with a compliant CAT II operation (e.g., TDZ lighting, centerline (CL) lighting, or Approach Lighting System with Sequenced Flashing Lights (ALSF) -1 & 2) by issuing the nonstandard OpSpec/MSpec C359. Specific guidance for this nonstandard VAT II authorization is found in Volume 3, Chapter 18,

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



Section 5, Part C Operations Specifications—Airplane Terminal Instrument Procedures and Airport Authorizations and Limitations.

E. Each airplane type (make/model/series (M/M/S)) used in CAT II operations must be listed in Table 3-17 of C059 and have an acceptable LLM maintenance program. The lowest decision height (DH) and lowest RVR authorized for each airplane type must also be specified. The following example illustrates the method for authorizing each airplane in OpSpec/MSpec C059:

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



Table 3-17, Example CAT II Approach and Landing Minimums

CAT II APPROACH AND LANDING MINIMUMS

AIRPLANE (MAKE/MODEL/SERIES)

DH NOT LESS THAN

LOWEST AUTHORIZED RVR

AIRBUS 300 A300B4103 100 ft. 1200

BOEING 727 217 100 ft. 1600

DOUG DC9 31 100 ft. 1600

DOUG DC9 32 100 ft. 1600

DOUG DC9 51 100 ft. 1600

DOUG DC9 81 100 ft. 1200

LKHEED 1011 385114 100 ft. 1200

BOEING 777-200 100 ft. 1000 F. CAT II operations, with a DH of 100 feet and RVR 1000 (300m) (lower than

standard) may be authorized at certain foreign airports and domestic type III facilities when:

1) An autoland approach or head-up guidance system (HGS) is used to touchdown;

2) The airplane and its automatic flight control guidance system, or manually flown guidance system, are approved for approach and landing operations as specified by paragraph C060, C061, or C062 of these OpSpecs/MSpecs;

3) The autopilot (AP) and approach coupler, or HGS system, is listed in the required CAT II airborne equipment (Table 3-18) of this OpSpec/MSpec;

4) Equipment is flown in the HGS CAT III mode(s) of operation or autoland to touchdown, as appropriate;

5) The flightcrew has been trained at the lower visibilities before they can be authorized. If the flightcrew is currently authorized CAT III operations, no further training is required for this authorization in C059.

6) The authorization for RVR 1000 is selected as subparagraph j in OpSpec/MSpec C059 and listed in Table 3-17 of OpSpec/MSpec C059.

7) The notation of HGS CAT III mode(s) of operation or autoland, as appropriate, is listed in the “Additional Equipment and Special Provisions” column of Table 3-18.

G. The equipment required to conduct manually flown or automatically flown CAT II operations is specified in Table 3-18 of OpSpec/MSpec C059 for each airplane M/M/S. The equipment required is established in accordance with the applicable regulations, the approved

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



AFM (if applicable), and AC 120-29, current edition. There are two acceptable methods of demonstrating that an airplane is airworthy for CAT II operations. These acceptable methods are “type design approval,” obtained by a manufacturer or STC holder, or an “operational demonstration,” conducted by an operator/ program manager.

1) Type design approval. The approved AFM (or flight manual supplement), for airplanes that have CAT II type design approval, contains a statement that the airborne systems have demonstrated the reliability and redundancy necessary for CAT II operations in accordance with AC 120-29. AFMs also specify that certain equipment is required for airworthiness approval of the various kinds of CAT II operations. Some of the AFMs also indicate that acceptable CAT II performance was demonstrated both with, and without, certain equipment (e.g., “autothrottles w/wo”). AC 120-29, current edition, also specifies that certain types of equipment are required for operational approval of the various kinds of CAT II operations (manual/AP). Therefore, both the approved AFM and AC 120-29, current edition, must be considered in determining if the additional equipment requirement must be listed (specified) in Table 3-18 of OpSpec/MSpec C059. The illustration below shows how the additional or required equipment should be listed in Table 3-18 of OpSpec/MSpec C059.

a) Equipment that is explicitly required by the airplane certification regulations (14 CFR parts 23 and 25), the operating regulations (parts 91 subpart K, 121, 125, and 135) and/or the approved AFM should not be listed in Table 3-18. The standard text of C059 requires this equipment to be functional. Therefore, the additional equipment or operational requirement that must be listed (specified) in OpSpec/MSpec C059 is determined by cross-checking the type of equipment required by AC 120-29, current edition, for the kinds of CAT II operations proposed, against the equipment required by regulations and the approved AFM.

1. The equipment listed in Table 3-18 of OpSpec/MSpec C059 as additional equipment is only that equipment required by AC 120-29, current edition, a Supplemental Type Certificate (STC), an Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS), etc., and/or Order 8400.13, Procedures for the Approval of Special Authorization Category II and Lowest Standard Category I Operations (current edition), as applicable, for the kind(s) of CAT II operations to be authorized that is not explicitly required by regulations and/or the AFM. This would include equipment such as autoland for B-747 operations below RVR 1600.

2. RVR 1000 authorization at certain foreign airports and domestic CAT III facilities must be noted in the listing (Table 3-18) of the additional equipment for CAT II and it must be noted in the remarks column of Table 3-18 that the equipment is to be flown in the autoland or HGS CAT III mode(s) of operation. Precision CAT II landing minima are authorized only for autoland or HGS-equipped aircraft when operated by a properly qualified flightcrew and flown in the HGS CAT III mode(s) of operation. Additional guidance may be found in AC 120-29, current edition.

3. When the AFM indicates acceptable performance both w/wo certain items of equipment (which are not explicitly required by AC 120-29, current edition), it must be determined how the operator/program manager intends to conduct CAT II operations and train flightcrews with those items of equipment. If the operator/program manager proposes to conduct operations both w/wo certain items of equipment (such as autothrottle, AP), flightcrews must be

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



trained for both situations and the item of equipment does not need to be listed in Table 3-18 of OpSpec/MSpec C059.

2) Equipment eligibility that is not stated in the AFM, the AFMS, or the FSB report. The operational demonstration method of demonstrating the airworthiness of CAT II equipment is only appropriate for airplanes and equipment that do not have CAT II type design approval. The operational demonstration must be conducted in accordance with AC 120-29, current edition. A part 121, 125, 129, 135 operator or a part 91K program manager should request that its Flight Standards District Office (FSDO) provide assistance in the eligibility assessment:

a) The operator or program manager should provide the FSDO with the aircraft make, model and serial number, any evidence of instrument flight rules (IFR) approach approval, and pertinent information from flightcrew operating procedures.

b) If the FSDO is unable to determine equipment eligibility from the approved documentation, it should forward the request and supporting data through its FAA Flight Standards Regional Division to the appropriate Aircraft Evaluation Group (AEG). The AEG will verify that the aircraft and its landing system meet the criteria for CAT II operations, and that the system can safely fly the CAT II approach procedures. The AEG will provide written documentation (e.g., amended FSB Report or other official documentation) to verify the eligibility of that equipment.

H. For CAT II authorization the operator or program manager must have an acceptable LLM maintenance program in accordance with Volume 4, Chapter 2. This LLM maintenance program should be coordinated with the principal airworthiness inspectors.

I. The kind of CAT II operation (manually-flown HGS and/or AP) must be specified for each item of equipment listed in Table 3-18 of OpSpec/MSpec C059. The following guidelines should be followed for filling out Table 3-18:

• CAT II equipment required by the regulations or the approved AFM should not be listed.

• The required airborne equipment table combines the manual and AP columns into one column for programming purposes. Instead of putting an X under the appropriate column, the POI will select the appropriate phrase, manual, or AP.

• If an item of equipment is applicable to a specific airplane’s M/M/S for both manual and AP CAT II operations, both manual and AP can be highlighted and selected for insertion into the column.

• Please note the equipment required for RVR 1000 CAT II authorization is to be listed in the “Additional Equipment” column.

• See the sample of Table 3-18 below for examples of how the items of equipment should be specified for the kind of CAT II operation.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



Table 3-18, Example of CAT II Items of Equipment

KIND OF CATEGORY II OPERATION

AIRPLANE (MAKE/ MODEL/SERIES)

ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT & SPECIAL PROVISIONS

MANUAL (HGS)/ AUTO PILOT

Boeing 767 219 1. Approach coupler and FD must be operative

Auto Pilot

Boeing 757-232 1. An independent FD and display for each pilot (L and R or C and R)

Auto Pilot

Boeing 737-200 None-AFM guidance Manual (HGS) or Auto Pilot

NIHON YSII A200 AFM Supplement dtd 3/26/2003 Auto Pilot

NOTE: The following equipment is required by the AFM and SHOULD NOT be listed in Table 3-18 of OpSpec C059:

• One engine inoperative with flaps 20 degrees and manual throttle or 2 engines operative.

• One AP. • Two electronic attitude director indicators (EADI). • Two Inertial Reference Units (IRU) in NAV mode. • Two sources of electrical power.

J. Authorized Airports and Runways. Airports and runways for which an operator is authorized to conduct CAT II instrument approach and landing operations are specified by Table 3-19 of OpSpec/MSpec C059.

1) All foreign CAT II facilities approved for the program manager/operator’s use must be listed in Table 3-19 of OpSpec/MSpec C059.

2) If the airport and runways are approved for CAT II operations in part 97, they should not be routinely listed in Table 3-19 of OpSpec/MSpec C059 unless the POI determines there is a need to specify a special limitation for an operator at a particular airport.

a) If the CAT II approach procedure is published in the National Aeronautical Charting Office IAP flight information publication as a CAT II procedure, it is approved under part 97.

b) The list of domestic- and foreign-approved CAT II/III facilities is based on Order 8400.8, Procedures for the Approval of Facilities for FAR Part 121 and Part 135 CAT III Operations, appendix 4, Facilities Approved or Approvable for CAT IIIA Operations, or the

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



current version of Order 8400.13, Procedures for the Approval of Special Authorization Category II and Lowest Standard Category I Operations, can be found on the Flight Operations Branch (AFS-410) Web site.

c) Once a facility has been approved, AFS-400 will put that facility on its Web site and notify the requesting air carrier, program manager, or their respective POIs of the approval.

3) For RVR 1000 authorization, the foreign approved airports and runways for these operations must also be listed in Table 3-19.

4) The following example of Table 3-19 illustrates a method for listing authorized airports and runways:

Table 3-19, Example List of Authorized Airports and Runways for CAT II Instrument Approach and Landing Operations

AIRPORT IDENT RUNWAYS SPECIAL LIMITATIONS

Mirabel, Canada 06

Taipei— Chiang Kai Shek, Taiwan

056/23R

Tokyo Narita, Japan 16

K. Note that in the “Operating Limitations” subparagraph, the crosswind component on

the runway of intended landing was increased from 10 knots to 15 knots (or in accordance with the AFM, whichever is more restrictive).

L. PIC who have not met the requirements of §§ 91.1039(c), 121.652, or 135.225(d) as appropriate, shall use the high minimum pilot RVR landing minimum equivalents as determined from the table in OpSpec/MSpec C054. For the PIC to conduct the part 121 CAT II operations at the lower authorized minima, he/she must have currently accumulated the hours required by § 121.652, in the aircraft type that he/she is going to be flying for that carrier. The provision of Air Transportation Association of America (ATA) exemption 5549 for part 121 air carriers may also apply.

M. Foreign lighting systems are accepted but may not be technically equivalent to Approach Lighting System with Sequenced Flashing Lights (ALSF).

N. For landing minima not less than 1200 RVR, the TDZ sensor and the rollout sensor of an RVR system is required and must be used. The TDZ sensor RVR report is controlling for all operations and the rollout sensor RVR report provides advisory information to pilots. A mid-RVR sensor report, if available, provides advisory information to pilots and may be substituted for the rollout sensor RVR report if the rollout sensor RVR report is not available. Some RVR reporting systems contain four sensors (e.g., TDZ, mid, rollout, and far end). In those

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



cases, a far end sensor also provides advisory information to pilots and may be substituted for the rollout sensor RVR report if the rollout sensor RVR report is not available.

OPSPEC/MSPEC C060, CATEGORY III INSTRUMENT APPROACH AND LANDING OPERATIONS.

A. CAT III is an optional authorization. OpSpec/MSpec C060 issuance is required for authorizing parts 121, 125, 135 and part 91K CAT III operations.

1) CAT III operations are evaluated in accordance with the latest version of AC 120-28, Criteria for Approval of Category III Weather Minimums for Takeoff, Landing, and Rollout.

2) Initial CAT III authorization must be coordinated through the Regional Flight Standards Division (RFSD) All Weather Operations (AWO) Program Manager (see Volume 4, Chapter 2).

3) RFSD (AWO) concurrence is also required before amending OpSpec/MSpec C060 to include an airplane M/M/S for an operator.

4) All reductions in CAT III operating minima for each operator and aircraft also require RFSD (AWO) concurrence.

5) Initial authorizations may require higher minima for a period of time or number of operations. The POI should issue the authorization using the higher minima and re-issue the OpSpec/MSpec at the appropriate time to authorize the higher minima.

B. The authorization is applicable to operations conducted by:

• Part 91K program managers. • Part 121 certificate holders. • Part 125 operators. • Part 129 foreign air carriers. • Part 135 certificate holders.

C. Airplanes Approved for CAT III operations. Airplanes with an approved AFM entry authorizing CAT III may be approved for CAT III. In accordance with the AFM, CAT III operations may be conducted with either fail operational (FO) or fail passive (FP) systems. Tables 3-20 and 3-21 of OpSpec/MSpec C060 classifies all CAT III landing systems as either FP or FO and is specified in Table 3-22 for each airplane M/M/S.

1) Each airplane type M/M/S and the equipment authorized to conduct CAT III operations must be listed in Table 3-22 of OpSpec/MSpec C060. Aircraft, including wide body aircraft such as the DC-10, L-1011, and B-747, which are authorized for FO CAT III but have not been demonstrated to meet the FP provisions of appendix 3 of AC 120-28, current edition, may be approved with landing minima of RVR 1000.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



2) The equipment required to conduct CAT III operations is established in accordance with the applicable parts of 14 CFR, the approved AFM, and AC 120-28, current edition.

a) The only acceptable method of demonstrating that an airplane is airworthy for CAT III operations is through type design approval obtained by a manufacturer.

b) The approved AFM (or flight manual supplement) for airplanes which have CAT III type design approval contains a statement to the effect that the airborne systems have demonstrated the reliability and redundancy necessary for CAT III operations in accordance with AC 120-28 (or previous versions).

c) These AFMs also specify that certain equipment is required for airworthiness approval of the various kinds of CAT III operations.

d) Some of the AFMs also indicate that acceptable CAT III performance was demonstrated both with and without (w/wo) certain equipment (for example “autothrottles w/wo”). AC 120-28, current edition, also specifies that certain types of equipment are required for operational approval of the various kinds of CAT III operations. Therefore, both the approved AFM and AC 120-28 must be considered in determining the additional equipment which must be listed (specified) in Table 3-22.

3) Equipment which is explicitly required by the airplane certification regulations (parts 23 and 25), the operating regulations (parts 91, 121, 125, and 135), and/or the approved AFM should not be listed in Table 3-22.

a) The standard text of OpSpec/MSpec C060 requires this equipment to be functional.

b) Therefore, only the additional equipment which must be listed (specified) in Table 3-22 of OpSpec/MSpec C060 is determined by cross checking the types of equipment required by AC 120-28, current edition, for the kind(s) of CAT III operation proposed against the equipment required by the regulations and the approved AFM.

c) The equipment to be listed in Table 3-22 as additional equipment is only that equipment which is not explicitly required by the regulations and/or the AFM, but is required by AC 120-28 and/or the guidance and direction in the AWOPM concurrence letter for the kind(s) of CAT III operations to be authorized.

4) When the AFM indicates acceptable performance both w/wo certain items of equipment (which are not explicitly required by AC 120-28, current edition, or the AWOPM AFS-400 concurrence letter), it must be determined how the operator intends to conduct CAT III operations and train flightcrews with those items of equipment.

a) If the operator proposes to conduct operations both with and without certain equipment (such as autothrottle), the operator must train flightcrews for both situations and the item of equipment does not need to be listed in OpSpec/MSpec C060.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



b) If the operator proposes to conduct operations only when those items of equipment (w/wo) are functional, then those items of equipment must be listed in OpSpec/MSpec C060.

5) The authorizations for a DH/Alert Height (AH), the lowest RVR (see also subparagraph I below), the field length factor (see subparagraph D below), and the FP/FO landing systems must be specific for each airplane type. In general, the following summary applies:

Table 3-20, Fail Operational Landing Systems

FAIL OPERATIONAL LANDING SYSTEMS-GENERAL 1. Utilize an AH (typically 50 ft.) 2. Must go-around if any system failure occurs above AH. 3. Could land safely if a failure occurs after AH.

FAIL OPERATIONAL WITHOUT A ROLLOUT SYSTEM:

FAIL OPERATIONAL WITH ANY FAA-APPROVED ROLLOUT SYSTEM:

FAIL OPERATIONAL WITH A FAIL PASSIVE ROLLOUT SYSTEM

FAIL OPERATIONAL WITH A FAIL OPERATIONAL ROLLOUT SYSTEM

1. Lowest allowable RVR 600/600/600 2. Suitable visual prior to touchdown

1. No visual necessary 2. Any FAA-approved rollout system 3. Lowest allowable RVR 600/400/400

1. No visual necessary 2. Lowest allowable RVR 400/400/400

1. No visual necessary 2. Lowest allowable RVR 300/300/300

Table 3-21, Fail Passive Landing Systems

FAIL PASSIVE LANDING SYSTEMS-GENERAL: 1. Utilize a DH (no less than 50 ft.) 2. Must have visual references NLT DH to land, otherwise missed approach 3. System not capable of autoland if a failure occurs after DH. 4. If lose visual references after DH or a failure after DH (prior to touchdown), missed approach.

FAIL PASSIVE WITHOUT A ROLLOUT SYSTEM:

FAIL PASSIVE WITH ANY FAA-APPROVED ROLLOUT SYSTEM

Lowest allowable RVR 600/600/600 Lowest allowable RVR 600/400/400 D. The runway field length required for the various kinds of CAT III operations must be

specified in Table 3-22 of OpSpec/MSpec C060 for each airplane M/M/S.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



1) For operations with a controlling RVR at or above RVR 600, the required field length is 1.15 times the field length required by:

• Part 121, § 121.195(b), • Part 135, § 135.385(b), • The AFM for part 125, or • Part 91, § 91.1037 and AFM.

2) For a precision instrument approach and landing with a controlling RVR below 600 feet, the required field length is either 1.15 or 1.3 times the field length required by the previously cited regulations depending on the operational procedures and/or additional equipment used by the operator.

3) The “Special Operational Equipment and Limitations” column in Table 3-22 is provided for equipment that is IN ADDITION to that required by 14 CFR and not included in the AFM.

4) For example, additional equipment may be required if a field length factor of 1.15 is used in operations below RVR 600 where a procedural means alone is not acceptable (see AC 120-28, current edition).

E. Operators currently authorized RVR 700 may be approved for RVR 600 operations as follows:

1) When the operator has incorporated changes reflecting RVR 600 into the approved training program (when applicable), bulletins, aircraft placards, etc., as appropriate.

2) When a check airman or an FAA inspector has certified the flightcrews to fly to these reduced minima.

F. An operator currently using RVR 600 or lower in its approved training for FP operations may be approved for RVR 600 without further checking when the operator has updated the approved training program (when applicable) and flightcrew bulletins to reflect RVR 600 authorization.

G. The following is an example of Table 3-22 with data inserted. If an operator is not authorized to conduct those kinds of CAT III operations with a particular airplane, or if the operator does not need special operational equipment, put N/A under the appropriate column (do not delete or leave any cells blank).

NOTE: Include only that equipment which is not explicitly required by the regulations and/or the AFM. For new CAT III operators, inspectors must coordinate the operational equipment requirements with the AWOPM during normal review processing.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



Table 3-22, CAT III Approach and Landing Minimums

AIRPLANE M/M/S

TYPE OF HGS/ AUTOLAND SYSTEM*

TYPE OF ROLLOUT SYSTEM*

DH/AH LOWEST RVR

FIELD LENGTH FACTOR

SPECIAL OPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT AND LIMITATIONS--

B-737-232B-737-247B-

FP N/A 50 DH 600 1.15 N/A

B-737-35B B-737-3 B7B-737-3L9

FP N/A 50 DH 600 1.15 Either Autoland or HGS must be operable

B-737-832 FP N/A 50 DH 600 1.15 Either Autoland or HGS must be operable

A-320-214 FO FO 100 AH

300 1.15 1.30 required if thrust reverser or antiskid inoperative below 600 RVR

B-747-47UF FO FO 100 AH

300 feet (75 meters)

1.15 Anti-skid and thrust reverser system must be fully operative for operations below RVR 600

B-737-301 FP N/A 50 DH 600 1.15 N/A

B-757-225 FO FO 50AH 300 1.15 1.30 required if thrust reverser or anti-skid inoperative below RVR600

B-727-277, B727-2D4

FP N/A DH 50 600 1.15

B-757-212B-757-232B-767-432

FO FO 50 AH 300 1.15 N/A

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



B-767-222 FO FO 100 AH

300 1.15 Use 1.3 if autobrake is inoperative

A319-112 FO FO 100 AH

300 1.15 1.30 required if thrust reverser or antiskid inoperative below 600 RVR

B-777-236 FO FO 50AH 700 1.15 N/A

B-777-236 FO FO 50AH 300 1.3 N/A

DC-10-10F FO FO 100 AH

300 1.15 Ground speed indicating system

MD-11F, MD-10-30F

FO FO 100 AH

300 1.15 Ground speed indicating system

NOTE: Enter: *N/A = Not Applicable; FP = Fail-passive Landing or Rollout Control System; FO = Fail-operational Landing or Rollout Control System; (i.e., FP/FO systems include autoland and HGSs);

H. Additional information.

1) Some European Aviation Safety Agency (EASA) member States apply a DH (as opposed to an AH) to operations at or below RVR 600 because of ILS facility integrity concerns.

2) As part of FAA/EASA harmonization, it was agreed that U.S. operators could continue to use AH when using an FO system in accordance with its OpSpec authorization.

I. Required RVR Reporting Equipment. The RVR reporting equipment authorizations were expanded to enable the use of new and more robust EASA Approval and AC 120-28, current edition, certification criteria for autoflight or guidance landing system(s) with FP rollout control or flight guidance landing systems.

1) OpSpec/MSpec C060 allows touchdown RVR 600, mid-RVR 400, rollout RVR 400 (600/400/400) for appropriate FP landing/rollout systems and 400/400/400 for FO landing systems with FP rollout control or flight guidance landing systems.

2) Note that to use the touchdown RVR 600 with mid-/rollout RVR 400, published runway landing minima of RVR 400 or lower is required.

3) Mid- and rollout RVR 400 cannot be used at runways where RVR 600 is the lowest published RVR minima.

4) RVR 300/300/300 is allowed for FO landing systems with FO rollout control or flight guidance landing systems.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



5) The operator or program manager is not authorized to conduct operations using an RVR lower than the published minima at any runway (domestic or foreign) even if the operator or program manager is authorized to conduct CAT III operations at a lower RVR than is published for that approach.

J. The crosswind component allowed is either less than the AFM’s crosswind limitations, or 15 knots or less, whichever is more restrictive. This should be reflected in the approved training program and flightcrew bulletins.

K. Authorized CAT III Airports and Runways. With the issuance of OpSpec/MSpec C060, the operator/program manager is authorized to conduct CAT III operations at airports and runways using an approved part 97 CAT III IAP unless a restrictive Notice to Airmen (NOTAM) is issued for that approach. Domestic airports and runways (that have no restrictions) do not have to be individually listed in OpSpec/MSpec C060; only foreign airports and runways approved for CAT III operations need to be specifically identified and listed in OpSpec/MSpec C060.

1) Foreign Airports and Runways. CAT III operations may be authorized at the foreign airports and runways listed in Table 3-22 from the selection list provided for Table 3-22.

2) U.S. Facilities with Restrictions or Conditions. The U.S. ILS facilities provided in Table 3-22 of C060 are approved only for the specific aircraft to conduct CAT III operations. The characteristics of the pre-threshold terrain at these facilities may cause abnormal performance in flight control systems. Additional analysis or flight demonstrations are required for each aircraft type prior to approval of CAT III minima. Publication of a part 97 standard instrument approach procedure (SIAP) or additional operators and their aircraft may be approved by the regional all weather operations staff as provided in AC 120-28, appendix 8, current edition. Approved aircraft are equipped with either autoland or HGS equipment The restrictions at U.S. facilities for the certificate holder are provided as selectables for listing in Table 3-22 of OpSpec C060. If applicable, Providence, RI, (KPVD) should be selected and listed with the following condition: “CAT III authorized with TDZ and RO RVR sensors, both are controlling. Mid RVR used from adjacent runway.”

L. Inoperative Lights. OpSpec/MSpec C359 authorizes specific minima for part 97 CAT II and III approaches when the TDZ and centerline lights are inoperative.

M. Lower Landing Minimums Maintenance Program. The operator/program manager must maintain the aircraft and equipment listed in Table 3-20 of OpSpec/MSpec C060 in accordance with its approved LLM maintenance program or inspection program, as applicable.

N. Non-Standard Requests. All requests for operational non-standard OpSpec/MSpec authorizations must be submitted to the Air Transportation Division, AFS-200, using the non-standard request policy outlined in Volume 3, Chapter 18, Section 2, paragraph 3-713, Procedures for Requesting Nonstandard Authorizations.

O. For part 129 Operations, Foreign Air Carriers and Foreign Operators of U.S.-Registered Aircraft Engaged in Common Carriage, see Volume 12, Chapter 2.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



OPSPEC/MSPEC C061, FLIGHT CONTROL GUIDANCE SYSTEMS FOR AUTOMATIC LANDING OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CATEGORIES II AND III.

A. C061 authorizes an operator to use a flight control guidance system with automatic landing capabilities to touchdown. Title 14 CFR §§ 121.579(c) and 135.93(d) specify this type of operation must be authorized by OpSpecs. A part 91K program manager is issued MC061, if applicable. Before issuing C061, the POI must determine the following:

1) The AFM permits use of the flight control guidance system (autoland system) to touchdown;

2) Training on the use of the flight control guidance system and autoland procedures to touchdown is provided to flight crewmembers; and

3) The operator continually maintains flight control guidance and autoland systems in accordance with an approved maintenance program for autoland operations.

B. The airplanes (make/model) and the flight control guidance systems (manufacturer/model) authorized for this type of operation must be listed in C061a.

C. AC 120-67, Criteria for Operational Approval of Auto Flight Guidance Systems, provides additional information.

OPSPEC/MSPEC C062, MANUALLY FLOWN FLIGHT CONTROL GUIDANCE SYSTEM CERTIFIED FOR LANDING OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CATEGORY II AND III.

A. OpSpec/MSpec C062 is optional for part 121, 135, and part 91K operations to authorize operators to use manually flown flight control guidance systems to conduct approach and landing operations to fly a CAT I ILS using an HGS. C062 is issued to use an HGS just as C061 is issued to use an autoland system for other than CAT II or CAT III operations.

1) This authorization is independent of CAT II/III authorizations. Typically this authorization is issued prior to CAT II/III authorizations and is kept after the issuance of CAT II/III authorizations.

2) FAA Order 8400.13 also provides credit for lower than standard CAT I minima using HGS or an autoland system to touchdown.

3) It is required to list series of aircraft in addition to make/model due to the distinct differences in series of models (especially in the newer aircraft). The aircraft listed must have a manual flight control guidance system installed and certified for manually flown landings (HGS).

B. C062 is not required to be issued to fly a CAT I ILS when the HGS CAT III guidance is not used to touchdown. Neither C061 or C062 is required when the autoland or HGS are disconnected prior to or not used to touchdown.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



C. NTSB safety recommendation A-99-40 recommends the FAA “issue a flight standards information bulletin that directs principal operations inspectors to ensure that MD-11 training programs provide simulator instruction in the proper procedure for AP disengagement and the subsequent manual control of the airplane.” As a result, Flight Standards recommends that POIs ensure that each operator conducting operations in an MD-11:

1) Has included in its company flight manual information regarding the potential for pitch attitude upsets caused by improper operation of the AP and disseminate that information to each flight crewmember of the MD-11 and;

2) Has included simulator instruction in the proper operating procedure for AP disengagement and subsequent manual control of the airplane in its MD-11 initial, upgrade, recurrent, transition, and re-qualification training programs.

D. See OpSpec/MSpec H111 for the helicopter equivalent of this authorization.

OPSPEC/MSPEC/LOA C063—U.S. IFR RNAV DEPARTURE PROCEDURES, RNAV ROUTES, AND RNAV STANDARD TERMINAL ARRIVALS.

A. The authorization provided by OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C063 is applicable to operators conducting operations under parts 91K, 121, 125 (including the part 125(M) operators issued a LODA), 129, and 135.

1) OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C063 authorizes operators to conduct operations using part 97 U.S. IFR terminal RNAV DP and RNAV STAR in the National Airspace System (NAS).

2) The term RNAV DP includes Standard Instrument Departures (SID) and Obstacle Departure Procedures (ODP).

3) If an operator’s aircraft are not eligible (properly equipped) and/or its flightcrews are not appropriately trained to conduct RNAV 1 DPs and STARs, then the OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C063 authorization should not be issued.

B. The current edition of AC 90-100, U.S. Terminal and En Route Area Navigation (RNAV) Operations, provides detailed guidance for operators regarding operations on RNAV DPs and RNAV STARs. The AC provides a link to the AFS Flight Operations Policy and Guidance Web page, where a compliance table is available as a checklist to determine aircraft eligibility. http://www.faa.gov/about/office_org/headquarters_offices/avs/offices/afs/afs400/afs410/policy_guidance/

1) Based on the information supplied by the operator, the POI must coordinate with the PAI to determine equipment eligibility for RNAV DPs and STARs compliance table referenced in AC 90-100.

2) An aircraft equipment compliance matrix is also available in the OPSS guidance in association with OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C063 by clicking on “Other Useful Links.”

http://www.faa.gov/about/office_org/headquarters_offices/avs/offices/afs/afs400/afs410/policy_guidance/�


5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



C. Procedures utilized under this approval should be outlined in the appropriate operations manual or within the OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C063 template for operators conducting operations under part 135 who have no operations manual.

D. Part 97 U.S. RNAV DPs and STARs throughout the NAS are designated as RNAV 1 and published in accordance with part 97. Current and new terminal RNAV DPs and STARs are charted as RNAV 1 to reflect the requirements specified in AC 90-100. The previous version of AC 90-100 made reference to Type B procedures and that guidance should no longer be used.

E. Some important definitions as they relate to this authorization:

1) Climb Via: An ATC instruction in development that will be issued to pilots flying RNAV DPs. The instruction is issued to enable pilots to vertically navigate (i.e., climb in accordance with published speed and/or altitude constraints) on a DP as published.

2) Descend Via: An ATC instruction issued to pilots flying RNAV STARs or Flight Management System Procedures (FMSP). The instruction is issued to enable pilots to vertically navigate (i.e., descend in accordance with published speed and/or altitude constraints) on an arrival procedure as published.

3) Flight Management System Procedure. An RNAV arrival, departure, or approach procedure developed for use by aircraft equipped with an FMS.

NOTE: The number of FMSPs in the NAS is limited and FMSP criteria are no longer preferred for the design of RNAV procedures.

4) Instrument Departure Procedure. Instrument DPs are published IFR procedures which provide obstruction clearance from the terminal area to the en route structure. There are two types of DPs, SID and ODP.

a) Standard Instrument Departures. A SID is a published IFR ATC DP that provides obstacle clearance and a transition from the terminal area to the en route structure. SIDs are primarily designed for air traffic system enhancement to expedite traffic flow and to reduce pilot/controller workload.

b) Obstacle Departure Procedure. An ODP is a published IFR DP that provides obstruction clearance via the least onerous route from the terminal area to the appropriate en route structure. ODPs are recommended for obstruction clearance unless an alternate DP (such as a SID or radar vector) has been specifically assigned by ATC. The RNAV ODP must be retrievable from the FMS database and included in the filed flight plan.

5) Standard Terminal Arrival Route. An RNAV STAR is a published IFR ATC arrival procedure that provides a transition from the en route structure to the terminal area.

6) RNAV 1 DPs and STARs. RNAV terminal procedures requiring, as a minimum, a DME,/DME/IRU-based and/or GPS-based RNAV system satisfying the criteria of AC 90-100. RNAV 1 procedures require the aircraft’s trackkeeping accuracy remain bounded by + 1 nautical mile for 95 percent of the total flight time.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



F. Training. An operator’s FAA-approved training program should include subject areas and frequency in accordance with the following:

NOTE: Operators not required to have approved training programs must include an RNAV SID, an RNAV ODP, and an RNAV DP and STAR on each part 61 qualification check.

1) Training and qualification should be conducted in the specific equipment being used and type of procedure(s) approved under OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C063. Training and qualification should include the following subject areas:

a) Operating procedures in AC 90-100;

b) Pilot knowledge requirements and training described in AC 90-100;

c) Importance of reducing flight technical error on RNAV procedures via use of equipment such as flight director and/or autopilot;

d) Recognition that some manually selectable aircraft bank-limiting functions might reduce the ability to satisfy ATC path expectations, especially during turns of 70 degrees or greater;

e) Procedures for verification that the correct procedure and runway are entered into the navigation system database prior to departure; and

f) Recognition of altitude restrictions on RNAV DPs and related aircraft capabilities.

2) Recurrent training and continuing qualification should be based upon the following:

a) These RNAV procedures should be trained to proficiency during the crewmembers first training sequence in the specific airplane type with equipment being used by the operator.

b) Pilot proficiency should be validated during each recurrent training or continuing qualification cycle (i.e., every 12 months) in the use of RNAV DPs and STARs that the operator is approved to use, in accordance with the operator’s FAA-approved training program. This may be accomplished during a Line-Oriented Flight Training, Line-Operational Simulation, or other course of training, as appropriate.

c) For parts 91K and 135 operators, pilot proficiency must be tested during each recurring qualification cycle (i.e., every 6 months) in the use of the RNAV system approved for conducting these RNAV DPs and STARs.

3) Typical pilot errors should be included in the operator’s training program. The following are examples of RNAV FMS entry errors:

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



a) Proper Interpretation of Predeparture Clearance (PDC) and Printed Clearance Routes. Pilots of operators using PDC and printed routes must be able to properly interpret their assigned clearance. Specifically, pilots must be able to recognize direct routings, assigned altitudes, revised clearances, SIDs, and en route transitions. As an example, some pilots incorrectly inferred that the absence of a period (“.”) in their PDC or printed clearance meant a direct routing. By making this assumption, their navigation system missed waypoints on the assigned en route transition segment. In the case of the NOBLY2 SID at Dallas–Fort Worth, a PDC with the routing of “NOBLY2 LIT” did not mean direct from NOBLY to LIT. In summary, pilots must understand their operator’s PDC notation and must request clarification from ATC if any doubt exists with regard to their clearance.

b) Correct Entry of Runway and En Route Transitions into RNAV System/FMS Prior to Takeoff. Prior to commencing takeoff, pilots must verify their aircraft navigation system is operating correctly and that the correct airport, runway, and DP (including any applicable en route transition) have been entered and are properly depicted by their navigation system. Pilots who are assigned an RNAV DP and subsequently receive a change of runway, procedure, or transition must verify that the appropriate changes are entered and available for navigation. A final check of proper runway entry and correct route depiction, shortly before takeoff, is recommended.

c) Verification of Assigned Route and Correct Entry of Transitions into RNAV System/FMS.

1. DPs. Prior to flight, pilots must verify their aircraft navigation system is operating correctly and the correct runway and DP (including any applicable en route transition) are entered and properly depicted. Pilots who are assigned an RNAV DP and subsequently receive a change of runway, procedure or transition must verify the appropriate changes are entered and available for navigation. A final check of proper runway entry and correct route depiction, shortly before takeoff, is recommended.

2. STARs. Pilots must verify their aircraft navigation system is operating correctly and the correct arrival procedure and runway (including any applicable transition) are entered and properly depicted.

d) Use of Navigation Map Displays. Prior to takeoff, pilots of aircraft with a navigation map display should verify that the relationship of the aircraft position symbol to their assigned runway and route on their display matches external visual cues, as well as charts. Specifically, once on or near their assigned runway, pilots should ensure their navigation display reflects the same relative position to the runway, and the route depiction reflects that of the respective chart. During flight, these displays should be used in concert with textual displays for route verification.

e) Manually Selectable Bank-Limiting Functions. Pilots should recognize that manually selectable aircraft bank-limiting functions might reduce their ability to satisfy ATC path expectations, especially when executing turns of 70 degrees or greater. Do not construe this request for awareness as a requirement to deviate from AFM procedures; rather, pilots should be encouraged to limit the selection of such functions within accepted procedures.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



G. Aircraft Eligibility. Operators and pilots should use the guidance in AC 90-100, to determine their eligibility for domestic U.S. RNAV terminal procedures. For the purpose of this authorization, “compliance” means meeting operational and functional performance criteria.

NOTE: Aircraft compliant with the current edition of AC 90-45, Approval of Area Navigation Systems for Use in the U.S. National Airspace System, may not be compliant with the criteria in AC 90-100.

NOTE: Per AC 90-100, data suppliers and avionics data suppliers must have an LOA in accordance with the current edition of AC 20-153, Acceptance of Data Processes and Associated Navigation Databases, operators must ensure that data supplier(s) are compliant.

1) RNAV 1 procedures require DME/DME/IRU sensors and/or GPS inputs. Due to gaps in the DME infrastructure of the NAS, “RNAV 1” procedures require IRU sensor inputs to augment DME/DME, which is often referred to as DME/DME/IRU.

2) The operator is responsible for providing equipment eligibility documented by the AFM or other FAA recognized means. If the operator is unable to determine that the aircraft is eligible, it must provide the following required documentation for RNAV 1 terminal procedures to the certificate-holding district office:

• RNAV system make, model, and part number(s); • Evidence of compliance with AC 90-100 criteria; • Crew operations procedures; • Crew training program; and • Any other pertinent information.

NOTE: AC 90-100 includes terminology harmonized with ICAO procedures. Formerly classified as either “Type A” and “Type B” procedures, they are now referred to as RNAV 1 procedures.

3) Based on the information supplied by the operator, the POI must coordinate with the PAI to determine equipment eligibility in accordance with the RNAV DPs and STARs compliance table. An aircraft equipment compliance table is also available in the OPSS guidance in association with all OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C063 templates and via the AFS-410 Web site at: http://www.faa.gov/about/office_org/headquarters_offices/avs/offices/afs/afs400/afs410/policy_guidance/.

a) As described in the AC 90-100, the term “compliance” means meeting the operational and functional performance criteria. For the intended purpose of this policy, “compatible” means equipment and systems that perform their intended function and meet performance requirements for RNAV 1 (and RNAV 2) operations, as determined to be in “compliance” for approval.

b) The PAI determines the proper nomenclature of the equipment manufacturer’s make, model, and software (version and that the area navigation equipment and system is



5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



installed in accordance with approved data and meets the criteria of the most recent version of AC 90-100. To ensure the proper configuration control of the approved RNAV operating system, it is required to list both the hardware and the software part numbers or version/revision numbers in Table 1 of OpSpec C063.

c) If the certificate-holding district office is unable to determine equipment eligibility for RNAV DPs and STARs via the AFS-410 Web site, contact AFS-410 for guidance.

4) Some RNAV equipment and systems may not be able to perform multiple STAR runway transitions, sometimes known as “route Type 3,” because of database limitations. Operators of such RNAV systems must procure a “tailored” database and charts to allow the use of multiple runway transitions in order to qualify for RNAV 1 approval.

5) After the POI and PAI agree that the operator’s navigation equipment, procedures, and flightcrew training are eligible for RNAV 1 DPs and STARs operations, the OpSpec/MSpec/LOA C063 template may be issued indicating the appropriate authorizations.

H. Certificate Holders and Program Managers Authorized European Precision RNAV (P-RNAV) Operations. The criteria in AC 90-100, required for U.S. RNAV procedures, are generally consistent (but there are exceptions) with the criteria for P-RNAV operations in Europe.

1) P-RNAV terminal and en route operations require a track-keeping accuracy of ± 1 nautical mile for 95 percent of the flight time.

2) If an operator has met the requirements for and is authorized P-RNAV (OpSpec/MSpec/LOA B034), that operator may also be eligible for RNAV 1 after consideration of the following issues regarding equipment. POIs should still evaluate their operator’s procedures and training to ensure compliance with current edition of AC 90-100.

a) If approval for the P-RNAV included the use of VOR/DME, then RNAV system performance must be based on the GNSS, DME/DME, or DME/DME/IRU for RNAV 1. However, VOR/DME inputs do not have to be inhibited or deselected.

b) If approval for the P-RNAV included the use of DME/DME: Operator can ask manufacturer or check the FAA Web site for a list of compliant systems. However, DME/DME-only systems are not authorized to conduct RNAV 1 operations.

c) Operators must be able to follow RNAV guidance no later than 500 ft above field elevation (AFE).

3) Appropriate P-RNAV references are:

a) Current edition of AC 90-96, Approval of U.S. Operators and Aircraft to Operate Under Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) in European Airspace Designated for Basic Area Navigation (B-RNAV) and Precision Area Navigation (P-RNAV).

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



b) Joint Aviation Authority Temporary Guidance Leaflet Number 10, Airworthiness and Operational Approval for Precision RNAV Operations in Designated European Airspace.

c) Volume 3, Chapter 18, Section 4, Paragraph, OpSpec/MSpec/LOA B034, IFR Class I Terminal and En Route Navigation Using Area Navigation Systems.

I. References.

• 14 CFR part 91, §§ 91.123, 91.205, and 91.503 (data currency); • 14 CFR part 95; • 14 CFR part 121, § 121.349; • 14 CFR part 125, § 125.203; • 14 CFR part 129, § 129.17; • 14 CFR part 135, § 135.165; and • FAA Order 7110.65, Air Traffic Control, current edition.

OPSPEC C064, TERMINAL AREA IFR OPERATIONS IN CLASS G AIRSPACE AND AT AIRPORTS WITHOUT AN OPERATING CONTROL TOWER—NONSCHEDULED PASSENGER AND ALL-CARGO OPERATIONS. C064 authorizes an operator to conduct nonscheduled passenger and all-cargo (scheduled and nonscheduled) terminal area IFR operations in Class G airspace or into airports without an operating control tower, with the following limitations and provisions:

A. Before authorizing C064, the POI must determine that the operator has a method or procedure for obtaining and disseminating necessary operational information. This operational information must include the following:

1) The airport is served by an authorized IAP (and departure procedure when applicable);

2) Applicable charts for crewmember use;

3) Operational weather data from an approved source for control of flight movements and crewmember use;

4) Status of airport services and facilities at the time of the operation; and

5) Suitable means for pilots to obtain traffic advisories.

6) Sources of Traffic and Airport Advisories.

B. Certificate holders may be authorized to use any two-way radio source of air traffic advisory information listed in the AIM (for operations in U.S. airspace) or equivalent Aeronautical Information Publications (AIP) (for foreign operations).

1) These sources include common traffic advisory frequencies, UNICOM, MULTICOM, and flight service stations.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



2) In those cases where two sources are listed at the same airport, inspectors must ensure the operator’s manuals have procedures which require pilots to continuously monitor and use the traffic advisory frequency when operating within 10 NM of the airport. The procedures should require communication concerning airport services and facilities to be completed while more than 10 miles from the airport.

3) At some airports no public use frequencies may be available. In those cases, a certificate holder must arrange for radio communication of essential information including surveillance of local or transient aircraft operations by ground personnel. Ground personnel who operate a company radio for airport status and traffic advisory must be able to view airspace around the airport.

C. OpSpecs C064 and/or C080 may need to be issued to the certificate holder in order for the OpSpec C081, Special Non 14 CFR Part 97 Instrument Approach or Departure Procedures, to be issued which authorizes the use of special (non-part 97) instrument approach or departure procedures.

D. C064 is applicable to parts 121, 125, 121/135, and 135 certificate holders. For helicopter authorization, see OpSpec H121. Part 91K program managers should use MSpec A014 for Class G operations.

OPSPEC C065, POWERBACK OPERATIONS WITH AIRPLANES.

A. C065 authorizes the use of powerplant reversing systems for rearward taxi operations. Before issuing C065, the POI must determine whether the operator meets requirements discussed in AC 120-29, current edition. Airplane types (M/M/S) authorized for powerback operations must be listed in C065. Airports where powerback operations are authorized must also be listed. If the POI and/or operator determine that restrictions to powerback operations are required at certain gates or ramp areas, the restrictions must be described (adjacent to the airport name) in the “Restrictions and Limitations” column. OpSpecs worksheets provide a template for listing authorized airplanes, airports, and restrictions.

B. Sections 121.133, 121.135, 135.21, and 134.23 require certificate holders to prepare manuals setting forth procedures and policies which must be used by ground and maintenance personnel in conducting their ground operations. Sufficient procedures must be established to maintain an adequate level of passenger and company ground personnel safety during ramp operations. Procedures should emphasize safety during boarding and deplaning of passengers or cargo, specifically during times when an engine(s) may be running or a propeller(s) is turning during ground operations. Procedures should include, as a minimum, a means for defining no-access areas around the propeller(s) as well as the landing gear and tugs during push and ground marshaling operations. Policies should provide that an adequate number of ground personnel are assigned to ensure safety of company personnel and passengers.

C. Procedures for pushback and ground marshaling activities should be clearly defined and should include safety precautions and signals, and should ensure adequate visibility of assigned personnel during the time of aircraft movement.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



D. FAA air carrier surveillance programs should emphasize increased awareness by inspectors and the strict need to follow safety procedures around turning propellers, in marshalling and pushback procedures, and/or other ground activities.

E. Additional references can be found in NTSB Recommendations 91-297, 91-298, and 93-146, and ACOB 8-94-2, Safety in Ground Operations.

OPSPEC C067, SPECIAL AIRPLANE AUTHORIZATIONS, PROVISIONS, AND LIMITATIONS FOR CERTAIN AIRPORTS.

A. General. OpSpec C067 authorizes certificate holders to operate airplanes into certain airports. The authorizations include the following:

1) Part 121 air carriers to conduct passenger-carrying operations into uncertificated airports (see C below),

2) Part 121 air carriers to conduct operations at airports that require curfew limitations for flights into or out of specific airports (see D below),

3) Part 121 or 135 air carriers to conduct operations into airports that have operational considerations such as special aircraft performance charts and equipment, special lighting (flare pots, etc.), or unpaved runways, (See D below.)

4) Part 121 or 135 air carriers to conduct operations using the Reginald Bennett International Runway Reflectorization System in Alaska (see D below), and

5) Part 135 transport category airplane deviations from § 135.376(a)(3) or § 135.379(d). (See D below and Volume 4, Chapter 3, Section 5, Selected Practices)

B. Authorizations Where Other OpSpecs are Applicable.

1) OpSpec C050 for “special PIC qualification airports” is applicable to the authorization described in § 121.445. Do not list special PIC qualification airports in OpSpec C067 unless one of the items in subparagraph A above also applies.

2) OpSpec C081 should be used for listing the airports/runways where AFS-400 has approved specific “Special” instrument procedures for a certificate holder.

3) OpSpec C058 is used for authorizing specific foreign terminal instrument procedures.

4) OpSpec C064 and C080 are used for authorizing a certificate holder to conduct airplane operations in airport terminal areas in Class G and E airspace.

5) OpSpec C070 is used for authorizing airports where certificate holders conduct scheduled operations.

C. Uncertificated Airports.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



1) In accordance with part 121, § 121.590(c) and (e), a certificate holder may be authorized to conduct passenger-carrying airplane operations into an airport (non-military) operated by the U.S. Government that is not certificated under 14 CFR part 139 if those airports meet:

a) The equivalent safety standards for airports certificated under part 139, and

b) The equivalent airport classification requirements under part 139 to serve the type airplanes to be operated and the type of operations to be conducted.

2) Authorization to use such airports may be granted by entering the location/identifier of each airport, and the M/M (if applicable) of the airplanes to be operated in Table 3-23:

a) Operators should obtain permission from the airport manager of non-military airports to operate at these airports before starting operations.

b) This permission is not needed for operations at joint-use civil and military airports.

3) The FAA may authorize a certificate holder to conduct passenger-carrying airplane operations into a domestic military airport that is not certificated under part 139 (by selecting this text in the OpSpec) if the certificate holder ensures the following in advance of starting operations into that airport.

a) Certificate holders should obtain permission from the Base Commander of military airports that are not certificated under part 139 in advance of commencement of operations.

b) In accordance with the requirements of § 121.590, certificate holders must ensure that the airport:

1. Meets the equivalent safety standards for airports certificated under part 139 and

2. Meets the equivalent airport classification requirements under part 139 to serve the type airplanes to be operated and the type of operations to be conducted.

D. Other Special Authorizations.

1) Other special authorizations include those that may require special operational considerations and special flight crewmember training. (See guidance in Volume 4, Chapter 3, Section 5, paragraph 4-601.) These authorizations may include but are not limited to:

a) Operations into airports with special runway markings, such as flare pots or trees;

b) High altitude airports with special airplane performance requirements;

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



c) Airports in or near precipitous terrain (§ 135.363(h)); and

d) Airports with unpaved runways or runways constructed on frozen lakes and rivers.

2) Special authorization for conducting operations at airports in Alaska. For authorization to conduct airplane operations using the Reginald Bennett International (RBI) Runway Reflectorization System in Alaska:

a) The air carrier must provide a station agent at the airport trained to give wind information to the flightcrew and

b) The air carrier must train its flightcrews on this specific system in accordance with an approved training program. The training program must be approved in accordance with the following criteria:

1. Each pilot must receive initial and follow-on recurrent training in accordance with the company approved training program.

2. Ground and flight personnel must complete initial training before participation with this authorization.

3. Recurrent training must be completed every 12 calendar-months following completion of initial training.

4. Whenever a person who is required to take this recurrent training completes the training in the calendar-month before or the calendar-month after the month in which this recurrent training is required, that person is considered to have completed it in the calendar-month in which it was required.

c) The sample Table 3-24, below, shows how to provide authorization for conducting operations after curfew hours at specific airports or use of the RBI Runway Reflectorization system at specific airports in Table 3-24 of OpSpec C067.

3) Unpaved runways for turbojet operations. To use an airport with unpaved runways, an operator is required to have special operational procedures and flight crewmember training. For approval of operations at an airport with unpaved runways the POI must identify the airport and reference the appropriate section of the operator’s manuals in Table 3-24 of OpSpec C067. See Volume 4, Chapter 3, Section 5.

4) You may list in OpSpec C067 Flag or Supplemental destination airports that do not have an available alternate airport (in accordance with § 121.621(a)(2) or 121.623(b)), for use by airplanes that are dispatched in accordance with the required fuel reserves set forth in § 121.641(b) or 121.645(c).

5) Although the FAA does not encourage operators to list aircraft limitations at certain airports during curfew hours in their OpSpecs, if an airport authority requires operators to list these limitations in their OpSpecs, then operators may list them in Table 3-24 of

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



OpSpec C067. A sample of Table 3-24 below shows an example of limitations for air carrier operations into specific airports during curfew hours.

Table 3-24, Sample of Airports and Special Provisions

AIRPORT LOCATION/IDENTIFIER

AIRCRAFT M/M (ENTER N/A IF NOT APPLICABLE)

SPECIAL PROVISIONS ANDLIMITATIONS AND SPECIAL FLIGHT CREWMEMBER TRAINING

PKEK, Ekwok, Alaska N/A A station agent is required to give wind information to the flightcrews and the flightcrew must have completed the required approved training on the RBI Runway Reflectorization System

DCA, Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport

Boeing 737-800 Limitations during the curfew hours Boeing 737-800Max Takeoff-159,000 pounds Max Landing 137, 600 pounds

Tahiti Island, Society IS; PPT/NTAA

N/A Approved as destination airport without an available alternate

6) Deviation from the Requirement to Obtain Obstacle Clearance Data for Takeoff. This OpSpec provides for the authorization of certain transport category airplanes a deviation from part 135, § 135.367(a)(3) or 135.379(d). Guidance for this deviation authorization is contained in Volume 4, Chapter 3, Section 5, paragraph 4-599. To authorize this deviation, it must be listed in OpSpec A005 and the following statement must be selected in OpSpec C067:

NOTE: “The certificate holder is authorized to conduct takeoff operations using transport category airplanes weighing no more than 19,000 pounds and having a seating configuration of no more than 19 passenger seats without showing compliance with part 135, §§ 135.367(a)(3) and 135.379(d). This authorization is limited to only the following operations conducted:

• At airports of 4,000 feet MSL or less field elevation; • On runways on which the available length of runway is equal to or greater

than 150 percent of the runway required by § 135.367(a)(1) and (2) or § 135.379(c), as applicable; and

• In weather conditions equal to or greater than straight-in Category I landing minimums for the runway being used.”

OPSPEC C068, NOISE ABATEMENT DEPARTURE PROFILES (NADP) ITEM 7K.

A. C068 authorizes an operator to conduct NADPs using aircraft with a maximum certificated gross takeoff weight of more than 75,000 pounds. Operators may use either or both

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



of two standard NADPs as described in AC 91-53, Noise Abatement Departure Profiles, current edition.

B. Before authorizing this paragraph, the POI must ensure that all airplane vertical departure profiles described in the certificate holder operations and/or training manuals comply with the minima criteria established in AC 91-53 for NADPs (Close-In and Distant) before approving paragraph C068 for the certificate holder’s OpSpecs. The certificate holder shall not use any other departure profile (except as stated in part 91) that is not defined within the AC.

NOTE: Use of part 91 procedures does not require OpSpecs authorization. If the operator does not meet the criteria established in AC 91-53, then OpSpec C068 will not be issued.

C. Proposed exceptions to the criteria as stated in this OpSpec which would be less limiting (less than 800 feet above field elevation (AFE)) must be addressed by the certificate holder to the certificate holder’s POI for concurrence by AFS-400 of the Flight Standards Service.

D. AC 91-53, effective July 22, 1993, established minimum acceptable criteria for speed, thrust settings, airplane configurations and the criteria for both the Close-In and Distant NADPs. These NADPs can be combined with preferential runway selection and flight path techniques to minimize noise impact. For helicopter information, see AC 91-66, Noise Abatement for Helicopters.

NOTE: The Distant departure profiles requires an initiation of flaps/slats retraction prior to thrust cutback initiation with the thrust cutback initiation at an altitude of no less than 800 feet AFE. Configuration changes necessary to meet regulatory performance or operations requirements shall not be affected by this procedure. For those airplanes that have a performance requirement to reduce takeoff flaps to an intermediate takeoff flap setting at 400 feet AFE or above, the next flap/slats retraction should be initiated at an altitude of no less than 800 feet AFE.

OPSPEC C070, AIRPORTS AUTHORIZED FOR SCHEDULED OPERATIONS.

A. Under 14 CFR part 119, § 119.49, the OpSpecs must prescribe the authorizations and limitations for each type of operation. All regular airports shall be listed in the OpSpecs of all operators conducting scheduled operations. This includes domestic operations, flag operations, and commuter operations. Provisional and refueling airports shall be listed for part 121 domestic and flag operations:

• Airport name, • Three letter identifier of the airport, • Airplanes authorized to use the airport, and • A notation as to whether the airport is regular (R), refueling (F), or provisional (P)

for each type of airplane authorized (refueling and provisional airports are not applicable to part 135 operators).

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



NOTE: If an airport is designated as provisional, the regular airport or airports for which it serves as a provisional airport must be annotated. (Except in unique situations, an airport should not be designated as a provisional airport if it is located more than 100 statute miles outside of the metropolitan area served by the regular airport.)

B. If the operator provides a list of airports to be incorporated into C070, this list must provide the same type of information discussed in subparagraph A. This list must be annotated with the effective date of the listing.

C. C070 specifies that the operator must maintain a list of alternate airports which can be used. This list of alternates may be integrated into the list provided by the operator, if desired. The POI should occasionally inspect the list of alternates to determine airport and airplane compatibility.

OPSPEC C071, AUTOPILOT ENGAGEMENT AFTER TAKEOFF AND DURING INITIAL CLIMB FOR AUTO FLIGHT GUIDANCE SYSTEM (AFGS).

A. OpSpec C071 is an optional authorization applicable to certificate holders operating in accordance with parts 121, 125, and 135; there is no MSpec C071 for part 91K operators. The authorization to engage the AFGS at an altitude lower than 500 feet after takeoff and the initial climb segment requires authorization through OpSpec C071 in accordance with the following criteria:

1) For certain aircraft, the AFM may specify a minimum altitude that has been satisfactorily demonstrated for AFGS engagement after takeoff and the initial climb phase of flight that is lower than 500 feet:

a) If the FSB report sets a higher altitude than the AFM, the higher FSB altitude would be the authorized altitude; or

b) If an FSB report is not available, or does not address AP engagement heights, the lowest authorized altitude shall be the altitude specified in the AFM.

c) If the FSB report sets a lower altitude than the AFM, the AFM value shall be used.

d) Operator training material and pilot training program(s) have been reviewed, incorporating appropriate changes, as necessary. The flightcrew must have successfully completed the certificate holder’s approved training program curriculum segment(s) for AFGS operations at the minimum engagement altitude(s).

e) The established maintenance and reliability program must be checked. This program should be designed to ensure that the equipment functions to the prescribed levels as delivered by the manufacturer, and include maintenance and preventative maintenance. Appropriate manuals should be referenced for compliance with manufacturers’ recommendations.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



2) If the AFM does not specify an altitude for engaging the AFGS for the initial climb, the lowest minimum altitude authorized is 500 feet, in accordance with § 121.579(a), 125.329(a), or 135.93(a), as applicable.

a) The FSB Report for the aircraft may also contain further conditions or limitations regarding AFGS engagement after takeoff and initial climb.

b) If there is uncertainty about applying AFM performance information, Airplane Operations Manual (AOM), General Operations Manuals (GOM), or Flightcrew Operating Manual (FCOM) procedures, or if there is a conflict between AFM and AOM, GOM, or the FCOM, the Aircraft Evaluation Group (AEG) should be consulted.

c) Principal Inspectors approving, or who have approved, performance-related takeoff procedures and training for systems not specifically designed with a takeoff mode should coordinate with the cognizant AEG.

d) The AEG, in coordination with the cognizant Aircraft Certification Office (ACO), will concur or nonconcur with the procedure or propose conditions and limitations, if any, as appropriate.

B. The AFM is the document which contains “FAA-approved” “performance” and “limitations.” Any use of the AP and/or FD modes should be consistent with both the AFM and the applicable operating rules (e.g., § 121.189, Airplanes: Turbine engine powered: Takeoff limitations).

1) The AFM establishes the basis to be used when developing the AOM or the FCOM.

2) While AOMs, GOMs, and FCOMs are accepted by the FAA, they typically are not used as the means to specify performance information, and they do not supersede the limitations sections of the AFM.

3) FSB Report further addresses such issues for some, but not all, aircraft types.

C. Some AOMs, GOMs, or FCOMs contain takeoff procedures such as using 1/2-bank mode, go-around mode, or capturing indicated airspeed (IAS) for systems not specifically designed with a takeoff mode and should not, by procedures themselves, be used as the basis for approving procedures and training programs that relate to achieving necessary takeoff performance.

D. AC 120-67 gives additional criteria applicable to operators using commercial turbojet and/or turboprop aircraft operating under parts 121, 125, and 135.

OPSPEC C072, ENGINE-OUT DEPARTURE PROCEDURES WITH APPROVED TEN-MINUTE TAKEOFF THRUST TIME LIMITS.

A. OpSpec C072 is optional and authorizes the certificate holder to use engine-out departure procedures under the provisions of parts 125, 121, and/or 135, as appropriate, using

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



airplanes that are equipped with powerplants that are approved 10-minute takeoff thrust time limits in accordance with the provisions of this guidance and the OpSpec C070.

B. The manufacturer’s AFM must include takeoff obstacle climb data for use with a 10-minute engine-out takeoff thrust time limit. This AFM data must be applied to the certificate holder’s airplane engine-out takeoff obstacle analysis to provide critical obstacle clearance in the event of an engine failure during takeoff.

1) The FAA Transport Airplane Directorate and the Engine and Propeller Directorate have developed a procedure to certify and revise airplane manufacturer’s AFMs to include takeoff obstacle climb data for use with a 10-minute engine-out takeoff thrust time limit.

2) Previously, airplane operators’ AFM takeoff data only provided data for a five-minute takeoff thrust time limit. Airplane operators may obtain revised AFMs from the airplane manufacturers for specific airplane/engine combinations. This AFM data may then be applied to the airplane operator’s engine-out takeoff obstacle analysis to provide critical obstacle clearance in the event of an engine failure during takeoff.

C. Since it is assumed that not all airplanes operated by an air carrier will have their AFMs revised for 10-minute takeoff thrust data some operator’s airplane takeoff thrust limits and may be restricted to 5 minutes while other airplanes in the same fleet may have the 10-minute restriction, certain criteria must be addressed to inform the pilot which limit is applicable in the event of an engine failure during takeoff.

D. The certificate holder’s approved operations manual and training program must include the engine-out departure procedures specifically designed to use the 10-minute takeoff thrust time limits. These departure procedures require that airplane operator’s training programs, manuals, and procedures address the following areas:

1) Air carrier performance engineers evaluation of engine-out departure procedures specifically designed to use the 10-minute takeoff thrust time limit.

2) An FAA-AFM revision outlining operational procedures with specific airplane/engine lists that involve the 10-minute takeoff thrust time limit.

3) An FAA-approved dispatch or similar acceptable system which provides specific 10-minute engine-out takeoff thrust departure procedure information to the pilot for the impending flight concerning the airport, aircraft weight, and departure path.

4) Information readily available to the pilot that indicates airplanes authorized for 10-minute takeoff thrust operations in the event of an engine failure on takeoff.

5) Pilot knowledge of the designed engine-out departure procedure which uses the 10-minute takeoff thrust time limit.

6) Pilot training of the 10-minute takeoff thrust time limit departure flight procedure.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



OPSPEC C073, IFR APPROACH PROCEDURES USING VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV). TBD.

OpSpec C074, Straight-In Category I Precision Approach Procedures and IFR Landing Minimums—All Airports (Split from C053): 14 CFR Parts 121, 125, 125M, 135, and 91 Subpart K Operators.

A. OpSpec C074 applies all operators conducting airplane operations under parts 121, 125 (including the LODA 125 operators), 129, 135, and 91 subpart K. Paragraph C074 authorizes the lowest straight-in CAT I precision approach procedures and IFR landing minimums. Paragraph C074 applies to operators conducting IFR CAT I precision approach procedures as follows:

1) OpSpec C074 is required to be issued to operators conducting operations under part 121. This OpSpec is required to be issued to operators that using turbojets in operations under part 135; however, it is optional for operators conducting operations under part 135 with all other aircraft.

2) OpSpec C074 and letter of authorization (LOA) C074 is optional for certificated operators that operate under part 125. LOA C074 is optional for operators conducting operations under part 125 that are issued a deviation from the certificate and OpSpec requirements of part 125 (125M).

3) MSpec C074 is required to be issued to those program managers conducting operations under part 91K.

4) OpSpec C074 is optional for part 129 foreign air carriers.

B. Paragraph C074 specifies the lowest minimums applicable to CAT I precision approaches based on runway lighting and approach lighting systems, as well as the controlling RVR. Table 1 in C074 reflects CAT I 1800 RVR landing minimums, including both the lighting systems and aircraft equipment requirements.

C. Paragraph C074 specifies the equipment usage requirements and part 97 SIAP depiction required for reduced CAT I landing minimums. Credit is given for FD, AP, and heads-up display (HUD) usage. The POI should allow the use of 1800 RVR minimums to runways without CL lighting or TDZ lighting, provided the Special Instrument Approach Procedure (SIAP) contains a straight-in ILS minimum with the chart note, “RVR 1800 Authorized with use of FD or AP or HUD to DA.” Additionally, the operator issued OpSpec C074 may continue to use 1800 RVR line of minimums on SIAPs without the above procedural note when the TDZ and/or CL lights are inoperative, if the approach is conducted in accordance with the equipment requirements outlined in paragraph C074.

1) FAA Approval. Operators may continue to use the standard CAT I minimums based solely on ground lighting systems without alteration of current authorizations or procedures. Operators can utilize reduced CAT I landing minima provided the SIAP contains a straight-in ILS minimum with the chart note, “RVR 1800 Authorized with use of FD or AP or HUD to DA.” A part 129 foreign air carrier must present documentation from its Civil Aviation

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



Authority (CAA) authorizing lower than standard CAT I operations to receive authorization for equivalent operations in this paragraph.

2) Conditions of Approval. Before issuing the C074 authorization to use CAT I minimums based on aircraft equipment and operation, inspectors must ensure that each operator meets the following conditions:

a) Aircraft and Associated Aircraft Systems. The authorized aircraft must be equipped with an FD, or AP with an approved approach coupler, or HUD that provides guidance to DA. Inspectors must establish that the FD, AP, or HUD are certified for use down to an altitude of 200 feet above ground level (AGL) or lower.

b) Flightcrew Procedures. The flightcrew must use the FD, or AP with an approved approach coupler, or HUD to DA or to the initiation of a missed approach, unless visual references with the runway environment are established, thus allowing safe continuation to a landing.

1. If the FD, AP, or HUD malfunctions or becomes disconnected, the flightcrew must execute a missed approach unless the runway environment is in sight.

2. Single pilot operators are prohibited from using the FD to reduced landing minima without accompanying use of an AP or HUD.

3. 1800 RVR operations without TDZ and/or CL lighting are prohibited if the crosswind is stronger than 15 knots.

c) Flightcrew Qualification. Each member of the flightcrew must have demonstrated proficiency using the FD, AP, or HUD, (as appropriate) on the most recent instrument proficiency check required in Order 8900.1, Volume 4, Chapter 2, Section 4, paragraph 4-259C; and 14 CFR §§ 121.441, 135.297, 125.291, 91.1069, 61.57(e)(2), 61.58 (as applicable), or in an approved Advanced Qualification Program (AQP).

D. Paragraph C074 allows the operator to continue to utilize reduced CAT I precision approach minimums when operating at an airport with an approved Special Instrument Approach Procedure. A Special Instrument Approach Procedure is one which is authorized by AFS-400, which is not a 14 CFR part 97 approach procedure. To authorize reduced CAT I minimums on a Special Instrument Approach Procedure, the procedure must be authorized by AFS-400, and the airport and runway must be listed in Table 2 of OpSpec paragraph C074. Table 2 should only list airports and runways with an approval Special Instrument Approach Procedure.

E. Paragraph C074 allows the operator to use reduced CAT I precision approach minimums when operating at an airport with a part 97 Standard Instrument Approach Procedure with an 1800 RVR minimums, published either on the approach chart or via a temporary or permanent NOTAM. These runways do not need to be listed in Table 2 of paragraph C074. The AFS-410 public Web site contains a list of all part 97 public approaches approved for reduced CAT I precision approach minimums.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



F. Paragraph C074 references the Joint Aviation Authorities (JAR-OPS-1), and specifies the requirements for both CAT I precision and nonprecision approaches at foreign airports. Sequenced flashing lights are not required when determining if the approach lighting system is equivalent to U.S. standards. The HAT used for precision approaches must not be below those specified in paragraph C074. This section also specifies the requirements for determining DA/MDA when an Obstacle Clearance Limit (OCL) or Obstacle Clearance Altitude (OCA) is specified.

G. OpSpec paragraph C074 subparagraph d, Limitations and Provisions for Instrument Approach Procedures at Foreign Airports, is not applicable to 14 CFR part 129 foreign air carriers.

OPSPEC C075, CAT I IFR LANDING MINIMUMS—CIRCLING APPROACHES. (SPLIT FROM C053).

A. OpSpec paragraph C075 is issued to operators who conduct parts 121, 135, and 125 operations with fixed-wing airplanes. OpSpec C075 specifies the lowest minima which can be used for CAT I circling approach maneuvers. It also provides special limitations and provisions for IAPs at foreign airports. See Volume 4, Chapter 2 for more information on required training for circling maneuvers.

B. For the purpose of this OpSpec authorization, any operator issued this paragraph is authorized to conduct circle-to-land maneuvers. In any weather condition, a certificate holder that permits its pilots to accept a “circle to land” or a “circle to runway (runway number)” clearance from ATC conducts circle-to-land maneuvers. The term “circle-to-land maneuver” includes the maneuver that is referenced in various regulations, publications, and documents as “circle-to-land maneuver,” “circling,” “circling maneuver,” “circle,” “circling approach,” and “circling approach maneuver.” With regard to pilots, “conducting” a circle-to-land maneuver means to act as the pilot flying when a circle-to-land maneuver is being conducted.

C. Aircraft operating under IFR during all circle-to-land maneuvers are required to remain clear of clouds. If visual reference to the airport is lost while conducting a circle-to-land maneuver the missed approach procedure specified for the applicable instrument approach must be followed, unless an alternate missed approach procedure is specified by ATC.

D. Each certificate holder who is issued OpSpec C075, and who is also required to have maneuver descriptions/ procedures, must publish in its training manual, or must incorporate in its training manual by reference to another approved manual, a detailed description of the procedures used to conduct a circle-to-land maneuver. Pilots must conduct circle-to-land maneuvers using those procedures.

E. Part 121 certificate holders may conduct circle-to-land maneuvers under two separate provisions contained within OpSpec C075.

1) With flight training and flight checking. Part 121 certificate holders whose pilots have been trained and checked for the circling maneuver in accordance with part 121, appendix E and appendix F, or in accordance with an AQP, may conduct a circle-to-land maneuver:

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



• At the published circling landing minima for the instrument approach to be used; or

• At the minima specified in the chart contained within the OpSpec paragraph, whichever is higher.

a) Appendix E does not require a part 121 certificate holder to train a SIC in the circling maneuver if the certificate holder prohibits the SIC from performing/conducting (acting as pilot-flying) a circling maneuver. However, an SIC must be trained and can be checked in those functions specific to the circle-to-land maneuver that the SIC is required to perform while acting as pilot-not-flying.

b) Any pilot who possesses a pilot certificate restricting circling approaches to visual meteorological conditions (VMC) is not eligible to conduct circle-to-land maneuvers except as provided in paragraph E.

2) Part 121 operations without flight training and flight checking. Certificate holders conducting circle-to-land maneuvers without training and checking must use a Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) of 1,000 feet (HAA) or the MDA of the published circling landing minima for the instrument approach to be used, whichever is higher. Certificate holders that conduct a circle-to-land maneuver under this provision remain under an IFR clearance and must comply with those procedures otherwise required for circle-to-land maneuvers. Certificate holders must ensure pilots are familiar with those procedures. Part 121 pilots who have not been trained and checked for the circling maneuver in accordance with part 121, appendices E and F, or in accordance with an Advanced Qualification Program (AQP), may conduct a circle-to-land maneuver when:

• The reported ceiling is at least 1,000 feet and the visibility is at least 3 statute miles (see part 121, appendices E and F).

OR

• The reported weather is at least equal to the published circling landing minima for the instrument approach to be used, whichever is higher.

F. Part 125 certificate holders are not permitted to conduct circle-to-land maneuvers in airplanes without their pilots having been checked in that maneuver.

1) Section 125.291 Pilot-in-command: Instrument proficiency check requirements. Subsection (b) states: “The IAP or procedures must include at least one straight-in approach, one circling approach, and one missed approach. Each type of approach procedure demonstrated must be conducted to published minimums for that procedure.”

2) Required part 125 SIC. The SIC must complete the annual competency check required by § 125.287. The circle-to-land maneuver is not part of the § 125.287 competency check. However, each SIC is evaluated for flightcrew coordination.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



3) Pilot-not-flying duties. Each crewmember can be checked in those functions specific to the circle-to-land maneuver that the pilot is required to perform while acting as pilot-not-flying.

G. Part 135 certificate holders are not permitted to conduct circle-to-land maneuvers in aircraft without their pilots having been checked in that maneuver. (Helicopter IFR circle-to-land maneuvers are authorized in OpSpec H118.)

1) Section 135.297 Pilot-in-command: Instrument proficiency check requirements.

a) Section 135.297(a) does not allow “any person to serve, as pilot-in-command of an aircraft under IFR unless, since the beginning of the 6th calendar-month before that service, that pilot has passed an instrument proficiency check under this section….”

b) Section 135.297(b) requires, “The IAP or procedures must include at least one straight-in approach, one circling approach, and one missed approach. Each type of approach procedure demonstrated must be conducted to published minimums for that procedure.” The requirement to demonstrate a circle-to-land maneuver is applicable to both airplanes and helicopters.

c) Part 135 single-pilot and single PIC operators are not required to have training programs. However, the circle-to-land maneuver must be successfully demonstrated in every § 135.297 instrument proficiency check.

2) In accordance with § 135.293, a part 135 IFR operator is required to ensure that each IFR SIC has an annual competency check. In accordance with Volume 3, Chapter 19, Section 7, paragraph 3-1279, a SIC need not be evaluated in “circling approaches” when an operator’s procedures restrict a SIC from conducting (acting as pilot-flying) this event in revenue service. However, each required IFR SIC is evaluated for flightcrew coordination.

3) Pilot-not-flying duties. Each pilot must be trained and can be checked in those functions specific to the circle-to-land maneuver that the pilot is required to perform while acting as pilot-not-flying.

4) The standard of competence for part 135 instrument proficiency checks is specified in § 135.293(d). This standard is also specified in the Airline Transport Pilot Practical Test Standard (FAA-S-8081-5) and the Instrument Rating Practical Test Standard (FAA-S-8081-4).

H. For helicopter authorization, see OpSpec H118.

OPSPEC/MSPEC C076, CAT I IFR LANDING MINIMUMS—CONTACT APPROACHES. (SPLIT FROM C053). The certificate holder shall not use any IFR CAT I landing minimum lower than that prescribed by the applicable published IAP. The IFR landing minima prescribed in paragraphs C053 for nonprecision “other than ILS, MLS, or GLS” approaches and C074 for precision “ILS, MLS, or GLS” approaches of these operations specifications are the lowest CAT I minima authorized for use at any airport. Those paragraphs must also be issued, as applicable. For helicopter authorization, see OpSpec H119.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



OPSPEC C077, TERMINAL FLIGHT RULES LIMITATIONS AND PROVISIONS. (FORMERLY OPSPEC B033).

A. OpSpec C077. OpSpec paragraph C077 is an optional authorization that is applicable to all operators conducting operations under the provisions for part 135 on-demand turbojet , all part 121, and part 129 foreign operators (except for rotorcraft operations). OpSpec paragraph B051 “Part 121 En Route Visual Flight Rules, Limitations, and Provisions,” is applicable for parts 121 and 129 VFR en route operations for propeller-driven aircraft and may be issued in conjunction with C077.

B. OpSpec C077 provides for operations under a Charted Visual Flight Procedure (CVFP) unless operating under the provisions of 14 CFR part 93, SFAR 50-2, if the minima in the CVFP are lower than those listed in § 121.649, § 121.649 prevails for all part 121 operations, conversely for part 135 operations in class G airspace, § 135.205 prevails. There are no provisions in § 121.649 or 135.205 for a deviation. An exemption is required if the operator wants to use a CVFP with lower than standard minima. For part 129 operators, the applicable provisions and limitations of part 91 prevails.

C. The VFR weather conditions specified in part 91, § 91.155 may be used. However, where § 91.155(c) and (d) refers to § 91.157, “Special VFR Minimums,” the minima set forth in § 121.649 or § 135.205, as applicable, take precedence for operations conducted under part 121 or 135.

D. Subparagraph c(2)(b). Uncontrolled airports can be in either controlled or uncontrolled airspace. As long as the provisions listed in this subparagraph are met, the operator may operate VFR in uncontrolled airspace in the terminal area in accordance with this OpSpec. For the purpose of direct communication at uncontrolled airports, a Common Traffic Advisory Frequency (CTAF) may be utilized as long as it is associated with an air/ground communication facility. The CTAF may be a UNICOM, MULTICOM, FSS, or a tower frequency. Acceptable air/ground communication is a demonstrated reliable means to directly relay traffic advisories and information that is pertinent to conditions on and around the landing surface during the terminal phase of flight. For example, if the operator adequately demonstrates to the POI its reliability to relay essential information, via radio or another type of communication, through an agent located near the landing surface, it is considered to be a “demonstrated reliable means” of communication.

E. Subparagraph c(3). In lieu of a published CVFP, an authorized visual guidance procedure such as the use of Visual Approach RNAV Reference Points (VARRP), or Special RNAV Visual Flight Procedures (RVFP) is highly recommended for all terminal VFR departures/arrivals that fall under this OpSpec. The POI may approve that procedure. The proximity of obstacles to the departure flight path, the seeing conditions, the accuracy of the guidance and control systems, the pilot's proficiency, and the operator's training, should determine the size of the area in which obstacle clearance or avoidance must be considered. The POI should take into account the airplane performance data annotated in Volume 4, Aircraft Equipment and Operational Authorizations, Chapter 3, Airplane Performance and Airport Data.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



F. Where there is an operating ATC facility and it is possible to obtain an IFR clearance, the flight must depart on an IFR flight plan, even if authorized en route VFR under B051.

1) It is recognized that the IFR infrastructure at certain locations may not always support an expeditious departure environment. If the certificate holder is able to show that it is just as safe to depart on a VFR flight plan at certain IFR airports, they may apply for a nonstandard OpSpec prescribing VFR departure procedures for that airport. For procedures to apply for a nonstandard OpSpec authorization, see Volume 3, Chapter 1, Section 2.

2) Subparagraph d(3). The requirement to obtain an IFR clearance no farther than 50 NMs still is valid. However, it is recognized that this procedure may not be practical in all situations. If a greater distance is necessary, the certificate holder may apply for a nonstandard paragraph.

3) OpSpec paragraph B051 is for part 121 and 129 VFR en route operations for propeller-driven aircraft. Paragraph B052 is for certain VFR operations in remote areas. If operating under those paragraphs, certain en route VFR provisions in part 93, SFAR 50-2, or SFAR 71, the flightcrew may depart VFR under the provision of C077d, except the requirement to obtain an IFR clearance en route does not apply.

G. Terminal Departure IFR Requirements in Subparagraph e. It is acceptable if ATC clears the flight to execute a VMC takeoff and climb to a specified point in the clearance as part of an IFR clearance. However, the operator must ensure that the obstacle performance requirements are met. Further, the flight must not depart on a VFR flight plan if the capability to go on an IFR flight plan is evident.

H. Subparagraph f provides special limitations and provisions for all VFR operations. This subparagraph is applicable to all the provisions and limitations of C077.

1) Subparagraph f(1). In order for the certificate holder or operator to conduct VFR operations under C077, they must have in place either a procedure or program which can identify obstacles and the airport obstacle data. Further, they must ensure use of that information by the flightcrew.

2) Subparagraph f(2). Although each subparagraph has specific details and minima regarding VFR, the requirements for sufficient seeing conditions to identify and avoid obstacles is required for all VFR operations.

I. For Alaska Operations. A nonstandard subparagraph (C077g) for certain intrastate Alaskan operations was added. The operator may operate under that nonstandard paragraph provided they qualify under the following requirements. If the operator does not qualify, they will not be issued subparagraph g.

1) In view of Public Law 104-264, section 1205, and in accordance with § 121.657(a), a deviation was granted from the minima set forth in § 121.657(b).

2) That deviation applied only to part 119 certificate holders that “transitioned” from operations under part 135 to part 121 by March 20, 1997, and only for those operations

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



conducted SOLELY within the state of Alaska (intrastate). Operations specification paragraph C077, subparagraph g, describes the provisions for that deviation, and is controlling.

3) If a “transitioned” certificate holder applied the above deviation to its operations, paragraph A005 “Exemptions and Deviations” of its OpSpec must reference that deviation for authorization.

OPSPEC C078/C079, IFR LOWER THAN STANDARD TAKEOFF MINIMA, 14 CFR PART 121 AIRPLANE OPERATIONS – ALL AIRPORTS.

A. C078 and C079 are optional for authorizing lower than standard takeoff minima. The authority for lower than standard takeoff minima is contained in part 91K, § 91.1039(e); part 121, § 121.651(a)(1); part 135, § 135.225(g) and (h); and part 125, § 125.381(a)(1). When appropriate, POIs will issue OpSpec paragraph C078 to part 121 or part 125 operators, LOA paragraph C078 to part 125M operators, OpSpec paragraph C079 to part 135 operators, and MSpec C079 to part 91K operators. These authorizations contain specific criteria regarding pilots, training and qualifications, aircraft, and airports when lower than standard takeoff minima are used.

NOTE: C078 and C079 are applicable to all airports utilized by the operator.

NOTE: There may be additional limitations and guidance for specific airplanes in FSB reports, which are binding upon all part 135 and 121 operators.

NOTE: For the purpose of this OpSpec/MSpec/LOA, the word “sensor” is used to indicate all approved RVR systems.

B. C078 allows for lower than standard takeoff minima for operators conducting operations under parts 121 or 125 (including holders of LODA operating under part 125) with the following limitations and provisions:

1) Takeoff operations without runway CL lighting are not allowed at less than RVR 1000 (300m),

2) Takeoff operations using only visual references are not allowed at less than RVR 500 (150m),

3) Takeoff operations with visibility down to, but not lower than, RVR 300 (75m) using approved HUD takeoff guidance systems,

4) Authorization for pilot assessment of TDZ RVR for takeoff when the installed RVR sensor is inoperative (see subparagraph H below), and

5) Lower than standard takeoff minima include paragraphs addressing takeoffs down to RVR 1600 (500m), RVR 1200 (350m), RVR 1000 (300m), RVR 600 (175m), and RVR 500 (150m).

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



C. C079 allows for lower than standard takeoff minima for operators conducting operations under 14 CFR parts 135 and 91 subpart K with the following limitations and provisions:

1) Lower than standard takeoff minima down to RVR 1600 (500m), RVR 1200 (350m), RVR 1000 (300m), or RVR 500 (150m) for part 135 domestic operations. Part 135, § 135.225(f) restricts part 135 domestic operators to one mile visibility for takeoffs at foreign or military airports.

2) Lower than standard takeoff minima down to RVR 1600 (500m), RVR 1200 (350m), RVR 1000 (300m), or RVR 600 (175m) for part 91K operations at all airports.

3) Each aircraft must be operated with a flightcrew consisting of at least two pilots. Use of an AP in lieu of a required SIC is not authorized.

4) There are some circumstances in which an operations inspector for a part 121 or 135 carrier may consider issuing this OpSpec for airplanes certificated under CAR 3 or part 23. Those airplanes have to meet the part 25 avionics equipment requirements necessary to hold C079 authorization. The following statement becomes binding on such aircraft, and must be added using the remarks paragraph selection for C079 to be issued:

a) Each pilot station must have operational equipment which displays a reliable indication of the following:

1. Aircraft pitch and bank information (attitude) (from a gyroscopic or attitude heading reference system source);

2. Aircraft heading (from a gyroscopic or magnetic direction indicating source);

3. Vertical speed;

4. Airspeed; and

5. Altitude.

b) Each pilot station must have an independent source of power for the equipment required by subparagraph C4)a)1., aircraft pitch and bank (attitude), and C4)a)2., aircraft heading (above).

5) Each PIC must have at least 100 hours flight time as PIC in the specific make and model airplane used under this authorization. Each PIC must have satisfactorily completed the operator’s approved training program (as applicable) and qualification check for the minima approved by this authorization. This includes the methods to be used to ensure compliance with the aircraft performance limitations during takeoffs with RVR less than RVR 1000 (300m), when applicable.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



6) Any part 135 or part 91K SIC authorized to manipulate the flight controls during lower than standard takeoff minima must have at least 100 hours flight time as a pilot in the specific make and model airplane, and must have satisfactorily completed the operator’s approved training program and qualifications check for those minima, when applicable.

7) For takeoffs when the RVR is less than RVR 1000 (300m), each airplane used must be operated at a takeoff weight which permits the airplane to achieve the performance equivalent to the takeoff performance specified in part 135, § 135.367 (for reciprocating powered airplanes), § 135.379 (for turbine powered airplanes), or § 135.398 (for commuter category airplanes).

D. C078 or C079 provide for the authorization of lower than standard take off minima using HUD systems with certain limitations and provisions. Although RVR 500 (150m) is the lowest authorized minima when the takeoff is based upon outside visual references (with the exception of operations conducted under part 91K and operations to foreign or military airports conducted under part 135), RVR 300 (75m) is the lowest authorized minima when using a HUD system on a runway that has been determined to be served by a Localizer (LOC) providing CAT III rollout guidance as indicated by a III/E/4 facility classification. As the HUD systems uses the LOC signal for steering commands, the LOC needs to be III/E/4 certified (III = CAT III, E = accurate to at least 2,000 feet from the departure end of the runway, and 4 = 4,000 hours mean time between failures for the LOC signal). A listing of runways with III/E/4 LOC classifications is available on the AFS-410 Web site at: http://www.faa.gov/about/office_org/headquarters_offices/avs/offices/afs/afs400/afs410/.

E. C078 or C079 authorize lower than standard takeoff minima of TDZ RVR 1600 (500m). If TDZ RVR is inoperative, mid-point RVR may substitute for TDZ RVR. Below RVR 1600, two operating RVR sensors are required and controlling. If more than two RVR sensors are installed, all operating RVR sensors are controlling, with the exception of a fourth, far-end RVR sensor which may be installed on extremely long runways. A far-end RVR sensor is advisory only. C078 or C079 allow the selection of the following lower than standard takeoff minima based on flightcrew training, checking, and allowed authorizations:

1) TDZ RVR 1200 (350M), mid-point (if installed) RVR 1200 (350m), and rollout RVR 1000 (300m); or

2) TDZ, mid-point (if installed), and rollout RVR 1000 (300m); or

3) TDZ, mid-point (if installed), and rollout RVR 600 (175m) (part 91K); or

4) TDZ, mid-point (if installed), and rollout RVR 500 (150m) (parts 121, 125 or 135). Part 91K program managers are limited by regulation to RVR 600 (175m) takeoff authorization without an exemption. The RVR 500 (150m) and RVR 300 (75m) authorization will not be available in the part 91K MSpec C079. Tables 3-25 and 3-26 below provide examples of tables that may be included in flightcrew manuals such as the Flight Operations Manual (FOM).

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



Table 3-25A, Runway Equipment Requirements for Lower Than Standard Takeoff Minima

Serviceable Runway Visual Aid Required

Lowest Allowable Takeoff Minimum Authorization

If an RVR sensor is not available:

Adequate visual reference, OR any ONE of the following: HIRL/CLL/RCLM

¼ sm (400m)

If an RVR sensor is available: Note: Below RVR 1600, two operating RVR sensors are required. All operating RVR sensors are controlling (except per the note below for Far End sensors).

Adequate visual reference, OR any ONE of the following: HIRL/CLL/RCLM

RVR 1600 ft. (500m)/NR/NR Mid-point can substitute for an unavailable touchdown

Day: CLL or RCLM or HIRL Night: CLL or HIRL

RVR 1200 ft. (350m)/1200 ft. (350m)/1000 ft. (300m)

RCLM and HIRL, or CLL RVR 1000 ft./1000 ft./1000 ft. (300m) HIRL and CLL RVR 600 ft./600 ft./600 ft. (175m) or

RVR 500 ft./500 ft./500 ft. (150m) With an approved HUD takeoff guidance system, HIRL, and CLL

RVR 300 ft./300 ft./300 ft. (75m)

NOTE: Extremely long runways (e.g., DEN 16R) utilize four RVR sensors (i.e., TDZ, mid, rollout, and far-end). When a fourth far-end RVR value is reported, it is not controlling and is not to be used as one of the two required operative RVR sensors.

Table 3-26A, Runway Equipment Requirements for Lower Than Standard Takeoff Minima

Runways with 1 RVR Sensor RCLM or CLL

or HIRL or Adequate Visual

Reference

Standard

3&4 Eng 1&2 Eng TDZ RVR 16

or 1/4 RVR 24 or 1/2

RVR 50 or 1

Runways with 2 RVR Sensors

Both RVR sensors are required and controlling. F. H

UD & CLL & HIRL

CLL & HIRL CLL, or RCLM & HIRL

RCLM (day only) or CLL or HIRL

RCLM or CLL or HIRL or

Adequate Visual Reference

Standard

TDZ RVR 3 TDZ RVR 5 TDZ RVR 10 TDZ RVR 12 TDZ RVR 16 3&4 Eng 1&2 Eng

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



Rollout RVR 3 Rollout RVR 5 Rollout RVR 10 Rollout RVR 10 or 1/4 RVR 24 or 1/2

RVR 50 or 1


Two operating RVR sensors are required. All operating RVR sensors are controlling.

G. HUD & CLL & HIRL





Standard

3&4 Eng 1&2 Eng TDZ RVR 3 Mid RVR 3

Rollout RVR 3

TDZ RVR 5 Mid RVR 5

Rollout RVR 5

TDZ RVR 10 Mid RVR 10

Rollout RVR 10


Rollout RVR 10

TDZ RVR 16 (if TDZ inop) Mid RVR 16

or 1/4

RVR 24 or 1/2

RVR 50 or 1


Two RVR sensors below must be operational. All operating RVR sensors are controlling except Far End which is advisory only.

H. HUD & CLL & HIRL





Standard

3&4 Eng 1&2 Eng TDZ RVR 3 Mid RVR 3

Rollout RVR 3

TDZ RVR 5 Mid RVR 5

Rollout RVR 5


Rollout RVR 10


Rollout RVR 10

TDZ RVR 16 (if TDZ inop) Mid RVR 16

or 1/4 RVR 24 or 1/2

RVR 50 or 1

I. RVR Applicability to Lower Than Standard Takeoff Minima.

1) Other than the authorization for RVR 1600 (500m), which permits use of RVV or “visibility values” under the appropriate authorization for an operator issued C078 or C079, all the authorizations in C078 and C079 are based on RVR reports that are generated by RVR sensors.

a) “Controlling” RVR means that RVR reports are used to determine operating minima whenever operating minima are specified in terms of RVR, and RVR reports are available for the runway being used.

b) All CAT I operating minima below 1/2 statute mile (RVR 2400) and all CAT II and III operating minima are based on RVR. The use of visibility is prohibited because the reported visibility may not represent the “seeing-conditions” on the runway.” (See Order 8900.1, Volume 4, Chapter 2, Section 3, Factors Affecting All Weather Terminal Area Operations, paragraphs 4-208 and 4-213.)

c) All takeoff minima below ¼ statue mile visibility require RVR values, and the use of visibility values for takeoff clearances is prohibited. In these situations RVR is said to be “controlling;” that is, RVR must be operating and reporting (by requirement High Intensity Runway Lights (HIRL) also must be working), and at a value equal to or greater than the lowest authorized RVR for the particular clearance. Takeoffs or approaches and landings in these conditions require actual RVR values to be authorized by the controlling agency.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



NOTE: The diagram above is intended as a memory aid intended to help in remembering the various RVR breakdowns, and associated requirements within each grouping. For example, 2 RVR sensors are required for all takeoffs at RVR values less than 1600 (500m) (shown above the runway).

2) The following requirements and restrictions apply to the use of RVR values below 1600 feet (500m). (In the C078 and C079 templates simplified wording is used):

a) Where only two RVR sensors are installed, the TDZ and rollout RVR sensors are both required and controlling.

b) Where three RVR sensors are installed on the runway to be used:

1. The TDZ, mid and rollout RVR reports are controlling for all operations.

2. The failure of any one RVR will not affect operations provided the remaining two RVR sensors are reporting values at or above the appropriate minima in this subparagraph.

NOTE: Extremely long runways (e.g., DEN 16R) utilize four RVR sensors (e.g., TDZ, mid, rollout, and far-end). When a fourth far-end RVR value is reported, it is not controlling and is not to be used as one of the two required operative RVR systems.

J. Flightcrew Training and Qualification Requirements. If an operator requests authorization to conduct lower than standard takeoffs, the flightcrew must be trained and qualified in their respective crew positions for the applicable takeoff minima requested. The PIC is ultimately responsible for ensuring that the flightcrew members are appropriately qualified before conducting an authorized lower than standard takeoff.

C078 Lower Than Standard Takeoff Visibility Quick Reference Chart

1600 (500)

1200 300

NOT Authorized

HIRL and CL and HUD

Note: High Intensity Runway Lights (HIRL) are always available when RVR is available

HIRL and CL

HIRL and RCLM, Or CL

RCLM day only or CL day or night or HIRL day or night

HIRL or CL or RCLM or Adeq Vis Ref

(75m) (150m) (300m) 350m)

RVR (2) minimum

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



1) Individual pilots must be trained in their respective crew positions (parts 91 subpart K, 121, and 135) and checked (parts 91 subpart K, 121, 125, and 135) in takeoffs using the appropriate requested minima, before being approved for conducting such takeoffs.

2) Pilot qualification must consist of an initial check that includes one takeoff at the lowest requested takeoff minima. It is also required during each pilot’s recurrent qualification cycle. This qualification must be completed in a flight simulator capable of replicating the applicable takeoff visibility, and the simulator must be set at the applicable takeoff visibility, or lower, during such takeoffs.

3) Additional crew qualification for a check airman or a qualified FAA inspector, beyond that shown herein for regular flightcrews, is not required.

4) POIs shall ensure that operators requesting lower than standard takeoff minima provide appropriate training for flightcrews, including the procedures listed below, as appropriate:

• Confirming the takeoff runway alignment (Safety Alert for Operators (SAFO) 07003 includes guidance and/or advisory information about acceptable techniques);

• Rejected takeoffs in a low visibility environment; • Low visibility instrument takeoff cross check priorities; • Engine failure during critical phases of takeoff in low visibility; • Acceleration and climb disorientation factors and illusions; • Use of HUD takeoff guidance systems (when installed in aircraft for RVR 300

authorization only); • Taxiing in a low visibility environment with emphasis on preventing runway

incursion and SMGCS training AC 120-57A, Surface Movement Guidance and Control System, includes guidance and/or advisory information about acceptable techniques);

• Taxiway critical areas; • Crew coordination and planning; • Required ground-based visual aids (such as stop bars and taxi holding position

lights); • Required ground-based electronic aids (such as ILS/MLS and

transmissometers); and • Determination of takeoff alternate airports.

K. Pilot Assessment of IFR Lower than Standard Takeoff Minima. C078 and C079 allows pilots to make an assessment of the touchdown RVR when the TDZ RVR sensor is inoperative, is not reported, or the pilot determines that reported TDZ RVR report is in error. This assessment, when equal to or greater than the TDZ RVR requirement for takeoffs made with only outside visual references, or for takeoffs using HUD systems, can be used for takeoff when mid and rollout RVR sensors are available, and are equal to or greater than the required minima. To be authorized for this pilot assessment, each operator must meet the following requirements:

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



1) For each specific runway for which the assessment is allowed, have an FAA-approved procedure for assessing RVR values that includes:

a) Identification of actual distances between runway lights (from 160 feet to 200 feet) on the particular runway for the takeoff in question.

b) Identification of an appropriate number and type of runway lights that matches the particular RVR minima or required visual distance for the takeoff being made.

c) Identification of runway markings of known spacing with corresponding distances that must be visible to the pilot from the flight deck when the aircraft is in the takeoff position.

2) This procedure must include the effects of variability of runway light intensity settings and changing ambient lighting (day or night). Flightcrew training and checking must assess knowledge of this specific subject area by requiring crews to relate runway markings and number of lights visible to specific known distances.

3) For each type of runway where an assessment is allowed, have an FAA-approved procedure for describing the actions to be taken when local visibility conditions, as determined by the pilot, indicate that a significantly different visibility exists from that reported for the TDZ recorded by RVR sensor. The procedure will address types of runway markings, runway lights and distances between lights, and any other runway environmental cues that permit precise distance evaluations by flightcrews.

4) For each runway where an assessment is allowed, have an FAA-approved procedure for coordinating release with ATC and dispatch for part 121 operations.

5) For part 135 air carriers, the operator must have an FAA-approved procedure for conducting pilot assessment of Takeoff Visibility contained in their manual as defined by § 135.21. That procedure will cover the following requirements:

a) How to determine actual visibility measured in number and type of runway lights that are seen, or markings of known spacing that are visible to the pilot when viewed from the cockpit in the takeoff position.

b) How all flight crewmembers will be trained and checked in the procedures used to determine visibilities, as described above.

6) Have FAA-approved procedures for RVR assessment, for determining that TDZ RVR sensor reports are in error, and for takeoff and flight release coordination in operating manuals and in such materials that are readily available to the flightcrew in the cockpit.

7) Have an FAA-approved training and validation program of the FAA-approved procedures for all flightcrews authorized to participate. Validation of the procedures will be accomplished in an FAA-qualified and approved flight simulator. No flightcrew member may participate in these operations until this portion of the approved training program is accomplished satisfactorily.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



OPSPEC C080, TERMINAL AREA IFR OPERATIONS IN CLASS G AIRSPACE AND AT AIRPORTS WITHOUT AN OPERATING CONTROL TOWER FOR SCHEDULED PASSENGER OPERATIONS. C080 is used to authorize terminal area IFR operations for scheduled passenger operations in Class G airspace or at airports without an operating control tower.

A. Before authorizing scheduled terminal area IFR operations in Class G airspace or at airports without an operating control tower, the POI must obtain and list the following information in C080.

1) Names of airports.

2) Sources of weather information to be used by flightcrews (see Volume 3, Chapter 26, Section 3, and Volume 3, Chapter 2).

3) Source of traffic and airport advisories.

B. Sources of Traffic and Airport Advisories. Certificate holders may be authorized to use any two-way radio source of air traffic advisory information listed in the AIM (for operations in U.S. airspace) or equivalent AIP (for foreign operations).

1) These sources include common traffic advisory frequencies, UNICOM, MULTICOM, and flight service stations.

2) If an air traffic advisory source is also suitable for determining the status of airport services and facilities, it is the only source which needs to be listed in C080.

3) When airport services and facilities information is on a different frequency, both sources should be listed in C080.

4) In those cases where two sources are listed at the same airport, inspectors must ensure the operator’s manuals have procedures which require pilots to continuously monitor and use the traffic advisory frequency when operating within 10 NM of the airport. The procedures should require communication concerning airport services and facilities to be completed while more than 10 NM from the airport.

5) At some airports, no public use frequencies may be available. In those cases, a certificate holder must arrange for radio communication of essential information including surveillance of local or transient aircraft operations by ground personnel. Ground personnel, who operate a company radio for airport status and traffic advisory, must be able to view airspace around the airport.

6) OpSpec C080 may need to be issued to the certificate holder authorized scheduled passenger operations in order for the C081, Special Non 14 CFR Part 97 Instrument Approach or Departure Procedures, to be issued.

C. C080 is not applicable for part 125 operators.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



OPSPEC/MSPEC C081, SPECIAL NON 14 CFR PART 97 INSTRUMENT APPROACH OR DEPARTURE PROCEDURES. C081 authorizes special non part 97 instrument approach or departure procedures and is applicable to parts 121, 125/135, 125, and 135 certificate holders.

A. C081 may require the authorization of OpSpec C064 and/or C080, as applicable.

B. Special Terminal Instrument Approach or Departure Procedures. (See Volume 4, Chapter 2, Section 10, Authorization and Use of Special Instrument Procedures, or contact your regional flight procedures branch for more information.)

C. For helicopter authorization, see OpSpec H122.

OPSPEC/MPEC/LOA C358, SPECIAL RESTRICTIONS FOR FOREIGN RNAV TERMINAL INSTRUMENT PROCEDURES WITH RNP LINES OF MINIMUMS.

NOTE: To obtain the nonstandard authorization C358, the operator is required to use the nonstandard request process. See Volume 3, Chapter 18, Section 2, paragraphs 3-712 to 3-713, for the nonstandard request process. For operators conducting operations under parts 121 or 135, the formal request must be requested through AFS-200. For operators conducting operations under part 125, including part 125 LODA holders, or under part 91K, the same nonstandard request process must be used and submitted through the General Aviation Division, AFS-800. The airplane qualification package should be sent simultaneously to AFS-400 for evaluation. AFS-400 will coordinate with the appropriate policy division for final approval of this nonstandard authorization for all operator requests.

A. Nonstandard Authorization. The nonstandard template C358 authorizes a qualified operator to conduct certain “RNP-like” foreign RNAV terminal instrument procedures with required navigation procedures (RNP) lines of minimums. These “RNP-like” foreign RNAV approaches are not designed to the same criteria as U.S. part 97 RNAV RNP special aircraft and aircrew required (SAAAR) procedures. Only the selectable procedures in Table 1 of the C358 template may be authorized. ICAO uses the term Authorization Required (AR) rather than SAAAR. AR may appear on “RNP-like” foreign RNAV procedures with RNP lines of minimums regardless of the design criteria.

NOTE: “RNP-like” foreign RNAV procedures with RNP minimums that meet part 97 RNAV RNP SAAAR procedure design criteria are not available for selection in the C358 template, Table 1, and require authorization via the authorization of template C384.

1) C358 authorization is granted through the nonstandard authorization request process (see Volume 3, Chapter 18, Section 2, Operations Specifications: Automated Operations Safety System (OPSS)).

2) C358 authorization is applicable to operators conducting operations under parts 91, 91K, 121, 125 (including those with a LODA 125M), and 135.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



3) Procedures with RNP lines of minimums. These “RNP-like” foreign RNAV procedures have RNP lines of minimums of 0.3 or less, and/or a radius to a fix (RF) leg required, and/or the missed approach requiring an RNP less than 1.0. RNP less than 0.3 specified in the line of minimums (RNP line of minimums refers to the minimum altitude for the approach and has an RNP requirement associated with it, e.g., there may be minimums of 250 ft for RNP 0.11 and a separate line of minimum of 350 ft. for RNP 0.20).

4) U.S. RNAV RNP SAAAR procedures are authorized (nonstandard template C384) using the guidance in AC 90-101, Approval Guidance for RNP Procedures With SAAAR. The foreign “RNP-like” RNAV procedures in Table 1 are authorized using the portions of AC 90-101 that apply to the particular RNP procedure design criteria for each approach.

Figure 3-66A, Sample Table 1—Special Restrictions for “RNP-like” Foreign RNAV Terminal Instrument Procedures with RNP Lines of Minimums

(Only those procedures allowed for authorization will be available as selectables in the C358 template.)

AIRPORT PROCEDURE IDENTIFICATION

PROCEDURE REQUIREMENTS

QUITO, Ecuador (SEQU-UIO) / RNAV (RNP) Rwy 17 / VNAV path required, RF leg required, RNP 0.15, Missed approach RNP < 1.0

QUITO, Ecuador (SEQU-UIO) / RNAV (RNP) Rwy 35 / VNAV path required, RF leg required, RNP 0.15, Missed approach RNP < 1.0

B. Airplane Qualification. The airplane qualification must meet the guidelines established in AC 90-101, appendix 2, with the following exceptions:

1) POIs should send the formal nonstandard request to the appropriate headquarters division stating that the airplane qualification and operating procedures have been sent to AFS-400 for evaluation. POIs should simultaneously submit the airplane qualification and operating procedures package to AFS-400 as described in the AC 90-101, appendix 7 checklist.

2) The vertical accuracy requirement as written in AC 90-101, appendix 2, paragraph 2c is not required for this authorization. Vertical guidance in these foreign “RNP-like” procedure(s) is based on baro-VNAV. Eligible aircraft are those with an AFM or AFMS that explicitly states that the VNAV system is approved for approach operations in accordance with AC 20-129, Airworthiness Approval of Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Systems for use in the U.S. NAS and Alaska, or those with written documentation (e.g., FSB report or other official documentation) verifying eligibility.

3) Airspace Containment (AC 90-101, appendix 2, paragraph 2d). The airspace containment requirement as written in AC 90-101 is not required for this authorization. Airplanes that are qualified to conduct RNAV operations in accordance with applicable directives and have the proper RNAV capability (e.g., global positioning system (GPS), RF leg capability) for the procedure(s) listed may be authorized.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



C. Operating Considerations. The operator must establish operating procedures that meet the applicable guidelines of AC 90-101, appendix 4. Operating procedures must incorporate all operational mitigations based on equipment authorization. For example, if RF leg is authorized, an operational mitigation is required if the equipment engages in “track hold” mode when a go-around is selected. (Track Hold would not follow the Lateral Navigation (LNAV) path when a go-around is initiated in or shortly after an RF leg.) Submit the operating procedures package to AFS-400 as described in the AC 90-101 checklist in appendix 7. The operating procedures must meet the guidelines established in AC 90-101, appendix 4, with the following exceptions.

1) Vertical track deviation monitoring limit of 75 feet (AC 90-101, appendix 4, paragraph 3g.). The track deviation monitoring limit of 75 feet vertically as written in AC 90-101 is not required for this authorization. Eligible airplanes, in accordance with baro-VNAV requirements, must be equipped with and operationally using either a flight director or autopilot capable of following the vertical path.

2) Verification of the most current airport altimeter is set prior to the final approach fix (FAF) but no earlier than the initial approach fix (IAF) (AC 90-101, appendix 4, paragraph 3k). The altimeter setting requirement as written in AC 90-101 is not required for this authorization. Although the listed procedure(s) require(s) the current altimeter setting for the airport of intended landing, the flightcrew is not required to verify the setting between the IAF and the FAF. Normal flight deck procedures must meet this requirement.

D. Training. The flightcrew must complete the operator’s approved RNP instrument approach procedure training program for these procedures and qualify for RNP instrument approach operations by one of the operator’s check airmen/check pilot, as applicable, or by an FAA inspector. The guidance of AC 90-101, appendix 5, must be addressed in the training program.

1) For operators authorized RNP SAAAR instrument approaches for the aircraft equipment listed in Table 2 of the C358 authorization, only the specific differences from RNP SAAAR procedures that apply to the “RNP-like” foreign RNAV instrument procedures listed in Table 1 of the C358 authorization, must be trained.

2) Flightcrew members of operators that are not authorized for RNP SAAAR for the aircraft equipment listed in Table 2 of the C358 authorization, the applicable subjects of AC 90-101, appendix 5 must be trained:

a) Guidance of AC 90-101, appendix 5, must be followed except where a task analysis has shown that the crew knowledge and skills for RNP SAAAR do not apply to the “RNP-like” foreign RNAV instrument procedure(s) authorized in Table 1.

b) Unique RNP approach criteria that apply to the “RNP-like” foreign RNAV instrument procedure(s) authorized in Table 1.

E. The airplane(s) and navigation systems approved for “RNP-like” foreign RNAV terminal instrument procedures with RNP lines of minimums must be listed in Table 2 of the C358 authorization as follows:

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



1) The approved navigation systems and the specific software version must be listed.

2) The table must identify the authorized use of a coupled autopilot or a flight director which is provided as a selectable in the OPSS in processing the authorization.

3) The lowest RNP authorized must be listed.

Figure 3-66B, Sample Table 2—Airplanes and Navigation Systems Eligible for “RNP-like” Foreign RNAV Terminal Instrument Procedures with RNP Lines of Minimums

AIRPLANE M/M/S

NAVIGATION SYSTEM M/M/ SOFTWARE VERSION

LIMITATIONS AND RESTRICTIONS

AUTOPILOT COUPLED OR FLIGHT DIRECTOR REQUIRED

LOWEST RNP

B-737-490 Smiths FMCS/FMC 2907A4 or 2907C1 with U10.5A

Not authorized to exceed temperature limits of the approach Not authorized RNP parallel approach operations (RPA) Not authorized RNP parallel approach runway transitions (RPAT)

Either FD or AP Autopilot only

RNP-0.15 RNP-0.11

F. Execution of an “RNP-like” foreign RNAV instrument procedure requires the current, local altimeter setting for the airport of intended landing. Remote altimeter settings are not allowed.

G. VNAV Path Requirements. An airplane(s) with an airworthiness approval for baro-VNAV approach operations in accordance with AC 20-129 must be equipped with and operationally use either a flight director or autopilot capable of following the vertical path.

H. Unlike RNP SAAAR C384 authorization, there is no interim approval required for this nonstandard authorization in C358. The operator must submit the following information on a continuous basis every 30 days to the POI for his/her evaluation of the continuing use of the authorization (AC 90-101, appendix 6, paragraph 1):

1) Total number of the “RNP-like” foreign RNAV approach procedures conducted;

2) Number of satisfactory approaches by aircraft/system (satisfactory if completed as planned without any navigation or guidance system anomalies); and

3) Unsatisfactory approaches must be included in the report and must include, but are not limited to, the following:

a) UNABLE REQ NAV PERF, NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD, or other RNP messages during any approach;

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



b) Excessive lateral or vertical deviation;

c) Terrain Awareness and Warning System warning;

d) Autopilot system disconnect;

e) Navigation data errors; and

Pilot report of any anomaly.

OPSPEC/MSPEC C359, SPECIAL AUTHORIZATION FOR CERTAIN CATEGORY II OPERATIONS AT SPECIFICALLY APPROVED FACILITIES. OpSpec/MSpec C359 is a special authorization for CAT II operations to approved ILS runways which do not have TDZ and CL or CAT II approach lighting systems with sequenced flashing lights (Approach Lighting System with Sequenced Flashing Lights (ALSF)-1 & 2). (For special authorization for lower-than-standard CAT I operations to RVR 1800, see OpSpec/MSpec C074.)

A. These special authorization CAT II operations at specifically approved facilities with a single RVR reporting system are limited to a DH of 100 feet and no lower than RVR 1600. An approved runway facility with two RVR reporting systems will be limited to DH of 100 feet and no lower than RVR 1200.

B. These special authorization CAT II approaches labeled as “Special Aircrew and Aircraft Certification Required” cannot be authorized except in accordance with the limitations and provisions of this OpSpec/MSpec and the following:

1) Conducted only when using an autoland system or a HGS to touchdown.

2) Only aircraft certified for autoland or HGS to touchdown capability are eligible for these operations. Those aircraft and equipment must be listed in Table 3-18 of OpSpec/MSpec C059.

3) Should the autoland system or HGS malfunction or be disengaged during the approach, the PIC must execute a missed approach not later than arrival at DH.

4) Pilots must be trained in the use of the autoland system or HGS, as applicable, and demonstrate proficiency in ILS approaches to minima using this equipment on checks conducted to satisfy part 91, § 91.1069, part 121, § 121.441, or part 135, § 135.297, as applicable.

5) The certificate holder/program manager must be authorized for CAT II operations and issued OpSpec/MSpec C059.

C. Authorized Airports and Runways.

1) The approved airports and runways required to be listed in OpSpec/MSpec C359 are those specific facilities that have been approved for these special authorization CAT II operations in accordance with the procedures and requirements in Order 8400.13, current edition.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



Once a facility has been approved and charted in accordance with part 97, it can be listed on OpSpec/MSpec C359.

2) These special authorization CAT II operations can also be conducted at runways approved for CAT II and CAT III operations under either OpSpec/MSpec C059 or C060 and need not be listed in OpSpec/MSpec C359.

3) When lighting components, i.e., TDZ and runway centerline lights, that are normally required for CAT II or CAT III operations become inoperative, the operations authorized under OpSpec/MSpec C359 may be conducted without having listed those airports and runways in OpSpec/MSpec C359, provided all the requirements of OpSpec/MSpec C359 are met.


04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0




CHAPTER 25 OPERATIONAL CONTROL FOR CARRIERS

Section 1 General Topics

3-1921 BACKGROUND AND DEFINITIONS. This section contains background information, definitions of terms, and direction and guidance to be used by principal operations inspectors (POI) concerning operational control. POIs should be thoroughly familiar with this information before reviewing an operator’s General Operations Manual’s (GOM) operational control section, which with respect to a flight means the exercise of authority over initiating, conducting or terminating a flight. The operator’s operational control system should include all of the elements of operational control and those would include e.g., crewmember and aircraft requirements, lease agreements, and management personnel and persons authorized to exercise operational control etc. POIs should be thoroughly familiar with this material when preparing those portions of an operator’s operations specifications (OpSpecs) that relate to operational control (OpsSpec A008).

A. Chapter Contents. Section 1 of this chapter contains general information on topics pertinent to the operational control of all air transport operations under Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) parts 121 and 135. Section 2 contains information and guidance specifically related to part 121 dispatch systems and domestic operating rules. Section 3 contains information specifically related to part 121 flight release systems and supplemental operating rules. Section 4 contains information specifically related to part 121 flag operations, supplemental operations conducted outside the contiguous states, and extended overwater operations. Section 5 contains information specific to part 135 flight locating requirements, § 135.179 and operational rules.

B. Regulatory Requirements. Part 121, §§ 121.531 through 121.537 require that part 121 operators exercise operational control over all common carriage commercial and air transportation flights they conduct. Part 135, § 135.77 contains the same requirements for part 135 operators.

1) Operational Control Functions—General. Operators conduct operational control by making decisions and performing actions on a daily basis that are necessary to operate flights safely and in compliance with the regulations. Operational control functions include crew and aircraft scheduling, accepting charter flights from the public, reviewing weather and Notices to Airmen (NOTAM), and flight planning. Another aspect consists of developing and publishing flight control policies and procedures for flightcrews and other operations personnel to follow in the performance of their duties. Operators are responsible for collecting and disseminating information that is needed to plan and conduct flights safely, including information about en route and terminal weather conditions, navigation, and airport facilities.

2) Operational Control Systems—General. Operational control systems vary with the kind of operation the operator is authorized to conduct, the complexity of the operations, the means of communication, and with the persons who are involved in preparing for and conducting flights under the operator’s system. Parts 121 and 135 contain a unique system of functional

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



responsibility to allow each air carrier to maintain operational control. Each facility contains multiple functions which when consolidated can provide operational control. These various functions form the basis for an operational control system which includes the functions of aircraft dispatch, flight locating and flight following, however those functions alone will not satisfy the overall goal of establishing an operational control system.

3) Operator Oversight Responsibility. The operator’s oversight responsibility includes ensuring that both its flightcrew and operational control employees comply with published policies and procedures and meet the requirements of part 119, § 119.65.

4) Operator’s GOM. Sections 121.133 and 135.21 require that operators prepare and keep current a manual for the guidance of flight, ground, and management personnel in the performance of their duties and responsibilities. The operator’s GOM must identify the person having overall responsibility for operational control and those persons to whom authority to exercise operational control has been delegated. The operator’s GOM must contain guidance on the conditions that must be met before a flight may be initiated or continued, or under which a flight must be diverted or terminated.

NOTE: Single pilot operators, single pilot in command (PIC) operators, or operators granted a deviation to the requirements of part 135 by paragraph A016 of the OpSpecs are not required to prepare and keep a current manual.

C. Specific Operational Control Functions. Operational control includes, but is not limited to, the operator’s performance of the following functions:

• Ensuring that only those operations authorized by the OpSpecs are conducted; • Ensuring that only crewmembers trained and qualified in accordance with the

applicable regulations are assigned to conduct a flight; • Ensuring that crewmembers are in compliance with flight and duty time

limitations and rest requirements prior to departing on a flight; • Designating a PIC and where applicable an second in command (SIC) for each

flight; • Providing the PIC and other personnel who perform operational control functions;

with access to the necessary information for the safe conduct of the flight (such as weather, NOTAMs, and airport analysis);

• Specifying the conditions under which a flight may be dispatched or released (weather minimums, flight planning, airworthiness of aircraft, aircraft loading, and fuel requirements);

• Ensuring that each flight has complied with the authorization specified for release before it is allowed to depart;

• Ensuring that when the authorization specified for a flight’s release cannot be met, the flight is either cancelled, delayed, rerouted, or diverted; and

• Monitoring the progress of each flight and initiating timely actions when the flight cannot be completed as planned, including diverting or terminating a flight.

D. Specific Operational Control Systems. In descending order of precision and complexity, the three general operational control systems are flight dispatch, flight release, and

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



flight locating. The operator must include, in the GOM, policies and procedures appropriate to the system being used.

NOTE: The operator’s system for exercising operational control must be described in paragraph A008 of the operator’s OpSpecs. Most operational control systems are too complex, however, to be adequately described in a single paragraph. In such cases, the operator’s system may be described in the operator’s GOM, and the POI may reference the GOM location of this system description in paragraph A008 of the operator’s OpSpecs.

1) Flight Dispatch Systems. Sections 121.533 and 121.535 require that both flag and domestic operators employ certificated aircraft dispatchers to exercise control of flights. Part 121, § 121.99 requires that flag and domestic operators provide radio communication facilities capable of quickly and reliably contacting a flight at all points while en route.

2) Flight Release Systems. Section 121.537 places the major responsibility for the operational control of supplemental air carriers and commercial operators with the director of operations and the PIC. The director of operations may delegate the functions for initiation, continuation, diversion and termination of a flight to other employees; however, the director of operations always retains full responsibility for these functions. For purposes of this handbook, the employees exercising operational control in a part 121 flight release system are termed flight followers. Inspectors should be aware that operators may apply different job titles to these employees. Except for planned rerelease operations, operators are not required to be able to establish direct radio contact with supplemental flights while they are en route. The flight follower must, however, concur with the PIC that a flight can be conducted safely before the flight may be initiated. This requirement necessitates a suitable means of communication between the flight follower and the PIC at each point of departure.

3) Flight Locating Systems. Part 135, §§ 135.23 and 135.77 require that the name and title of each individual authorized to exercise operational control be listed in the operator’s GOM. A part 135 operator may delegate the authority for a specific flight to the PIC, but always retains full responsibility. If a flight plan is not filed with air traffic control (ATC), the individual exercising operational control must be able to establish the location of the flight to provide timely notification should an aircraft be overdue or missing. The individual exercising operational control is not required to be able to communicate with the aircraft during a flight.

E. Organizational Structure. An operational control function may be centralized in one individual or diversified throughout an operator’s organization. In practice, it is not feasible for an individual to exercise operational control without assistance in any but the simplest of flight operations. Most operators create specialized departments for crew scheduling, load control, and other functions. These functions may or may not be placed under the management of the “flight control” department. When these functions are delegated to specialized sections of the operator’s organization, the operator is responsible for the following:

• Establishing a means to ensure that all functions have been accomplished before a flight is authorized to depart;

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Establishing effective internal communications, operating procedures, and administrative controls to meet this obligation; and

• Ensuring that these procedures are published in the operator’s GOM.

F. Complex Operations. Practical and economic considerations may motivate operators to install operational control systems that are more sophisticated than those required by the applicable regulation. Two operators that conduct operations under the same regulation may require operational control systems of differing degrees of sophistication. For example, a part 135 on demand operator moving hunters to and from remote locations in the bush may find a simple flight locating system to be adequate. A part 135 commuter operator that conducts 100 flights a day to and from major terminal areas may find, however, that a more sophisticated system is necessary to effectively control operations. The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) may require that an operator establish a sophisticated operational control system as a condition of obtaining authorization to conduct specific operations, such as operation of an Enhanced Weather Information System (EWINS).

1) FAA Evaluation. Inspectors must evaluate each operator’s operational control system to ensure that the operator complies with the applicable regulations and that the system is effective and provides for an adequate level of safety in the operations actually being conducted.

2) Inadequate Operational Control. An inspector may find that an operator’s operational control system provides an inadequate level of control to ensure safety. In this case, the inspector should carefully document the facts and report them to the POI through the Program Tracking and Reporting Subsystem (PTRS). The POI shall evaluate the facts and, if required, negotiate an acceptable solution with the operator, ensuring that the changes are incorporated. Should the operator be unwilling to negotiate, the POI may find it necessary to amend the operator’s OpSpecs in accordance with part 121, § 121.79 and part 135, § 135.17.

G. Dispatch services provided by Contractors. Operators may contract for certain equipment, facilities, and services of an aircraft dispatcher that are required by part 121 (for example, § 121.99). Operational control responsibilities must be retained by the appropriate management personnel and anyone in a position to exercise control over operations conducted under the operating certificate as listed in § 119.65.

1) Domestic and Flag Operators. If a domestic or flag operator contracts for the service of an aircraft dispatcher, the operator must maintain control over the duties, functions, and responsibilities of the contract aircraft dispatcher. (See part 121, § 121.1(b) for the applicability of the part 121 rules governing such contract services.) If a certificate holder proposed to contract for the services of an aircraft dispatcher, the POIs must coordinate with their regional Flight Standards divisions (RFSD). RFSDs are requested to thoroughly examine proposed services arrangements and responsibilities and recommend approval of services that are in compliance with the regulations. The FAA does not currently have a means for approving non-certificated entities who are offering to provide aircraft dispatcher services. Part 121 requires domestic and flag operators to exercise operational control. Operational control must be provided by the certificate holder, and that responsibility may not be contracted. In all cases, RFSD’s are requested to forward all requests for review with the Air Transportation Division (AFS-200).

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



2) Part 121 Supplemental Operators and All Part 135 Operators. These operators may contract some functions but not their responsibility to exercise operational control over their operations. The operator is responsible for ensuring that the training and qualification of contract personnel meets any regulatory requirements, that contractor personnel are performing their duties diligently, and that the provisions of the operator’s manual are being complied with by the contractor personnel. The operator must also have an effective means of maintaining responsibility for the actions and/or inactions of contractor personnel when set guidance and policy is not complied with. Operators cannot under any circumstances contract responsibility for operational control (§§ 121.537 and 135.77).

3) OpSpecs Authorization. Any contract arrangements must be clearly and completely defined in the operator’s GOM and authorized by the POI in paragraph A008 of the operator’s OpSpecs.

3-1922 AIRCRAFT DISPATCHERS. An aircraft dispatcher is an airman who holds an aircraft dispatcher certificate. Part 121 flag and domestic operators must employ certificated aircraft dispatchers who are responsible for performing certain specified operational control functions. Part 121 supplemental and part 135 operators are not required to use certificated aircraft dispatchers to exercise control. A part 121 or 135 operator using an EWINS must employ either an aviation meteorologist or a certificated aircraft dispatcher who has been specifically trained to issue flight movement forecasts (FMF) (see Volume 3, Chapter 26, Section 4, Sources of Weather Information).

3-1923 FLIGHT INFORMATION. Operators must supply or ensure that the information necessary to plan, conduct, and control operations is available to operational control and flightcrew personnel. Most of this data can be obtained through subscriptions to a government service or to a commercial aeronautical information and charting service. Operators should be expected to supplement these services if necessary and, in all cases, are responsible for ensuring that the information used is accurate and complete. Operators must also supply other data, such as NOTAMs, track messages, and airport obstruction data, when applicable. The operator’s system to obtain and distribute airport data must be described in paragraph a9 of the OpSpecs. The operator’s system may also be described in a section of the GOM and referenced in paragraph a9 of the operator’s OpSpecs. The operator’s GOM must contain the guidance and procedures by which flightcrew and operational control personnel can acquire and apply this information.

A. Airport and Facilities. The Airport/Facility Directory (A/FD) contains information on airports and facilities that is needed by flight crewmembers and operational control personnel. For example, the information that certain runways are closed to air carrier aircraft may be contained in the “Airport Remarks” section for each airport listed in the A/FD. Inspectors should inform their operators that such information is removed from the NOTAMs system when it is published in the A/FD. This information is obtained from the Aeronautical Information Publications (AIP) of the country for operations outside the United States. Also, inspectors should ensure that operators understand their requirement to make the A/FD information (for those airports at which operations are conducted) available to their personnel.

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



B. NOTAMs. Operators must provide NOTAMs to flightcrews and operational control personnel for domestic and international operations in airspace covered by NOTAM systems. United States (U.S.) NOTAMs are edited into final form and distributed by the U.S. NOTAM Office (USNOF). NOTAMs are disseminated by two methods: electronically through what is termed, Service A, and in printed form through the biweekly publication, Notices to Airmen. In general, NOTAMs originally appear in electronic form and are later incorporated in the biweekly publication. Once incorporated in writing, they are no longer transmitted electronically. NOTAM information is classified into the following three groups: NOTAM (D)s, NOTAM (L)s, and FDC NOTAMs. These groups, subdivisions of these groups, and other information concerning the NOTAM system are described in the following subparagraphs:

NOTE: Refer to FAA Order 7930.2, Notices to Airmen (NOTAM), and to the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) paragraphs 5-3, Notice to Airmen (NOTAM) System, and 7-3, Preflight Briefing, for detailed descriptions of the current NOTAM system.

1) NOTAM (D)s. NOTAM (D), or distant dissemination information, pertains to navigational aids (NAVAID), landing areas, airport runway lighting facilities, and other data that is normally not published, such as parachute jumping areas, restricted areas, and some air shows. NOTAM (D)s are appended to electronically transmitted weather reports, such as the Service A network. NOTAM (D)s are disseminated for all NAVAIDs that are part of the National Airspace System (NAS) as well as all public use airports, seaplane bases, and heliports listed in the A/FD.

a) Center Area NOTAMs (CAN). CANs are issued on airway changes within controlled airspace, and they are transmitted as FDC NOTAM information on Service A.

b) Special Notices. Special notices concern matters having a significant impact on flight safety. They are transmitted only once on Service A, and then are published in the biweekly, Notices to Airmen. An example of the kind of information carried in the Special Notices section is that of available landing distances when land and hold short operations (LAHSO) are in effect.

c) LRN NOTAMs. Loran systems are covered by NOTAMs. While these are technically NOTAM (D)s, they are grouped in a special file entitled Long Range Navigation (LRN) NOTAMs. Omega navigational system outages are also listed in the LRN NOTAM file. These NOTAMs may be obtained from any Flight Service Station (FSS) on request, or by phoning the Naval Observatory at (202) 653-1757.

2) NOTAM (L)s. NOTAM (L), or local information, includes such information as airport and taxiway construction and certain airport lighting. This information is directly relevant to surface movement guidance and control. NOTAM (L)s can also contain information that is expected to be in effect for less than 1 hour concerning NAVAIDs, lighting, and runways. NOTAM (L)s are not normally transmitted beyond the area of coverage for the local FSS or automated flight service station (AFSS).

a) POI Responsibility. POIs must ensure that the operator’s GOM contains specific procedures for the acquisition and dissemination of local NOTAM information to

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



flightcrews and operational control personnel. Operational control personnel must be provided with a positive means to collect, analyze, and disseminate current NOTAM (L) information to flightcrews.

b) Obtaining NOTAM (L) Information. This information may be obtained from the FSS having responsibility for the geographic area in which the destination airport is located. Another acceptable means for operators to acquire this information is to task an authorized agent with collecting this information and reporting it to the operator’s operational control center.

NOTE: FAA inspectors and National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB) accident investigators have reported that a failure of operators to provide NOTAM (L) data to flightcrews has been a contributing factor in several accidents and incidents. For example, a Part 121 operator dispatched a flight of approximately 30 minutes duration to a destination at which the instrument landing system (ILS) was reported by NOTAM (L) to be out of service. This particular flight could not be dispatched in compliance with 14 CFR § 121.613 without an operational ILS.

NOTE: The details of what is included as NOTAM (D) and NOTAM (L) are quite complex (see FAA Order 7930.2 for more specific information).

3) National Flight Data Center (NFDC) NOTAMs. FDC NOTAMs are issued by the USNOF and are regulatory in nature. They are transmitted electronically and are transmitted nationally only once. After national transmission, FDC NOTAMs are normally only maintained in a file by FSSs and AFSSs within 400 nautical miles (NM) of the respective FDC location. FDC NOTAMs are cancelled by a one time notice that is transmitted electronically. FDC NOTAMs include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Interim instrument flight rules (IFR) flight procedures; • Temporary flight restrictions; • Presidential (and other parties) flight restrictions; • Permanent 14 CFR part 139 certified airport condition changes pertaining to

the Aircraft Rescue and Fire Fighting Equipment (ARFF) Index; • Snow conditions affecting glide slope operations; • Air defense emergencies; • Emergency flight rules; and • Substitute airway routes.

NOTE: POIs must ensure that the operator’s GOM contains specific procedures for the acquisition, dissemination and cancellation of FDC NOTAM information to flightcrews and dispatchers. Operators should clearly understand that since FDC NOTAM dissemination is normally limited to within 400 NM of the “tie in” FSS/AFSS, a means must be devised to collect en route, destination, and alternate airport FDC NOTAMs that may impact operations.

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



NOTE: Very low frequency (VLF) stations are not covered by regular NOTAMs service, but the Naval Observatory does provide certain information at (202) 653-1757.

4) Global Positioning System (GPS) NOTAMs. At present the GPS system is not covered by NOTAMs. GPS advisories are available by computer modem to a special bulletin board operated by the GPS Information Center of the Coast Guard. Call (703) 313-5910. A 24-hour voice bulletin board is also available by calling (703) 313-5907. GPS NOTAM requirements and specifications are currently under development.

5) International NOTAMs. The means for transmission of International NOTAMs differs from that used for domestic NOTAMs. International NOTAMs are transmitted electronically to those operators that have arranged to receive them, and they are available, on a request reply basis, for those offices with Aeronautical Fix Telecommunication (AFTN) circuits. For all other operators, they are available upon request by contacting the nearest FSS/AFSS. If the nearest FSS/AFSS is unable to supply the information, inspectors should advise FAA Headquarters by phone at (202) 267-8343. As a last resort, they can contact the USNOF by phone at (202) 267-3390. International NOTAMs are also available from some commercial services.

6) Operations Not Covered by NOTAMs. Operators may need to establish procedures or systems to develop or disseminate flight safety information concerning areas not covered by domestic or international NOTAMs, such as isolated airports or offshore operations.

7) Limitations of FSS NOTAM Briefings. Inspectors and operators alike should be aware that printed NOTAMs contained in the biweekly, Notices to Airmen, are not provided by the FSS specialist unless specifically requested. Also, lengthy and graphically depicted NOTAMs, because of their complexity, are normally not obtainable during a telephone FSS briefing. Notwithstanding the above limitations, POIs must ensure that operators that direct their crews to obtain FSS briefings also make the following information available to flightcrew and operational control personnel: electronically transmitted NOTAMs, local NOTAMs and other flight safety data, such as special notices and information from the Airport Remarks section of the A/FD.

C. Track Messages. Messages containing the coordinates of routes to be followed on flexible track systems such as the North Atlantic organized track structure or the Western Pacific flexible track structure are transmitted approximately every 12 hours. Track messages are sent by FAA ATC centers to various airline dispatch offices. Western Pacific and Northern Pacific Track NOTAMs are also available as international NOTAMs under the location identifiers of the respective air route traffic control center; examples are Oakland Center (KZOA) or Anchorage Center (PAZA). Flightcrews operating over these routes are required to have all current valid track coordinates available in the cockpit to verify flight plan coordinates, should an in flight rerouting become necessary. Inspectors must ensure that an operator’s operational control personnel have this information for flight planning and flight monitoring purposes.

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



D. Aircraft Performance and Airport Obstacle Data. Inspectors must ensure that operators of all types of airplanes comply with the performance requirements of subpart I of part 121 or 135, as applicable, before a flight departs. Operators of transport category and commuter category airplanes must obtain and use airport obstacle data for takeoff performance calculations (see Volume 4, Chapter 3, Airplane Performance and Airport Data). Operators of all categories of aircraft must comply with en route obstacle clearance requirements, including contingency planning for engine failure. Inspectors should refer to 8900.1, Volume 4, Chapter 3 for direction and guidance on aircraft performance requirements.

3-1924 WEATHER INFORMATION FOR CONTROL OF FLIGHT OPERATIONS. Inspectors must ensure that the system the operator uses to obtain and disseminate aeronautical weather data is either described in OpSpec A010 of the operator’s OpSpecs or that the system description, if in the operator’s GOM instead, is referenced in OpSpec A010.

A. Sources of Weather Reports. Weather reports used to control IFR flight operations under either part 121, part 135, or visual flight rules (VFR) part 121 operations must be issued by either the U.S. National Weather Service (NWS), a source approved by the NWS, or (for operations outside the United States) by a source approved by the FAA Administrator. Part 135 VFR operations may be conducted using pilot or other authorized observations when other reports are not available (see Volume 3, Chapter 26, Section 4, for a detailed discussion of approved weather sources).

B. Sources of Forecasts. All weather forecasts must be based on data obtained from a qualified approved source as listed in subparagraph A above. POIs should ensure that operators obtain forecasts from approved sources.

C. Weather Reports and Forecasts for Takeoffs and Landings. Operators must obtain and use a current weather report or forecast before taking off, landing, or beginning an instrument approach. The visibility and ceiling values (when applicable) in the body of the report are controlling for these operations. A reported observation of Runway Visual Range (RVR), Runway Visibility Value (RVV), or Runway Visibility by Observer (RVO) on the runway to be used is controlling (part 121 operations only) when such reports or forecasts are available. For part 135 operations, if the visibility and ceiling are below minimums, the reported RVR may be used if that RVR is at or above the minimums for the instrument procedure being used and authorized for that certificate holder. For definitions of “current weather” and “latest weather report,” see Volume 3, Chapter 26, Section 1, General Background Information, paragraph 3-2050.

D. Weather for Flight Release. Parts 121 and 135 contain a number of rules that require operators to use “appropriate weather reports or forecasts or any combination thereof, (which) indicate the weather conditions at the estimated time of arrival.” The FAA Office of the Chief Council (AGC) has interpreted this language to mean that the critical time period is the estimated time of arrival (ETA). Inspectors must ensure that operators use all available weather reports and forecasts, as applicable, to cover this time period. If these weather reports are accessed via the Public Internet, the operator must use a Qualified Internet Communications Provider (QICP). The FAA public Internet Web site contains the current list of all the QICPs that can be authorized to provide internet communication services for accessing aviation weather and

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



NOTAMs. These QICP are approved only to the extent of their security practices which protect the approved weather data from unauthorized modification.

1) Use of Forecasts for Long Range Operations. Clearly, current weather reports are of less value than forecasts for long range operations. Under the AGCs interpretation, a flight may be released to a destination that is currently below minimums but that is forecast to be above minimums at the ETA. AGC goes on to comment, however, that the use of hourly reports to monitor trends is prudent and may be required to meet the intent of the rule.

2) Release of Flights Based on Forecast Weather Information. Operators may be required to release flights with limited weather information. For example, a transcontinental flight from the east coast to the west coast must depart several hours before the destination airport opens and the first surface observations (SA) of the day are taken. A similar situation occurs when a station SA is missing from the hourly sequence reports. An operator, aircraft dispatcher, or PIC who operates a flight under such conditions would be considered to be in compliance with 14 CFR under the following conditions:

• Those weather reports and forecasts which are available have been obtained and used; and

• Adequate contingency plans have been made to deal with the situation, should later reports be unfavorable.

3) Use of Pilot Reports. The term, “available reports,” includes pilot reports (PIREP).

4) Specific Part 135 Requirements. Part 135, § 135.213(b) requires “weather observations made and furnished to pilots to conduct IFR operations” to be taken at the airport where those operations are conducted, unless the operator has been issued authorization by OpSpecs to use an observation taken at another location. The NTSB has ruled that a part 135 operator may file a flight plan and fly IFR to a radio fix where VFR conditions exist, and then continue under VFR to a destination (where weather reports are not available) when an area forecast shows prevailing weather to be VFR.

NOTE: In these cases, operators must continue to comply with the flight locating requirements of part 135, § 135.79.

E. Conditional Phrases in Weather Forecasts. An AGC opinion has been given concerning conditional phrases contained in the remarks section of a forecast. In AGC’s opinion, these remarks (in addition to the information contained in the main body of the forecast) are controlling for purposes of a flight dispatch or flight release (see Volume 3, Chapter 26, Section 1, paragraph 3-2049).

1) FMF. Under an EWINS, an EWINS qualified meteorologist or aircraft dispatcher may issue an FMF based on a detailed analysis of the specific flight without including conditional phrases. A FMF may be used for operational control purposes (see Volume 3, Chapter 26, Section 1). It is an acceptable practice for an aircraft dispatcher to release a flight to a destination (at which conditional remarks of an NWS forecast indicate the possibility of the

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



destination being below minimums) when the FMF for that specific flight indicates the airport will be at or above minimums.

2) Exemptions from Weather Requirements. Many part 121 operators who conduct domestic operations have obtained exemptions to release flights to destinations at which the forecast remarks contain conditions below minimums. Inspectors and POIs should be aware that these exemptions require those operators to exercise a number of additional precautions. Typical precautions include the designation of a second alternate airport and a requirement that the aircraft dispatcher monitor and advise the flightcrew of conditions while the flight is en route. POIs of operators using these exemptions should ensure that the operator’s GOM contains adequate guidance.

F. Adverse Weather. Part 121, § 121.101 requires flag and domestic operators to have a system for obtaining reports and forecasts of adverse weather for each route and airport used. Part 121, § 121.601 requires that the aircraft dispatcher provide this information to the PIC.

3-1925 FLIGHT PLANNING. Inspectors must ensure that operators conduct preflight planning so that flights are conducted as follows: to the standards of navigational accuracy required in the airspace traversed, to meet regulatory fuel requirements, to satisfy ATC information and reporting requirements, and to ensure that flights are operated safely. The degree of sophistication and accuracy required in flight planning depends on the type of navigation conducted and on the airspace traversed. Operators may assign flight planning duties to either flightcrew or operational control personnel. It is a common and acceptable practice for operators to contract for flight planning from specialized services. The operator, however, is responsible for the accuracy of any information the contractor uses and for the accuracy of the results.

A. Flight Plans. The term “flight plan” means a paper document or a file of electronic data prepared for purposes of flight planning, flight control, and navigation. Flight planning consists of selecting an appropriate aircraft cruise schedule and applying forecast wind, temperature, and aircraft performance data to a planned route to predict estimated time en route (ETE) and estimated fuel consumption. The term “ATC flight plan” is used in this chapter to mean the subset of information extracted from the flight plan, which is filed with ATC to obtain an ATC clearance.

B. Computation and Verification. A flight plan may be computed manually or with computer aids. In either case, inspectors must ensure that the operator’s GOM contains the specified procedures, formats, and forms to be used. POIs shall ensure that operators understand their responsibility for making sure that flightcrew and operational control personnel verify the accuracy of planning. Since even computer generated flight plans are subject to input errors, use of a computer system that contains internal software to check for errors in flight plans is desirable. POIs shall also ensure that the operator’s GOM contains adequate procedures for flightcrew and operational control personnel to scrutinize all computer generated and all manually generated flight plans for accuracy.

C. Part 121 Requirements. Part 121 operators are required by part 121, §§ 121.695(a) and 121.697(a) to carry a flight plan to destination on all flights. Operators typically require that flightcrews record the flight progress on the flight plan or on other documents.

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



NOTE: In international operations, POIs may require such procedures as a condition of authorizing extended overwater navigation. When the flightcrew is required to record the flight progress, the annotated flight plan becomes a record of the flight. After completion of the flight, the flight plan is a record that must be retained by the operator for a period of 30 days (see § 121.697).

D. Part 135 Requirements. Part 135 operators are not specifically required by regulation to carry a flight plan on all flights. POIs of Part 135 operators, however, should ensure that the operator’s GOM contains procedures that accomplish the following:

• Inform the PIC of the required information contained in center stored flight plans that ensure compliance with 14 CFR part 91, § 91.169(a);

• Ensure compliance with part 135, §§135.209 or 135.223 fuel supply requirements;

• Ensure compliance with part 135, §§ 135.181 and 135.211(b)(1), and applicable part 135, subpart I performance requirements;

• Ensure compliance with part 135, §§ 135.211 and 135.217, and § 135.221 alternate requirements; and

• Familiarize PICs with all available information required by part 91, § 91.103.

1) Load Manifests. Part 135, § 135.63(c) requires that a load manifest be kept on board all multiengine aircraft flights. The load manifest must contain the following:

• Number of passengers; • Total weight of the loaded aircraft; • Maximum allowable takeoff weight for that flight; • Center of gravity (CG) limits of the loaded aircraft; • CG or an acceptable entry from an approved schedule; • Flight or registration number; • Origin and destination of flight; and • Identification of all crewmembers and their position assignments.

2) Valid Track Coordinates. Flightcrews must carry the valid track coordinates in the cockpit during flights over flexible track systems.

E. Navigation Methods and Flight Plans. Inspectors should keep in mind that the primary concerns in choosing navigation methods and procedures are the degree of precision required for the separation of air traffic and obstacle avoidance. Class I station reference navigation is VFR or IFR navigation within the standard service volume of International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO), ground based, electronic NAVAIDs. Courses and distances are published on standard IFR charts or may be determined by plotting courses on an IFR or VFR chart. To be acceptable for Class I navigation, a simple flight plan should include at least the following:

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Fix or intersection identifiers, segment distances, ETEs for each segment, and an estimate of fuel consumption for each segment (A segment or zone is the distance between two check points); and

• A summation of distance, time, and fuel to show regulatory compliance.

1) Long Range, Class II Navigation. Long range, Class II navigation is navigation conducted beyond the operational service volume of standard ICAO NAVAIDs. Long range, Class II navigation normally requires specialized long range navigation systems such as Loran, Omega/VLF, inertial navigation systems (INS)/inertial reference systems (IRS), GPS, or Doppler. In some cases, dead reckoning (DR), pilotage, or celestial navigation may be used.

2) Long Range, Class II Flight Plan. An acceptable flight plan for long range, Class II navigation should contain the following elements:

• Waypoints (Fixes for the portion of the route conducted by Class I navigation);

• The waypoint coordinates identifier (located next to the waypoint or on the line below);

• The course leaving the waypoint; • Forecast segment wind, drift, or drift correction; • Forecast temperature (or temperature deviation) and true air speed (TAS); • Segment distances, estimated ground speed, and segment ETE; • Estimate of fuel consumption for each segment; • Indication of equal time points (ETP), if they are used for compliance with

engine out fuel or oxygen requirements; • A summation of distance, time, and fuel to indicate regulatory compliance;

and • A means of predicting clear air turbulence, such as the height of the

tropopause, maximum wind level, temperature gradients, or shear index.

3) Celestial Navigation. When navigation is conducted by celestial means, flight planning requires current navigation charts, a current air almanac, and sight reduction tables. The operator’s GOM must contain specific procedures to be used for flight planning, the required forms, and the procedures for checking the validity of the planning conducted.

4) Organized Track Systems. When operations are conducted over an organized track system, the flight plan coordinates must be checked against the track message. The operator’s GOM must specify the individual responsible for the check and the procedures to be used.

NOTE: Advisory Circular (AC) 90-76, Flight Operations in Oceanic Airspace; AC 91-49, General Aviation Procedures for Flight in North Atlantic Minimum Navigation Performance Specifications Airspace; and AC 120-33, Operational Approval of Airborne Long Range Navigation Systems for Flight Within the North Atlantic Minimum Navigation Performance Specifications Airspace,

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



contain guidance for approving operations in minimum navigation performance specification (MNPS) airspace.

5) Omega/Loran Systems. When Omega or Loran is used, appropriate NOTAMs must be checked to ensure that adequate signal coverage is available.

F. Pilotage. Pilotage is navigation conducted solely by reference to visually distinguishable checkpoints. Pilotage may be either Class I or Class II navigation, but may only be approved over areas where checkpoints are readily distinguishable and in airspace where such operations are authorized. VFR navigation by pilotage may only be conducted by operators as follows:

1) Part 121. These operators may conduct VFR navigation only when and where specifically authorized to do so by the OpSpecs.

2) Part 135. These operators may conduct VFR navigation by pilotage in airplanes (other than turbojets) and helicopters without specific authorization by OpSpecs.

3) Turbojet Airplane Operations. These operations may be conducted by VFR navigation by pilotage only according to paragraph B033 of the OpSpecs.

4) Flight Planning for VFR Pilotage. VFR pilotage requires the use of current VFR navigation charts. Inspectors must evaluate an operator’s flight plan to ensure that it includes, but is not limited to, the following elements as applicable to the operation:

• Checkpoints, segment distances, ETEs for each segment, and an estimate of fuel consumption for each segment; and

• A summation of distance, time, and fuel planning to show regulatory compliance (departure point to destination, required reserve, and contingencies).

5) Flight Planning and Navigation for Class II, VFR Operations. Additional precautions may be necessary, depending on the area of operations. For example, in a polar or wilderness area, aircraft should always have adequate fuel to fly to the nearest fueling point, along with a reserve of fuel. Helicopters operating offshore should at all times have at least enough fuel to reach land, and thereafter fly for an additional time as specified by the operator’s manual.

G. Dead Reckoning (DR). DR is navigation conducted solely by the pilot flying a calculated heading and estimated groundspeed without a means of obtaining a position. The pilot computes such headings by applying estimated wind information to the measured track. Navigation by DR is only acceptable under certain limited circumstances. For example, operators may be approved by the OpSpecs to conduct either IFR or VFR flights between the service volumes of two standard NAVAIDs on a direct course between the aids. Such operations must be limited to periods of not more than 1 hour and to areas where ATC separation standards do not preclude such operations. POIs must evaluate other DR operations on a case by case basis.

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



3-1926 SELECTION OF ALTERNATE AIRPORTS. A critical element of preflight planning is the selection of alternate, takeoff, en route, and destination airports. PICs and operational control personnel have a range of latitude to accommodate individual circumstances. Operators must provide specific direction and guidance to PICs and aircraft dispatchers for the selection of takeoff, en route, and destination alternate airports.

A. Terrain. Part 91, § 91.103 requires that PICs familiarize themselves with “all available alternatives if the planned flight cannot be completed.” Part 121, § 121.565(a) requires the PIC to land at the “nearest suitable airport” in case of an engine failure or shutdown. Section 121.565(b), however, does allow a PIC operating an airplane of three or more engines to proceed to an airport other than the nearest suitable airport when this course of action is as safe as landing at the nearest suitable airport. While these rules apply specifically to PICs, operational control personnel should be aware of, and be guided by, these requirements when selecting alternate airports. POIs shall ensure that operators and PICs take particular care in the selection of alternate airports in mountainous areas. POIs should ensure that the operator would be in compliance with subpart I of part 121 or 135 (in normal and engine out configurations) while en route to the alternate airport.

B. Weather, NAVAIDs, and Airport Conditions. Aircraft dispatchers, flight followers, and PICs must be aware of the distance to the alternate, the effect of weather, inoperative NAVAIDs, and airport conditions when selecting alternate airports. For example, when the winds switch from easterly to strong westerly at Boseman, Montana, the alternate minimums increase from 600/1+½ to 1,200/3+½. Inoperative NAVAIDs, runway conditions, or runway closures can render an airport unacceptable as an alternate airport.

3-1927 LOAD CONTROL. When heavy payloads are carried aboard an aircraft, the fuel load may have to be limited. In addition, the weight at which an aircraft can be released is limited by takeoff, en route terrain clearance, and landing performance limitations (see Volume 4, Chapter 3).

A. Loading Assumptions. Operational control personnel must have either actual loading information or they must make assumptions about aircraft loading before they can release a flight. For flights released using loading assumptions, inspectors must ensure that the operator has established a means for ensuring that flights actually do depart at, or below, the maximum weight used for planning.

B. GOM. Inspectors must ensure that the operator’s GOM contains information and procedures for the control of fuel load, payloads, takeoff weights, and CG. The operator’s GOM must clearly delineate the category of employee responsible for making these computations, adequate information and procedures for performing such calculations, and the procedures by which the flightcrew and operational control personnel can ensure that these functions have been accomplished before the aircraft departs.

3-1928 AIRWORTHINESS OF AIRCRAFT. Part 121, § 121.605 prohibits the dispatch or release of an aircraft unless it is airworthy and has all required equipment installed, as prescribed in § 121.303. Section 121.709 and part 135, § 135.443 require that before an aircraft can be

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



operated it must have an Airworthiness Release (or appropriate logbook entry) and be signed by a properly authorized person.

A. Compliance with Minimum Equipment List (MEL) or Configuration Deviation List (CDL) Provisions. When an aircraft is released in accordance with MEL or CDL provisions, the operator’s procedures, policies, instructions, and controls for the use of the MEL or CDL must ensure that:

• There are no known conditions that would make the airplane unairworthy, and • The airplane is in condition for safe operation.

NOTE: Use of the MEL or CDL does not require a new airworthiness release. Under certain circumstances, however, approved company procedures may require the issuance of a new airworthiness release. In any event, inspectors shall ensure that operators follow the approved procedures.

B. MEL or CDL Limitations in Dispatch or Flight Releases. When MEL or CDL restrictions impose aircraft performance or weight limitations, the aircraft dispatcher or the person exercising operational control must be notified of these limitations before the flight is dispatched or released. It is not unusual for additional discrepancies to arise after a release has been prepared and transmitted. When a decision has been reached to operate the aircraft with an additional deferred discrepancy after the release has been prepared, the operator must have procedures for notifying the aircraft dispatcher or the individual exercising operational control. If the flight cannot be operated as originally released, a new release must be prepared or the original release must be amended.

C. Discrepancies After Departure. A flight is considered to have departed when it moves under its own power (forward or backward) for purposes of flight. After this time, any discrepancy that arises must be handled according to the flight manual. If the flight manual has procedures for that particular discrepancy, which allow for the continuation of the flight, and the PIC determines that the flight can safely depart using those procedures, then the flight may continue. If the flight manual does not permit continuation of the flight, or if the PIC determines that the flight cannot safely depart, the discrepancy must be entered in the maintenance log in accordance with § 121.563 or § 135.65(b) and maintenance action must be taken in accordance with § 121.709 or § 135.65(c) before the aircraft takes off. A new or amended release is required when the flight cannot be operated as originally planned. For example, the anti skid could fail during the taxi for takeoff. If the flight manual contains procedures for adjusting performance computations which indicate that the flight can operate within the required limits at the departure point, destination, and alternate airport, the flight could continue. Conversely, if the flight handbook does not contain any such procedures, the flight must return for maintenance action.

3-1929 CREW QUALIFICATION AND CREW FLIGHT TIME LIMITATIONS AND REST REQUIREMENTS. The operator is responsible for assigning specific personnel to operate each flight, including the designation of a PIC. Crewmembers and the operator are jointly responsible for ensuring that crewmembers are qualified in accordance with the regulations (including special airport qualifications) and are in compliance with crew flight time limitations and rest requirements before the flight departs. Operators may delegate these

04/09/08 8900.1 CHG 0



responsibilities to departments (i.e., crew scheduling) other than the operational control department, but must establish procedures by which operational control personnel can verify that these requirements have been accomplished.

NOTE: Operators should have policies in place addressing flight leg assignment and the division of crew duties during critical phases of flight when environmental conditions (cold weather operations, windshear, thunderstorms, etc.) are marginal. Special consideration should be given to line flying experience and background qualifications in determining when the PIC may delegate control of the aircraft and under what adverse weather conditions control of the aircraft should be accomplished by the PIC.

3-1930 CREW MEDICAL QUALIFICATION AND PROCEDURES DURING TEMPORARY MEDICAL DEFICIENCY.

A. Responsibility of Operators and Flight Crewmembers. 14 CFR part 61, § 61.53 and 14 CFR part 63, § 63.19 preclude required flight crewmembers from flight duty while they have a known medical or physical deficiency. These sections rely solely on the ability of flight crewmembers to honestly determine their medical fitness. It is incumbent on individual airmen to be certain that they have no illness or physical impairment that would affect their medical fitness for flight. The NTSB believes that air carrier operators should share the responsibility for verifying flight crewmembers medical fitness for flight duty. However, it is not always easy for operators to determine the extent of a crewmember’s medical fitness. In order to maintain the highest level of safety, required flight crewmembers must not fly under conditions that would make them unable to meet the requirements for their current medical certificate. This decision should not be influenced by fear of company reprisals.

B. POI Responsibility. POIs should encourage their assigned air carriers to have established sick leave policies and procedures, especially those concerning the release of flight crewmembers from duty when they develop sudden temporary illnesses, such as colds, flu, or fevers. These policies and procedures should not discourage flight crewmembers from taking sick leave when they are ill.


04/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0




CHAPTER 25 OPERATIONAL CONTROL FOR CARRIERS

Section 5 Title 14 CFR Part 135 Flight-Locating Systems and Operating Rules

3-2021 GENERAL. This section contains direction and guidance to be used by inspectors concerning Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 135 flight-locating systems and operating rules. Inspectors should use this section with section 1 of this chapter when reviewing an operator’s General Operations Manual (GOM) and when conducting inspections of part 135 operators.

3-2022 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. Although 14 CFR part 135, § 135.77 explicitly requires that each operator exercise operational control, the method by which an operator does so is not closely defined by 14 CFR. Part 135 operations range from visual flight rules (VFR) operations in simple aircraft to extended overwater operations in highly sophisticated jet transports. Section 135.77 provides operators with the latitude necessary to design systems that fit the conditions surrounding the operations they conduct. Operators and principal operations inspectors (POI) must ensure, however, that each operator's system provides adequate control of the operation being conducted. Inspectors should be aware of the following requirements regarding operational functions:

A. Formal Releases. Part 135 does not require operators to prepare a formal release authorizing a specific flight. Part 135, § 135.69 does require that the operator restrict or suspend operations when either the pilot in command (PIC) or the operator becomes aware of a hazardous condition. One acceptable means an operator may use to comply with this requirement is to use a formal release system.

B. GOM Requirements. The operator’s GOM must contain adequate briefing and trip planning procedures to ensure that all safety requirements are fulfilled. POIs shall ensure that each operator’s GOM contains detailed policies, conditions, and specific procedures for each category of employee responsible for the authorization or planning of a flight.

C. Delegation of Authority. Part 135 operators commonly delegate the authority to PICs for initiating flights. Such delegation has generally proven to be adequate for the operation of general purpose, single-engine and multiengine airplanes and helicopters in on-demand operations. Such systems may be inappropriate, however, for commuter operations, air ambulance services, jet transport operations, operations conducted beyond the contiguous states, extended overwater operations, and complex operations requiring extensive planning or coordination. POIs should strongly recommend that operators establish operational control systems that require the concurrence of an individual authorized to exercise operational control and the PIC for all flight release decisions. National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) statistics show that police and air ambulance service operators who have adopted such systems have had significantly better safety records than operators of the same type who have not had such systems.

3-2023 FLIGHT-LOCATING SYSTEMS. Part 135, § 135.79 requires that each operator maintain a flight-locating system. The system must provide for the timely notification of an FAA

04/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



facility or a search-and-rescue facility if an aircraft is overdue or missing. The operator’s notification must be at least as prompt as notifications provided by FAA procedures and facilities.

A. Flightplans Filed by PICs. Part 135 operators may require PICs to file and activate air traffic control (ATC) flightplans as one means of complying with § 135.79. In this case, the operator’s GOM must prohibit the PIC from operating without an activated flightplan until arrival at the destination airport. Operators may find that requiring the PIC to file a flightplan to satisfy the requirements of § 135.79 precludes certain operations. For example, it is impractical for a PIC to conduct a flight to a non-controlled field by cancelling instrument flight rules (IFR) at the last radio navigation fix and then proceeding under VFR to destination on a VFR flightplan. ATC does not accept composite IFR/VFR flightplans. Normally, ATC will not activate a VFR flight on an air traffic control frequency. A PIC who cancels IFR and then changes to a flight-watch frequency to activate a VFR flightplan is not in compliance with § 135.79. One acceptable means an operator may use to comply with § 135.79 are to require the PIC to telephone the person exercising operational control upon arrival at a destination not served by an ATC facility.

B. Procedures in Lieu of Flightplans. When an FAA flightplan is not filed, operators must have established procedures for following and locating each flight. The individual authorized to conduct operational control must be provided with at least the information required in a VFR flightplan.

C. Flight-Locating Information When Radio Contact Cannot Be Maintained. Part 135 operators are not required to maintain the capability to contact flights while they are airborne. When operations are conducted in an area in which radio contact cannot be maintained with ATC, the individual authorized to exercise operational control must be provided with the location, date, and estimated time at which the PIC will re-establish radio or telephone communications. Flight-locating information must be retained at the operator’s principal base of operations, or at other places designated by the operator, until the completion of the flight. Operators should maintain sufficient records to show compliance with these requirements.

D. Flight Followers. Part 135 does not specify the qualifications or titles of individuals authorized to authorize or follow flights. Section 135.77 does, however, require the operator to list the name of each individual authorized to perform these duties in the GOM.

E. Contractors. Part 135 operators may contract with other operators or organizations to perform direct operational control functions. The operator remains fully responsible for ensuring that the operations conducted comply with the CFR, the operator’s GOM, and with safe operating practices. The name of each employee of the contractor authorized to perform operational control functions for the operator must be placed in the operator’s GOM.

F. Training. Operators are responsible for ensuring that individuals authorized to exercise operational control are adequately trained to perform their assigned duties. One acceptable means an operator may use to meet this requirement is to establish a training and qualification program such as that described in chapter 22 of this volume.

04/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



NOTE: Individuals exercising operational control must be knowledgeable of, and have access to, appropriate sections of the operator’s GOM while performing their assigned duties.

3-2024 PART 135 FUEL-PLANNING REQUIREMENTS. The fuel-planning requirements of 14 CFR parts 91 and 135 are based on IFR and VFR Class I navigation within the contiguous states. Other types of operations or operations outside of the contiguous states may require additional or special planning.

A. VFR Operations in Airplanes. Section 135.209(a) prohibits takeoff in an airplane under VFR rules unless the airplane has enough fuel to fly to the airport of first intended landing. Thereafter the airplane must have enough fuel (computed at normal cruise) to either fly for 30 minutes during the day or for 45 minutes at night.

B. VFR Operations in Helicopters. Section 135.209(b) prohibits takeoff in a helicopter under VFR rules unless the helicopter has enough fuel to fly to the airport of first intended landing, and then to fly for 20 minutes at normal cruising fuel consumption.

C. IFR Operations in Airplanes. Section 135.223 prohibits takeoff in an airplane in IFR conditions unless the airplane has enough fuel to complete the flight to the airport of first intended landing. Thereafter, the airplane must have enough fuel to fly to the alternate airport, and then to fly for 45 minutes at normal cruise fuel consumption.

D. IFR Operations in Helicopters. Section 135.223 prohibits takeoff in a helicopter in IFR conditions unless the helicopter has enough fuel to complete the flight to the airport of first intended landing. Thereafter, the helicopter must have enough fuel to fly to the designated alternate airport, and then to fly for 30 minutes at normal cruise fuel consumption.

E. Contingency Fuel. Part 135 does not specifically require a specific increment of contingency fuel. Part 91, § 91.103, however, does require that such contingencies be considered in preflight planning. Therefore, an increment of fuel to compensate for foreseeable contingencies must be on board for takeoff. One such contingency would be a delay in receiving takeoff clearance at major terminals. The operator’s GOM should contain specific policies and instructions for computing the amount of contingency fuel to be carried under the circumstances likely to be encountered in the operator's specific operation.

F. En Route Requirements. The fuel planning requirements discussed in subparagraphs A through E apply for takeoff. Part 135 does not specify the action the PIC must take if an alternate airport goes below minimums when the flight is en route, or how much fuel must be on board when the flight arrives overhead a destination or alternate airport. Section 135.69(b) allows a PIC to continue toward a destination when a hazard to safe operations may reasonably be expected to be corrected before arrival. Section 135.69(b) does prohibit a PIC from continuing a flight toward a destination, however, when the operator or the PIC knows of conditions that make continuation of the flight hazardous. The operator’s GOM should contain specific policies and instructions on how the PIC is to proceed in foreseeable circumstances that may be encountered in the operator's specific operation.

04/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



3-2025 WEATHER REQUIREMENTS. Part 135, § 135.213 requires that weather reports and forecasts used in part 135 operations be prepared by the National Weather Service (NWS), a source approved by the NWS, or a source approved by the FAA (see section 1 of this chapter). Inspectors should ensure that part 135 operators are conducting operations in compliance with 14 CFR weather provisions, as follows:

A. VFR Operations. A flight may not depart under VFR rules unless the ceiling and visibility en route are forecast to be above the applicable VFR minimums until the aircraft arrives at the destination airport.

1) All available reports and forecasts must show that the flight can be completed in visual meteorological conditions. Available reports include Pilot Weather Reports (PIREP), which must be obtained and used when available.

2) When there is no information available from an approved source, § 135.213(a) authorizes PICs to use their own observations or those of another competent person for operations under VFR. This authority is limited to only those situations in which a report from an approved source is not available. For example, these procedures might be appropriate for floatplane operations at remote lakes where no weather observer is stationed. This provision does not relieve PICs and operational control personnel from obtaining and using the information that is available, such as area forecasts and PIREPs.

3) The operator's GOM must specify the circumstances under which PICs may use the provision of § 135.213(a). If observers other than PICs are used, operators must specify the training and qualifications of these observers.

B. Point of Departure - IFR Operations. A flight may not be originated when the weather at the departure point is below that specified in paragraph C057 or paragraph H106 of the operator’s operations specifications (OpSpecs).

1) Takeoff weather minimums may be below the authorized landing minimums. For takeoff in such conditions, an alternate airport must be available, within one hour of flying time from the departure airport at normal cruise speed.

2) Operators may be authorized to use “lower-than-standard” takeoff minimums by paragraph C057(e)(1) of the OpSpecs. POIs, operators, and PICs must be aware of the limitations associated with this authority. The operator must have an approved “lower-than-standard takeoff” training program and qualification module. The PIC (and second in command (SIC), when applicable) must have satisfactorily demonstrated competency on their last competency check (135.293) or instrument proficiency check (§ 135.297). A single pilot may not conduct lower-than-standard takeoffs in weather conditions below Category I (CAT I) landing minimums.

C. Destination Weather - IFR. A flight may not depart under IFR or over-the-top rules unless appropriate weather reports or forecasts indicate that conditions will be at or above the minimums required by the OpSpecs at the destination airport at the estimated time of arrival (ETA). The reports or forecasts used must be the most currently available at the time of takeoff.

04/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



CAT I weather minimums are contained in paragraphs C053, C054, and H103 of the OpSpecs. CAT II and CAT III minimums are listed in paragraphs C059, C060, H108, and H109.

D. Designation of Alternate Airports. Section 135.223 specifies when an alternate airport is required for IFR operations or over-the-top operations. An alternate airport does not have to be designated when, for at least one hour before and one hour after the ETA at the destination airport, the appropriate weather reports or forecasts (or any combination of them), show the ceiling will be as follows:

1) At least 1,500 feet above the lowest circling minimum descent altitude, if a circling approach is authorized for the airport; or

2) If a circling approach is not authorized, at least 1,500 feet above the lowest published instrument approach minimum or 2,000 feet above the airport elevation, whichever is greater; and

3) The visibility at that airport will be at least three miles, or two miles more than the lowest applicable visibility minimums, whichever is greater, for the instrument approach procedures to be used.

E. Alternate Airport Weather. The forecast weather at the designated alternate airport must exceed the requirements of the table in either paragraph C055 or paragraph H105 of the OpSpecs, as applicable.

3-2026 IFR PASSENGER-CARRYING, OVER-THE-TOP OPERATIONS. Part 135 contains a set of rules that limit IFR passenger-carrying, over-the-top flights. These limitations do not apply to cargo-only part 135 flights.

NOTE: Section 135.181 does not prohibit a pilot from operating an aircraft in VFR conditions on an IFR clearance. An aircraft must be IFR equipped and the pilot or pilots must be qualified according to part 135 before an IFR clearance may be requested or IFR weather conditions are entered.

A. Operation of Single-Engine Aircraft in Over-The-Top Operations. Section 135.181 prohibit the operation of single-engine aircraft (airplanes and helicopters) in over-the-top operations unless the following conditions can be met:

1) The flight may be planned to climb to VFR over-the-top conditions as described in previous subparagraph A.

2) If a ceiling exists, VFR conditions must be forecast to exist under the ceiling along the planned route from the time the flight begins operating over-the-top until one hour after the flight is estimated to reach the destination.

3) At all points along the route, upon reaching destination, and for one hour thereafter, the forecast must show that the flight will be able to descend in VFR conditions (clear of clouds), should an engine fail.

04/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



B. Operation of Multiengine Aircraft in IFR, Over-The-Top, Passenger-Carrying Operations. A multi-engine aircraft (airplane or helicopter) may be released for IFR or VFR over-the-top, passenger-carrying operations under the following circumstances:

1) The flight may be operated under the conditions described in subparagraphs A and B, or;

2) The operator may limit the takeoff weight so that the aircraft can climb at 50 feet per minute at the minimum en route altitude (MEA) of the route to be flown or at 5,000 feet mean sea level (MSL), whichever is higher, with the critical engine inoperative. Passenger-carrying, multiengine helicopters flying offshore may be started when the helicopter can climb at 50 feet per minute at the MEA or at 1,500 feet MSL, whichever is higher, with the critical engine inoperative.

3) A flight may start when weather forecasts and reports indicate that the flight will be able to operate in VFR conditions until it reaches the destination and then descend in VFR conditions to beneath the ceiling. Conditions at the destination must allow a VFR descent for the period of the ETA to one hour after ETA. While operating over-the-top, the flight must be able to comply with subparagraphs B 1) or B 2).

4) A flight may start when it can be operated clear of the clouds until it reaches the final approach fix at the initial approach altitude under VFR conditions and then conduct an instrument approach.

3-2027 OVERWATER, PASSENGER-CARRYING OPERATIONS. Except for takeoffs, landings, and operations within gliding distance of land, all passenger-carrying flights operated over water must be operated as follows:

A. Airplanes. Operators must limit the takeoff weight of an airplane so that it can climb at 50 feet per minute at an altitude of 1,000 feet above the surface with the critical engine inoperative.

B. Helicopters. Helicopters must be equipped with flotation devices.

3-2028 PART 135 EXTENDED OVERWATER OPERATIONS. Although part 135 does not specifically address the requirements for extended overwater operations, 14 CFR part 135, § 135.21(a) requires that each operator develop a manual establishing the policies and procedures for operations that are acceptable to the FAA Administrator. One means, but not the only means, that a part 135 operator may use to develop acceptable extended overwater operations procedures is to show compliance with those portions of 14 CFR part 121 that correspond to the operation conducted.

A. Flight Planning and Navigation. Flight planning and navigational requirements do not differ from those of part 121 operators conducting operations in the same airspace (see sections 1 and 4 of this Chapter ).

B. Fuel Planning. The operator must provide adequate procedures for compensating with the limitations of forecast winds. One acceptable means an operator may use is to comply

04/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



with the requirements of, § 121.641 for reciprocating or turbopropeller aircraft and with the requirements of, § 121.645 for turbojet aircraft. These sections provide for appropriate en route reserves.

C. Engine-Out En Route Performance Limits. The operator must develop procedures to comply with the engine-out performance limitations of part 135, subpart I. The operator’s analysis must show compliance at the most critical point on the route. Under most conditions, engine-out operations require drift down procedures. Inspectors must ensure that the operator’s analysis considers how oxygen and aircraft systems are affected by engine loss.


05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0


Check FSIMS to verify this version is current prior to use


CHAPTER 40 APPROVE A MAINTENANCE RELIABILITY PROGRAM FOR 14 CFR PARTS 121/135

Section 1 Approve Maintenance Reliability Program

3-3781 PROGRAM TRACKING AND REPORTING SUBSYSTEM (PTRS) ACTIVITY CODES.

A. Maintenance:

1) New: 3331.

2) Revision: 3332.

B. Avionics: 5331.

3-3782 OBJECTIVE. This chapter provides guidance for approving Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) parts 121 and 135 reliability programs and providing technical assistance to the certificate holder.

3-3783 GENERAL.

A. The Airworthiness aviation safety inspector (ASI) performs this task, which needs to be closely coordinated between both the maintenance and avionics specialties. Approving a reliability program is one of the most complex duties of an Airworthiness ASI, who must give special attention to every element of the proposed program.

B. Reliability programs establish the time limitations or standards for determining intervals between overhauls, inspections, and checks of airframes, engines, propellers, appliances, and emergency equipment.

1) Guidance on the program elements is listed in the current editions of:

• Advisory Circular (AC) 120-17, Maintenance Program Management Through Reliability Methods;

• The Airline/Manufacturer Maintenance Program Planning Document, Maintenance Steering Group (MSG)-2/3; and/or

• Maintenance Tasks.

2) It is important that the ASI explains all of the program requirements to the operator/applicant.

3-3784 PRIMARY MAINTENANCE PROCESSES.

A. MSG-2, Primary Maintenance Processes Definitions.

05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0



1) Hard-Time (HT), Overhaul Time Limit, or Part Life-Limit. This is a preventive primary maintenance process that requires a system, component, or appliance to be either overhauled periodically (time limits) or removed from service (life limit). Time limits may only be adjusted based on operating experience or tests, in accordance with (IAW) procedures in the operator’s approved reliability program.

2) On-Condition (OC). This is also a preventive primary maintenance process that requires a system, component, or appliance be inspected periodically or checked against some appropriate physical standard to determine if it can continue in service. The standard ensures that the unit is removed from service before failure during normal operation. These standards may be adjusted based on operating experience or tests, as appropriate, IAW a carrier’s approved reliability program or maintenance manual.

3) Condition Monitoring (CM). MSG-2 introduced condition monitoring. This process is for systems, components, or appliances that have neither HT nor OC maintenance as their primary maintenance process. It is accomplished by appropriate means available to an operator for finding and solving problem areas. The user must control the reliability of systems or equipment based on knowledge gained through analysis of failures or other indications of deteriorations.

B. MSG-3, Maintenance Task Definitions.

1) Lubrication/Servicing (LU/SV). Any act of lubrication or servicing for the purpose of maintaining inherent design capabilities. The replenishment of the consumable must reduce the rate of functional deterioration.

2) Operational/Visual Check (OP/VC). Hidden functional failure categories. An operational check is a task to determine if an item is fulfilling its intended purpose. The check does not require quantitative tolerances, but is a failure-finding task. A visual check is an observation to determine that an item is fulfilling its intended purpose and does not require quantitative tolerances. This is a failure-finding task that ensures an adequate availability of the hidden function to reduce the risk of a multiple safety failures and to avoid economic effects of multiple failures and be cost-effective.

3) Inspection/Functional Check (IN/FC), All Categories.

a) Inspections.

1. Detailed inspection. An intensive visual examination of a specific structural area, system, installation, or assembly to detect damage, failure, or irregularity. Available lighting is normally supplemented with a direct source of good lighting at an intensity deemed appropriate by the ASI. Inspection aids such as mirrors or magnifying lenses may be used. Surface cleaning and elaborate access procedures may be required.

2. General visual (surveillance) inspection. A visual examination of an interior or exterior area, installation, or assembly to detect obvious damage, failure, or irregularity. This level of inspection is made under normally available lighting conditions, such as daylight, hangar lighting, flashlight, or drop-light, and may require removal or opening of

05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0



access panels or doors. Stands, ladders, or platforms may be required to gain proximity to the area being checked.

3. Special detailed inspection. An intensive examination of a specific item(s), installation, or assembly to detect damage, failure, or irregularity. The examination is likely to make extensive use of specialized inspection techniques and/or equipment. Intricate cleaning and substantial access or disassembly procedures may be required.

b) Functional Check. A quantitative check to determine if one or more functions of an item perform within specified limits. Reduced resistance to failure must be detectable, and there must be a reasonably consistent interval between a deterioration condition and functional failure.

4) Restoration (RS), All Categories. That work necessary to return an item to a specific standard. Since restoration may vary from cleaning or replacement of single parts to a complete overhaul, the scope of each assigned restoration task has to be specified.

5) Discard (DS), All Categories. The removal from service of an item at a specified life limit. Discard tasks are normally applied to so-called single-celled parts, such as:

• Cartridges, • Canisters, • Cylinders, • Engine disks, or • Safe-life structural members.

3-3785 NEW AIRCRAFT. The lack of real experience with new aircraft requires a careful, detailed study of their characteristics to determine which components or systems would probably benefit from scheduled maintenance (HT or OC).

A. Special teams of industry and Federal Aviation Administraion (FAA) personnel developed the initial maintenance programs for the B-747, DC-10, and L-1011 aircraft. Using the MSG-2 decision analysis, these teams identified potential maintenance tasks and determined which of these tasks must be performed to ensure operating safety or determine essential hidden function protection. The remaining tasks were evaluated to determine if they were economically useful.

B. This evaluation provided a systematic review of the aircraft design so that, in the absence of real experience, the best maintenance process could be employed for each component or system. The B-747, DC-10, and L-1011 aircraft operating experience confirmed the effectiveness of these procedures.

3-3786 DATA COLLECTION SYSTEM.

A. Typical sources of data collection include:

• Unscheduled removals,

05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Confirmed failures, • Pilot reports, • Sampling inspections, • Shop findings, • Functional checks, • Bench checks, • Service difficulty reports, • Mechanical Interruption Summaries, and • Other sources the operator considers appropriate.

B. Not all of these sources may be covered in each and every program. However, the availability of additional information provides the operator with an invaluable source of operating history for determining success or failure in meeting program goals.

C. Data collected must be accurate and factual to support a high degree of confidence for any derived conclusion. It must be obtained from units functioning under operational conditions and must relate directly to the established levels of performance.

3-3787 DATA ANALYSIS AND THE APPLICATION TO MAINTENANCE CONTROLS. The objective of data analysis is to:

• Recognize the need for corrective action, • Establish what corrective action is needed, and • Determine the effectiveness of that action.

A. Data Analysis Systems. Data analysis is the process of evaluating mechanical performance data to identify characteristics indicating a need for program adjustment, revising maintenance practices, improving (modifying) hardware, etc. The first step in analysis is to compare or measure data against acceptable performance levels. The standard may be a running average, tabulation of removal rates for past periods, graphs, charts, or any other means of depicting a “norm.”

B. Programs Incorporating Statistical Performance Standards (“Alert” Programs).

1) Reliability programs developed under AC 120-17, current edition, and earlier criteria use parameters for reliability analysis such as delays per 100 departures for an aircraft system. They incorporate performance standards as described in paragraph 3-3788. These standards define acceptable performance.

2) System performance data usually is reinforced by component removal or confirmed failure data. The condition-monitored process can be readily accommodated by this type of program.

C. Programs Using Other Analysis Standards (“Non-Alert” Programs). Data compiled to assist in the day-to-day operation of the maintenance program may be used effectively as a basis for continuous mechanical performance analysis.

05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0



1) The following are examples of the types of information suitable for this monitoring method:

• Mechanical interruption summaries, • Flight record review, • Engine monitoring reports, • Incident reports, and • Engine and component analysis reports.

2) The number and range of inputs must be sufficient to provide a basis for analysis equivalent to the statistical programs standards.

3) Actuarial analysis should be conducted periodically to ensure that the current process classifications are correct.

3-3788 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS.

A. The following factors are acceptable for establishing or revising a reliability program’s performance standards:

1) Past and present individual operator and industry experience. If industry experience is used, the program must include a provision for reviewing the standards after the operator has gained one year of operating experience.

2) Performance analysis of similar equipment currently in service.

3) Aircraft or equipment manufacturers’ reliability engineering analysis.

4) History of experience where reliability standards were acceptable to the airline industry.

B. If the program does not incorporate statistical performance standards or significantly deviates from the instructions in AC 120-17.

1) Performance measurements expressed numerically in terms of:

• System or component failure, • Pilot reports, • Delays, • A/C operating hours, • Number of landings, • Cycles, or • Other.

2) Standards adjusted to:

• Operator’s experience,

05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Seasonal, and/or • Environmental.

3) Procedures for periodic review:

• Upward adjustment, and • Downward adjustment.

C. Monitoring procedure:

• New aircraft, and • Computing performance standards.

1) No statistical performance standards:

• Do not approve program. • Submit package by letter to region for review/forward to AFS-300,

Washington, DC.

2) Also any significant deviation from AC 120-17, current edition.

3-3789 EVALUATING PROGRAM DISPLAYS AND STATUS OF CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAMS AND REPORTING.

A. Corrective Action System. Corrective action should be positive enough to restore performance effectively to an acceptable level within a reasonable time. The corrective action system must include provisions for the following:

1) Notifying the organization responsible for taking the action.

2) Obtaining periodic feedback until performance reaches an acceptable level.

3) Encompassing methods that have been established for the overall maintenance program, such as:

• Work orders, • Special inspection procedures, • Engineering Orders, and • Technical standards.

4) Critical failures in which loss of function or the secondary effects of failure could affect the airworthiness of the aircraft.

B. Statistical Performance Standards System.

1) A performance measurement expressed numerically in terms of system or component failure, pilot report, delay, etc (bracketed by hours of aircraft operation, number of landing, operating cycles, or other exposure measurement) serves as the basis for the standard.

05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Control limits or alert values are usually based on accepted statistical methods, such as standard deviations or the Poisson distribution.

2) Some applications use an average or baseline method. The standard should be adjustable and should reflect the operator’s experience during seasonal and environmental condition changes and variations.

3) The program should include procedures for periodic review and adjusting the program as appropriate.

4) The program should include procedures for monitoring new aircraft until sufficient operating experience is available to compute performance standards, normally one year.

C. Data Display and Reporting System.

1) Operators with programs incorporating statistical performance standards (“alert” programs) should develop a monthly report, with appropriate data displays summarizing the previous month’s activity. This report should include the following:

• All aircraft systems controlled by the program in sufficient depth to enable the FAA and other recipients to evaluate the effectiveness of the total maintenance program;

• Systems that exceeded the established performance standards and discussion of what action has been taken or planned;

• An explanation of changes that have been made or are planned in the aircraft maintenance program, including changes in maintenance and inspection intervals and changes from one maintenance process/task to another;

• A discussion of continuing over-alert conditions carried forward from previous reports; and

• The progress of corrective action programs.

2) Programs using other analytical standards (“non-alert” programs) should consolidate or summarize significant reports used in controlling their program to provide for evaluating program effectiveness. These reports may be computer printouts, summaries, or other forms. A typical program of this type reports the following information:

• Mechanical Interruption Summary (MIS) reports, • Maintenance process/task and interval assignments (master specification), • Weekly update to the maintenance process and interval assignments, • Daily repetitive item listing by aircraft, • Monthly component premature removal report, including removal rate, • Monthly engine shutdown and removal report, • Quarterly engine reliability analysis report, • Engine threshold adjustment report, and • Worksheets for maintenance process/task and interval changes (not provided

to the FAA, but the FAA approves the process/task changes).

05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0



D. Program Review System. The program should include a procedure for revision which is compatible with FAA approvals. The procedures should identify organizational elements involved in the revision process and the authority. The program areas requiring formal FAA approval include any changes to the program that involve the following:

• Procedures relating to reliability measurement/performance standards, • Data collection, • Data analysis methods and application to the total maintenance program, • Process/task changes , • Adding or deleting components/systems, • Adding or deleting aircraft types, or • Procedural and organizational changes concerning administration of the program.

3-3790 INTERVAL ADJUSTMENTS, PROCESS, AND/OR TASK CHANGES.

A. Maintenance Interval Adjustment, Process Category, and/or Task Change System. Reliability programs provide an operator with a method of adjusting maintenance, inspection, and overhaul intervals without prior FAA approval. This does not relieve the operator or the FAA of their responsibilities regarding the effects of the program on safety.

NOTE: If the ASI has any doubt as to the soundness of a requested maintenance interval adjustment or task change, the inspector should coordinate the request with the appropriate Aircraft Certification Office (ACO).

B. Procedures. Procedures for adjusting maintenance intervals must be included in the program. Maintenance interval adjustments should not interfere with ongoing corrective action. There should be special procedures for escalating systems or components whose current performance exceeds control limits.

1) Typical considerations for adjusting HT or OC intervals include the following:

• Sampling, • Actuarial studies, • Unit performance, • Inspector or maintenance findings, and • Pilot reports.

2) Methods for adjusting aircraft/engine check intervals should be included if the program controls these intervals. Sampling criteria should be specified.

C. Classifying the Maintenance Processes and/or Tasks. The program should include procedures for the classification and assignment of maintenance processes and/or tasks and for changing from one process and/or task to another. Refer to MSG-2 for maintenance processes and MSG-3 for maintenance tasks. It should include the authority and procedures for changing maintenance specifications and the related documents to reflect the interval adjustments or process and/or task change.

05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0



3-3791 PREREQUISITES AND COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS.

A. Prerequisites. Previous experience with the type of equipment the operator/applicant proposes to include in the program.

B. Coordination. This task requires coordination between the Airworthiness ASIs, to include both maintenance and avionics. Further coordination may be required with regional and national headquarters.

3-3792 REFERENCES, FORMS, AND JOB AIDS.

A. References (current editions):

• AC 120-17, Maintenance Control by Reliability Methods. • MSG-2/3 Documents. • FAA Order 8900.1, Volume 8, Chapter 2, Section 7.

B. Forms. None.

C. Job Aids. Automated operations specifications (OpSpecs) checklists and worksheets.

3-3793 PROCEDURES.

A. Meet With Operator/Applicant. In addition to providing AC 120-17, current edition, inform the operator/applicant of the following program requirements:

• Program application, • Organizational structure, • Data collection system, • Methods of data analysis and application to maintenance control, • Procedures for establishing and revising performance standards, • Definition of significant terms, • Program displays and status of corrective action programs, • Procedures for program revision, and • Procedures for maintenance control changes.

B. Evaluate the Program Application Procedures. When the applicant submits a formal program, ensure that the program document defines the following:

1) Components, systems, or complete aircraft controlled by the program. Individual systems and/or components are identified by Air Transport Association of America (ATA) Specification 100. A list of all components controlled by the program must be included as an appendix to the program document or included by reference (e.g., time limits, manuals, or computer report).

2) The portion of the maintenance program controlled by the reliability program (e.g., overhaul and/or inspection, check periods).

05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0



C. Evaluate Organizational Structure. The structure must be described adequately and address committee membership, if appropriate, and meeting frequency. Ensure that the reliability program includes an organizational chart that shows the following:

1) The relationships among organizational elements responsible for administering the program.

2) The two organizational elements responsible for approving changes to maintenance controls and specifying the duties and responsibilities for initiating maintenance program revisions.

NOTE: One of the two organizations must have inspection or quality control responsibility or have overall program responsibility.

D. Evaluate the Organizational Responsibilities.

1) Determine if the reliability program document addresses the following:

a) The method of exchanging information among organizational elements. This may be displayed in a diagram.

b) Activities and responsibilities of each organizational element and/or reliability control committee for enforcing policy and ensuring corrective action.

2) Ensure that authority is delegated to each organizational element to enforce policy.

E. Evaluate the Data Collection System.

1) Ensure that the reliability document fully describes the data collection system for the aircraft, component, and/or systems to be controlled. The following must be addressed:

• Flow of information, • Identification of sources of information, • Steps of data development from source to analysis, and • Organizational responsibilities for each step of data development.

2) Ensure that the document includes samples of data to be collected, such as:

• Powerplant disassembly and inspection reports, • Component condition reports, • Mechanical delay and cancellation reports, • Flight record reports, • Premature removal reports, • In-flight shutdowns, • Confirmed failure reports, • Internal leakage reports, and

05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Engine shutdown reports.

3) Ensure that the reliability document includes a graphic portrayal of program operations. It must be a closed loop and show source data, data collection, and analysis.

F. Evaluate the Methods of Data Analysis and Application to Maintenance Controls. Ensure that the data analysis system includes the following:

1) One or more of the types of action appropriate to the trend or level of reliability experienced, including:

• Actuarial or engineering studies employed to determine a need for maintenance program changes;

• Maintenance program changes involving inspection frequency and content, functional checks, overhaul procedures, and time limits;

• Aircraft, aircraft system, or component modification or repair; and/or • Changes in operating procedures and techniques.

2) The effects on maintenance controls such as overhaul time, inspection and check periods, and overhaul and/or inspection procedures.

3) Procedures for evaluating critical failures as they occur.

4) Documentation used to support and initiate changes to the maintenance program, including modifications, special inspections, or fleet campaigns. The program must reference the operator’s manual procedures for handling these documents.

5) A corrective action program that shows the results of corrective actions in a reasonable period of time. Depending on the effect on safety, a “reasonable” period of time can vary from immediate to an overhaul cycle period. Each corrective action plan or program must be made a matter of record and include a planned completion date. Samples of forms used to implement these actions must be included in the program document.

6) A description of statistical techniques used to determine operating reliability levels.

G. Evaluate the Procedures for Establishing and Revising Performance Standards.

1) Ensure that each program includes one of the following for each aircraft system and/or component controlled by the program:

• Initial performance standards defining the area of acceptable reliability; or • Methods, data, and a schedule to establish the performance standard.

2) Ensure that the performance standard is responsive and sensitive to the level of reliability experienced and is stable without being fixed. The standard should not be so high that abnormal variations would not cause an alert or so low that it is constantly exceeded in spite of the best known corrective action measures.

05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0



3) Ensure that the procedures specify the organizational elements responsible for monitoring and revising the performance standard, as well as when and how to revise the standard.

H. Evaluate Definitions. Verify that each program clearly defines all significant terms used in the program. Definitions must reflect their intended use in the program and will therefore vary from program to program. Acronyms and abbreviations unique to the program must also be defined.

I. Evaluate Program Displays and Status of Corrective Action Programs and Reporting.

1) Ensure that the program describes reports, charts, and graphs used to document operating experience. Responsibilities for these reports must be established and the reporting elements must be clearly identified and described.

2) Ensure that the program displays containing the essential information for each aircraft, aircraft system, and component controlled by the program are addressed. Each system and component must be identified by the appropriate ATA Specification 100 system code number.

3) Ensure that the program includes displays showing:

• Performance trends, • The current month’s performance, • A minimum of 12 months’ experience , and • Reliability performance standards (“alert” values).

4) The program must include the status of corrective action programs. This includes all corrective action programs implemented since the last reporting period.

J. Evaluate the Interval Adjustments and Process and/or Task Changes System.

1) Review the change system procedures. Ensure that there are special procedures for escalating systems or components whose current performance exceeds control limits.

2) Ensure that the program does not allow for the maintenance interval adjustment of any Certification Maintenance Requirements (CMR) items. CMRs are part of the certification basis. No CMR item may be escalated through the operator maintenance/reliability program. CMRs are the responsibility of FAA engineering as far as approval and escalation.

NOTE: The operator may not use its reliability program as a basis for adjusting the repeat interval for its corrosion prevention and control program; however, the operator may use the reliability program for recording data for later submission to the FAA to help substantiate repeat interval changes.

3) Ensure that the program includes provisions for notifying the certificate-holding district office (CHDO) when changes are made.

05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0



K. Evaluate the Procedures for Program Revisions. The reliability document must accomplish the following:

1) Identify and isolate areas which require FAA approval for program revision, including the following:

• Reliability measurement; • Changes involving performance standards, including instructions relating to

the development of these standards; • Data collection system; • Data analysis methods and application to maintenance program; and • Any procedural or organizational change concerning program administration.

2) If the operator proposes that the FAA approve all revisions to the program document, isolation of those areas requiring FAA approval is not required. However, the document must recognize each of the above requirements and must contain procedures for adequately administering and implementing changes required by these actions.

3) Identify the organizational element responsible for approving amendments to the program.

4) Provide a periodic review to determine that the established performance standard is still realistic.

5) Provide procedures for distributing approved revisions.

6) Reference the operator’s manual and provide the overhaul and inspection periods, work content, and other maintenance program activities controlled by the program.

L. Evaluate the Procedures for Maintenance Control Changes. Ensure that the reliability program document addresses the following:

1) Procedures for maintenance control changes to the reliability program.

2) The organizational elements responsible for preparing substantiation reports to justify maintenance control changes. At least two separate organizational elements are required, one of which exercises inspection or quality control responsibility for the operator.

3) Processes used to specify maintenance control changes (e.g., sampling, functional checks, bench checks, decision tree analysis, and unscheduled removal).

4) Procedures covering all maintenance program activities controlled by the program.

5) Procedures for amending OpSpecs, as required.

6) Procedures to ensure maintenance interval adjustments are not interfering with ongoing corrective actions.

05/30/08 8900.1 CHG 0



7) Critical failures and procedures for taking corrective action.

8) Procedures for notifying the CHDO, when increased time limit adjustments or other program adjustments are addressed.

M. Analyze Reliability Program Evaluation. Upon completion, record all deficiencies noted. Determine the appropriate corrective action(s) to be taken. Deficiencies noted in the program must be given to the operator/applicant in writing.

3-3794 TASK OUTCOMES.

A. Complete the PTRS Record.

B. Complete the Task. Successful completion of this task will result in the approval of the operator/applicant’s reliability program and OpSpecs IAW Volume 3, Chapter 18, Section 6, Parts D and E—Maintenance Mspecs/OpSpecs.

C. Document the Task. File all supporting paperwork in the operator/applicant’s office file.

3-3795 FUTURE ACTIVITIES. Normal surveillance.


05/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0




CHAPTER 43 EVALUATE CONTINUOUS AIRWORTHINESS MAINTENANCE PROGRAM/REVISION

Section 1 Evaluating a CAMP Program


A. Maintenance: 3330, 3341.

B. Avionics: 5330, 5341.

3-3867 OBJECTIVE. This chapter provides guidance for evaluating a Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Program (CAMP) developed by an operator/applicant subject to Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 121 or 135, or a fractional program manager (hereafter referred to as the program manager) under part 91 subpart K.

3-3868 GENERAL. A CAMP combines the maintenance and inspection functions used to fulfill an operator/applicant’s or program manager’s total maintenance needs. The regulations specify that each operator/applicant or program manager must have a maintenance program adequate to perform the work and a separate inspection program adequate to perform required inspections.

A. Definitions.

1) Airworthiness. A condition in which the aircraft, airframe, engine, propeller, accessories, and appliances meet their type design and are in a condition for safe operation.

2) Inspection. The routine performance of inspection tasks at prescribed intervals. The inspection must ensure the airworthiness of an aircraft up to and including its overhaul or lifelimits.

3) Scheduled (Routine) Maintenance. The performance of maintenance tasks at prescribed intervals.

4) Unscheduled (Non-Routine) Maintenance. The performance of maintenance tasks when mechanical irregularities occur. These irregularities are categorized as to whether or not they occur during flight time.

5) Structural Inspection. A detailed inspection of the airframe structure that may require special inspection techniques to determine the continuous integrity of the airframe and its related parts.

B. Program Requirements. Basic requirements of a CAMP include the following:

• Inspection,

05/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0

113

• Scheduled maintenance, • Unscheduled maintenance, • Overhaul and repair, • Structural inspection, • Required Inspection Items (RII), • Continuing Analysis and Surveillance System (CASS), and • Outsourcing maintenance.

C. Manuals. Instructions and standards for unscheduled maintenance should be in the operator/program manager/applicant’s technical manuals. The manuals must contain procedures to be followed when using these manuals and recording scheduled and unscheduled maintenance.

D. Operations Specifications (OpSpecs)/ Management Specifications (MSpecs). CAMPs are authorized according to the OpSpecs for certificate holders and MSpecs for fractional ownership programs. These OpSpecs/MSpecs describe the scope of the program and reference manuals and other technical data. Details of the program must be included in the operator/program manager/applicant’s manual.

MSpecs apply only to those operations conducted under part 91 subpart K. All other operators must use OpSpecs.

E. Operator/Program Manager/Applicant’s Organization. The operator/program manager/applicant must have an organization adequate to carry out the provisions of the CAMP. If the work is to be performed outside of the operator/program manager/applicant’s organization, the contractor must meet the same requirements. In determining the adequacy of the organization, the following must be considered:

• The complexity of the organization, • The aircraft, • The experience of the personnel, and • The number of personnel.

3-3869 INSPECTIONS.

A. Applicability. During the original certification process of an operator/program manager/applicant, the aviation safety inspector (ASI) should ensure that the CAMP is applicable to the operation in question. To do so, the ASI will inform the operator/program manager/applicant of the relevant policies, procedures, and requirements of the regulations. This is also true during the process for issuing MSpecs to a program manager.

B. Scheduling. The operator/program manager/ applicant and the ASI should develop a plan to determine a schedule for submitting required documents.

1) Scheduled Maintenance. Maintenance tasks performed at prescribed intervals are considered scheduled maintenance. Some of these tasks are performed concurrently with

05/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0



inspection tasks and may be included on the same work form. Work forms that include maintenance instructions must be provided for a record of the accomplishment of these tasks.

a) Scheduled tasks include replacement of life-limited items and components requiring periodic overhaul, special nondestructive inspections (such as X-rays), and checks or tests for on-condition items, lubrications, and weighing aircraft.

b) Prime factors considered for inspection intervals are aircraft use, environmental conditions, and the type of operation. Examples include changes in temperature, frequency of landings and takeoffs, operation in areas of high industrial pollutants, and passenger or cargo operations.

c) To ensure proper maintenance, each inspection interval must be stated in terms of calendar times, cycles, and hours, as required.

2) Unscheduled Maintenance. Unscheduled maintenance takes place when mechanical irregularities occur.

a) Mechanical Irregularities Occurring During Flight Time (Block-to-Block). These include operational failures and malfunctions and abnormal flight operations, such as hard or overweight landings. The aircraft maintenance record, required by part 91, § 91.1439, part 121, §§ 121.563 and 121.701, and part 135, § 135.65, must be used to record each irregularity and its corrective action.

b) Mechanical Irregularities Not Occurring During Flight Time. These include all other failures, malfunctions, and discrepancies, including, but not limited to, inspection findings. A discrepancy form or equivalent system must be used to record each irregularity and its corrective action.

C. Types of Maintenance.

1) Overhaul and Repair (Airframe, Engine, Propeller, and Appliance). Maintenance for these items, whether scheduled or unscheduled, may be independent from maintenance performed on the aircraft. The operator/program manager/applicant must provide instructions and standards for repair and overhaul, and a method of approving and recording the work. Appropriate life-limited parts replacement requirements should be included in this portion of a CAMP.

2) Structural Inspection.

a) Each level of inspection must be clearly defined in the operator/program manager/ applicant’s CAMP. For example, a specific area of the aircraft may require only a visual inspection during pre-flight “A” and “B” checks, but will require a detailed X-ray or Zyglo inspection in the same area for a “C” or “D” check.

b) Some aircraft are subject to a supplemental structural inspection document, which requires additional age-related structural inspections to be incorporated into the maintenance program.

05/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0

115

D. Requirements. If a certificated operator or program manager proposes changes to the CAMP, the ASI must determine the impact of the revision on the program. Because CAMPs vary, depending on the operator/program manager/applicant’s complexity of operation, the ASI must become familiar with all of the pertinent technical and regulatory aspects of the program.

E. Return to Service. Through the provisions of 14 CFR part 43, either part 121 or 135 operators using a CAMP are considered maintenance organizations. As such, they are authorized to approve aircraft and/or equipment for return to service and are responsible for meeting the requirements of part 43, § 43.13. Program managers are not maintenance organizations and do not have the privileges of a certificated organization, although they may have related organizations, such as repair stations that are certificated.

1) The persons exercising certificate privileges have always had the responsibility to show compliance with regulatory requirements and to make a determination of conformance and safety. The need to ensure that a replacement part was produced by a Federal Aviation Administration (FAA)-approved source is therefore critical.

2) Principal inspectors (PI), during the process of certification and surveillance, must ensure that the operator/program manager/applicant fully understands § 43.13 and the following resulting responsibilities:

• Showing that any/all parts and/or materials used, from any source, are airworthy (i.e., conform to type design);

• That such parts are equal to the original or properly altered condition; and • That parts and materials have been maintained properly.

3) Additionally, the PI must ensure that the operator/program manager/applicant’s manual contains adequate procedures at the incoming inspection to determine the compliance with § 43.13, prior to the material being stocked or used.

F. Part 135 (Nine or Less) Operators. An operator with a CAMP must maintain its aircraft according to that program. This includes aircraft of nine or less passengers maintained under an operator’s CAMP in accordance with § 135.411(b).

G. Maintenance Performed for Other Operators. An operator maintaining their aircraft under a CAMP under part 121 or 135 may also perform maintenance for another certificate holder under the same 14 CFR part. Such maintenance must be performed in accordance with that certificate holder’s CAMP, including aircraft of nine or less passenger seats. However, an operator under part 135 is NOT authorized to perform maintenance for an operator under part 121, and vice versa.

Although program managers may use a CAMP, they are not authorized to perform maintenance for other program managers unless they also hold an appropriate certificate, such as a repair station certificate or a mechanic’s certificate. Having approval to use a CAMP does not give them the same privilege to perform maintenance that an air carrier certificated under part 121 or part 135 has.

05/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0



3-3870 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM. The maintenance program must incorporate a set of procedures that ensures the following:

• Maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations performed by air carriers or by other persons/organizations (outsourcing maintenance) are performed according to the operator’s or program manager’s manual;

• Competent personnel and adequate facilities/equipment are provided for the proper performance of maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations

• Each aircraft released to service is airworthy; • Airworthiness inspections and RII are performed per the operator’s manual, by

qualified personnel; and • A system is in place that addresses how specific RII are developed, controlled, and

reviewed to ensure the continued airworthiness of aircraft.

Although operators are not required to base their maintenance inspection programs on original equipment manufacturers’ (OEM) programs, Principal Inspectors should utilize the Maintenance Review Board Report (MRBR) and Maintenance Planning Document (MPD) for the pertinent aircraft, as a basis for reviewing a new entrant carrier’s initial program, as well as revisions to an existing program.

A. Airworthiness Inspections. Section 121.135(b)(19) and similar provisions of part 135 and part 91 subpart K stipulate that each operator/program manager’s manual must discuss airworthiness inspections, including instructions covering procedures, standards, responsibilities, and authority of inspection personnel. The methods and procedures established by the manual must be followed as prescribed by § 121.367 and § 135.427. Items not designated as RII will also be inspected according to the manual’s instructions.

B. RII. Sections 91.1427(b)(2), 121.369(b)(2), and 135.427(b)(2) discuss the designation of maintenance and alteration work that must be inspected.

1) The manual must contain a designation of the items of maintenance and alteration that must be inspected. These will include, at a minimum, those items that could result in failure, malfunction, or defect, endangering the safe operation of the aircraft if maintenance is not performed properly or if improper parts or materials are used. Each operator must evaluate its work program to identify RII. Such items may be identified with the abbreviation “RII,” an asterisk, or any similar method.

2) In determining the work items that are to be categorized as RII, the operator or program manager should consider the importance of the following:

• Installation, rigging, and adjustments of flight control; • Installation and repair of major structural components; • Installation of aircraft engines, propellers, and rotors; and • Overhaul, calibration, or rigging of components such as engines, propellers,

transmissions, gearboxes, and navigation equipment.

05/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0

117

3-3871 INSPECTION ORGANIZATION. Each operator/program manager must have an organization adequate to perform required inspections. The performance of required inspections must be organized so as to separate the required inspection functions from other maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alteration functions. Section 91.1423(b) requires that if the program manager maintains its aircraft under a CAMP, each organization with which the program manager arranges to perform the work must also have an adequate organization to perform the work.

A. Personnel Considerations. The operator/applicant or program manager must maintain a current listing of persons qualified to inspect its RII. Where such maintenance is performed by other organizations, the operator must determine that the contractor maintains such a list. Each individual must be identified by name, occupational title, and the RII that individual is authorized to inspect.

1) To comply with these requirements, the operator/program manager’s personnel roster (or the contractor’s roster) may be used. This roster should include a method for positive identification of those who are trained, qualified, authorized, certificated, and current.

2) Authorized individuals may be informed by letter or by a list showing the extent of their responsibilities, authorities, and inspection limitations. If a list is used, it should be signed by each authorized individual to confirm that the authorized person is fully aware of any inspection limitations.

B. Maintenance and Inspections. The separation of the operator’s maintenance organization from the inspection organization applies to required inspection items.

3-3872 OUTSOURCING MAINTENANCE.

A. Sections 121.367(a) and 135.425(a) require that all maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations performed by other persons be performed in accordance with the air carrier’s manual. Air carriers must detail in their manuals the policies, procedures, instructions, and methods for the accomplishment of all outsourced maintenance. Outsourcing of maintenance can be accomplished at many different levels. From line maintenance and on-call maintenance to component/accessory repairs to the accomplishment of heavy maintenance checks and substantial maintenance, outsourcing of maintenance is an integral component of every air carrier’s CAMP.

B. To determine if the air carrier has the appropriate policies, procedures, instructions, and methods of performing outsourcing maintenance refer to Order 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 42, Section 1, Evaluate Part 121/135 (10 or More) Outsource Maintenance Arrangement.


A. Prerequisites:

• Knowledge of the regulatory requirements of parts 91, 121, and 135, as applicable; and

05/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Successful completion of the Airworthiness Inspector Indoctrination course(s), or equivalent.

B. Coordination. This task must be coordinated between Airworthiness ASIs, Operations ASIs, and regional specialists.


A. References:

• Maintenance Review Board Document, • 14 CFR parts 43, 65, 91, and 145, • Appropriate current advisory circulars (AC), (e.g., AC 120-16, Air Carrier

Maintenance Program), and • ATOS Elements: 1.3.1, 1.3.2.

B. Forms. FAA Form 8400-8, Operations Specifications.

C. Job Aids. Job Task Analysis (JTA): 3.3.41.

3-3875 PROCEDURES.

A. Brief the Operator/Program Manager/ Applicant. Provide the operator/program manager/applicant with the applicable ACs and advise him or her of the current policies and regulatory requirements.

B. Review the Schedule of Events. If this task is performed as a part of an original certification, review the schedule of events to ensure that this task can be accomplished within the schedule.

C. Evaluate the Organization Documentation. The CAMP must contain the following:

1) A complete description of the operator/program manager/applicant’s organization as it relates to the program, including the duties and responsibilities of the relevant individuals.

2) A list of persons with whom the operator/program manager/applicant has arranged for the performance of any work, along with a general description of that work.

3) A proper separation of maintenance and inspection functions for the performance of required inspections.

D. Evaluate the Inspection and Maintenance Programs. The CAMP must contain inspection and maintenance procedures for the performance of maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations. These procedures must, at a minimum, include the following:

1) The method of performing routine and non-routine maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations.

05/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0

119

2) A list of designated items that must be inspected.

3) The method for performing required inspections.

4) A system that addresses how specific required inspections are developed, controlled, and reviewed to ensure the continued airworthiness of aircraft.

5) The method of designating personnel performing required inspections by occupational title, name, and authorization.

6) Procedures for the reinspection of work performed as a result of previous required inspection findings (buy-back procedures).

7) Procedures, standards, and limits necessary for required inspections, including identifying RII within work forms or job cards.

8) Procedures for the periodic inspection and calibration of precision tools, measuring devices, and test equipment.

9) Procedures for maintaining records and control of the inspections and calibrations.

10) Procedures to ensure that all required inspections are performed.

11) Instructions to prevent any person who has performed any item of work from performing any required inspection of that work.

12) Instructions and procedures to prevent any decision of an inspector regarding any required inspection from being countermanded. Only supervisory personnel of the inspection unit or an administrative person with overall responsibility for both the required inspection and other maintenance and alteration functions can override an inspector’s decision.

13) Procedures to ensure that required inspections, maintenance, and alterations that are left incomplete as a result of a work interruption are properly completed before the aircraft is returned to service.

14) Work forms, job cards, and detailed procedures for performing inspections and other maintenance.

15) The necessary policies, procedures, instructions, and methods for the performance of outsourcing maintenance (ref. vol. 3, ch. 42).

E. Evaluate the Maintenance Records/System. The CAMP must contain a maintenance recordkeeping system. The operator/program manager/applicant must meet the requirements of §§ 91.1113, 121.380, and 135.439. In addition, the operator must have a system for the retention and retrieval of maintenance records to provide the following:

• A description of the work performed;

05/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• The name of the person performing the work and/or the name of the organization if other than the operator/program manager/applicant;

• The name of the person approving the work; and • Transfer maintenance records from outsource maintenance providers to the air

carrier.

F. Evaluate Personnel. The CAMP must contain the following:

• Procedures to determine the qualifications of personnel, including management and supervisory personnel;

• Procedures to ensure that only persons who currently are appropriately certificated, properly trained, authorized, and qualified perform any required inspections;

• Instructions to ensure that those persons performing required inspections are under the control of the inspection unit; and

• Instructions to relieve any person performing maintenance for a period of at least 24 hours per a 7 day period, or the equivalent thereof, within any calendar-month. (This is a part 121 requirement only.)

G. Evaluate the Structural Inspection Procedures. This part of the CAMP must include the following:

• Corrosion control procedures; • A detailed inspection of areas where maintenance is being performed to detect

cracks, distortion, and corrosion, to examine attachment of parts, and to determine the condition of the area; and

• Maintenance Review Board/ manufacturer’s routine structural inspection requirements.

H. Analyze the Findings.

1) Evaluate all deficiencies to determine what, if any, corrective actions will be required.

2) If the CAMP has deficiencies, schedule a meeting with the operator/program manager/applicant to discuss needed program changes and deficiency resolutions.


A. Complete PTRS Record.

B. Complete the Task. Successful completion of this task will result in the following:

1) When all requirements for the program have been met, accept and authorize the use of the program by issuing OpSpecs/MSpecs in accordance with Volume 3, Chapter 18, Operations Specifications, or part 91 subpart K, § 91.1015.

05/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0

121

2) Providing the operator/program manager/applicant with the original CAMP, with instructions to provide a copy of the program to the certificate-holding district office (CHDO).

C. Document The Task. File all supporting paperwork in the operator/program manager/ applicant’s office file.



05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0




CHAPTER 44 ASSESS CONTINUING ANALYSIS AND SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM FOR PARTS 121 AND 135

Section 1 Evaluating an Air Carrier’s CASS

3-3891 PROGRAM TRACKING AND REPORTING SUBSYSTEM (PTRS) AND AIR TRANSPORTATION OVERSIGHT SYSTEM (ATOS) ACTIVITIES.

A. Maintenance:

• New: 3333. • Revision: 3334. • Surveillance: 3635.

B. Avionics:

• New: 5333. • Revision: 5334. • Surveillance: 5635.

C. ATOS. ATOS Safety Attribute Inspection (SAI) or Element Performance Inspection (EPI) Data Collection Tool (DCT), as appropriate, for the CASS element 1.3.11.

3-3892 OBJECTIVE. This section provides guidance and information on the design, implementation, functions, and other considerations of an air carrier’s Continuing Analysis and Surveillance System (CASS).

3-3893 GENERAL.

A. Regulatory Requirements. Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 121, § 121.373 and part 135, § 135.431 require an air carrier operating under part 121 or 135 to establish and maintain a CASS. These sections also allow the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) to require revisions to an operator’s maintenance program based on deficiencies or irregularities revealed by the CASS.

B. Background.

1) The FAA implemented the regulatory requirement for a CASS in 1964 in response to safety concerns and discoveries of systemic weaknesses in the maintenance programs of some air carriers. These concerns were identified during accident investigations and FAA surveillance activities accomplished during the 1950s. The FAA introduced CASS as an element of a Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Program (CAMP) that contained other elements such as a manual, an adequate maintenance organization, a maintenance recordkeeping system, Required Inspection Items (RII), and more.

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



2) A CASS is required for air carriers operating under parts 121 and § 135.411(a)(2) applicability. CASS is a safety management tool that permits air carriers to identify and understand maintenance program deficiencies well enough to develop and implement permanent solutions for those discrepancies. CASS is a keystone of an air carrier’s ability to produce airworthy aircraft on a consistent basis.

C. Definitions.

1) Authority. The power to design or change fundamental policy or procedures without having to seek a higher-level management approval. Authority is a permission; it is a right coupled with an autonomous power to accomplish certain acts or order others to act. Often, one person grants another authority to act as an employer to an employee, a corporation to its officers, or as a governmental empowerment to perform certain functions.

2) Carried Out by the Certificate Holder or Other Person. The certificate holder must maintain operational control over maintenance that any person performs on its aircraft. Operational control includes independently determining the scope and type of maintenance that may be required, when to accomplish that maintenance, and if the maintenance was done in accordance with its manual and program, regardless of who accomplished the maintenance.

3) Continuing Analysis and Surveillance (CAS). The elements of the system are always working. For example, continuing surveillance means someone is always looking and collecting information. Continuing analysis means that someone is always analyzing the information that is always being collected.

4) Correction. An action that is designed to eliminate or mitigate a deficiency that has been identified within one of the nine maintenance program elements.

5) Deficiency. A condition which is insufficient or incomplete, or where something required is lacking. In CASS, it is something that is missing from the air carrier maintenance program that should be there, or it is something that is there but not producing the desired results. Alternatively, it could indicate the maintenance program documentation is not being followed. For example, a program element that has failed and is not working, or a program element that has faults and is not working as it should are deficiencies.

6) Effective. Producing or capable of producing a result. The maintenance program is producing the desired results:

• Airworthy aircraft, • Competent personnel, and • Adequate facilities.

7) Establish and Maintain. To establish means that the air carrier develops a CASS that is appropriate for the type and scope of its operation. To maintain means that the air carrier keeps its CASS current and appropriate in response to changes in the type and scope of its operation.

05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



8) Inspection Program and the Program Covering Other Maintenance, Preventive Maintenance, and Alterations. The air carrier maintenance program outlined in § 121.367 and other sections of part 121, subpart L, and described in some detail in the current edition of Advisory Circular (AC) 120-16, Air Carrier Maintenance Programs.

9) Maintenance. Inspection, overhaul, repair, preservation, and the replacement of parts, excluding preventive maintenance.

10) Performance. The act of doing something successfully; the successful execution of an action. In CASS, performance means that the maintenance program is being accomplished or executed as outlined in the air carrier manual.

11) Person. An individual, firm, partnership, corporation, company, association, joint-stock association, or governmental entity. It includes a trustee, receiver, assignee, or similar representative of any of them.

12) Program. An organized list of procedures.

13) Responsibility. The obligation to ensure that a task or function is successfully carried out. Responsibility includes accounting for actions related to the task or function. This is a key attribute of operational control.

14) Risk. Risk is the degree of probability that hurt, injury, or loss will occur over a specific period of time or number of operational cycles. Risk has two elements, severity and likelihood.

a) Severity is the harm that will be inflicted if an unsafe event happens.

b) Likelihood is a qualitative expression of the probability that a specific unsafe event will occur.

15) System. A functionally related group of elements. In CASS, the elements are:

• Surveillance, • Analysis, • Performance, • Effectiveness, • Corrective action, and • Followup.

3-3894 OVERVIEW OF A CASS.

A. What CASS Does. CASS functions as an air carrier safety management tool that includes continuous and methodical monitoring and evaluation of an air carrier maintenance program. An air carrier’s CASS uses a continuous, system safety-based, closed-loop cycle of surveillance, data collection and analysis, corrective action, and monitoring/followup to continually evaluate the performance and effectiveness of the maintenance program. Through CASS, the air carrier ensures that it is performing the right maintenance at the right time and that

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



the intended results are produced. CASS is one of the tools an air carrier uses to exercise operational control over maintenance activities conducted on its aircraft.

B. How CASS Does It. CASS enables an air carrier to detect and correct discrepancies in all elements of its maintenance program by proactively looking for indicators and symptoms of deficiencies and reactively looking at the results of deficiencies. CASS monitors maintenance program performance and effectiveness through a closed-loop system of four major activities:

• Surveillance, • Data analysis, • Corrective action, and • Monitoring/followup.

1) Surveillance. The air carrier conducts surveillance so it can gather information and conduct analysis that is used to evaluate all elements of its program (including its maintenance providers) from two different perspectives: performance and effectiveness.

a) Surveillance to verify performance involves the use of audits, specifically work-in-progress audits, that are used to make sure the manual and program are being followed.

b) Surveillance to verify effectiveness involves the collection and analysis of operational data and aircraft systems failure data so that the air carrier can make conclusions about the degree of effectiveness of the maintenance program.

2) Data Collection and Analysis. Data collection and analysis is the identification of system deficiencies in an air carrier’s maintenance program through analysis of the various kinds of data that the air carrier has chosen to collect. Data collection and analysis is also used to verify an acceptable level of program performance or effectiveness.

a) A major analytical process that CASS uses to accomplish this function is Root Cause Analysis (RCA). Stated very simply, RCA is a methodology for finding and correcting the most central cause of the occurrence of a discrepancy. RCA differs from troubleshooting and problem solving in that these processes typically seek to resolve a specific discrepancy, while RCA is focused on identification of the underlying issues (i.e., root causes; why the discrepancy occurred in the first place).

b) The performance (program execution) surveillance and analysis function of CASS is carried out through the accomplishment of work-in-progress audits and the analysis of audit data. These audits examine the actual accomplishment of the activities and tasks of a maintenance program element relative to the standard (i.e., the air carrier manual and the maintenance program). Accomplishment of audits and analysis of audit data measure program execution.

c) The effectiveness (intended results produced) surveillance and analysis function of CASS is carried out through the collection and analysis of operational data. Collection and analysis of operational data allow the air carrier to measure the output of the

05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



maintenance program relative to its objectives. Collection and analysis of data the aircraft operations generate measure maintenance program results.

3) Corrective Action. CASS finds deficiencies through analysis of the audit and operational data that it collects. CASS conducts RCA to identify the causal factor(s) for any identified discrepancy. Following the identification of a discrepancy, the next step is to address it. A comprehensive corrective action is a strategy designed to deal with an identified deficiency. However, not all deficiencies will require corrective action. For example, a number of mechanical delays or cancellations may be acceptable in the eyes of the air carrier. This can be acceptable as long as safety is not compromised.

4) Monitoring/Followup. Monitoring/followup is the very important function that ensures the corrective action has been implemented and it has addressed or is addressing the deficiency. Monitoring/followup ensures the corrective action accomplishes what the air carrier intended it to do. Monitoring/followup connects the closed loop back to surveillance.

C. CASS in an Air Carrier’s Operation. An air carrier should tailor its CASS to its individual operation. Therefore, to a large degree, what CASS looks like will depend on the design of the maintenance organization and the size, complexity, and the level of flight operations of that air carrier.

1) The basic CASS functions are always the same, but the personnel who carry out each function and the manner in which the functions are carried out will be different from one air carrier to another.

2) For example, an air carrier with a high level of daily aircraft utilization and a very large fleet of many different kinds of aircraft may have a separate department dedicated to performing CASS activities. An air carrier with a fleet of 25 aircraft, operating seasonally or weekly may find it more efficient to use its quality assurance (QA) department to perform CASS activities. A part 135 on-demand operator with few employees and one or two aircraft having an average annual utilization of less than 1,000 hours may outsource most of its CASS activities.

3) Regardless of the air carrier’s size and level of flight operations, a well-structured CASS helps an air carrier exercise operational control over maintenance activities. This involves taking a systems approach to enhancing safety and eliminating deficiencies as well as systematically determining the level of performance and effectiveness of its maintenance program. This is a key to achieving operations with the highest possible degree of safety as well as a very high degree of efficiency.

D. What CASS Examines. CASS monitors all nine elements of the air carrier’s maintenance program. CASS accounts for the consequences of various internal and external influences on the maintenance program. The following are examples of some, but not all, of the items within each element that CASS looks at. You should note that all of these items are predisposed to surveillance of the maintenance program performance function of CASS. This is accomplished through audits. However, in addition to real time events such as accidents/incidents, CASS will address effectiveness discrepancies that are identified through collection and analysis of operational data (i.e., RCA).

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



1) Airworthiness Responsibility.

a) Air carriers are primarily responsible for performance of maintenance, including work done by maintenance providers on its aircraft. All maintenance, including work done by outside persons, must be done in accordance with the air carrier’s maintenance program and maintenance manual.

b) An air carrier certificate makes the certificate holder a maintenance entity. Each person who accomplishes maintenance on a certificate holder’s aircraft does so on behalf of the certificate holder as an agent for the certificate holder. Consistent with the privileges and limitations of its air carrier certificate, air carriers, through their maintenance organization, are responsible for executing operational control over maintenance activities anyone accomplishes on its aircraft. Such activities include determining when maintenance is required, what maintenance is required, accomplishing the maintenance, determining if the maintenance was done satisfactorily, and approving its aircraft for return to service. Consistent with the regulations, an air carrier certificate holder may not delegate this responsibility to outside persons.

2) Maintenance Manuals. CASS ensures that:

a) The content of all manuals, including maintenance manuals and technical content, is the responsibility of the air carrier. The manuals may be based on the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) manuals or other information, but the air carrier is required to use its own manual, not the OEM manuals.

b) Manuals, publications, and forms are useable, current, correct, and readily available to all personnel who are required to use them.

c) Each person who is required to comply with the air carrier’s manual has access to it during performance of normal duties.

3) Maintenance Organization.

a) Consistent with the responsibility described above, air carriers have a maintenance organization that is able to effectively exercise and maintain operational control over all persons performing, supervising, managing, and amending the maintenance program. The maintenance organization must be able to manage and guide its maintenance personnel and provide the direction necessary to achieve overall maintenance program objectives.

b) In order to be effective, an adequate maintenance organization will have the following four characteristics as a foundation of its basic organizational duties and responsibilities:

• Defines the environment within which individuals conduct their tasks, • Defines the policies and procedures that individuals must follow and

respect, • Allocates the resources that individuals need in order to achieve safety and

production goals, and

05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Investigates system failures and takes all needed remedial action to avoid a repetition.

c) A maintenance organization will become ineffective if the following failures occur:

• Failure to understand the effect of people on safety and reliability of aircraft maintenance operations,

• Failure to organize its employees’ work, • Failure to monitor its employees’ work effectively, and • Failure to implement corrective actions.

d) The individual with overall maintenance program authority and responsibility is the Director of Maintenance (DOM) who functions as the accountable manager for the maintenance program. This individual must be clearly identified within the organization and must be qualified in accordance with part 119, §§ 119.65 and 119.67(c) or §§ 119.69 and 119.71(e), as appropriate. While retaining overall authority and responsibility, the accountable manager may delegate responsibility for elements of the program as appropriate for its size and structure.

e) The air carrier manual must contain a chart or a description of the maintenance organization showing clear authority and responsibility, including delegated responsibility, for the overall maintenance program and all of its elements and functions. The air carrier should include a description of each person’s duties and responsibilities in its maintenance manual so that there is not a fragmented organizational system with high risk of confusion over who is responsible for a given task.

f) The performance of the RII function(s) must be organizationally separated from the performance of the other maintenance (including inspection), preventive maintenance, and alteration functions. This organizational separation must be below the level of the individual who has primary responsibility for the RII function, other maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations functions. In simple terms, this means that the part of the maintenance organization that accomplishes the maintenance (including inspection), preventive maintenance, and alterations function cannot be the same part of the maintenance organization that accomplishes your RII function.

4) Maintenance Schedule. This sets out the appropriate item, task, and interval of the air carrier’s scheduled maintenance effort. The FAA expects the air carrier’s maintenance schedule to be task based and appropriately modified in accordance with the CASS data collection and analysis findings. The initial selection and the continuous validation of each scheduled maintenance task and its associated interval is accomplished according to well defined criteria throughout the service life of the item, system, or structure.

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



5) RIIs.

a) The air carrier has specific procedures, standards, and limits necessary for the acceptance or rejection of each RII and for periodic inspection and calibration of precision tools, measuring devices, and test equipment.

b) Personnel who are authorized to accomplish RII inspections are properly trained and qualified for each RII task they are authorized to perform.

c) Designated RII inspectors who perform an item of work do not perform the required inspection on that item.

d) The structure of the maintenance organization is designed to organizationally separate the accomplishment of the required inspection function from the accomplishment of the other maintenance, including other inspection, preventive maintenance, and alteration functions.

e) The manual contains procedures to ensure that only supervisory personnel of an inspection unit or the person who has overall responsibility for the RII function as well as the other maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alteration functions may countermand the decision of any RII inspector regarding an RII.

6) Contract Maintenance. Vendors and suppliers are qualified and provide services and products according to the air carrier's maintenance program and manual. There should be little difference between the way work is done by air carrier personnel or by contract maintenance providers.

7) Personnel Training.

a) Personnel, including those of contract maintenance providers, are competent to accomplish their duties.

b) The air carrier has a training program for personnel (including inspection personnel and contract maintenance provider personnel) that determine the adequacy of accomplished maintenance. The program ensures that these personnel are fully informed about procedures, techniques, and new equipment in use, and that they are competent to perform their duties.

8) Accomplishment and Approval of Maintenance and Inspection.

a) Maintenance facilities and equipment, including base and line stations as well as contract maintenance providers’ facilities and equipment are adequate to perform the maintenance.

b) Parts and components are properly stored, dispensed, identified, and handled.

c) Tools and equipment are properly calibrated.

05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



d) Requirements for specialized tools or training are identified and the tools are provided.

e) Maintenance and alterations are performed according to methods, standards, and techniques specified in the air carrier’s manuals.

f) Work interruptions and deferred maintenance are properly documented in shift turnover records and accomplished according to applicable procedures.

g) Major repairs and major alterations are properly classified and accomplished with approved technical data.

h) Log entries and Airworthiness Release Forms are executed by appropriately certificated mechanics or repairmen who are authorized by the air carrier to do so.

i) Log entries and Airworthiness Release Forms are completed according to the air carrier's written policies and procedures.

9) Maintenance Recordkeeping System.

a) Maintenance records and current status records are generated and retained in accordance with the air carrier's manual procedures.

b) Maintenance records and current status records are complete and correct.

c) Airworthiness Directives (AD) are appropriately evaluated, accomplished, and tracked.

d) Life-limited parts are identified and the current status time in service is tracked.

10) CASS.

a) CASS has four major activities that ensure, with a system-oriented, structured approach, that all elements of the air carrier maintenance program are properly executed and are consistently effective by design rather than by chance.

b) Senior management reviews CASS issues on a regularly scheduled basis. Meetings of CASS or maintenance management committees or boards are also held on a regular basis to discuss findings, analysis, and the progress of corrective actions. These meetings may address events, as well as statistical data and trends.

E. Four Major Activities of CASS. The regulations require that CASS accomplish surveillance and analysis of the air carrier maintenance program from two perspectives: performance and effectiveness. The first two steps in the CASS process (surveillance and analysis) are carried out in two different ways. One is primarily based on auditing, while the other is primarily based on operational data collection and analysis. The results of these two

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



types of surveillance and analysis feed into the third and fourth basic CASS activities (corrective action and followup). Table 3-124 summarizes the flow of the four basic steps of a CASS.

Table 3-124, The CASS Process

VERIFY PERFORMANCE OF INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

VERIFY EFFECTIVENESS OF INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

1. Surveillance: Audit process. __Create an audit plan based on risk assessment. __Perform transaction audits. __Perform systems evaluation. __Identify hazards.

1. Surveillance: Data collection process. __Select data sets. __Collect operational data. __Collect equipment failure data. __Note trends, anomalies, and potential hazards.

2. Analysis: Accomplish hazard risk assessment and preliminary RCA.

2. Analysis: Investigate adverse indicators; accomplish risk assessment and preliminary RCA.

3. Corrective Action: Complete final RCA, develop corrective action options, risk assessment, decision-making, and develop and implement a corrective action plan. 4. Followup (Performance Measurement): Monitor corrective action implementation, verify the corrective action is effective, and initiate risk based followup surveillance planning.

F. How CASS Monitors Maintenance Program Performance. The program performance part of CASS ensures that everyone, including all of the air carrier’s maintenance providers, comply with the air carrier’s manual and program and with all applicable regulations and statutes.

1) Generally, the program execution part of CASS functions through a system of scheduled audits and investigations of operational events. The air carrier should consider each negative audit and each operational event as an indicator or symptom of a program or systemic failure. Each one should be evaluated. However, depending on the results of the evaluation, every symptom or indicator may not require corrective action.

2) The program execution part of CASS should include a continuous cycle of both scheduled and unscheduled (proactive and reactive) surveillance and investigations, data collection and analysis, corrective action and monitoring and feedback.

G. How CASS Monitors Maintenance Program Effectiveness. The program effectiveness part of CASS ensures that the maintenance program is producing the desired results. Primary indicators of the level of maintenance program effectiveness are:

• The level of unscheduled maintenance, and • The rate of availability of the aircraft for use in air transportation.

05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



1) Generally, the program effectiveness part of CASS functions through a system of data collection and analysis of operational data that results from operation of the aircraft. Operational data and equipment failure data should be collected that measures the output (results) of the maintenance program.

2) Since one of the primary objectives of a maintenance program is to produce airworthy aircraft for operations in air transportation, data sets such as the rate of aircraft availability, the rate of unscheduled landings, and the rate of schedule and dispatch reliability are useful for this purpose. This data can be collected in relation to a particular aircraft or a particular fleet.

3) While the FAA does not mandate the specific data an operator should collect, the FAA does expect an operator to have an effective process that is designed to select appropriate, relevant, and useful types of data that is collected. This data selection process should also ensure that any data collected is useful for its intended purpose. Moreover, a periodic review of the type of data collected ensures that the data that is collected remains appropriate, relevant, and useful.


A. Prerequisites:

• Knowledge of the requirements of parts 119, 121 and/or 135. • Successful completion of the Air Carrier Airworthiness Inspectors Indoctrination

Course. • Successful completion of FAA25712, Air Carrier Continuing Analysis and

Surveillance System.

B. Coordination. This task may require coordination between the principal maintenance inspector (PMI) and the principal avionics inspector (PAI).



• AC 120-16, Air Carrier Maintenance Programs. • AC 120-79, Developing and Implementing a Continuous Analysis and

Surveillance Program. • FAA Order 8040.4, Safety Risk Management.

B. Forms. None.

C. Job Aids. None.

3-3897 VERIFY THE CASS ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE.

A. Surveillance of the Performance of Maintenance Programs. Identify the positions within the company that have authority and responsibility for CASS. The definitions below have

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



meaning within the context of an air carrier’s organization. Consistent with existing regulations, there should be a chart or description of the CASS organization in the air carrier’s manual.

1) Authority is the power to create or modify fundamental policy or procedures without higher level review or approval. Authority also means the power to accomplish a function, as well as the power to assign responsibility for carrying out the various functions of the maintenance program. The individual with authority for the CASS may design or change the CASS without having to seek approval from a higher level of management. CASS procedures should include a process to modify or revise the CASS.

2) Responsibility is the obligation, with attendant accountability, for ensuring tasks and functions are successfully accomplished in accordance with applicable policies, procedures, and standards. This work may be accomplished directly by the individual with the responsibility, or the responsibility for the work may be delegated. The individual with responsibility for the CASS has the obligation to carry out the functions of the CASS, including overseeing and managing any personnel to whom responsibility for CASS functions and duties are delegated. Note that for smaller organizations where personnel share duties and may only carry out CASS functions part-time, this oversight and management responsibility relates only to those part-time tasks.

B. Authority and Responsibility.

1) An individual or position within the maintenance organization should have authority for the CASS, and an individual or position within the maintenance organization should have overall responsibility for managing and implementing the CASS. An individual may have both responsibility and authority for the CASS. That individual might also have responsibility for other functions as well as the CASS. It is common for the individual with responsibility for CASS functions to delegate some or much of this work to others within the organization, depending on the size and staffing of the operator. What the FAA expects is clear responsibility for the overall CASS functions so that there is not a fragmented system with high risk of confusion over who is responsible for a given task or function.

2) Personnel with CASS responsibilities and duties should be as independent as possible from the day-to-day operations of the maintenance program. Theoretically, the most independent, objective audits are conducted by outside agency personnel who are contracted to perform such work for the air carrier. Air carrier personnel who are conducting audits should work in separate departments from the departments performing the actual inspection and maintenance activities that are being audited. However, this is not necessarily feasible for small operators. At small operators, personnel performing CASS functions, particularly audits, may consist of one or more of the following:

a) Borrowed personnel from other shops or departments. The operator’s procedures should include ways to avoid having these individuals assigned to audit areas where they normally work.

b) The company owner or chief executive officer, particularly if there are no other employees and the CASS audits are focused on outside vendors and maintenance providers

05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



because all or most of the actual inspection and maintenance work is accomplished through contracts.

c) Outside resources contracted to perform audits and analysis for the company.

d) Others deemed qualified by the operator to provide the operator with an independent objective audit, operational data collection, and analysis services that fulfill the requirements of a CASS.

C. Risk Assessment. In concert with the attributes of a good organization, personnel and resources for CASS should be prioritized as part of the overall risk management process. Essentially, any methodology that is used to prioritize surveillance personnel and resources (as well as to formulate corrective action decisions later in the process) involves principles of risk assessment. Risk assessment is a concept applicable in many aspects of an aviation operation. See Order 8040.4 for additional information. Order 8040.4 is an example and is not the only source of risk assessment procedures; however, it provides insight into FAA expectations.

1) In an effective CASS, you should be able to identify the principles of the systematic risk assessment process that:

• Establish a plan, including the scope of the process and priorities (for example, detect and prevent noncompliance);

• Specify the areas of concern for surveillance and analysis (personnel, maintenance and inspection programs and organizations, operations, aircraft, facilities, systems);

• Identify hazards or potential threats to the operation; • Determine how likely such hazards are to be realized and actually cause harm; • Determine the severity of the consequences if the hazard is realized; • Express a combination of the likelihood and severity of harm as risk; and • Evaluate the appropriate response to the identified risk.

2) A CASS should take into account four principal potential sources of hazards:

• Personnel (hiring, capabilities, interaction), • Equipment (design, maintenance, logistics, technology), • Workplace (environment, sanitation), and • Organization (standards, procedures, controls).

3) A number of quantitative and graphical off-the-shelf tools exist to help a user determine the gradations of a risk (high, medium, or low) based on the likelihood of an unwanted event occurring and the severity of the consequences if it does occur. In the initial steps of the CASS process, the appropriate response involves setting surveillance priorities based on risk assessments aimed at maintaining compliance and safety in inspection and maintenance. A CASS risk assessment, through the feedback loop, helps to set the audit and data collection priorities. The process is best accomplished by an interdisciplinary team, guided by CASS management but involving representatives of the relevant areas.

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



3-3898 VERIFY THE CASS FUNCTIONS CONCERNING THE PERFORMANCE OF THE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM.

A. Surveillance of the Performance Maintenance Programs.

1) The main tool for surveying whether the operator and its contractors are properly performing the maintenance program is audits. For purposes of a CASS, an audit is a formal examination of the activities of a department or area of an operator’s maintenance program based on an established standard such as the applicable manual. Audits are intended to ensure operator maintenance personnel and outside maintenance providers comply with the operator’s manual, program, and all applicable requirements.

NOTE: Consistent with the “performance” part of the CASS regulation, the primary type of audit that the operator should be accomplishing is the work-in-progress audit.

2) The operator should have written procedures to guide its auditing process, including the scheduling of audits. The CASS must address both internal and external audits. Internal audits are audits the operator conducts within the company. External audits are audits the operator conducts of vendors supplying parts and services to the operator. CASS procedures should include a risk-based methodology for determining priorities and for establishing and adjusting audit cycles (for example, 12-, 18-, 24-, or 36-month cycles) so that resources are focused on the most pressing issues. This is a risk assessment and risk management process. You should note that a risk assessment and risk management process may show that a department or maintenance provider self audit is applicable and effective.

3) Although the majority of the inputs to this process would be generated internally, one additional input may be the results of outside audits of the operator or its vendors conducted by entities other than the operator. For example, the results of audits or inspections conducted by the FAA or the Department of Defense (DOD) may be useful by providing an operator with:

• Specific findings requiring RCA and possible corrective action, and • Information useful in focusing the operator’s own audits and operational data

collection.

B. Planning Audits. The operator may approach this initial scheduling task in many different ways, ranging from resource allocation based on company experience and very basic analysis to use of a sophisticated, software-supported risk analysis process. Within this range of possible methodologies, expect the operator’s CASS audit scheduling procedures to contain processes to systematically make those decisions that are compatible with the size and complexity of its operations. Encourage your operator to make this process as structured as possible. The operator should place priority first on safety and regulatory compliance, and second on issues of operational efficiency. However, an effective CASS will meet all three of these objectives.

1) To identify the areas to audit and to set priorities, the CASS process should include consideration of factors in outside reports. These factors could include inspections,

05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



reports, special studies, or audits conducted by outside entities such as the FAA, DOD, Department of Transportation (DOT), Office of the Inspector General (OIG), or National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB). Outside reports may address:

• Information specific to the operator or its vendors; • Information related to the industry as a whole and of interest to the operator;

or • Information about an accident, incident, procedure/process, or equipment type

that is relevant.

2) The operator should equip CASS auditors with checklists to ensure consistency and completeness of audits. The accountable manager responsible for the CASS should ensure the checklists are updated as needed. An auditor should also be permitted a level of flexibility to ask questions not contained in the checklist if he or she finds an area that requires further investigation.

3) An operator’s procedures should include identification of all areas that need to be audited, along with a process for updating this list. The following list presents examples of areas operators should consider for routine audit. A CASS audit should verify that:

• Manuals, publications, and forms (paper and electronic versions) are useable, up-to-date, accurate, and accessible to users when they are performing assigned duties;

• Maintenance and alterations are performed according to the methods, standards, and techniques specified in the operator’s manuals, including ensuring major repairs and alterations are properly classified and accomplished consistent with technical data approved by the Administrator;

• Parts and components are properly stored, dispensed, identified, and handled; • ADs are appropriately evaluated, accomplished, and tracked; • Maintenance records are generated in accordance with manual procedures and

are complete and correct; • RIIs are identified and addressed according to the operator’s procedures; • Section 121.709 and 135.443 Airworthiness Release Forms and Log Entries

are executed by authorized individuals according to the operator’s procedures; • Shift turnover records, work interruptions, and deferred maintenance are

accomplished according to applicable procedures; • Maintenance facilities and equipment, including base and line stations and

contract maintenance providers’ facilities, are adequate for the work that is to be done;

• Personnel, including those of contract maintenance providers, are qualified and competent to accomplish their duties;

• Tools and equipment are properly calibrated; • Requirements for specialized tools or training are met, such as for

nondestructive testing, Category II/III maintenance, and run-up/taxi; • Computer programs for the maintenance program are used in accordance with

specifications;

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Maintenance providers, vendors, and suppliers provide services and products according to the operator’s policies and procedures; and

• Each aircraft released to service is airworthy.

4) CASS audits should be primarily proactive, searching out potential problem areas before they can result in undesirable events. However, CASS procedures should also address how to direct unscheduled audits in response to events or a series of events. For example, rejected takeoffs, unscheduled landings, in-flight shutdowns, accidents, or incidents may indicate the need for special audits or surveillance under a CASS. One of the primary purposes of a CASS is to detect and analyze trends for indications of program weaknesses or deficiencies. For example, CASS auditors would not necessarily audit a single maintenance-related rejected takeoff, although the CASS would investigate the event as part of the reactive function. A CASS would, however, consider whether that instance indicated a need to focus audits on a particular area from the trending proactive point of view.

5) Auditors and analysts should maintain informal lines of communication with personnel in the other departments so that maintenance personnel can discuss concerns they may have. Through this informal communications process, the operator can learn about potential hazards in the system. For example, the operator may learn about an event that could have occurred but, because of some intervention, did not. This event would be known to shop personnel but is otherwise difficult or impossible to detect in routine audits. With informal lines of communication open to shop personnel, a CASS may detect this near-event. You should ensure that the operator’s CASS procedures address how to encourage this type of communication and interaction.

C. Analysis of Audits.

1) Audit results should undergo risk assessment and preliminary RCA to identify a deficiency, or potential deficiency, in any aspect or element of the maintenance program. A risk assessment process tells operators where to allocate resources and helps them understand what is found. This preliminary analysis helps CASS personnel determine the level of priority the issue merits and what type of additional technical expertise may be required to complete the RCA and evaluate corrective action options.

2) RCA treats errors as defects in the system rather than in an individual. RCA looks beyond the symptom to find the organizational defect that permitted an error to occur, to correct the fundamental problem, and to prevent recurrence. The more thorough the analysis, the greater the likelihood the operator will uncover why the system deficiency occurred and how the organization can respond definitively. The process starts during the audit itself, because auditors must collect information conducive to later analysis. If a CASS is to uncover a procedural weakness, for example, information about the procedure must be collected. This should be factual and objective information, not premature judgment about root cause. RCA is a key to any complete CASS, even though procedures may vary in complexity from operator to operator.

3) The objective of the audit analysis is to allow the operator to address the problem in such a way as to avoid recurrence of the deficiencies. To the extent possible, the operator should set forth the analysis process in the CASS documentation. The analysis process should be

05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



as objective as possible to avoid any tendency to promote individual or commercial interests. The system should also place priority on finding the systemic or root cause of a program deficiency over seeking to assign personal blame, at any level of the organization, for an error.

4) Ensure that the operator’s procedures or corporate culture do not advocate the blame culture. The blame culture can have a significant negative effect on safe operations. Terminating the individual who has the blame assigned is usually not consistent with effective RCA. Operators that adopt the blame culture:

• Fix the blame and move on, • Focus on the individual(s) who made the error, • Stop short of identifying systemic problems and root causes, • Never fix the problem, and • Allow mishaps/mistakes to recur.

5) While audits are designed mainly to verify that an operator is performing maintenance in accordance with its manual, the regulations, and applicable requirements, auditors and analysts should also be alert for systemic deficiencies. That is, there may be procedures in the manual that are correctly followed, but that have become outdated, conflict with other manual procedures, or for some other reason are in need of change.

a) Auditors and analysts should be encouraged to be inquisitive and think in terms of “what if?” so that the CASS functions proactively, detecting problem areas or trends before they lead to an accident, incident, or infraction of regulations. For example, what if event x occurred in conjunction with observed condition y?

b) This approach is closely tied to the CASS analysis process but would require an analytical approach that permeates the CASS organization, from determining audit priorities and scheduling through auditing and analyzing, and including monitoring and evaluating corrective actions.

6) The audit analysis process is not as typically oriented toward quantitative analysis as the operational data analysis discussed below. However, operators may find it useful to manage the data through database or quantitative applications. Be aware that this approach does not have to be complicated or costly. The level of formality and sophistication should match the operator’s conditions.

3-3899 VERIFY THE CASS FUNCTIONS CONCERNING THE EFFECTIVENESS OF THE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM.

A. Surveillance of the Effectiveness of the Maintenance Program.

1) The main tool for assessing whether the air carrier’s maintenance program is effective is the collection of operational data (data resulting from airplane operations). This way, the output of the maintenance program can be measured. However, not all operational data or information may be useful for determining maintenance program effectiveness.

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



NOTE: Consistent with the “effectiveness” part of the CASS regulation, the primary type of effectiveness surveillance that the operator should be accomplishing is the collection of operational data.

2) A primary goal of air carrier maintenance programs is to ensure that each air carrier aircraft is airworthy at all times as well as to provide the maximum level of availability for operations in air transportation. However, in order to consistently reach these goals, the air carrier must have a means of determining if the maintenance program is producing the intended results so that the appropriate intervention may be initiated.

3) Generally speaking, at the end product level, an indicator of the effectiveness of the maintenance program is the amount of time an air carrier aircraft is not available for operations in air transportation due to issues controlled by the maintenance program. This particular effectiveness indicator can be broken down into fleet availability or individual aircraft availability, and broken down still further to the reliability of aircraft systems, subsystems, and components. In simple terms, the amount of unscheduled maintenance that reduces the availability of an air carrier aircraft for operations in air transportation is a primary indicator of whether or not the maintenance program is producing its intended results.

B. Collecting Operational Data.

1) Air carrier operational data collection systems under the CASS effectiveness activity are critical to the air carrier’s ability to determine the level of effectiveness of its maintenance program. These systems should have capabilities for collecting, storing, managing, and retrieving all types of operational data that the air carrier can use to help it determine the level of maintenance program effectiveness.

2) Current systems that collect information regarding the status of aircraft structures, systems, and engines have a wide variance ranging from simple paper systems administered manually by air carrier personnel to the very sophisticated, complex, and automatic real time data collection systems that use information collected from sensors embedded all over the aircraft. As of this writing, there are operational data collection systems planned that will manage, and sometimes repair, system faults through automatic computer activity. Newer transport category aircraft are delivered with sophisticated electronic, propulsion, flight control, and structural monitoring and data acquisition systems.

3) In recent years, an increased emphasis has been placed on using these automatic data collection capabilities, in conjunction with emerging sensor, data processing, and systems status monitoring and assessment technologies to realize real time conditions of aircraft components. While most of these automatic systems are not well defined, the goal is to use real-time flight data to detect system flaws or defects or abnormal operating conditions early enough to allow timely intervention.

4) The key thing to remember is that these new maintenance management systems are part of the continuing evolution of maintenance. They should be characterized as a new and different way of doing maintenance, not a means of eliminating maintenance. As maintenance is

05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



still being accomplished, these systems do not eliminate maintenance actions. They may, however, eliminate some scheduled maintenance activities.

5) Contact the Aircraft Maintenance Division (AFS-300) for guidance before you authorize an air carrier to use an automatic data collection system or automatic Aircraft Systems Health Monitoring and Management System.

C. Operational Data Procedures.

1) The operator should have written procedures to guide its operational data collection process. CASS procedures should include a risk-based methodology for determining the type and frequency of operational data collection so that resources are focused on the most revealing data, with regards to maintenance program effectiveness. This is a risk assessment and risk management process. An air carrier CASS should include clear procedures for determining:

• What operational data to collect, • How to collect it, and • What to do with it.

2) Operational data can be divided into routine or non-routine data collection and analysis. The routine data element uses a proactive data collection and analysis process that seeks to identify indicators of maintenance program ineffectiveness before they can progress to a functional failure that results in a reduction in aircraft availability. Some examples are:

• Aircraft logbook information detailing unscheduled maintenance, including maintenance deferred in accordance with the minimum equipment list (MEL)/Configuration Deviation List (CDL);

• “Chronic” aircraft systems that have repeat write-ups within a specified time period (for example, 10 to 15 days);

• Corrosion prevention and control program findings; • Engine condition trend monitoring data; • Individual item failure rates; and • Mechanical reliability reports, mechanical interruption summaries, and similar

data.

3) The non-routine operational data element is a reactive data collection and analysis process that seeks to identify indicators of maintenance program ineffectiveness after an undesirable event has occurred. Some examples are:

• Accidents and incidents, • In-flight engine and propeller separations and uncontained engine failures, • In-flight engine shutdowns, • High load events, • Flight delays and cancellations related to mechanical issues, • Rejected takeoffs, • Unscheduled parts replacement or unscheduled maintenance,

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Unscheduled landings due to mechanical issues, • Lightning strikes, and • Hard landings.

4) As with reactive audit surveillance, a CASS generally approaches problems from the analytical, systems perspective. For example, in response to one or more rejected takeoffs, a CASS might focus the operational data collection and analysis to determine if a pattern in rejected takeoffs was evident, or if other types of data might be examined in relation to the rejected takeoff situation.

5) The above data sets are presented only as examples. Although the data sets are oriented toward equipment, this area of a CASS may also collect other types of data, such as information on the different types of maintenance errors experienced by the operator.

6) The operator’s CASS documentation should include a means of identifying data that is relevant and useful for that operator to use in monitoring the effectiveness of its specific maintenance program. The operator should periodically review and reevaluate the usefulness of the data it collects and analyzes to accomplish this portion of the CASS.

D. Analysis of Operational Data.

1) Provide analysts with an understanding of the potential significance of each data set and how to process the data to understand its significance. This may require statistical analysis to compare the frequency of certain events or equipment failures with a determined norm, or qualitative analysis to evaluate reports of certain types of events.

NOTE: This process is not necessarily the same as what would be used in an FAA-approved reliability program.

2) Emphasize that the analysis of operational data should consider root causes of negative trends or anomalies. This preliminary RCA, including human factors, may require collaboration with technical personnel in the affected areas or specialists in engineering and reliability departments, or the OEM.

3) Delineate the roles of the CASS analysts as well as other departments or personnel in the analysis of operational data.

4) Some operators select a system that uses alerts or warnings if results of the analysis exceed certain predetermined parameters. A CASS should not rely completely on such alerts to the exclusion of analysts’ judgment. The FAA’s expectation of a CASS in this regard is that the operator has a complete, written procedure to review and analyze the operational data collected and to determine when further review is necessary.

5) While the surveillance and analysis steps differ for the verification of the performance of the maintenance program versus verification of the effectiveness of the program, the process merges when responding to CASS findings. The two types of analyses identify potential deficiencies in the maintenance program. In responding to these findings and analyses, the objective of a CASS is to determine the root causes of program deficiencies and address them

05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



appropriately, regardless of the perspective from which the deficiencies are found. Note that the discussion is focused on a CASS function, not an organization. For a given operator, that function might be performed by more than one organization.

6) Generally, the area responsible for surveillance will present their results to the technical or production area of the operator with a preliminary analysis of the collected information and, in some cases, possible underlying causes of the problem. Personnel in technical or production areas usually complete the RCA (if necessary) and develop proposed corrective action alternatives.

E. Final RCA.

1) Analysis of audit findings or operational data requires evaluating mechanical and human performance, or other results generated by the CASS process, to determine the condition of a process, maintenance practices, or equipment. In the case of operational data, analysis begins with comparison of the data to a standard representing acceptable performance. The standard may be in the form of an average or other means of calculating a reference. The standard may be set by the FAA, industry common practice, or the operator, as appropriate.

2) The key is to have a CASS structure that addresses the basic disciplines and elements involved in finding and correcting program deficiencies. The CASS procedures should note that in performing RCA, all relevant areas should be considered, including the role of senior management in setting appropriate policies, procedures, and an environment of communication.

3) RCA applies to both audit findings and analysis of results and trends in the operational data. For example, either audits or operational data analysis may point to maintenance errors being committed because of inadequate training. Analysis should not stop with simply determining which mechanics were inadequately trained and then retraining the mechanics. Rather, the analysis should determine why the training breach occurred and consider areas in management, communications, scheduling, or training program design that may be involved.

4) Principles and considerations of RCA are closely related to those of risk assessment, particularly in terms of the thoroughness of the analysis. Both processes do not simply consider the person involved in an issue (for example, the mechanic made a mistake), but all aspects of the organization within which that person works. This approach includes the premise that human error is a consequence of the system rather than a deliberate action of an individual, and that proactive measures and continuous reform of different aspects of the processes and organization can address “latent conditions” in the system and increase the system’s resistance to operational hazards. The term latent condition refers to flawed procedures or organizational characteristics that are capable of creating hazards if the right conditions or actions occur.

F. RCA Areas.

1) Systems analysis plays an increasingly important role in a CASS because of the increasing complexity and variety of operations, equipment, and organizations.

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



a) Systems analysis emphasizes a coordinated approach to an enterprise, including:

• Specific written procedures and planning for all activities; • Clearly established authority and responsibilities; • Communications processes; and • Methods of measuring results, detecting system errors, and preventing

recurrence.

b) This approach recognizes the wide range of interrelated issues potentially associated with a problem in the system, such as management policies, communications, and pilot technique, in addition to the maintenance activities themselves.

2) Human factors analysis looks at how humans communicate and perform in the work environment and then seeks to incorporate that knowledge into the design of equipment, processes, and organizations. This enhances safety and maximizes the human contribution, partly by designing systems to anticipate the inevitability of human error. Human factors include basic issues that can be addressed in audit checklists, such as whether there is adequate lighting for mechanics and inspectors to perform their work, and whether schedules permit personnel to be properly rested. But the discipline addresses a wider range of issues affecting how people interface with technology and the operational system, including:

• Human physiology; • How people learn and perceive; • Equipment, technology, and documentation; and • Workplace.

3) Knowledge gained from human factors analysis can:

• Help avoid maintenance errors, • Ensure that personnel skill sets match task requirements, • Ensure skill sets are maintained and improved, and • Enhance the work environment.

a) This knowledge can help CASS analysts perform RCA.

b) Continuing with the previous example of inadequate training, with insufficient awareness of human factors issues, operators may trace a maintenance error to a mechanic or technician who appears to be insufficiently trained for the task, and determine that the solution is more technical training. Further analysis may reveal, however, that there are contributing flaws in equipment design, job cards, manuals, the work environment, or organizational procedures such as shift turnover that more training will not satisfactorily overcome. Or, it may turn out that a different kind of training, perhaps involving decisionmaking skills, is called for.

4) As of this writing, the FAA is deeply involved in cooperative efforts with industry and academia in promoting human factors in aviation. This field is rapidly evolving, particularly in its application to aviation maintenance. According to a study conducted for the FAA, which

05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



cited Boeing research, maintenance error contributes to a significant portion of air carrier accidents, with shift-turnover errors and work interruptions standing out as leading underlying causes. Based on the growing importance of human factors and information available to industry, the FAA expects that operators will apply concepts of human factors to their CASS surveillance and analysis.

5) CASS surveillance also should ensure that RCA considers human factors and that personnel designated to respond to events such as rejected takeoffs also include human factors as part of the investigation of individual events. Otherwise, data reviewed in a CASS may be incomplete.

6) One challenge presented by the increasing emphasis on human factors is how to balance two seemingly contradictory purposes.

a) On the one hand, the FAA and industry need to encourage personnel to cooperate in addressing system organization and design issues without inhibitions caused by fear of discipline or enforcement. On the other hand, in some cases, individual employees or the operator may bear a degree of culpability (e.g., deliberately bypassing important controls or committing a serious regulatory infraction in the commission of a maintenance error).

b) In some rare instances, disciplinary action or even FAA administrative or legal enforcement may be indicated, if the action was deliberate and not a result of corporate culture. In any case, a RCA should be accomplished. This is a common issue in industry and FAA programs designed to promote the greater good of the system by encouraging voluntary reporting of errors and infractions by aviation personnel and operators without threat of disciplinary action or penalty.

c) A CASS, in any event, is concerned specifically with identifying and correcting deficiencies in the maintenance programs, not assigning blame to any individual or individuals. CASS should be designed to that objective, rather than specific event resolution, even if CASS analysts research specific events.

G. Analytical Tools and Processes. While it is not a requirement for an operator to implement any specific externally developed system, analytical tools or processes are available to assist in the analysis process. In view of the continuing evolution of this process, as of this writing, some examples of these tools are:

1) The Maintenance Error Decision Aid (MEDA) tool was developed by the Boeing Human Factors Engineering group in collaboration with the FAA, airlines, and the International Association of Machinists for analyzing human performance issues related to maintenance errors and trends. Operators use MEDA to track events, investigate and prevent maintenance errors, and identify contributing factors, corrective actions, and prevention strategies. A software analysis package has been developed to work with this aid and facilitate analysis of systemic issues.

2) The Managing Engineering Safety Health tool was developed by the University of Manchester in collaboration with British Airways Engineering. This system is geared toward researching the workplace and organizational environment in aircraft maintenance to find the

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



issues with the greatest potential to contribute to human factors problems. The system uses software, diagnostic, and sampling tools. Managing Engineering Safety Health conducts anonymous survey-like assessments among personnel at the work location. This is a more structured, data-intensive approach toward determining and monitoring personnel attitudes toward the system than the interview process discussed earlier. The industry has far less practical experience with Managing Engineering Safety Health than with MEDA.

3) The Human Factors Accident Classification System Maintenance Extension tool was developed by the U.S. Naval Safety Center in collaboration with the FAA for use in the air carrier industry as well as naval aviation. This comprehensive system incorporates a number of analytical tools and has profiled maintenance errors and contributing conditions, permitting development of potential prevention measures. While the Human Factors Accident Classification System Maintenance Extension may be more sophisticated than many operators would need, it demonstrates principles and techniques of software-aided analysis that could be applied to a CASS.

H. Corrective Action Options.

1) Once the CASS auditors and analysts have identified a problem or deficiency, the operator must determine if a corrective action is warranted and, if so, the details of the corrective action.

2) CASS procedures for determining whether to proceed with a corrective action should outline:

• How such a determination will be made, • Who will make the determination, and • What levels of review, if any, will be performed.

3) Technical area personnel should have primary responsibility for developing the proposed corrective action, as they are most familiar with the technical workings of the area in question and are sensitive to the possibility of creating new problems as a result of the corrective action.

a) CASS procedures should emphasize a team approach. Team members may include the CASS auditors or analysts, but should include technical area personnel in the affected maintenance and inspection disciplines, and perhaps other affected areas such as training or flight operations.

b) The CASS auditors should not develop the corrective action. This would compromise any later audits of the corrective action.

4) There are several possible types of general corrective actions or responses, depending on the outcome of the risk assessment.

a) Prevent recurrence through engineering or system changes designed to eliminate the risk.

05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



b) Accept the underlying cause of a trend or discrepancy, but reduce the risk through implementing controls or countermeasures. Examples are training, policy or procedure revisions, or warning devices. Other countermeasures might involve modifying or introducing new equipment or technology.

c) Accept that under certain conditions a discrepancy may occur, and be prepared to contain or mitigate the results of that situation.

1. A CASS does not necessarily have to implement corrective actions for every apparently negative trend or finding. Analysis of findings or trends may identify problem areas that do not present safety hazards and that the operator is willing to accept, in accordance with its risk assessment process.

2. For example, the operator might find that a higher than average number of component removals with “no fault found” occurs at a particular location. The operator might determine that the reason for this situation is that the aircraft spends insufficient time on the ground for line maintenance to completely isolate the fault. The operator might prefer to continue the brief turn times and simply switch components. This would be a business decision for the operator to make. However, more comprehensive corrective actions would be mandatory if the CASS detects that the maintenance program lacks adequate procedures and standards to meet the requirements of part 121 or part 135, as applicable.

I. Written Procedures for Developing and Implementing Corrective Actions. A CASS should provide written procedures for developing and implementing corrective action. The procedures should:

1) Result in a specific corrective action plan that addresses basic questions of:

• Development of the corrective action proposal; • Analysis and final approval level of the corrective action, including who is

accountable for approval of the corrective action; • Who will implement the corrective action; • How the accountable individual person will implement the corrective action; • When the corrective action should be completed; • Who will evaluate the outcome, and how, including identification of data to be

collected, awareness of the possibility of unintended consequences, and events that should trigger a response;

• Who will monitor the status of the corrective action, and how; and • Reporting the status of the corrective action (to whom, with what frequency).

2) Maintain the appropriate role of auditors in developing responses to findings so that they continue to remain independent from the corrective actions they may subsequently audit.

3) Distinguish clearly between the technical area personnel’s responsibility for developing and implementing corrective actions, and CASS personnel’s responsibility for producing the findings.

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



4) Designate the position or organization responsible for evaluating and approving proposed corrective actions. The CASS director or other designated manager may appoint a corrective action team to design and propose a corrective action. The team—which typically represents a cross section of the departments involved in audits, operational data collection, analysis, and production—oversees the implementation of the corrective action. Technical and reliability control boards are most often used in conjunction with FAA-approved reliability programs; however, a similar concept applies to a CASS, even if no FAA-approved reliability program exists.

J. Corrective Action Risk Assessment.

1) CASS procedures should:

a) Specify that personnel will analyze a corrective action proposal carefully before its selection and implementation to ensure corrective action is necessary and will actually fix the problem and not lead to unintended negative consequences.

b) Remind both CASS and technical area personnel of the need to consider the impact of the proposed corrective action on other aspects of the operation. This includes other areas of the inspection and maintenance programs, such as manuals. The corrective action may require coordination with other areas, such as flight operations, that might be affected.

2) Technical area personnel play the key role in risk assessment, but the process should include the CASS analysts, who will act as resources in support of the technical area managers and bring risk assessment and systems analysis techniques to the process. The auditor and analyst should be qualified (through training or experience) in systems analysis and can contribute to the evaluation of a proposed corrective action by determining if the basic system elements have been considered. However, the technical personnel have the expertise to actually develop and implement the corrective action, and to evaluate it in practical terms. Thus, the corrective action is a result of cooperation between the technical personnel and the CASS personnel.

3) Personnel working on the proposed corrective actions should ensure they consider issues of a timetable for the corrective action implementation, as well as the safety attributes of:

• Authority, • Responsibility, • Procedures, • Controls, • Process measurement, and • Interfaces.

K. Corrective Action Plan.

1) With the RCA complete, corrective action options identified, and risk assessment performed as appropriate, a final decision can be made on the proposed corrective action plan. The corrective action plan should address all relevant issues, including a timetable for

05/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



completion of the action, with milestones, if appropriate. The appropriate technical department (and other departments, such as flight operations, if the corrective action goes beyond the inspection and maintenance organizations) should then implement the plan.

2) The CASS procedures should identify how this plan will be approved and at what level of the company, as well as the parties responsible for implementing, monitoring, and ensuring all affected parties are notified, both within the company and externally, if necessary.

L. Monitoring Corrective Actions. The CASS procedures should:

1) Specify how implementation of corrective actions will be monitored and evaluated. This may require the following:

• Followup audits of a specific area, • Regular communication from the affected technical area as to the status of the

corrective action, and/or • Other forms of verification action by the auditors or analysts tracking the

implementation.

2) Identify the person or entity (such as a CASS board) accountable for determining if any changes in the status of a corrective action are acceptable. The CASS auditors or analysts may have the duty of ensuring the corrective action has been implemented in accordance with the established timetable or, if not, determining why the timetable has changed.

3) Include responsibilities and guidelines for:

• Tracking the implementation of corrective actions in accordance with the timeline;

• The role of auditors, managers, management committees, and senior management;

• How automation or computerized systems will be used; • How risk assessment and/or systems analysis will be used to guard against

unintended consequences; • Measures to evaluate the effect of the corrective action; and • The affected technical area to communicate the status of the corrective action

to the person responsible for monitoring implementation.

M. Getting Help from a Manufacturer. In some cases, the operator may require data or assistance from a manufacturer to help correct a deficiency detected by the CASS. However, manufacturers may not always assign these issues the same priority as the operator does. The operator should offer guidance in its CASS procedures, based on its particular experience, on how CASS and other personnel should address the need for assistance or information from manufacturers, and how to proceed in case of unsatisfactory or slow responses. This may include developing a standardized letter citing the need for this information or assistance to satisfy the requirements of §§ 121.373, 135.431, or other pertinent regulations. It may also include working with you, the FAA principal inspector (PI), to find solutions.

5/21/08 8900.1 CHG 0



N. Follow-up Surveillance Plan. CASS procedures should include how to determine the level of follow-up audits for verifying corrective action implementation. For example, based on the risk assessment or complexity of the corrective action, the designated CASS analyst or team may schedule special, less frequent, or more frequent audits. They may also change the data collection process or institute other means of verification. The FAA expects the operator to have a well-designed and logical process to design the follow-up actions.

O. Closed-Loop. The information and analysis performed through the closed-loop, continuous cycle of surveillance, investigations, analysis, and corrective action permits the operator to refine its audit and data collection priorities through the risk assessment process.

P. Analyze Results. Upon completion of the review/surveillance, analyze the results and determine if the operator/applicant’s CASS meets all of the requirements. If deficiencies are identified, initiate collaborative discussions with the operator/applicant to resolve the issues.



B. Complete the Task. Complete ATOS SAI or EPI DCT, as appropriate, for the CASS Element 1.3.11. Successful completion of this task will result in the acceptance of CASS program or revision and/or a determination that the CASS is being performed properly and is producing the desired results.

C. Document the Task. File all supporting paperwork in the operator/applicant's office file.



05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0




CHAPTER 47 EVALUATE PART 121/125/135 (10 OR MORE AND TURBINE-POWERED AIRCRAFT) OPERATOR’S WEIGHT AND BALANCE CONTROL

PROGRAM

Section 1 Evaluating an Operator/Applicant’s Weight and Balance Control Program


• Maintenance: 3328, 3329, • Avionics: 5328, 5329, • Surveillance Activity: 3639, 5639, and • Part 121 Air Carriers use the appropriate Air Transportation Oversight System

(ATOS) Data Collection Tools (DCT).

3-3967 OBJECTIVE. This chapter provides guidance for evaluating an operator/applicant’s weight and balance control program procedures.

3-3968 GENERAL.

A. Approved weight and balance control program procedures are the only means for an operator/applicant to authorize the use of other than known weights for crew, passengers, carry-on baggage, or cargo. This program must be included in the operator/applicant’s manual system. The weight and balance control program is approved on the automated Operations Safety System (OPSS) by the principal maintenance inspector (PMI). If an operator chooses to use average passenger and baggage weights, the process for establishing these weights and surveys that validate them must be approved by the principal operations inspector (POI). Reports of the established average passenger and baggage weights and surveys are entered in OPSS.

B. The operator/applicant may develop and submit for approval any method or procedure by which they can show that an aircraft:

• Is properly loaded according to approved configuration (loading schedules or charts);

• Will not exceed authorized weight and balance limitations during all ground and flight operations;

• Will be periodically reweighed and its data reevaluated; and • Will have its data recalculated, if needed due to changes.

C. The operator/applicant’s weight and balance control program should be an independently controlled document that includes all the instructions and procedures for weight and balance control, or it may be included as a controlled part of another manual. The weight and balance control program should undergo periodic reviews to ensure compliance.

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



NOTE: NOTE: AC 120-85, Air Cargo Operations defines cargo as freight, baggage, company materials (COMAT), or hazardous material (hazmat).

3-3969 CERTIFICATION BASIS (TYPE CERTIFICATE (TC)/AMENDED TC/SUPPLEMENTAL TYPE CERTIFICATE (STC)).

A. When the design of an aircraft is approved by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), an approved TC and type certificate data sheet (TCDS) are issued. The TCDS includes all of the pertinent specifications for the aircraft. The weight and balance information is located in the TCDS under “Data Pertinent to All Models.”

B. Conformity to type design is considered attained when the required and proper components are installed, and they are consistent with the drawings, specifications, and other data that are part of the TC. Conformity would include amended TCs, applicable STCs, and field-approved alterations.

C. Before an aircraft can be properly weighed and its empty-weight center of gravity (EWCG) computed, certain information must be known. This information is furnished by the FAA for every certificated aircraft in the TCDS or Aircraft Specifications available to all operators and can be accessed via the Internet at http://www.airweb.faa.gov/rgl.

NOTE: NOTE: Additionally, the equipment list that comprises the basic operating weight (BOW) of the aircraft must be validated to ensure that it is current.

3-3970 MANUFACTURER DOCUMENTATION: AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL (AFM)/WEIGHT AND BALANCE DOCUMENT.

A. Review the manufacturer’s program in the approved weight and balance control document and AFM/Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM).

B. Verify that the weight and balance information in the weight and balance control document and AFM, includes current weight and balance information such as:

• EWCG, • Loading graphs, • Center of gravity (CG) envelopes, • Loading schedules, • Index tables, and • Load manifest.

NOTE: NOTE: The manual may refer to a weight and balance plotter. If so, ensure that this device is available.

C. Ensure that the manufacturer’s procedures cover all aspects of the Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) parts 121/125/135 operator/applicant’s intended operation.

http://www.airweb.faa.gov/rgl�

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



3-3971 OPERATOR/APPLICANT-DEVELOPED PROGRAM.

A. Submitted Program. The operator/applicant can submit any method or procedure by which it can show that all aircraft are properly loaded and will not exceed authorized weight and balance limitations during all operations.

1) These procedures can be provided in the operator’s manual or they may be an independently-controlled document that includes all instructions and procedures for maintenance, operations, and cargo handling.

2) The weight and balance document must include company procedures and instructions for completing forms used in aircraft weight control and aircraft loading. Mathematical justification for loading provisions or schedules should be included in the submitted information.

3) The weight and balance document must indicate the source of the data used to develop the program. This data may come from the manufacturer’s weight and balance documentation referenced from the TCDS, the AFM/RFM, STC information, or other FAA approved source.

4) The program shall contain the duties, responsibilities, and authority for flight, ground operations, maintenance, and management personnel.

B. Unusual or Complex Programs. If the operator/applicant proposes an unusual or complex weight and balance program, or that program is substantially different from the weight and balance document or approved AFM/RFM, request assistance from regional specialists.

C. Load Schedules. The load schedule must include a manageable system for aircraft loading under all loading situations, including alternate procedures for nonstandard weight persons or groups. The operator’s procedures must provide all necessary information (charts, graphs, tables, etc.), with related instructions for the loading.

D. Major Alterations. Occasionally, an operator/applicant may request approval to operate an aircraft with an increase in gross weight and/or change in CG range. This constitutes a major design change, and requires approval by the FAA per 14 CFR part 21, § 21.113.

E. Determining the Loaded Weight and CG. An important part of preflight planning is to determine that the aircraft is loaded so its weight and CG location are within the allowable limits. There are two ways of doing this: by the computational method using weights, arms, and moments; and by the loading graph method, using weight and moment indexes.

F. Program Approval. The weight and balance control program is approved by the PMI. Coordination with POIs will be necessary relative to those pertinent parts of the program, such as calculation of average passenger and baggage weights and surveys that require POI oversight responsibility.

3-3972 AIRCRAFT WEIGHTS.

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



A. Aircraft operated under parts 125/135 are required to be weighed at least once every 36 calendar-months. Both the operator/applicant’s OPSS and manual must reflect this requirement.

B. Aircraft operated under part 121 are required to be weighed at intervals contained in the FAA-approved weight and balance control program.

1) Aircraft may be weighed individually on a fixed interval schedule such as every 36 months.

2) Aircraft may be weighed based on fleet weights, as defined in Figure 3-132.

NOTE: NOTE: Procedures that establish BOW, establishment of zone weights and compartment weight within the aircraft, and tables or charts that depict proper weight and CG ranges and limitations are contained in the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) weight and balance requirements, STC holder’s weight and balance supplement, or other FAA-approved data. See AC 120-27, Aircraft Weight and Balance Control (current edition), for additional guidance.

3-3973 WEIGH SCALES.

A. Scales used to weigh passengers, aircraft, and cargo must be calibrated and traceable to a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standard or equivalent. Calibration must be performed in accordance with the civil authority for weights and measures having jurisdiction over the area in which the scales are used. The frequency of calibration testing depends on use and handling. Certification documents should be in the English language.

B. Periodic testing of scales using a known weight to ensure accuracy should be included in an operator’s program.

C. If a scale is out of calibration it may be used if there is a procedure in place to verify accuracy using a known weight that is representative of the load to be carried.

3-3974 LOADING SCHEDULE AND PROVISIONS.

A. Loading Schedule. Loading schedules should be simple and orderly, based on sound principles, thus reducing the elements of human error. Loading schedules may be applied to individual aircraft or to a complete fleet. When an operator uses several types or models of aircraft, a loading schedule, which may be index-type, tabular-type, or a computer, should be identified in the OPSS with the type or model of aircraft for which it is designed.

B. Loading Provisions. All seats, compartments, and other loading stations should be properly marked and the identification used should correspond with the instructions established for computing weight and balance of the aircraft. When the loading procedures provide for blocking off seats or compartments to remain within the CG limits, the operator/applicant should provide effective means to ensure that such seats or compartments are not occupied during operations specified. In such cases, instructions should be prepared for crewmembers, load agents, cargo handlers, and other personnel concerned, giving complete information regarding

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



distribution of passengers, cargo, fuel, and other items. Information relative to maximum capacities and other pertinent limitations affecting the weight or balance of the aircraft should be included in these instructions. When it is possible by adverse distribution of passengers and/or cargo to exceed the approved CG limits of the aircraft, special instructions should be issued to the pilot in command and appropriate personnel so that the load distribution can be maintained within the approved limitation.

C. Standard Passenger Weights. Actual weights, or when appropriate, average passenger weights, are used to compute passenger loads over any segment of a certificate holder’s operations. Actual weights are generally used for operations with aircraft having nine or less passenger seats and aircraft carrying nonstandard passenger loads. The loading system should readily accommodate nonstandard weight groups, and the manifest should indicate whether average or actual weights, or a combination thereof, were used in the computation.

NOTE: The intent of the current edition of AC 120-27 is to provide methods and procedures for developing weight and balance control systems, not to address the entire spectrum of all possible weight configurations. Therefore, the operator will provide the FAA with a reliable survey to establish an average passenger weight for its specific operation.

1) Average Passenger Weights. The standard average passenger weights listed in AC 120-27, were developed for conventional airline passenger groups. They cannot be arbitrarily adopted for operations with passenger groups that appreciably differ from the basis or where the mix of male and female passengers is known to be different from a 60 percent male/40 percent female operation. Special average weights or special ratios may be established for particular operations based on surveys that:

• Indicate that those weights consistently provide for loading within prescribed weight and balance limits; and

• Meet the criteria for surveys and statistical analysis in AC 120-27.

2) Average Baggage Weight or Actual Weights. An operator may establish average passenger baggage weights predicated on a study of actual baggage weights for the operations or routes involved that consider seasonal and other variables.

NOTE: Unless otherwise authorized by the FAA-approved weight and balance control manual, the actual passenger and baggage weights shall be used in computing the weight and balance of charter flights and other special services involving the carriage of special groups.

D. Passenger and Crew Baggage. Procedures should be provided so that all baggage, including that carried onboard by the flightcrew, is properly accounted for. If desired by the operator, a standard crew baggage weight may be used. Checked baggage average weights may be used as described below. Actual weights should be used for aircraft of nine or less passenger seats or when checked baggage noticeably exceeds the average weights.

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



3-3975 OPERATOR’S PASSENGERS AND CARGO LOADING PROCEDURES TRAINING.

A. Responsibility for Weight and Balance Control. Weight and balance is one of the most important factors affecting safety of flight. An overweight aircraft, or one whose CG is outside the allowable limits, is inefficient and dangerous to fly. The responsibility for proper weight and balance control begins with the air carrier/operator, extends to ground operations persons who load the aircraft, the Aviation Maintenance Technician (AMT) who maintains the aircraft, and the pilot who operates the aircraft. Normal loading of aircraft using load persons must have procedures and training to ensure proper weight and balance, with a system to direct the proper loading of the aircraft within limits. The system must comply with the load manifest requirements of part 121, § 121.665; part 125, § 125.383; and part 135, § 135.63(c).

1) Operator Personnel Qualification Identification. Employees involved in cargo loading must be trained, authorized, and qualified. This training must be easily identified by documentation in training records and authorization documents.

2) Responsibility. The operator’s training program must convey to the three employee groups (maintenance, ground operations, and flight operations) that although they have different functions in an approved weight and balance control program, each group has individual responsibilities that ensure safety in air cargo operations.

B. Weight and Balance (CG Control). Operators must have training programs for personnel involved with weight and balance calculations. These programs should contain the processes and procedures to maintain the weight and CG of aircraft dispatched. Topics in the training programs would include:

• Notification of flightcrew; • Position of cargo and baggage; • Calculations for average weights of persons and baggage, seasonal changes,

unusual loads such as sports teams, military, and manifest weights of cargo, etc; • Calculations for actual weights and when to use them; • Processes that take into account CG offsets for containers, both loaded into unit

load devices (ULD) and loaded onto the aircraft; and • Computer programs used and processes and procedures to certify personnel to

calculate weight and balance.

C. Training Program Curriculum. Operators must provide:

1) Programs for Load Personnel. Training programs for aircraft loaders are to include:

• Basic aircraft load procedures, such as step loading containers on all-cargo aircraft, loading containers in passenger aircraft, and bulk loading in lower lobes and uppers lobes on all-cargo and combi-aircraft;

• Procedures for training load contractors, and audit requirements for those contractors;

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Training on expectations of loaders and proper load procedures, including safety and hazmat; and

• Frangible load requirements for certain positions.

2) Programs for Load Supervisors. Training for persons responsible for the load on an aircraft must teach understanding of those responsibilities, to include ULD load, aircraft load, serviceability of ULDs, aircraft cargo handling, and restraint systems.

3) Training on ULD Buildup. Training on recognition of proper ULD configuration, including operational standards, net attachments, container configurations and condition, CG offsets, profiling, and authorization for use on particular aircraft. Training on how to build up a ULD to comply with CG control. Personnel to receive this training include contractors and freight forwarders.

4) Programs for Freight Forwarders. Programs should include procedures for training freight forwarders on air carrier/operator requirements, including ULD buildup with attention to CG offsets and profile.

5) Programs for Maintenance Personnel. Training for maintenance personnel must consist of:

• Aircraft weighing procedures; • Weight and balance changes due to alterations; • Cargo loading system maintenance; • Weight and balance control program audit function under the Continuing

Analysis and Surveillance System (CASS) program (parts 121/135); • Repair of ULDs and cargo restraint systems; • Inspection requirements; • Receiving inspection requirements for components contracted out; and • Recording requirements.

6) Training on Records. Programs should include procedures to retain training records for personnel trained in cargo loading and checking serviceability of ULDs. Training should address computerized recordkeeping and recurrency requirements.

7) Flightcrew Awareness Training. Programs should include procedures to train flightcrews in cargo loading awareness, to include examples of unserviceable ULDs, restraints, aircraft configuration, and duties and responsibilities of ground personnel.

3-3976 PASSENGER AND CARGO LOADING PROCEDURES. Procedures should be written in the air carrier/operator’s manuals and be consistent throughout the company.

3-3977 CARGO HANDLING PROCEDURES.

A. Cargo. Procedures must be provided for loading/unloading freight into upper main cargo compartments on all-cargo and combi-aircraft and into lower lobe compartments on all

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



aircraft. This includes forward and/or aft compartments on regional type aircraft as well as cargo pods. Cargo handling should include procedures for:

1) Loading, based on aircraft configuration, i.e., all-cargo, passenger, combi, and convertible. These procedures may vary depending on the type of cargo handling system installed, restraint equipment installed or used, and cargo door configuration.

2) Loading aircraft to ensure that tail tipping is not an issue on all-cargo aircraft.

3) Loading for passenger and cargo aircraft so that containers, if used, are loaded onto the aircraft and restrained.

4) Ensuring that if bulk-loaded on lower lobe or forward or aft compartments or pods, that cargo or baggage is properly restrained using the restraint system required by the airplane weight and balance documents.

5) Ensuring that cargo bulk-loaded on the main deck is loaded per the original equipment manufacturer’s and operator’s weight and balance procedures.

B. ULD. ULDs are certified to a Technical Standard Order (TSO), STC, production certificate, and military standard. Uncertified ULDs are built to an industry standard and are allowed only on certain aircraft as described in the aircraft weight and balance manual or STC weight and balance supplement. Operators must have procedures for the following:

1) Procedures on buildup of containers and pallets to ensure proper CG control, so as not to exceed certification limitations for horizontal and vertical CG.

2) Buildup procedures for palletized and bulk cargo that ensure that the load fits the fuselage profile of the aircraft being loaded.

3) CG offset control to ensure that loaded pallets or containers do not exceed certification limitations for horizontal and vertical CG. For bulk load procedures to ensure that the load does not exceed CG offset for the compartment being loaded. This would include ULDs loaded in double configuration with vacant adjacent positions.

4) Procedures to ensure that ULDs are operational before loading on an aircraft, and designate a responsible person to perform these checks and validate to the flightcrew on the load sheet, manifest, or other form, that operational checks have been performed.

5) Operators should have a program to maintain ULDs in accordance with the ULD manufacturer’s recommendations or procedures developed by the operator and acceptable to the FAA. This program should include serviceability limits, inspection limits, inspection frequency, and receiving inspection requirements. Control of ULDs should be shown along with reweigh procedures to establish tare weights.

6) Procedures to route unserviceable ULDs to repair facilities should be established, along with procedures to add repair facilities to approved vendor lists.

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



C. Active ULDs. “ Active ULDs” are ULDs with active temperature control systems for transporting temperature sensitive (Cool Chain) cargo.

1) Unlike the typical ULD (or “Can”), Active ULDs are capable of heating and/or refrigerating as required. These systems consist of a highly insulated container with a battery-operated heating/cooling system integrated into the construction of the container; they are battery-powered in flight and are only recharged while on the ground. The “active” component of these units usually consists of a vapor cycle refrigeration/heat pump type system that is powered by various types of large batteries, depending on the manufacturer.

2) Only Active ULDs approved under 14 CFR § 21.305(d), a TC, or a STC, may be utilized on U.S.-registered aircraft (not applicable to part 129). In addition to the markings required by the above, they will also bear a placard as depicted in Figure 3-133. Additionally, if an operator intends to deploy these containers in their fleet, they should follow the guidance in AC 120-85, Air Cargo Operations, and at a minimum prepare the following in their manual:

a) Operators must have procedures that ensure only containers that are properly prepared, and meet the handling and airworthiness requirements of the manufacturer are carried on an aircraft. The operator should address these requirements in the appropriate manual.

b) Although the certification basis (§ 21.305(d) TC or STC) ensures Active ULDs do not present a hazard, aircrew and ground personnel need to recognize that they are different, due to their design and contents.

c) The maintenance and inspections procedures are normally derived from the Active ULD manufacturers’ instructions for continued airworthiness and/or limitations documents. This program must also include training to ensure that only qualified personnel perform maintenance on, and return these devices to service in accordance with the operators’ procedures.

3-3978 OTHER RESTRAINTS. Restraints such as straps, tie-downs, nets, etc., may be certified by original type design, STC, or major alteration. The restraints that are allowed on an individual aircraft are listed in the weight and balance manual, STC weight and balance supplement, or major alteration documentation for each aircraft.

3-3979 CONTRACTORS. An operator/applicant may use a contractor to weigh items required to be weighed. However, the operator/applicant is responsible for ensuring that the contractor complies with the operator/applicant’s approved weight and balance control program. This includes ensuring that scales are calibrated and tested in accordance with the operator/applicant’s policies and procedures manual. The operator/applicant must have procedures for the following:

A. Freight Forwarders. Procedures to train freight forwarders or contract loaders to the operator’s requirements. Procedures to audit forwarders or contractors.

B. Interlining. Procedures to ensure that ULDs received from other operators, whether U.S. or foreign, meet the gaining operators requirements for load and serviceability.

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



3-3980 CARGO HANDLING SYSTEMS.

A. Cargo handling systems, both upper and lower deck, are approved by various means. They may be certified as part of the certification basis of an aircraft, by STC, or by major alteration for an individual aircraft installation. These systems consist of locks, end stops, vertical side restraints, ball mats, roller sections, side guides, etc. Cargo handling systems are also designed as a conveyance for ULDs, allowing them to move easily in and out of the aircraft. In addition, some cargo handling systems are powered.

B. Repair of system components should be part of the operator’s manual system, along with ability to substitute load-bearing components. Substitution should be based on FAA-approved data. Substitution would include those subparts of a load-bearing component. The operator should show that if substitution is done that it is backed up with approved data, and the operator’s manual system should show that modified configuration and how that configuration is controlled. That control may be in the form of an Engineering Order, Engineering Report, or other vehicle described in the operator’s manual.

C. No matter the means of approval used, minimum equipment list concerns should be addressed. This includes operation with missing restraint devices along with weight and/or performance penalties for the missing device.

3-3981 VERIFYING MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES.

A. Addition or Removal of Equipment.

1) CG Change After Repair or Alteration. The largest weight changes that occur during the lifetime of an aircraft are those caused by alterations and repairs. It is the responsibility of the air carrier/operator doing the work to accurately document the weight change and record it in the aircraft record.

a) When air carriers/operators make conversions, modifications, repairs, or major alterations to an aircraft that change the current weight and balance requirements and/or limitations, the FAA generally approves a weight and balance supplement or other control documents, such as STCs, FAA Form 337, Major Repair and Alteration, or other weight and balance reports. This supplementary information describes the effect of the conversion or modification on the aircraft, and the FAA generally approves it as part of an STC or major alteration.

b) When an air carrier/operator makes a conversion, modification, or major alteration to an aircraft that changes its weight and balance characteristics, the air carrier/operator should have a procedure in place to ensure that all supplemental information developed, issued, and approved for that aircraft is incorporated into the air carrier/operator’s weight and balance control program. An air carrier/operator must apply the most restrictive ranges of the incorporated modifications to the operation of that aircraft. For example, if multiple STCs apply, the air carrier/operator must use the STC with the most restrictive weight and balance limitations when incorporating the supplemental information into air carrier/operator’s weight and balance control programs. In all cases of multiple STCs applied to a single aircraft, the STCs should be

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



evaluated for effect on each other and the appropriate limitations applied. At a minimum, an air carrier/operator should:

• Include the supplemental information described above or cross-reference the supplemental information in air carrier/operator’s weight and balance manual; and

• Organize the supplemental information according to aircraft type or in a way that facilitates use by loading personnel.

c) Include the supplemental information in its air carrier/operator weight and balance manual and any charts or tables that indicate proper weight and CG range limitations.

2) Permanent Ballast.

a) If a repair or alteration causes the aircraft CG to fall outside of its limits, permanent ballast can be installed. Permanent ballast may consist of blocks of lead or other material. It should be marked “Permanent Ballast/Do Not Remove.” It should be attached to the structure so that it does not interfere with any control action, and attached rigidly enough that it cannot be dislodged by any flight maneuvers or rough landing.

b) Two things must first be known to determine the amount of ballast needed to bring the CG within limits: the amount the CG is out of limits, and the distance between the location of the ballast and the limit that is affected.

3) Temporary Ballast. Temporary ballast, in the form of lead bars or heavy canvas bags of sand or lead shot, is often carried in the baggage compartments to adjust the balance for certain flight conditions. The bags should be marked as ballast and secured. Removal may require recalculation of the aircraft BOW. Temporary ballast must be secured so it cannot shift its location in flight, and the structural limits of the baggage compartment must not be exceeded. All temporary ballast must be removed before the aircraft is weighed.

B. Weight and Balance Revision Record.

1) Each revision record should be identified by the date and the aircraft make, model, and serial number. The pages should be signed by the person making the revision.

2) The computations for a weight and balance revision are included on a weight and balance revision form. Appropriate fore and aft extreme loading conditions should be investigated and the computations shown. The weight and balance revision sheet should clearly show the revised empty weight, empty weight arm, and/or moment index, and the new BOW.

NOTE: NOTE: BOW is defined as the weight of an aircraft with unusable fuel, all fluids, crew, and installed equipment, as defined by the operator’s program based on TC, STC, or other FAA-approved data.

3-3982 WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORDS SURVEILLANCE.

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



A. Maintenance weighing records, training records, and air cargo operations audit records must reflect compliance with the weight and balance control program. Cargo handling systems and ULDs must have records of maintenance, preventive maintenance, and inspections located in the aircraft maintenance records.

B. Ground operations load manifest records, load verification sheets, and personnel training records must reflect compliance with the weight and balance control program.

C. Flight operations records (flight papers), and personnel training records must reflect compliance with the weight and balance control program.

3-3983 AUTHORITY FOR WEIGHT AND BALANCE (OPSS).

A. The weight and balance control program is not just an isolated program for maintenance to comply with weighing the aircraft. It covers all employee disciplines that must interact together to operate the aircraft within the weight and balance limitations. Manuals must be consistent in text to provide guidance for the weight and balance system to work properly.

B. Approval of weight and balance control programs is affected on operations specifications (OpSpecs). The OpSpecs will list the appropriate documents used for weight and balance control. Average passenger and baggage weights, along with surveys to validate these weights, will be entered into OPSS.

NOTE: The guidance for OPSS can be found in FAA Order 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 18, Section 2, Automated Operations Safety System.

3-3984 CONTINUOUS ANALYSIS AND SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (CASS) (parts 121/135). The CASS periodically monitors the performance of and audits the weight and balance control program to ensure constant compliance.

A. The CASS program should define how and when weight and balance control systems are audited, to include, but not limited to:

• Aircraft loading, • ULD buildup, • Personnel training, and • Freight forwarders.

B. System performance should be monitored to include such items as load plans, load manifests, aircraft configuration changes, cargo handling system performance, and human factors issues with loaders, load supervisors, and contractors.

3-3985 FAA SURVEILLANCE.

A. The PMIs are to review their assigned air carrier/operators weight and balance control procedures. This review shall include the subject areas discussed in this chapter, along with the appropriate air carrier/operator’s manuals, OpSpecs, and wet lease agreements. It is imperative that any contractors used for cargo loading are qualified and authorized by the certificate holder

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



to perform these functions. PMIs are encouraged to review any training program their certificate holder accomplishes for personnel who supervise the loading of aircraft, prepare load manifest forms, or qualify and authorize other persons to accomplish these requirements.

B. Air carriers/operators have a statutory mandate to perform their services with the highest possible degree of safety. Achievement of that goal requires a concerted effort between the FAA and the carrier. Special emphasis ramp checks are to be conducted to validate the current state of weight and balance control procedures and cargo loading operations. The FAA should make special efforts to keep all carriers apprised of the methods by which FAA inspections are carried out and inform them of any instances of noncompliance discovered in those inspections. Air carriers/operators are encouraged, in turn, to use such information to evaluate their own systems, programs, and operations.

NOTE: Aviation safety inspectors (ASI) assigned to an operator should be trained on the specific requirements of that operator’s weight and balance control program.


A. Prerequisites.

• Knowledge of the regulatory requirements of 14 CFR parts 121, 125 and 135; • Successful completion of the Airworthiness Inspector Indoctrination course(s) or

equivalent; and • Previous experience with part 121, 125, or 135 weight and balance programs.

B. Coordination. This task requires close coordination between maintenance and operations inspectors.


A. References (current editions).

• Title 14 CFR parts 21, 23, 25, 43, 91, 121, 125, and 135; • Civil Air Regulations Part 3 (CAR 3), Airplane Airworthiness—Normal, Utility,

Acrobatic, and Restricted Purpose Categories; • AC 43.13-1, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices—Aircraft Inspection

and Repair; • FAA-H-8083-1, Aircraft Weight and Balance Handbook, as amended (replaces

AC 91-23, Pilot’s Weight and Balance Handbook); • AC 120-27, Aircraft Weight and Balance Control; • Approved AFMs; • Approved Pilot’s Operating Handbooks (POH); • Approved weight and balance manuals; • TCDS and aircraft specifications; • STCs; • Aircraft equipment lists;

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Aircraft Maintenance Records (weight and balance records); • ATOS Element Performance Inspection (EPI)/Safety Attribute Inspection

(SAI) 1.3.17, Weight and Balance Program, and 1.3.25, Cargo Handling Equipment, Systems, and Appliances; and

• ATOS Element 1.3.17.

B. Forms. FAA Form 8400-7, Operations Specifications

C. Job Aids.

• Automated OpSpecs checklists and worksheets; and • Job Task Analysis (JTA): 3.3.38.

NOTE: NOTE: This job aid is for use in evaluating an operator’s weight and balance control program. The job aid recommends six areas that can be used in the evaluation of the weight and balance control program. The option of using all of the parts of this job aid or any individual part is the decision of the inspector that is doing the evaluation.

3-3988 PROCEDURES.

A. Coordinate with the Operator/Applicant. The operator/applicant must submit the following for review:

• Manual or revision; • Weight and balance program document (if not part of a manual); • Pertinent company procedures; • Instructions for completing forms used in aircraft weight control and aircraft

loading; and • Mathematical justification for loading provisions or schedules.

B. Review the Operator/Applicant’s Manual/Program Document. The manual must include procedures, levels of authority, and information appropriate to part 121, 125 or 135. In addition, the ASI must confirm that the following are included:

1) Ensure that the manual, as presented, adheres to the System Safety attributes:

• Responsibility and authority, • Procedures, • Process measurement, • Control, and • Interface.

2) Manual introduction, to include:

• Description of the philosophy and the goals of the manual;

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Description of the division of contents between volumes, if more than one volume; and

• List of effective pages, including dates.

3) Manual revision and distribution procedures, to ensure:

• Current information is provided to all manual holders • Manuals are available to maintenance, operations, and ground personnel and

are furnished to the certificate-holding district office (CHDO)

4) Definitions of all significant terms used in the program. The definitions must reflect their intended use and include any acronyms or abbreviations unique to the manual.

5) Description of the organizational unit responsible for the control and maintenance of the weight and balance program, to include:

• Definitions of lines of authority; and • Description of the support structure.

6) Job descriptions for all elements (ATOS’s EPI/SAI).

7) Training programs for the following:

• Maintenance personnel; • Operations and dispatch personnel; and • Ground handling personnel.

8) A means of documenting and retaining individual training records.

9) Procedures for:

• Determining standards and schedules for calibration of aircraft scales; • Preweighing instructions and requirements; • Determining which aircraft are to be weighed; • Establishing and maintaining BOW equipment lists for each aircraft; • Recording the type and serial number for each scale used, airplane weight,

residual fluids, and scale tare weights; • Initial weighing of aircraft; • Monitoring and adjusting individual aircraft or fleet, empty weight, and CG; • Periodic reweighing of aircraft; • Ensuring aircraft are configured in accordance with approved data; • Control of ULDs, including serviceability standards, CG offset, and buildup;

and • Control and oversight of contractors including freight forwarders.

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



10) A loading schedule consisting of graphs/tables or a special loading schedule for a calculator or computerized program. These schedules must ensure that pertinent data is available for all probable weight and balance conditions of the aircraft.

11) A load manifest on which all required loading information shall be entered by personnel responsible for weight and balance control, including procedures for:

• Completing the load manifest; • Ensuring the load manifest is carried on the aircraft; • Retaining the load manifest for the time periods specified in the CFRs; and • Distribution of the load manifest in accordance with part 121, §§ 121.695

and/or 121.697 (as applicable); part 125, § 125.405 , and part 135, § 135.63(c).

12) Procedures to be used by crewmembers, cargo handlers, and other personnel concerned with aircraft loading, for the following:

• Distribution of passengers; • Distribution of fuel; • Distribution of cargo; • Verification and acceptance of actual cargo weights as listed on a bill of

lading; • Restriction of passenger movement during flight, if applicable; and • Hazmat requirements, if applicable.

13) A drawing of each cargo and/or passenger configuration, to include emergency equipment locations.

14) Mathematical justification for loading provisions or schedules. This may be included under separate cover and not as part of the company manual.

15) An alternate procedure for allowing manual computations, if a computerized weight and balance program is used.

16) Procedures for a weight range system, if applicable, that ensures:

• The range is typical of passengers carried on similar operations; • Computations for critical load considerations support the ranges; • Personnel responsible for loading the aircraft are required to prepare

appropriate loading records; • The system includes methods for loading passengers whose weights are

outside the range; and • Loading records indicate the number of passengers within the stated range and

account for passengers who fall outside the range.

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



17) A system for loading nonstandard weight groups, such as athletic squads or military groups and their baggage, which must use actual weights for both passengers and baggage.

18) Procedures to verify actual weight of cargo.

19) Standards and schedules for calibration of commercial scales used to determine baggage/cargo weights.

20) Procedures to ensure that carry-on baggage is limited to articles which may be placed in overhead compartments or under seats. Carry-on baggage weight must be accounted for in the same manner as checked baggage or added to the average passenger weight.

C. Review the Operator/Applicant’s OpSpecs.

1) Review the draft OpSpecs to ensure that OpSpec E096 or E097 includes the following:

a) Aircraft make/model/series.

b) Type of loading schedule.

c) Loading schedule instructions for:

• Passengers and crew (average or actual weight). • Baggage (average or actual weight) and cargo (actual). • Nonstandard weight groups.

d) Weight and balance control procedures.

NOTE: NOTE: The above items must be referenced by indicating the locations in the operator/applicant’s manuals; e.g., volume, chapter.

2) Review draft OpSpec A011 for accuracy of average passenger and baggage weight calculations along with weight and balance survey requirements and completion. Coordinate this activity with the POI.

D. Analyze the Results. Upon completion of review, analyze the results and determine whether the operator/applicant’s manual and OpSpecs meet all requirements.

E. Meet with Operator/Applicant. Discuss any discrepancies with the operator/applicant and advise them on areas that need corrective action.


A. Complete the PTRS Record. Part 121 Air Carriers use the appropriate ATOS Data Collection Tools (DCT)

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



B. Complete the Task. Approve OpSpec E096, E097, or A011 in accordance with Order 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 18.

C. Document the Task. File all supporting paperwork in the operator/applicant’s office file.

3-3990 FUTURE ACTIVITIES. Normal surveillance to be conducted using PTRS codes 3639/5639. Part 121 Carriers will use the appropriate ATOS EPI to document surveillance.


05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Figure 3-132, Glossary/ Index of Definition and Terms

Aircraft Arms, Weights, and Moments.

The term arm, usually measured in inches, refers to the distance between the CG of an item or object and the reference datum. Arms ahead of or to the left of the datum are negative (-), and those behind or to the right of the datum are positive (+). When the datum is ahead of the aircraft, all of the arms are positive and computational errors are minimized. Weight is normally measured in pounds. When weight is removed from an aircraft, it is negative (-), and when added, it is positive (+). A moment is a force that tries to cause rotation, and is the product of the arm, in inches, and the weight, in pounds. Moments are generally expressed in pound-inches (lb-in) and may be either positive or negative. A number of weights must be considered in aircraft weight and balance. Terms for various weights listed here are used by the General Aviation Manufacturer’s Association (GAMA).

Airplane Flight Manual (AFM).

An FAA-approved document, prepared by the holder of a TC for an airplane or rotorcraft, that specifies the operating limitations and contains the required markings, placards, and other information applicable to the regulations.

Aircraft Specifications. Documentation containing the pertinent specifications for aircraft certificated under the CARs.

Approved Type Certificate. A certificate of approval issued by the FAA for the design of an airplane, engine, or propeller.

Basic Empty Weight. The empty weight of the aircraft plus the weight of the undrainable fuel, oils, and hydraulic fluid outlined in the manufacturer’s maintenance manual.

Basic Operating Index. The moment of the airplane at its basic operating weight (BOW) divided by the appropriate reduction factor.

Basic Operating Weight. The weight of an aircraft with unusable fuel, all fluids, crew, and installed equipment, as defined by the operator’s program based on TC, STC, or other FAA-approved data.

Cargo. Cargo refers to passenger-checked baggage, freight, dangerous goods, company materials, and hazmats. Cargo does not include passenger carry-on baggage.

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Emergency Equipment. Required emergency equipment must be part of the preweight checklist and be stored in its assigned position specified by the operator’s manual.

Empty-Weight Center of Gravity (EWCG).

The CG of an aircraft when it contains only the items specified in the aircraft empty weight.

Empty-Weight Center of Gravity Range

The distance between the allowable forward and aft empty-weight CG limits.

Equipment List. A list of items approved by the FAA for installation in a particular aircraft. The list includes the name, part number, weight, and arm of the component. Installation or removal of an item in the equipment list is considered to be a minor alteration.

Fleet Weight. An average weight accepted by the FAA for aircraft of identical make and model that have the same equipment installed. When a fleet weight control program is in effect, the fleet weight of the aircraft can be used rather than having to weigh every individual aircraft.

Flyaway Kit A flyaway kit would considered part of the empty weight when it is installed. Spare parts loaded onboard must be considered as COMAT.

Index point. A location specified by the aircraft manufacturer from which arms used in weight and balance computations are measured. Arms measured from the index point are called index arms.

Manufacturer’s Empty Weight.

The manufacturer’s empty weight contains only the basic equipment when the aircraft is delivered to the operator. The operator may install additional equipment required for its specific operation creating the basic empty weight for that operator.

Maximum Allowable Gross Weight.

The maximum weight authorized for the aircraft and all of its contents as specified in the TCDS or Aircraft Specifications for the aircraft.

Maximum Landing Weight. The greatest weight that an aircraft normally is allowed to have when it lands.

Maximum Ramp Weight. The total weight of a loaded aircraft, including all fuel. It is greater than the takeoff weight due to the fuel that will be burned during the taxi and runup operations. Ramp weight is also called taxi weight.

Maximum Takeoff Weight. The maximum allowable weight at the start of the takeoff run.

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Maximum Zero Fuel Weight.

The maximum authorized weight of an aircraft without fuel. This is the sum of the BOW and payload.

Payload. The weight of the passengers, baggage, and cargo that produces revenue.

Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).

An FAA-approved document published by the airframe manufacturer that lists the operating conditions for a particular model of aircraft and its engines.

Standard Empty Weight. The weight of the airframe, engines, and all items of operation weight that have fixed locations and are permanently installed in the aircraft. This weight must be recorded in the aircraft weight and balance records. The basic empty weight includes the standard empty weight plus any optional equipment that has been installed. Depending upon the part of the Federal regulations under which the aircraft was certificated, either the undrainable oil or full reservoir of oil is included.

Supplemental Type Certificate (STC) Data.

Provided it specifically applies to the item being repaired/altered, such data may be used in whole or part as included within the design data associated with the STC.

Unit Load Device (ULD). A device for grouping, transferring, and restraining cargo for transit. The ULD may consist of a pallet and net or may be a container.

05/20/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Figure 3-133, Active ULD Markings

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9




CHAPTER 54 PART 142 TRAINING CENTERS

Section 1 Part 142 Training Centers: Training Center and Training Center Program Manager Overview

3-4331 PURPOSE. This chapter incorporates the Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 142 training center guidance previously located in Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) Order 8700.1, chapters 148 through 154. This chapter supersedes all previous guidance issued concerning FAA policy and procedures for the management of part 142 training centers.

3-4332 BACKGROUND. Prior to the implementation of part 142, regulations did not permit organizations other than certificated air carriers to use qualified simulators or flight training devices (FTD) to conduct the training, checking, or testing required by the regulations to qualify flight crewmembers. To acknowledge the advantages of using simulation technology, the FAA issued various regulatory exemptions to training organizations that enabled them to conduct training and qualification through the use of flight simulation devices. In 1996, part 142 was implemented and provided the regulatory basis to certificate training centers using approved curricula, qualified instructors, and authorized evaluators to conduct the training, testing, and checking of airmen in qualified simulators and FTDs.

A. The certification of part 142 training centers also made additional resources available to air operators (14 CFR parts 121, 125, 135, and 91 subpart K (part 91K)) to enable them to enter into agreements with a training center to conduct simulator flight training and checking for their crewmembers. With approval of the operator’s principal operations inspector (POI), a training center may conduct authorized portions of the operator’s approved training program. This provision has enabled approved centers to provide a valuable service to operators who would otherwise not have the benefit of advanced flight training devices (AFTD) or simulators to use in their crewmember training curricula.

B. In addition to adopting part 142, the FAA also revised applicable sections of 14 CFR parts 61, 63, 91K, 121, 125, 135, and 141 to afford a means for crediting the training, testing, and checking accomplished in flight simulators toward the flight training requirements of those parts.

3-4333 GENERAL. Part 142 permits a certificated training center to use approved simulators, FTDs, and aircraft in conjunction with approved curricula, qualified instructors, and evaluators to accomplish airman training, testing, and checking to meet the requirements of parts 61 and 63. Title 14 CFR part 119 air operators conducting operations under parts 121, 125, and 135 as well as operators under part 91K and 14 CFR part 137 may also, under certain conditions, permit training centers to conduct the required training and checking of their crewmembers. Conditions under which an air operator may permit a training center to conduct required training, testing and checking are outlined later in this chapter.

3-4334 DEFINITIONS. The following definitions are provided to clarify their use as they pertain to this chapter and part 142 training centers. Other training and technical terms not

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



specifically listed, but which appear in this chapter, must carry the same definition and/or connotation used elsewhere within this order, 14 CFR, part 1, and/or appropriate FAA guidance.

A. AFTD. For the purpose of this chapter and the certification of part 142 training centers, the term AFTD applies to Level 6 or 7 FTDs as approved and described in Advisory Circular (AC) 120-45, Airplane Flight Training Device Qualification, as amended.

NOTE: When 14 CFR part 60 becomes effective, the terminology and definition of flight training devices within that rule will take precedence over the definitions contained in this chapter.

B. Air Carrier and Air Operator (“Carrier” or “Operator”). As used in this chapter, these terms are interchangeable and apply to each person operating or intending to operate civil aircraft as an air carrier or commercial operator, in air commerce. These terms also refer to any operator who receives an air carrier or operator certificate authorizing operations under parts 121, 125, and 135; and for the purpose of this chapter also applies to fractional ownership program managers conducting flights under part 91K.

C. Assistant Training Center Program Manager (ATCPM). The certificate-holding district office (CHDO) may assign ATCPMs on an as required basis for the training center. ATCPMs have responsibility for the complexity assigned to the Training Center Program Manager (TCPM) and as such, normally participate in the full range of TCPM duties. This position can be used only in conjunction with an existing authorized TCPM position. The TCPM maintains technical oversight for the center. Based on a center’s activity, the CHDO may or may not assign an ATCPM to a particular certificate.

D. Courseware. Instructional material developed for each course or curriculum, including lesson plans, flight event descriptions, syllabi, computer software programs, audiovisual programs, workbooks, and handouts. Courseware is an integral portion of a curriculum or course, and is subject to approval in accordance with part 142, § 142.39.

E. Fleet Training Program Manager (FTPM). An FAA-qualified inspector assigned to support a part 142 principal training center’s curriculum for a specific fleet or aircraft type/group/category. FTPMs report to the principal centers TCPM and may be remotely assigned inspectors. Based on a center’s activity, the CHDO may or may not assign an ATCPM to a particular certificate.

F. Foreign Training Center. A training center or satellite training center that is located outside of the 50 United States.

G. Partial Program Manager (PPM). PPMs are assigned as aircraft subject matter experts to assist TCPMs when the number of aircraft at a particular training center requires such assistance.

H. Remote Training Site. A site that is temporary in nature and operated to accommodate a specific or limited training center need. Remote sites are distinguished by the use of facilities, such as simulators or classrooms, which may be dry leased and may or may not be under the direct operational control of the certificated training center (principal training center).

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



Management, staffing, training curricula, and courseware remain under the control of the principal training center. The TCPM may authorize remote training sites on a temporary basis through the issuance of an approval letter for periods not to exceed 120 days. Extensions may be granted for extenuating circumstances.

I. Satellite Training Center. Satellite training centers are considered to be permanent in nature and function under the operational and management control of the principal training center. Although physically separated from the principal training center, responsibility for regulatory compliance of the satellite rests with the principal training center. The principal center is also responsible for the successful maintenance and delivery of all assigned curricula, and courseware used by the satellite. Approval of a satellite’s flight training equipment (FTDs and simulators) is also the responsibility of the principal center. Satellite training centers receive their authority to operate through the training specifications issued to the principal training center.

J. Syllabus. A detailed summary or outline describing the main points of a course of study. A syllabus describes the course content in a sufficient level of detail to ensure that all knowledge areas and required skills are covered adequately. It includes those materials that are necessary to support the course (courseware). It includes details of course requirements, course content, and evaluation plans, including programmed hours, media, and all courseware. Each curriculum must, by regulation, include a syllabus.

K. TCPM. TCPMs have regulatory oversight responsibility for training centers and are responsible for overall FAA technical administration, certification, surveillance, and investigation. TCPMs are the primary FAA focal point for relations with training centers and are responsible for coordinating FAA activity at training centers, satellites, and remote training sites. Their role is to verify that the training, testing, and checking conducted by the center continually meets regulatory standards; the terms and conditions of the center’s training specifications; and complies with established FAA policy and guidance.

L. Training Specifications. A document issued by the Administrator to a training center and forms part of the center’s certificate. This legally binding document prescribes the center’s training, checking, and testing authorizations and limitations, and specifies training program requirements such as approved flight training equipment.

3-4335 AUTHORIZED TRAINING FACILITIES—SATELLITES, FOREIGN CENTERS, AND REMOTE SITES.

A. Satellites. Part 142 provides that a training center certificate-holder may establish one or more satellites to provide some or all the services that are authorized for the certificated “principal” center. The approval process for satellite centers is the same as that of the principal center, except for required management positions, which may be shared with the principal. Consequently, the responsibility for operational control of satellite centers remains with the principal center. Contractual agreements for the use of flight simulators, FTDs, and classroom/briefing facilities are an essential requirement for selected satellites.

1) A satellite’s authority to provide training services is provided through the principal center’s training specifications. Removal of the satellite from the principals training

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



specifications does not normally affect the principal center’s authority to operate. If the principal training center’s certificate is surrendered, suspended, revoked, or expires, the satellite center’s authority to operate is similarly affected.

2) Below are descriptions of the five basic combinations of training centers and associated satellites:

a) Certificate Management Office- or Unit-Managed Satellite. Satellites of principal centers whose certificate is managed by a certificate management unit or office (CMU or CMO) will normally have their surveillance activities carried out by the assigned CMU/CMO. In other words, the surveillance responsibilities for these satellites normally reside with the assigned CMU or CMO and not the Flight Standards District Office (FSDO) with geographic responsibility for the satellites location. Surveillance responsibilities for satellites attached to principal centers under the supervision of a CHDO are described in paragraph (b) through (e) below.

b) U.S. Satellite of a Domestic Training Center. The U.S.-based training center (principal center) holds the training center certificate, and its U.S.-based satellite is listed in paragraph A008 of the principal’s training specifications. Surveillance of the satellite will be coordinated between the TCPM and the FAA office holding geographic responsibilities for the area containing the satellite. Authority for the satellite to operate remains in effect as long as the principal center’s certificate remains effective. Domestic training center certificates are issued without an expiration date.

c) U.S. Satellite of a Foreign-based Training Center. The foreign-based training center (principal center) holds the training center certificate, and its U.S.-based satellite is listed in paragraph A008 of the principal’s training specifications. The surveillance responsibilities for the domestic-based satellite are the same as those for a satellite of a domestic-based principal. However, a foreign training center’s certificate expires every 12 months from the date of issuance. Consequently, all U.S.-based satellite(s) of a foreign principal certificate holder will lose their authority to operate unless the foreign principal’s certificate is renewed annually. If the foreign principal’s certificate is not renewed for any reason, the domestic satellite’s authority to provide training also expires.

d) Foreign Satellite of a U.S. Domestic Training Center. The U.S.-based principal holds a permanent training center certificate; however, the principal center’s TCPM is responsible for coordinating required surveillance of the foreign satellite with the appropriate International Field Office (IFO) or FSDO. Adverse action and/or suspension of the U.S. based principal will affect the foreign satellite’s ability to continue operations. An adverse action against the foreign satellite could result in removal of the satellite from the principal training specifications, and may lead to sanctions against the principal’s operating certification depending on the type and severity of the infraction.

NOTE: Satellites of principal centers are not issued operating certificates or training specifications; therefore, are not subject to the annual renewal requirements of part 142, § 142.7(b). However, part 142, § 142.17 requires satellite centers to comply with all other applicable requirements of part 142.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



TCPMs must ensure that each foreign satellite is included in their surveillance plan and may remove any satellite from the principals training specifications should the satellite fail to maintain the requirements of part 142 or this order.

e) Foreign Satellite of a Foreign Training Center. The satellite’s foreign training center authority to operate is based on the principal’s operating authority and training specifications. In this example, both the principal and satellite are subject to annual renewal. The foreign satellite’s authority is typically renewed concurrently with the principal center’s certificate renewal. The reissuance of the foreign satellite authority to operate is therefore dependent upon the outcome of the normal surveillance and oversight of both the satellite and the foreign principal center. The TCPM for the foreign principal is typically assigned from the IFO/FSDO responsible for the geographic area containing the principal center.

NOTE: If the training certificate of a principal foreign center expires or is not renewed, all of the principal center’s satellite(s), regardless of their location, also expires.

B. Foreign Training Centers. Part 142 permits the certification of training centers outside the United States. Other than the differences addressed below, training centers, and/or satellites located outside the United States must meet the same regulatory requirements as those outlined for a domestic training center. The following identifies some of the operational and management differences between domestic and foreign training centers/satellites.

1) Foreign training centers are issued an operating certificate valid for 12 calendar-months whereas a domestic training center’s certificate is valid until surrendered, suspended, or revoked. Foreign centers and satellites must have their operating certificate/authority renewed annually.

2) Surveillance and Investigation. While the surveillance and oversight of domestic training centers and their associated satellites is typically conducted on a daily or weekly basis, the surveillance and oversight of foreign training centers and associated foreign satellites may be conducted on a less frequent basis. The reduced frequency is primarily associated with the difficulties associated with travel and in some instances country clearances. The reduced frequency, however, does not lessen the inspection detail; it merely changes the scheduling of required inspections to accommodate travel restrictions.

3) Limitations.

a) Part 142 certificated foreign training centers and associated foreign satellite/remote sites are prohibited from providing initial and transition training as defined below unless the provisions of subparagraph 3)b) below are met. Additionally, the training and evaluations that may lead to the initial issuance of a pilot certificate at the private and commercial level are also restricted.

1. Initial Training. The training required for crewmembers who have not qualified and served in the same capacity on another airplane of the same group.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



2. Transition Training. The training required for crewmembers and dispatchers who have qualified and served in the same capacity on another airplane of the same group.

b) Foreign training centers and their associated satellites/remote sites are required to comply with all Transportation Security Administration, FAA, and other applicable U.S. Government agency requirements concerning student enrollment and training.

4) Foreign Center/Satellite Renewal. The processes for renewal or recertification of a foreign training center include a review of all of the steps required for initial certification. However, a phased inspection process conducted throughout the year is considered to be more practical than one large annual inspection. While more frequent or day-to-day surveillance is preferred, a combination of inspections that will also meet renewal requirements may be used as a method of renewing the foreign-based training center’s certificate. When warranted, a complete recertification evaluation should be conducted.

5) Coordination. Surveillance leading to investigation and/or enforcement action against a foreign training center certificated by the FAA will be handled through normal FAA enforcement processes. Inspectors are cautioned not to become involved with another country’s pilot certification issues or the policies, procedures, and regulations of a foreign state. These events are to be coordinated with the host country’s civil aviation authority. A fraudulent foreign airman certificate and or fraudulent training record entries are representative situations that must be coordinated with the host government authorities.

6) Cost. All activities associated with the certification, approval and/or authorization of a foreign training center, satellite center, or remote site, and associated equipment and personnel are to be charged to the applicant. Inspections required for or conducted as part of the certification and/or recertification of the center, equipment, and personnel are also subject to these charges. The regulatory requirements for recovering costs of this type are provided in 14 CFR part 187. Fee structures for associated surveillance are outlined in the current edition of AC 187-1, Flight Standards Service Schedule of Charges Outside the United States.

7) Surveillance Responsibilities. The Flight Standards IFO with geographical responsibility for the area containing the foreign center or satellite has surveillance responsibility for the foreign operation. The CHDO and TCPM of a domestic training center with a foreign satellite(s) will need to coordinate the surveillance responsibility for the subject satellite(s) with the appropriate IFO.

C. Remote Training Sites. A remote training site is characterized by its temporary nature. It is distinguished by the fact that it uses facilities, such as simulators or classrooms, which are typically dry leased or not under the direct or full time operational control of the certificated (principal) training center.

1) The management, staffing, instructors, training center evaluators (TCE), training curricula, and courseware that are used at the remote site are provided by the principal training center and remain under the control of the principal center. Instructors and TCEs that have authority to provide instruction or evaluations at the principal center or satellite may also provide

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



instruction and evaluations at a remote site providing they have been trained on the operation of associated flight training equipment.

NOTE: Before a TCE may conduct evaluations at a remote site that is outside of the TCPM’s geographic area of responsibility, the TCPM must coordinate associated evaluations with the FAA office with geographical responsibility for the remote site. Because the TCE’s activities are temporary, this coordination does not require additional Vital Information Subsystem entries by the FSDO that has geographic oversight responsibility for the remote site.

2) The TCPM must authorize remote training sites before the accomplishment of any training authorized by the principal center’s training specifications. Remote site authorization will be granted by letter and typically for periods not exceeding 120 days. Letters of authorization may be renewed for extenuating circumstances for not more than 60 days at a time. If, due to emergency situations, longer periods are required, consideration should be given to upgrading and designating the facility as a satellite center.

3-4336 TRAINING CENTER PROGRAM MANAGERS.

A. The FAA CHDO will assign a TCPM to each training center certificate-holder. The TCPM will have oversight responsibility for the training center and is responsible for overall FAA technical administration, certification, surveillance, and investigations relating to the certificate holder. The CHDO may consider the assignment of an ATCPM when:

1) A TCPM’s duties exceed 70 percent of the TCPM’s available time; or

2) The complexity of the training center is such that the TCPM could not reasonably be expected to provide required surveillance of the activities of the center and associated satellite(s).

B. TCPMs serve as the primary operations coordinator between the FAA and the training center. They oversee includes TCEs, ground/flight instructors, facilities, equipment, and curriculum approvals. The TCPM’s role is to ensure that the training conducted by the center, its personnel, and facilities meets the regulatory standards of part 142, and complies with established policy and procedures. TCPMs also coordinate with training center management regarding regulatory changes in FAA policy matters.

1) TCPMs are responsible for reviewing and granting approval of core and/or specialty curricula that are submitted by the center. Once initially approved, each curriculum will be entered into the center’s training specifications as either a core or a specialty curriculum. The TCPM must advise the Air Carrier Training Branch’s, AFS-210, part 142 program lead of each core curriculum that is initially approved for a center’s use. The TCPM may notify by e-mail and should provide the curriculum name and the training requirement that it is intended to satisfy.

2) TCPMs may be called upon to assist POIs of air carriers that are requesting to use the services of the TCPM’s assigned training center. For those operators that may wish to use a training center’s core or specialty curricula to accomplish a portion of their training requirements, the TCPM may assist the POI with his/her evaluation of the center’s capabilities to

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



meet the operator’s training requirements. If approved by the POI, the center’s curriculum may become a part of that operators training program.

3) TCPMs may function as a geographic resource for POIs whose operator(s) have been authorized to use the assigned training center or their satellites. Surveillance of this type is determined through mutual agreement between the POI and TCPM. The surveillance of foreign training centers or satellites that have been approved to conduct an air carrier’s training will require POIs to coordinate required surveillance with both the TCPM and IFO.

4) TCPM Surveillance Responsibilities. (See Section 7 for a discussion of the coordination activities associated with an air operator outsourcing a portion of their crewmember training to an authorized training center.)

a) The TCPM must develop and conduct a surveillance program of all training center curricula that are authorized in section B of the center’s training specifications.

b) Coordinate and conduct various surveillance and certification activities, as appropriate, with other FAA inspectors. This activity will primarily involve POIs for air carriers who have been approved to use the training center.

c) Determine through surveillance and investigation that the training center is adequately staffed with appropriately qualified instructors and TCEs.

d) Monitor TCEs to determine adequacy and quality of approved training programs as well as the quality of checking and testing.

e) Monitor instructors to determine adequacy and quality of approved training programs.

f) Monitor flight training equipment status, including discrepancy logs as required by part 142, § 142.59 to assure continued compliance with qualification standards and authorized maneuvers.

g) Monitor training programs conducted in support of the center’s training specifications to ensure compliance with center procedures, FAA regulations, policies, and procedures.

5) TCPM Certification Responsibilities.

a) Conduct practical tests for the issuance of airman certificates and ratings.

b) Conduct or observe the reexamination of certificated airmen following failures to meet the minimum standards required for the certificate they hold.

c) Initiate and/or assist in the emergency suspension of airmen certificates.

d) Conduct enforcement investigations and prepare final reports in those cases requiring legal disposition.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



e) Provide technical assistance to legal counsel, give depositions, and testify at court trials and formal hearings.

f) Review, recommend necessary changes, and approve training specification, training center curricula, courseware, and associated revisions.

g) Recommend amendments to previously approved programs to eliminate unsafe practices, and/or improve the efficiency of the curriculum.

h) Conduct formal inspections on a regular basis and evaluate methods and plans for any necessary corrective actions, including followup inspections to ensure that appropriate corrective action has been taken.

i) Approve individual maneuvers and functions in support of the center’s curriculum for simulator and flight training devices that have been appropriately qualified by the National Simulator Program team, AFS-205.

j) Conduct periodic record evaluations to determine the centers compliance with 14 CFR, center policies, and other regulatory requirements.

6) Approval and oversight of TCEs.

a) Train and examine TCEs for initial designation, recertification, and standardization as an evaluator as necessary.

b) Approve TCEs for specific types of aircraft and simulators operated by the training center and enters appropriate authorizations in the center training specification.

c) Monitor TCEs during the conduct of airman certification and recurring evaluations to ensure compliance with established standards and approved procedures and TCE authorization letters.

d) Ensure compliance with the memorandum of understanding between the center and FAA regional Flight Standards division.

7) TCPM Simulator and FTD Surveillance Responsibilities.

a) Review applications for initial or upgrade evaluation of flight simulators and FTDs.

b) Assist AFS-205, as required, with the initial and requalification of the center’s simulator(s) and FTDs.

c) Periodically conduct practical evaluations of FTDs to determine that they continue to meet AFS-205’s initial approval performance standards.

d) Review and approve simulator inoperative component guides.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



e) Review simulator discrepancy logs for deficiencies that have not been corrected in a timely manner and that may affect the capabilities of the flight training equipment to meet training curriculum requirements.

f) Verify through actual flights or operation of training devices that each maneuver, procedure, crewmember function, circling approach, and runway scene required to support proposed curricula can be accomplished in accordance with the device’s qualification.

g) Monitor the centers notification of any discrepancies and or modifications that may require reevaluation by AFS-205.

8) The TCPM must maintain technical oversight of each ATCPM, FTPM, and PPM, assigned to the TCPM’s training center whose duties include responsibility for one or more specific aircraft training programs conducted by a training center.

9) ATCPM duties include the following:

a) Conduct surveillance and assist the TCPM with assigned responsibilities on an as required basis.

b) Additional duties as assigned by the ATCPM’s supervisor.

10) PPM duties include the following:

a) Conduct surveillance and assist the TCPM with assigned responsibilities on an as required basis. Particular emphasis is placed on the types of aircraft the PPM is qualified and remains current on.

b) Coordinate with the TCPM regarding FAA policy, updated training requirements, and any necessary changes to regulatory requirements for the types of aircraft in which rated.

c) Review and submit to the TCPM training curricula, courseware, associated revisions, and any recommendations for assigned aircraft.

d) Conduct surveillance programs for all training center activities within the assigned aircraft program.


05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9





Section 2 Part 142 Training Centers: Training, Qualification, and Designation of Training Center Instructors and Evaluators

3-4353 GENERAL.

A. Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 142 requires each training center to have adequately trained personnel to accomplish the center’s approved training curricula. Part 142, subpart C outlines the qualifications, prerequisites, training requirements, and limitations of training center instructors and evaluators who are employed by training centers to conduct instruction and evaluations on their behalf.

B. Part 142 requires that each approved curriculum specify minimum instructor and evaluator qualifications and the initial and continuing training required by those individuals to conduct the assigned curricula. The qualifications and training required to ensure center instructors and evaluators are competent to conduct the assigned training curricula is an integral part of a center’s approved program. Training Center Program Managers (TCPM) must ensure that the center has developed and received approval for their instructor and evaluator training curricula. The various curricula and syllabi must identify, in a modular format (including specific elements and events), the specifics of each required course of training for their instructors and evaluators.

3-4354 INSTRUCTOR TRAINING, QUALIFICATION, AND DESIGNATION. Although part 142 does not specifically address the differences or distinguish between ground and flight instructors, it is a well-established practice to make this distinction. The distinction between ground and flight instructors at training centers is appropriate for a number of reasons. First, it enables the centers to distinguish between medical and pilot certification requirements as well as the training required to qualify an individual to conduct a specific portion of an approved curriculum. Additionally, it affords the centers the flexibility currently provided to air carriers by their operating rules and policies governing ground and flight instructors.

A. Ground Instructors.

1) A training center ground instructor is an “authorized instructor” similar to the holder of a ground instructor certificate issued in accordance with 14 CFR part 61. Training center ground instructors, when properly qualified, may provide instruction in the ground-training segment of a center’s core and/or specialty curricula. Individuals that a center wishes to designate as a ground instructor may only be authorized to conduct training that is not considered flight training. Training centers must have an approved process to train and qualify ground instructors to ensure those individuals are knowledgeable in the subject matter and qualified to conduct assigned curricula. Subpart C of part 142 requires that training centers identify the training, experience, and evaluations that will be administered to perspective instructors prior to permitting the individual to conduct an approved curriculum.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



2) Centers may employ subject matter experts (SME) on occasion to support specific curriculum elements that demand specialized technical training and experience that would not otherwise be available. For example, it may be appropriate to use emergency medical service personnel to conduct cardiopulmonary resuscitation training or request that the airport fire department personnel assist to discuss aircraft crash and rescue procedures. SMEs, such as engine and equipment manufacturers, may also be used to assist regular training center ground instructors in a particular subject area to provide additional information and experience to enhance the course content.

3) As required by part 142, § 142.47 all instructors must be able to read, write, understand, and speak English. Fluency in reading, comprehension, and especially speaking are critical attributes for all instructors. Ground school instructors who conduct systems integration sessions in flight training devices (FTD) must also receive training in the applicable portions of the center’s flight training segment to ensure an adequate level of knowledge and skill are obtained to support the assigned curriculum. Training centers must also develop training curricula to qualify ground instructors in the use of all hardware, software, and training devices (both ground and flight) that are identified in the curriculum modules/elements that the instructor will be assigned to conduct. These training curricula must contain both knowledge and skill demonstration testing modules. The instructors training record must contain a record showing the satisfactory completion of these tests. Both initial and recurrent training and testing records must be maintained in the instructor’s file. If the instructor is assigned to deliver modules/elements that incorporate a simulator or an FTD for system review, the instructor must also demonstrate their proficiency in the use of the supporting FTD(s) or simulators(s). Again, ground instructors, if authorized, are limited to nonflight activities.

4) Each instructor designated as a ground instructor must complete the applicable training and testing requirements specified in part 142, subpart C not specifically related to flight duties.

B. Flight Instructors (Simulator/FTD).

1) Part 142, §§ 142.47 and 142.49 outline the instructors’ eligibility, airman qualifications, and experience requirements that each center must address in their instructor training curricula. A center’s instructor training curriculum must describe in detail how the training center will train their flight instructors in the areas required by part 142 and the center’s policies and procedures.

2) The training center must have an approved curriculum, including syllabus and courseware, to train flight instructors to ensure that instructors are knowledgeable and proficient in the subject matter, maneuvers, and procedures the instructor will be assigned to conduct. This curriculum must include:

• Training in the operation of the associated hardware, software, and flight training equipment that will be used;

• Required prior experience, training to be received, and evaluations that will be accomplished as part of the instructor’s qualification; and

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



• Recurrent ground training in basic instructional methods, operation of simulators and FTDs as well as instruction in the specific content of each training course in which the instructor is designated to instruct.

3) When evaluating a center’s instructor training curriculum, TCPMs must ensure that the items specified in §§ 142.47(c)(1) and (2) have been adequately covered. The following guidance is provided to clarify the intent and scope of the items listed in § 142.47(c)(1).

a) Principles of Learning, Including Instructional Methods and Techniques.

NOTE: The TCPM may waive requirements for instruction in “Instructional Methods and Techniques” and “The Fundamental Principles of The Learning Process” for individuals who hold a current teacher’s certificate or its equivalent (issued by a state, county, or city) that authorizes that person to teach in a junior or senior high school, or a person regularly employed as an instructor in an accredited college or university; or holder of a current flight or ground instructor certificate. If the TCPM issues a waiver to either of these instructional requirements, it must be in writing and made a permanent part of the instructor’s record.

b) Training center policies and procedures. (Forms and distribution, briefings/debriefings, unsatisfactory performance, crew pairing limitations, maximum training day length, checklist usage, customer read files, etc.)

c) Instructor duties, privileges, responsibilities, and limitations. (Customer contact, scheduling, applicable regulations/orders/notices/advisory circulars (AC), Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) policy memos, authorized deviations/waivers/exemptions, etc.)

d) Proper operation of the simulator or FTD, including controls and limitations, the use of simulator discrepancy logs, simulator component inoperative guides.

e) Customer requirements and applicable differences training, etc.

f) Minimum equipment requirements for each curriculum. (Operation of audiovisual systems, who to contact for inoperative equipment, acceptable alternate presentation methods, etc.)

g) Crew resource management and crew coordination.

h) Evaluation of student performance. (Center policy on reporting, customer policy on reporting, corrective action in the event of substandard performance, etc.)

i) Content and revisions to each training curricula. (How to request amendments, amendment process, how to validate the currency of center/customer material, etc.)

NOTE: Except for center-specific items such as training center policies and procedures, FTD or simulator operation, recordkeeping, deviations, etc. An instructor who has satisfactorily completed the instructor training requirements

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



for a part 121 or 135 certificate holder within the last 36 months may be given credit for satisfying appropriate portions of the instructor training required by § 142.47 if the TCPM determines that the training previously received is equivalent to and meets part 142 regulatory requirements.

4) Each flight instructor must satisfactorily complete a written test on the subject areas outlined in § 142.47(c)(1). The test must be approved by the TCPM and be comprised of questions that are equivalent in difficulty, complexity, and scope to those specified by the FAA for the Flight Instructor Airplane, and the Instrument Flight Instructor knowledge tests. Written testing on simulator operations is required by § 142.47, which is not normally covered by the aforementioned FAA tests.

5) Flight instructors are required, prior to initial designation and annually thereafter, to demonstrate to an inspector or evaluator the knowledge, ability, and proficiency to instruct each authorized maneuver, procedure, and crewmember function for a representative segment of each curriculum for which that instructor is designated to instruct at the center. The demonstration of instructing ability must be performed from the instructor panel in a flight simulator or FTD (as applicable) representing each type of aircraft in which the individual will instruct. In addition, if authorized to instruct in an aircraft due to the limitations of the simulator or FTD not permitting 100 percent training, testing, and checking, the flight instructor must accomplish an annual proficiency check in the aircraft on at least the maneuvers that are not authorized to be accomplished in the simulator or FTD. (See appropriate practical test standards)

NOTE: Part 142, § 142.53(a)(1), requires a training center instructor to demonstrate his or her knowledge and proficiency in conducting a representative segment of each curriculum for which that instructor is authorized to instruct. If an instructor is authorized to conduct multiple curricula, then the instructor must demonstrate his or her ability to conduct a representative segment of each of the curricula for which he/she is authorized to provide instruction. Each authorized curriculum will be evaluated separately unless the TCPM has made a determination that the commonality between two or more curricula or courses is sufficient to accept concurrent approval. Credit for concurrent instructional demonstration applies only to ground training segments and the operation of FTDs.

6) Section 142.53(a)(7) requires all instructors who conduct training in an approved simulator or FTD to satisfactorily accomplish a written test and proficiency check on the content of each course the instructor is authorized to conduct, prior to initial designation and annually thereafter. It is important that the center’s instructor training curriculum provide detailed information on the training to be given to each flight instructor in which the instructor is authorized to conduct. This is important because the instructor will be evaluated initially and annually on his/her ability to instruct as well as pilot the flight simulator or FTD in the maneuvers, procedures, and crewmember functions authorized to be conducted. Written tests must encompass and evaluate the instructor’s knowledge on the specifics of aircraft systems, operating procedures, maneuvers, and crewmember functions that are part of the curriculum.

7) Proficiency check requirements (§ 142.53(a)(7)):

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



a) Unless further restricted by the training center, the standards for satisfactory performance during proficiency checks are those stated in the applicable practical test standards.

b) Administered by a qualified FAA inspector, TCPM, or authorized evaluator.

c) Encompass subject matter and maneuvers of a representative segment of each curriculum the instructor is authorized to conduct. If an instructor is authorized to instruct in multiple curricula for the same aircraft, then the instructor must be evaluated annually in each of those curricula for which he/she is authorized to provide instruction. The TCPM must ensure that annual proficiency checks, which are designed to cover a representative segment of a particular curriculum or course, are sufficiently comprehensive to ensure that the instructor is proficient and capable of instructing the subject course.

d) The TCPM or authorized evaluator must determine the specific content of the required proficiency check. These evaluations must cover as many subject areas, maneuvers, procedures and crewmember functions as necessary to determine the instructor’s knowledge of, and proficiency in, operating the aircraft.

e) The proficiency check must be conducted in the same flight training equipment that the instructor will be using to conduct instruction. Instructors who provide instruction in multiple simulators, representing different model or series covered by the same type rating, are to accomplish a proficiency check in each of the various simulators.

f) The proficiency check requirements of § 142.53 may be met by satisfactorily completing a proficiency/competency check accomplished under the requirements of parts 91 subpart K, 121, or 135 provided: each instructor who instructs in a Level C or D flight simulator must annually meet one of the practical experience requirements listed in § 142.53(b). The center’s approved instructor training curriculum must describe how the center will ensure one of these practical experience requirements will be met. The aircraft used to accomplish the flight experience or in-flight observation/line observation and Line-Oriented Flight Training (LOFT) must be the same type as the simulator in which the instructor is designated to instruct.

NOTE: The annual requirement of § 142.53(b) may be considered met if the instructor participates in an approved line observation program for an air carrier under part 135, § 135.338(f)(2) or part 121, § 121.412(f)(2) including an additional LOFT approved by the TCPM and conducted by the center.

C. Flight Instructors (Aircraft). A flight instructor who provides instruction in an aircraft in those maneuvers and procedures unable to be accomplished in an approved simulator or FTD must meet the same qualifications and training/evaluation requirements that are specified for a simulator or FTD instructor plus the additional training requirements stated in § 142.53(a)(5) and (6). In addition, if instruction is given in an aircraft from a required crewmember position, each instructor must hold a medical certificate, a current FAA flight instructor certificate with appropriate category, class, and type rating and must maintain recency of flight experience as required by 14 CFR part 61, § 61.57. If instruction is provided from a noncrewmember position or observer seat, the pilot in command (PIC) must be qualified and current as a flight instructor in the aircraft.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



NOTE: Flight simulator instructors and evaluators who also instruct or evaluate in an aircraft may maintain recency of flight experience in a flight simulator, as authorized by § 142.63.

D. Designation of Instructors.

1) The training center must authorize and designate each ground and flight instructor in writing who is qualified to provide instruction on behalf of the center. Authorization letters or records must include the:

• Instructor’s name, • Employee identification, • Initial qualification date for each authorized curriculum, • Curriculum/module/element name and course number (if appropriate), and • Other qualifying information the TCPM deems appropriate.

2) The training specifications (paragraph A013) issued to each training center require that the center maintain a list of qualified instructors. This listing must also identify the curriculum(s) that the instructor is authorized to conduct on behalf of the training center. The TCPM should advise the training center that all changes or additions to this list will require notification to the TCPM within five working days.

3-4355 SELECTION, TRAINING, AND DESIGNATION OF TRAINING CENTER EVALUATORS (TCE).

A. Regulatory Basis. The regulatory basis for the designation of a training center evaluator (TCE) may be found in 14 CFR parts 183 and 142. The FAA considers TCEs with certification authority to be examiners as that term is used in part 183. Training centers certificated under part 142 are required to have sufficient personnel to support their training objectives, which may include the appointment of a number of TCEs. Part 142 also outlines the prerequisites, training requirements, operating procedures, and limitations of TCEs who are authorized by the center’s TCPM.

1) The determination of a “sufficient” number of TCEs for a particular center will require a careful evaluation of:

• TCE projected workload relative to the center’s customer base and request authorization;

• Number of advanced FTDs and simulators; • The make, model, and series of aircraft trained at the center and FAA

available support and oversight; • Number of satellites and geographical location with respect to available FAA

surveillance; and • Projected number of evaluations the training center predicts over a particular

period.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



NOTE: FAA Order VS 1100.2, Managing AVS Delegation Programs, current edition, provides direction for the management of Aviation Safety delegation programs including the FAA’s roles and responsibilities, delegation principles, oversight staff qualifications and training, and management of designees. This order must be reviewed when considering the appointment of a TCE.

2) There is no fixed formula that will definitively answer this question. However, a center’s ability to manage their standardization quality program and memorandum of understanding between the center and the FAA are primary factors in determining the resources required to adequately supervise center evaluators. Other primary considerations include an equitable balance between the center’s workload and their ability to reasonably meet their customer’s needs without compromising standardization, the quality of instruction, or safety.

NOTE: TCPMs must carefully evaluate the FAA’s and center’s resources to ensure the surveillance demands required to adequately monitor TCE activities and to ensure the center and the FAA can properly train, supervise, and evaluate each evaluator is not compromised.

B. Eligibility.

1) To be eligible for consideration as a TCE, candidates must first:

a) Hold an unrestricted FAA pilot or flight engineer (FE) certificate as appropriate, to act as PIC or FE for the specific aircraft;

b) Have met the instructor qualification and training requirements of part 142, subpart C and this chapter;

c) Be currently assigned as an instructor at the employing training center; and

d) Be qualified in each specific curriculum and the associated flight training equipment for which TCE privileges are requested.

2) Individuals that meet the eligibility criteria in the above paragraph will be evaluated on the following criteria before proceeding with formal training:

a) Have a history of cooperation with the FAA, and a good record as an airman regarding accidents, incidents. The TCPM must verify the airman information through the FAA’s recordkeeping system(s) before scheduling any training or qualification observations. The airman’s information will be retained in the TCE’s file.

b) Have a reputation for integrity and dependability within the industry and the community.

c) Have at least one year of training center experience as a simulator instructor and have accumulated at least 100 hours of simulator/FTD operating experience within the previous 12 months in the same aircraft make, model, series, and type (if type is applicable) of simulator or aircraft for which the designation is requested. TCPMs may consider the candidate’s

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



previous experience as an alternative to the 1-years’ experience requirement if such experience is appropriate, timely (within the last 36 months), and equivalent to the 1-year prerequisite. When considering a candidate’s previous experience to determine its equivalency relative to the authorization(s) being requested, the TCPM must carefully evaluate the candidate’s overall experience in the type of operation and aircraft he or she will be authorized to evaluate. Examples of experience that may be considered include prior experience as an examiner, (aircrew program designee (APD), Designated Examiner (DE)), part 91K check pilot, or a part 119 certificated air carrier check airman.)

d) Candidates requesting authorization to conduct evaluations in an aircraft while acting as a required crewmember must have logged at least 100 hours as PIC in the make, model, and series of aircraft, except when approved as initial cadre on newly certificated aircraft types or newly acquired aircraft for the employing center.

NOTE: The 1-year training center experience and/or the 100-hour requirement to be considered as a TCE does not apply to the introduction of a new aircraft type into the center’s program. In this case the policies and procedures in volumes 3 and 5, as appropriate, relating to initial cadre airmen should be followed.

NOTE: Although current regulations do not require TCEs to be a full-time employee of the employing center, caution must be exercised when selecting part-time individuals. The task of remaining proficient in the conduct of evaluations becomes more difficult as active participation becomes less frequent.

3) To ensure standardization, regional office 200s may authorize waivers to the requirements outlined in subparagraphs 2)c) and d) above. Other listed requirements are not subject to wavier. In addition to the foregoing guidance, FAA Order 8710.3, Designated Pilot and FE Examiner’s Handbook, current edition, provides additional guidelines that may be appropriate when considering a waiver request.

NOTE: Not all provisions of that order apply to TCEs, and there are requirements for TCEs that the order does not contain.

C. Selection, Training, and Designation.

1) The process for the selection, training, and designation of TCEs generally mirrors that of APDs and DEs as outlined in 8900.1 Volume 13, Chapter 1, Section 1 and 2. TCPMs should refer to Volume 13, Chapter 1 for guidance on:

• Selection, • Training and observation, • Oversight and support, • Required records, • Processing of initial request, • Examiner’s authority abroad, • Shared oversight responsibilities, • Amendment of designations,

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



• Renewal of designations, • Processing of examiner’s paper work, • Review of examiner decisions, • Termination of examiner designation, • Cancellation for cause procedures, and • Other actions that may be relative to the designation of TCEs.

NOTE: The following subparagraphs 2)–9) contain information specific to training center TCEs and is provided as a supplement to the examiner information provided in Volume 13, Chapter 1, Sections 1 and 2. The following paragraphs are meant to provide additional guidance and clarification and not designed to replace the guidance contained in Volume 13, Chapter 1, Sections 1 and 2.

2) TCE Application and Processing. The application process to designate a TCE is initiated by the employing training center. The center must submit an application letter and completed FAA Form 8710-6, Examiner Designation and Qualification Record, (front side) to the TCPM for each TCE nominee. The application letter must include at a minimum, the data requested in Volume 13, Chapter 1, Section 2. Appropriate guidance for processing the application letter and Form 8710-6 is located in 8900.1 Volume 13, Chapter 1, Sections 1 and 2. “Training Center Evaluator Designation/Renewal Checklist” may be used to assist with the processing of the application. This checklist is located on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

3) TCE Training and Qualification. TCE applicants must satisfactorily complete the training outlined in Volume 13, Chapter 1, Section 2 by the TCPM or his designated representative. The training conducted by the TCPM must include, as a minimum, the items under § 142.55(a)(3). Each candidate will also be observed and evaluated conducting each portion of a practical test (or proficiency check, if authorization is limited to § 61.58 proficiency checks only) by an FAA inspector qualified in accordance with Order 4040, as amended. This evaluation will include an observation of the applicant conducting a complete oral, simulator, and (if appropriate) aircraft flight-testing modules as well as associated briefings and debriefings appropriate for the authorization(s) requested. The qualification evaluation(s) referenced above must be conducted in accordance with a core curriculum approved for the employing training center and appropriate for the evaluation authority being sought. The applicant must also demonstrate the proper completion of the airman certification and/or qualification paperwork required by the employing center as well as appropriate FAA documentation and reporting.

a) TCE Proficiency Check(s).

1. TCEs must remain qualified as an instructor in all curricula/courses for which he/she holds evaluation authority. Therefore, TCEs must meet all instructor training and testing/checking requirements in order to remain authorized as a TCE for a particular curricula/course.

2. Section 142.55 requires a TCE to satisfactorily pass an annual proficiency check in the flight training equipment in which he or she is authorized to conduct evaluations. This proficiency check must be taken in a simulator or FTD (as applicable), in an aircraft that

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



represents the make, model, and series of aircraft in which the TCE will be conducting evaluations. In addition, if authorized to evaluate in the aircraft due to the limitations of the simulator or FTD for 100 percent testing and checking, the TCE must accomplish an annual proficiency check in the aircraft on the maneuvers that cannot be accomplished in the simulator or FTD.

NOTE: An instructor proficiency check that is designed to evaluate “a representative segment of each curriculum” as permitted by § 142.53 (as opposed to the full requirements of the appropriate practical test standard) does not meet the checking/testing requirements for a TCE. A TCE proficiency check, however, may be considered to meet the instructor proficiency requirements in § 142.53.

3. A TCE may accomplish required part 142, subpart C proficiency check requirements by one of the following methods:

• Accomplish the annual proficiency evaluation as required by § 142.55; • Complete an air carrier’s proficiency evaluation in accordance with

§§ 121.441 or 135.293 and 135.297 for the make, model, and series of aircraft for which the TCE holds evaluation authority; or

• Accomplish the evaluation required for initial or the addition of an aircraft type to the TCE’s letter of authorization (LOA).

NOTE: TCEs that maintain their § 142.55 qualification through an approved air carrier program must accomplish all of the maneuvers required by the Air Transport Pilot Practical Test Standard regardless of the specific operator’s proficiency check requirements. For example, an operator may not be approved to conduct circling approaches at published minimums or authorized global positioning system approaches. In order for the TCE to remain qualified to instruct/evaluate circling approaches, at published minimums, the TCE must be evaluated accomplishing the circling maneuver at published minimums during his/her proficiency check. This requirement must be met to ensure the TCE’s part 61 qualifications are maintained.

b) An Inspector that is qualified in the aircraft and current in accordance with FAA Order 4040, must conduct the TCE proficiency check in the applicable flight training equipment unless otherwise authorized by the TCPM. The content of the proficiency check must include a demonstration of the following:

1. The knowledge and skill areas required for the original issuance of the certificate for which the TCE holds authority; and

2. All maneuvers and procedures listed in the practical test standard for the applicable certificate and rating. At the discretion of the evaluator, this check may include other crewmember functions that the TCE may be expected to evaluate in the accomplishment of assigned duties.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



4) Letters of Authorization and General Restrictions.

a) Following the satisfactory completion of all required training and testing, TCPM’s will issue a LOA to each TCE outlining their evaluation authority. The TCE’s LOA will become a permanent part of their training record maintained by the employing center. A TCE cannot be granted authorization to evaluate graduates of a curriculum or course that the employing center does not hold the authority to conduct. For example, TCPMs may not authorize a TCE to act as a contract check airman or conduct evaluations for air carriers operating under parts 91, subpart K, 121, or 135. The operators POI may only approve contract check airmen. (See section 7 for additional details on the approval process for authorizing center personnel to act as contract check airmen or contract instructors for an operator.) Training centers are limited to conducting crewmember training and evaluations pursuant to parts 61 and 63 certifications only.

b) TCEs may not be authorized to:

• Evaluate in more than two aircraft types or two different models/series within the same type if they are significantly different; (For example, LR-25 and LR-55 are considered significantly different aircraft and therefore are considered as two separate aircraft for the proposes of this order.)

• Remain qualified to conduct evaluations in training courses for three or more grades of pilot certificate unless specifically justified and approved by the TCPM;

• Conduct evaluations in more than one aircraft type and one training course for nontype-rated aircraft; or

• Conduct evaluations in five or more different series of one aircraft model.

c) In addition, the TCPM must consider limiting a TCE’s evaluation authority when evaluations are conducted in different models that are significantly different as determined by the differences table in Volume 3, Chapter 2 of this order.

d) If a TCE’s authorization is limited to the PIC proficiency check required by § 61.58 only, airmen type certification privileges § 61.157 are not authorized.

e) Before a TCE can be approved for a second aircraft, the TCPM must carefully evaluate the differences between the aircraft currently authorized and that of the second type requested. In many cases, an aircraft type rating will encompass a number of different models and series of aircraft within that type rating. Different models and/or series within a specific type may have vastly different operating characteristics and systems. Levels of differences (designated A–E) are described in 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 19. Because the TCEs knowledge and skills directly affect the quality of an evaluation, the TCPM must consider the following guidelines when determining the reasonable number of aircraft in which a TCE may be authorized to conduct evaluations.

1. Authorization as a TCE (not limited to proficiency pilot examiner (PPE)-only) includes the authorization to conduct airman certification tests and PIC proficiency

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



checks (§ 61.58) for the aircraft covered by that type rating or curriculum for nontype-rated aircraft.

2. Authorization to conduct evaluations in an aircraft model or series that encompass Level A or B differences are relatively easy to accomplish (e.g., DHC-8-100 versus DHC-8-200) and may not affect the TCE’s ability to effectively transition between the two aircraft.

3. Authorization to evaluate in a model and series that requires Level C, D, E, or Flight Standards Board differences training will affect the complexity of the evaluation and must be considered before additional authority is granted. (e.g., LR-25 versus LR-55)

4. Authorization to evaluate in aircraft that have a common type rating but require separate curriculum and/or flight training equipment should be considered essentially the same complexity as another type rating (e.g., DC-9-30 versus MD-88 or B-717).

5. Evaluations resulting from a specialty curriculum, such a Category II, also affect overall complexity.

6. Consideration must also be given to the number of annual proficiency checks and training required to maintain the TCE’s currency.

5) TCE Limitations. The following limitations must be observed by TCEs in the accomplishment of their authorization evaluations.

a) TCEs must comply with the provisions of § 142.49 as required by § 142.55 during the accomplishment of their evaluation duties. Specifically, TCEs must comply with the requirement that their combined instruction and evaluation time in a simulator or flight training device may not exceed 8 hours in a 24-hour period. This limitation does not include pre and post briefings associated with flight training.

b) Except as outlined in paragraph 6)d) below, TCEs may only conduct evaluations for graduates of the employing training center or satellite associate center(s).

c) When conducting evaluations at one of the principal’s satellites or remote sites the TCE will remain under the direct supervision of the principal training center manager and the terms and conditions of the TCEs LOA. If the satellite or remote center(s) is located outside of the TCPMs geographical area of responsibility the TCE must notify their center manager and ensure the TCPM is contacted prior to conducting such evaluations. The TCPM must contact the FAA field office with geographic responsibility for the satellite/remote center’s location and coordinate required surveillance requirements.

d) TCEs may not act as examiners at large by conducting practical tests or proficiency checks for the general pilot population or in violation of their LOA as issued by the employing center’s TCPM.

e) A TCE may not function as a required crewmember while conducting simulator evaluations.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



f) Without the expressed written permission of the TCPM or their authorized representative, a TCE must not evaluate an applicant for a certificate or additional rating if the TCE participated in one or more of the three flight training periods immediately preceding the proposed evaluation. Exceptions to this policy may be granted on a case-by-case basis after considering any unique or extenuating operational circumstances surrounding the particular request. Scheduling convenience and or trainee availability are not valid reasons to grant such permission.

g) TCEs of U.S. domestic centers including Alaska and Hawaii, must not conduct any evaluation services outside of the 50 United States without the expressed permission of their assigned TCPM/assistant TCPM. The TCPM or assistant TCPM will coordinate all international activities (other than Canadian) with the applicable International Field Office or certificate-holding district office with geographic responsibility for the requested evaluation.

h) A TCE must not conduct any evaluation after the expiration date listed on his/her FAA Form 8430-9.

6) TCE Authorizations.

a) Pilot TCEs may accomplish their recency of experience requirements in an approved Level C or D flight simulator. FE TCEs may accomplish their recency of experience requirements in an approved Level 6 or 7 FTD as well as all levels of authorized simulators.

b) TCEs, not limited to PPE privileges only, may issue an “SIC Type Rating” to applicants in conjunction with the satisfactory completion of a center’s curriculum provided the second in command is enrolled in a curriculum that:

1. Is approved to meet the requirements of § 61.157, or

2. Is approved to meet the requirements of § 61.58, or

3. Meets the requirements of § 61.55.

NOTE: This does not apply to part 119 certificate holders or part 91, subpart K air operators who are conducting training at the center.

c) TCEs may issue “SIC Type ratings” to qualified pilots of part 119 certificate holders or part 91, subpart K air operators for which they hold check airman authority. This authorization is limited to pilots employed by the air carriers for which the TCE holds contract check airman authority.

d) A TCE who is authorized as a contract check airman for an air carrier may also issue type ratings in accordance with the provisions of § 61.157 if specifically authorized by the air carrier’s POI. POIs should issue such authorizations in conjunction with and as part of the TCE’s check airman approval letter. However, this privilege may only be exercised at the TCEs employing center and for air carriers accomplishing training at that center.

7) TCE Recurrent Training.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



a) The TCPM or his designee normally conducts this training within 60 days of renewal. It may be accomplished in multiple sessions during the year; therefore, a record review to ensure that the TCE attended each session within the previous 12 months should be part of the annual renewal.

b) Each TCE must satisfactorily complete annual training in those subject areas required for initial qualification and changes to FAA regulations and policy. In addition, a discussion of pertinent accidents and incidents as well as National Transportation Safety Board recommendations on those models or similar model aircraft should be reviewed. The TCPM may exercise discretion in choosing which of those areas to emphasize during this training.

c) Due dates for renewal of TCE authorizations must be considered. Completion of the annual training and/or checking in the calendar-month before or the calendar-month after the due month is considered to have been completed in the month it was due.

8) Recurrent TCE Proficiency Check(s):

a) Each TCE must satisfactorily accomplish a written test and proficiency check in a flight simulator/FTD/aircraft in which evaluations will be given. The TCE must also comply with the annual instructor qualification requirements, including a proficiency check in each curriculum, and specific flight training equipment in which instruction will be given. The proficiency check required by §§ 142.53 and 142.55 may be combined provided the content of the check meets the proficiency check requirements for a TCE and is appropriate to the make, model, and series of aircraft represented by the simulator in which evaluations have been authorized.

b) TCEs must maintain their qualifications as instructors in order to retain their evaluator’s authorization as a TCE. Each required proficiency check must have been accomplished within the 12 months prior to the expiration date of the TCE designation except as permitted in paragraph 7)c) above, or that portion of the designation will become invalid.

c) If approved by the TCPM, the TCE proficiency check required by § 142.55 may be conducted by a TCE, qualified and current in the specific curriculum and flight training equipment. Approval to permit a TCE to conduct these checks may be granted on a one-time basis or other reasonable time period that the TCPM deems appropriate. Such approvals will be made in writing and not to be included in the TCE’s LOA. Approvals to conduct the subject evaluations will have an expiration date not later than the TCE’s current LOA.

9) Observation and Evaluation.

a) Ninety days before the expiration date of a TCE’s designation, the TCPM or other TCPM-authorized FAA inspector will be schedule to observe the TCE conduct a complete practical test for at least one of the authorizations held.

NOTE: The purpose of this observation is to evaluate the TCE’s ability to administer a test or check as an evaluator. The TCE’s aircraft-specific knowledge and flight training equipment proficiency is evaluated during the annual instructor proficiency check for each curriculum. If, for good reason, a certification practical

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



test cannot be observed as required for TCE renewal, a proficiency check administered under §§ 61.58, 121.441, or combined competency/proficiency checks under §§ 135.293/135.297 may be substituted at the discretion of the TCPM. If credit will be for the completion of either a § 121.441 proficiency check or a combined §§ 135.293/135.297 competency and proficiency checks, these specific checks must be accomplished using the curriculum of one of the center customers that the TCE has also been authorized as a contract check airman. For TCEs with authorizations limited to proficiency checks only, a complete proficiency check will be required for renewal. The TCE will be observed in the context of all phases applicable to the TCEs authority (oral, simulator, and aircraft). If the observation is conducted during a part 121/135 proficiency check, the Inspector should sign FAA Form 8410-3, Airman Competency/Proficiency Check, or equivalent form to document the observation requirements of §§ 121.413 or 135.339.

b) If the TCE is qualified in more than one type of aircraft, alternating annual observation of an evaluation should be planned. If the aircraft are not in the same category and class, evaluations that are more frequent should be scheduled. In this situation, the TCE’s next renewal must be accomplished in the alternate aircraft. It is important to note that the TCE’s renewal evaluations are not the same as the requirement for each instructor to annually demonstrate instructional proficiency in a representative segment of each curriculum in which he/she is authorized to instruct (§ 142.53(a)(1)).

NOTE: TCPMs must specify in each evaluator’s LOA the specific subjects by curricula or course name the evaluator is authorized to test and/or check. A sample letter of designation, entitled “Training Center Evaluator Letter of Authorization” and a “Training Center Evaluator Designation or Renewal Check List” is available on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

10) TCE Identification Numbers. Each TCE will be issued a unique identification number made up of their pilot certificate number followed by the four-letter identifier of the employing center or satellite. For example: (Pilot/FE certificate #) plus (center or satellite 4 letter ID).


05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9





Section 5 Part 142 Training Centers: Outsource Training—Air Operators and/or Fractional Ownership Program Managers Contracting With Training Providers

3-4409 GENERAL. This section provides policy guidance for principal operations inspectors (POI) that have operators or receive requests from their operators to outsource a portion of their required crewmember training. The information in this section may also be useful for Training Center Program Managers (TCPM), operators, and training center managers.

3-4410 BACKGROUND.

A. In addition to adopting Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 142, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) also revised applicable sections of 14 CFR parts 61, 63, 91 subpart K (91K), 121, 125, 135, and 141 to provide a means for crediting the training, testing, and checking accomplished in flight simulators and flight training devices (FTD) toward the flight training requirements of those parts. The adoption of part 142 enabled operators to pursue training alternatives not previously available under the regulations. Part 142 has made the use of training centers by operators more widely accepted as an alternative means of providing training to its employees.

NOTE: “Alternative means” as used in part 142 has in some cases been misunderstood and has been interpreted to mean that compliance with a training center’s approved courses will meet the training requirements required by the appropriate operating rules for an operator. This is not the case. “Alternative means” permits an operator to outsource or arrange to have its approved training conducted by a third party. It does not mean that an operator has an “alternative means” to meet the training approval requirements governing its particular operation. Programs approved in accordance with part 142 may not be used as an alternative means of satisfying the requirements of the appropriate operating rules as approved by the operator’s POI.

B. As the use of training centers continues to increase, the interrelationship between a center’s TCPM and an operator’s POI have become increasingly important. When an operator wishes to use the services of a part 142 training center, the most common operational issues that POIs must resolve—and this section will address—are below:

1) Exactly what portion of the operator’s required crewmember training, checking, and/or testing will the center be authorized to conduct?

2) What qualification requirements are necessary to enable the training center flight instructors to conduct the requested training? (Reference part 91, §§ 91.1075, 91.1089, and 91.1093; part 121, §§ 121.412 and 121.414; and part 135, §§ 135.338 and 135.340.)

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



3) How does the operator propose to qualify training center evaluators (TCE) or other personnel to become contract check airmen? (Reference part 91, § 91.1063; part 121, §§ 121.411 and 121.413, and part 135, §§ 135.337 and 135.339.)

4) What documentation is required to ensure the training conducted by the center complies with the operator’s approved curricula, and how does the operator propose to document this training?

3-4411 BASIC STRUCTURE.

A. The operating rules of parts 121, 135, and 91K permit operators to use the services of another operator certificated under the same part or a certificated part 142 training center to conduct some or all of their required crewmember training. If approved by the operator’s POI, an operator may use the training provider’s facilities, equipment, and personnel to varying degrees to accomplish the training, checking, and testing required by their approved/accepted training program.

B. Regardless of who actually developed an operator’s training curriculum, the operator is responsible for its approval, oversight, content, and currency. Regulations are very clear regarding an operator’s requirement to have appropriate crewmember training programs that support their particular operation. The regulations are also clear concerning the requirement to have these programs approved/accepted by the Administrator. In the case of the operator, this approval is delegated to the operator’s POI. In similar fashion, training centers certificated under part 142 are also required to have their curricula approved by the Administrator. For training centers, the approval authority is delegated to the center’s TCPM.

C. The following cases are the two most common arrangements that are formed between air carriers and training centers.

1) Case One—Dry Lease.

a) The least complicated way in which an operator may use the facilities and equipment of a training center is through a “dry lease” agreement. In this case, the operator has developed and maintains its own approved training curriculum, associated courseware, materials, checklists, procedures, and personnel to conduct training and checking, but elects to dry lease flight training equipment and facilities from a training center. Associated airman certification functions and proficiency requirements are completed by check airman employed by the carrier (not the training center), the operator’s aircrew program designee (APD) or the FAA. The operator accomplishes recordkeeping, although required training records may be maintained at the training facility if approved by their POI. POIs will make all Vital Information Subsystem (VIS) entries concerning the operator’s check airman activities. The operator’s POI approves the use of the center’s flight training equipment; however, the operator is responsible for ensuring that the center’s equipment and facilities continue to meet the standards required to accomplish required training. The training center simply acts as a host for the operator and center personnel are not involved in the training or checking of the operator’s crewmembers.

b) POIs are responsible for providing required surveillance to determine if contracted facilities and training equipment meet the requirements for continued approval. Due

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



to the center’s physical location in relation to the POI’s office, the POI may request the center’s TCPM to provide information concerning the training center facility and equipment as well as assistance in performing required surveillance.

c) Operators who conduct training in this manner (dry lease) are not outsourcing their training from another training provider and therefore do not require approval for outsourced training in their operations specification (OpSpec)/management specification (MSpec) A031.

2) Case Two—The Training Center Provides Facilities, Instructors, and/or Evaluators Under Contract to the Operator.

a) The second most common way operators use the services of part 142 training centers is to enter into an agreement with the center to provide instructors and/or evaluators to act on behalf of the operator in the conduct of the operator’s training curricula. In this situation the operator may have developed its own training curricula, hired a consultant to develop their curricula, or adopted the training center’s curricula. Regardless of the source, each curriculum must be approved by the operator’s POI for their use. However, it is not uncommon for operators to submit one of the center’s core or specialty curricula without revision to their POI for approval. To determine if this is possible, the operator must conduct a detailed comparison and analysis of the center’s curriculum, courseware, procedures, equipment, and personnel to determine if the training center’s curricula will meet their operational needs. If the operator determines that the center’s curricula will meet their needs, they may submit it to their POI for approval. If the POI accepts the submitted curriculum and grants approval, the curriculum becomes part of the operator’s approved program, and in effect becomes the operator’s curriculum. This trend is particularly evident among part 135 and new entrant part 121 operators for whom the development of a complete in-house pilot qualification program using modern flight simulation devices often entails prohibitive costs and logistics.

b) Training center personnel (flight instructors) conducting flight training activities for an operator must be trained and qualified in accordance with the air carrier’s approved program to become eligible to conduct training under the air carrier’s approved curriculum (§§ 121.412 and 121.414 or §§ 135.338 and 135.340 as appropriate). If an air carrier wishes to have the center provide flight checking or testing services, they must ensure nominated individuals are trained and qualified as a check airman in accordance with the operator’s approved training program (§§ 121.411 and 121.413 or §§ 135.337 and 135.339, as appropriate).

c) The center may maintain the operator’s training records if approved by the POI. However, the responsibility for the adequacy of the records remains with the operator, not the training center.

d) If the operator elects to nominate one or more of the center’s personnel to act as a contract check airman, and the operator’s POI authorizes such check airmen, the POI must maintain all check airman entries in the VIS. In other words, whether an operator uses its own personnel as check airmen (as outlined in case one) or elects to use center employees as contract check airmen, all required VIS entries relating to check airmen will be made by the POI. This will help ensure that both the POI and the operator maintain proper operational control over persons performing check airmen/contract check airmen functions.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



e) The POI must be assured that the center’s facilities and equipment are adequate to conduct the training as specified in the training program. The center’s TCPM is one of the POI’s best sources of information to enable him/her to make that determination and assist in surveillance activities.

f) Operators who wish to engage a training center to accomplish the aircraft-specific training modules of their curricula create special surveillance requirements. The division of an operator’s required training between the operator and a training center creates a unique recordkeeping situation as well as specialized training for the center instructors. POIs must be extremely vigilant in determining that all elements of the operator’s program are being completed by each party. POIs should communicate regularly with the training center’s TCPM and are encouraged to request assistance with surveillance of the operator’s activities at the training center. The TCPM’s assistance will typically afford the POI greater flexibility and a higher level of surveillance than would normally be possible without the TCPM’s assistance. An operator should develop and keep up to date a “Training Source Document” or similar statement detailing what training will be provided in-house and what will be provided by the training center. See the Air Carrier Training and 142 Training Center Branch’s Web site for a sample of such a document.

3-4412 PART 142 APPROVED CURRICULA. A short review of the various types of training center curricula and their approval process will assist with our understanding of the appropriateness of these curricula for use by an air carrier/operator. It is important to emphasize that a center’s approved curricula may not be used by an air carrier/operator without first being evaluated by the operator for appropriateness and secondly, being approved/accepted for use by the operator’s POI.

A. Core Curriculum.

1) A core curriculum is a training center-developed course that is approved by the Administrator (through the TCPM) for the purpose of meeting the training and certification requirements of airman under parts 61 and/or 63. (Reference § 142.3.)

2) In order for a training course to be approved as a core curriculum it must:

a) Meet the applicable requirements of part 142, subpart B and part 61/63;

b) Contain all the events and maneuvers required by the appropriate practical test standards for the issuance of the particular airman certificate for which the curricula was designed;

c) Meet the requirements of the Flight Standardization Board report for that specific aircraft;

d) Consist of training segments that identify training and testing requirements for the issuance of a particular certificate;

e) Follow the guidance in Order 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 54, Section 6 and Volume 3, Chapter 19 Section 5 concerning ground and flight training threshold hours; and

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



f) Include maneuver descriptions, standard operating procedures, checklists, and other supporting courseware.

3) Part 142 pilot training curricula are designed to meet the certification requirements of part 61 and therefore do not include many of the operator-specific elements required by the operating rules associated with an air carrier. For example, a part 142 core curriculum does not require a training center to specify the training that is normally found in an operator’s OpSpecs, such as authorized takeoff or landing minimums, types of authorized approaches, and captain high minimum requirements. Additionally, ground training in areas such as hazardous materials handling, security, aircraft maintenance, logbook procedures and flight following is also not required to be part of a part 142 training center’s core curriculum. A sample part 142 core curriculum may be found on the Air Carrier Training and 142 Training Center Branch’s Web site. Although a training center’s part 142 approved core curricula may meet the aircraft specific requirements for an operator, these curricula do not qualify operator’s pilots for line operations and may not be used by an operator without the specific approval of the operator’s POI.

B. Specialty Curriculum. This term refers to courses that are designed to satisfy a particular requirement of 14 CFR Chapter I (parts 1–199), other than airman certification under parts 61 and 63. The Administrator (through the TCPM) is authorized to approve specialty curricula for use by a training center and, if appropriate, associated satellite and/or remote sites (reference § 142.3). Training centers often develop specialty curricula to meet the specific needs of a particular customer. Some examples of specialty curricula include (but are not limited to) long-range navigation, Category II/III authorization, equipment differences training, night vision goggles and so forth. Specialty curricula can vary widely in focus and subject matter and may be developed for personnel other than flight crewmembers (reference § 142.81). The approval of specialty curricula or courses by a training center’s TCPM, however, does not enable those curricula or course to be used by an operator without the specific approval of the operator’s POI.

3-4413 ROLES, RESPONSIBILITIES, AND COORDINATION. The safety, efficiency, and quality of training provided by training centers, through the use of structured programs and advanced simulation devices, has proven to be an effective and economical means for some operators to accomplish required training. Consequently, a number of operators have come to rely on part 142 training centers as a source of technical expertise and as their primary training provider. As the use of approved training centers continues to expand, it becomes increasingly important to understand the roles, responsibilities, and coordination activities required of each participant. Paragraphs A through D below emphasize the regulatory roles and responsibilities as well as the coordination required between operators and training centers when an operator is using a training center to conduct a portion of their required training program. Paragraphs A through D do not focus on day-to-day activities associated with the surveillance of training centers or operators outside of the context and scope of this section. It is presumed that these activities are being conducted in accordance with the guidance located elsewhere in this chapter, associated regulations, orders, and policy guidance.

A. Air Operators. The regulatory responsibility for ensuring that an operator’s training program remains current and continues to meet the operator’s needs resides with the operator,

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



not the training provider. When an operator makes application to use the services of an authorized training provider they must:

1) Ensure that all training, testing, and/or checking to be conducted by the training center has been approved by the POI before any training is accomplished;

2) Develop an instructor/check airman standardization program including a checklist, which clearly identifies those elements of the operator’s program that are to be completed by the training center and those that are to be completed by the operator. This checklist must specifically identify each training element that will be conducted by the center and include the regulatory and/or the training program reference for each item.

NOTE: A sample instructor/check airman standardization program may be found on the AFS-210, part 142 training center Web site. The sample program is designed to be all-inclusive and therefore not every item covered in the sample may be applicable to all operators. The sample is intended to be comprehensive and include sufficient detail to ensure the training provider has an accurate understanding of the operator’s training requirements. The FAA suggests that each subject in the sample standardization program be reviewed with a potential training provider to ensure a complete understanding of each party’s role.

3) Develop an implementation plan to perform oversight of center facilities and personnel engaged in the conduct of the operator’s training and associated evaluations. The operator’s implementation plan must:

a) Ensure that all training center personnel selected to act as contract instructors (both ground and flight) and/or contract check airmen are appropriately trained and qualified. Flight instructors and/or check airmen must be qualified in accordance with the operator’s approved program. (Reference §§ 91.1089 through 91.1093, §§ 121.411 through 121.413, and §§ 135.337 through 135.339 as appropriate.)

NOTE: Operators must complete a detailed comparison between their check airman curricula and that of the training centers’ TCE curricula to determine what, if any, additional training must be provided to qualify the center’s personnel to act as a contract check airman. Elements of the center’s instructor/TCE training curricula that the operator finds equivalent to their training program may, with the POI’s approval, be credited toward the completion of the operator’s instructor/check airmen curricula. If the center’s curriculum is approved as meeting the requirements of the operator’s curricula, other than the operator specific items, no additional training for the center’s personnel would be required. Any differences or deficiencies noted will require the operator to develop a training module to ensure all regulatory requirements are met and to qualify the center’s personnel as contract check airman. This module that includes the operator-specific subjects must be presented to the operator’s POI for approval/acceptance. AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site contains an equivalent training and continued qualification requirements table that provides

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



guidelines for determining equivalency of training between various operating regulations and part 142.

b) Provide the center with appropriate administration procedures and instructions to be used in the accomplishment of agreed training.

c) Provide for the oversight of all contract center personnel who are authorized to conduct training, testing, and/or checking on behalf of the operator.

4) Additionally, the following procedures must be followed when requesting the use of center personnel to become qualified as contract check airmen:

NOTE: These procedures follow the guidance outlined in Volume 3, Chapter 20 and should be accomplished in the order shown.

a) Evaluate the instructor’s/TCE’s credentials to ensure he/she meets company requirements to become a check airman;

b) Evaluate the individual’s training record to determine the differences training required to qualify the individual as a contract check airman;

c) Develop an appropriate training differences module(s) to qualify the center’s instructor/TCE as a contract check airman and submit the training module to the POI for acceptance/approval; and

d) Conduct and record appropriate check airman training; submit the individual’s name, short resume, and training records to the POI for review and approval in accordance with Volume 3, Chapter 20.

NOTE: POIs should notify the center’s TCPM whenever they authorize one of the center’s personnel to act as a contract check airman by forwarding the TCPM a copy of the contract check airmen’s letter of authorization (LOA).

5) Coordinate the approval of Simulator Component Inoperative Guide(s) (SCIG) and associated training devices (FTDs and simulators) that will be used in support of the operator’s curriculum.

NOTE: If the center is going to provide a simulator or use a simulator in the conduct of an operator’s training program, the operator may wish to submit the center’s SCIG for approval. Training centers typically have SCIGs for each of the simulators in its center(s). These guides permit training to be accomplished with certain simulator components inoperative, provided the particular component is not required for the training that is being conducted. If a SCIG is not going to be used, all of the simulator components must be operable for each training session. AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site contains guidance for the development of a SCIG.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



B. Principal Operations Inspectors.

1) When an operator requests the use of a training center’s facilities, training devices, curricula (core and/or specialty), flight instructors, TCEs, and/or other services, including recordkeeping, the POI is responsible for determining the operator’s request conforms to the appropriate regulations, policies, and procedures.

2) The approval authority for an operator to conduct training at a training center resides with the operator’s POI, and must conform to the training program approval process outlined in Volume 3, Chapter 19.) If an operator wishes to use a training center’s core and/or specialty curricula to meet a portion of their required training program, it is the operators’ responsibility to ensure:

a) The center’s curricula/courses meet the operator’s training requirements.

b) The curricula are submitted to the operator’s POI for review and approval in accordance with the procedures outlined in Volume 3, Chapter 1, Section 1.

c) The curricula are integrated into the operators training program.

NOTE: If the curricula are approved for the operator’s use, these curricula now become a portion of the operator’s approved training program, and the maintenance/currency of those curricula becomes the responsibility of the operator, not the training center.

3) If an operator applies to have the same training curriculum conducted by two or more centers (either operated by the same or a different training provider/company), the operator must develop an implementation plan for each center and ensure that each of the approved centers conducts their training curricula using the operator’s approved training curriculum (including maneuvers, procedures, and checklists). Additionally, each center must be specifically approved for use by the POI and listed in the operator’s OpSpec/MSpec A031. It is the responsibility of the operator to ensure that all required software and hardware approved to support the subject curriculum is available and used by each center during the delivery of their training curricula. Refer to paragraph 3-4436D, Air Carrier Training at Multiple Training Centers, for additional guidance.

NOTE: POIs should notify the center’s TCPM whenever they authorize one of the center’s personnel to act as a contract check airman. This may be accomplished by forwarding the TCPM a copy of the check airmen’s LOA. POIs are encouraged to contact the center’s TCPM for assistance with the review and potential approval of a contract check airman. TCPMs are often the POI’s best source of information relating to a center’s operation and personnel. A sample contract check airman LOA is located on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

4) Approval of provider’s personnel as contract instructors and/or contract check airman for use by the operator. When an operator requests the use of a training provider’s personnel to conduct a portion of their required training it is the operator’s responsibility to

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



ensure those individuals are qualified to conduct the subject training. Prior to authorizing a center’s flight instructors or TCE(s) to conduct any portion of an operator’s training, the operator must qualify each individual in accordance with the training and testing requirements of their operating rule and provide sufficient evidence of such training and checking to the POI for review and approval. See subparagraph 7) in this section for guidance on the approval of contract instructors and/or contract check airmen.

5) Required observations. Sections 121.414(a)(2) and 135.340(a)(2) require an observation of each authorized flight instructor to be accomplished at least once every 24 months. Sections 121.413(a)(2) and 135.339(a)(2) require an observation of each simulator check airman and each aircraft check airman to be accomplished at least once every 24 months. Similar requirements for flight instructors and evaluators at training centers are contained in 14 CFR part 142, § 142.53(a)(1) and 142.55(a)(2). However, part 142 requires an observation to be conducted at least once every 12 months.

a) The intent of the regulations noted above is to ensure standardization of each operator's training program by performing periodic observations of each flight instructor and check airman. The observations focus on the individual’s performance in conducting a representative part of a curriculum or training program approved for that operator.

The operator or an FAA inspector may employ a designated examiner to observe contract flight instructors and contract check airmen. Whether conducting its own training or contracting for training with a training provider, each operator must ensure that all required observations are accomplished and documented. A training center’s part 142 observations of their flight instructors may meet the requirements for the center under part 142, but do not meet the requirements for an air carrier under part 121 or part 135. Such an observation might be acceptable for a portion of an operator’s requirement under the following conditions:

1. When the training curriculum or curriculum segment conducted by the training center is essentially the same as that of the operator.

NOTE: Training program components may be viewed as “essentially the same” when they comprise identical checklists, operational procedures, and call-outs, and cockpit layouts and flight manuals which are compatible in the judgment of the operator’s POI. Training program components, which relate to like-aircraft types, are considered dissimilar when they do not meet the criterion for “essentially the same.” When differences are too pronounced or too numerous in the judgment of the POI, cockpit layouts and flight manuals must not be viewed as compatible.

2. When the observation is acceptable to the operator’s POI.

b) An observation conducted by the FAA is always permissible instead of an observation conducted by an approved check airman or by a designated examiner employed by the operator. An observation by an FAA inspector counts toward the observation requirements of all operators contracting for training program services provided by a training center. POIs and TCPMs may conduct an observation at any time at their discretion. It is anticipated that operators

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



and training centers will exchange information regarding observations of their instructors. However, it is the responsibility of the operator to ensure that all required observations are kept current and are documented.

c) The observation requirements for instructors and evaluators in an air carrier’s Advanced Qualification Program (AQP) will be accomplished in accordance with the approved documentation for that program.

6) Conduct training center surveillance to determine continued compliance with the operator’s approved program.

7) If the operator requests approvals of two or more centers, determine that all training, testing, and checking is conducted using the operator’s approved curricula. To ensure standardized training for all of the operator’s crewmembers, it is essential that, before authorizing multiple sources of training, the operator provides the POI with a surveillance plan to ensure continued compliance with their approved curricula by all centers. Each authorized training center must conduct the operator’s curricula as approved by the operator’s POI and be alike in content, training times, maneuvers descriptions, procedures, checklists, and training devices. Crewmember training using differing curricula for the same aircraft is not acceptable. If a training center is providing the same training program to two or more operators at the same center, it may be permissible (with the operator’s permission) to interchange crewmembers during the flight training phase. This may only be accomplished providing the individual operator’s training curricula are essentially similar, including aircraft checklist, flows, emergency procedures, and profiles. In this example, two separate but identical programs are being accomplished simultaneously. It is important to ensure that operators may only have one approved training curriculum for each series of aircraft they operate.

NOTE: Part 135 On-Demand and Single-Pilot Operations Only: POIs may accept an evaluation given by another company’s check airman if the training and checking modules are essentially the same. In this situation, the evaluator may photocopy the evaluation form and provide each company with a copy that may be placed in the respective crewmember’s file.

8) Determine that simulators and/or flight training devices are appropriate to, and representative of, the aircraft being operated by the air carrier. Flight training equipment must be specifically qualified and approved for the operator’s use, as well as each maneuver, procedure, or crewmember function to be trained.

9) Each training facility must be authorized and listed in the operator’s OpSpec/MSpec A031—Authorization to Make Arrangements with Training Center(s), Air Agencies, and/or Other Organization(s) for Certificate Holder Training.

10) Review the operator’s instructor/check airman standardization program.

NOTE: A sample instructor/check airman standardization program can be found on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

11) Review the operator’s training center audit program.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



NOTE: Many of the training centers used by operators are located in areas apart from the operator’s primary operations base and are often outside of the geographical area of its assigned certificate-holding district office (CHDO). This makes routine surveillance of the training center difficult for POIs and increases the coordination necessary between the CHDO and the FAA office with geographical oversight responsibilities. Under these conditions, it is very important that the POI and TCPM work closely to ensure adequate surveillance of the operator’s approved training facilities, equipment, and curricula.

12) Airman Training Records. Ensure that required airman records meet regulatory requirements. If requested by the operator the POI may permit the training provider to maintain the operator’s crewmember training records. However, the operator must be advised that they (operator) remain responsible for the security, accuracy, and availability of all required records. Permitting a training center to maintain operators’ records does not relieve the POI of required check airman/APD tracking requirements outlined elsewhere in this order or certificate management office policies.

C. TCPMS. From time to time, TCPMs may be called upon to assist a POI whose operator is using the services of a training center. The TCPM’s firsthand knowledge of center personnel, facilities, equipment, and curricula is a valuable resource that POIs have come to rely on. This knowledge enables TCPMs to:

1) Provide the POI information regarding the status and approval level of simulators, FTDs, and the installed equipment used by center instructors and TCEs;

2) Assist the POI by providing technical information regarding the center’s curriculum, training devices, and facilities;

NOTE: TCPMs should advise the POI of any status change involving an instructor or TCE that is also approved as a contract check airman for an operator.

3) Assist the POI with the evaluation of TCEs or other training center personnel nominated by the operator to become contract check airmen or flight instructors. The procedures outlined in Volume 3, Chapter 20, will be followed when evaluating center personnel as potential contract check airman candidates.

4) Assist the POI with required surveillance activities including;

a) Potential contract check airmen;

b) Observing contract check airman during the evaluation of the operator’s airman to ensure evaluations are objective, accurate, and consistent with the operator’s program;

c) Evaluation of required crewmember training records that were authorized to be maintained by the training center; and

d) Other surveillance activities appropriate to the operator’s activities at the training center.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



NOTE: In all cases, the TCPM’s assistance is subject to the CHDO’s workload requirements.

D. Training Center(s). A training center’s roles, responsibilities, and coordination activities include:

1) Participating in the operator’s instructor/check airman standardization program to ensure there is a clear understanding between the center and the operator of exactly what portions (by regulation) of the operator’s approved curricula the center will be conducting;

2) Ensuring the operator has received approval from their POI to use center facilities and personnel in the conduct of their approved curricula;

3) Establishing a naming convention that will enable operator-approved curricula/courses to be distinguished from center-approved curricula. Operator programs are not to be referred to as core or specialty, as these terms are only appropriate for TCPM-approved center curricula/courses;

NOTE: Training centers are not required to list operator names or the operator curricula/courses in the center’s training specifications. Only the center’s TCPM-approved core or specialty curricula/courses are required to be listed in the center’s training specifications.

4) Ensuring that all center personnel used to instruct and/or check on behalf of the operator have been appropriately trained, evaluated, and authorized in accordance with the operator’s approved curricula to conduct such activities. This training must include, at a minimum, training in all portions of the operator’s curricula for which the contract instructors/check airman are assigned to conduct on behalf of the operator;

5) Ensuring that sufficient contract instructors are qualified to support the operator’s training agreement and requirements;

6) Recommending (not qualifying) center personnel as potential contract check airman. The center must ensure recommended individuals:

a) Have completed the center’s approved instructor training program; and

b) Are currently qualified and actively participating in one or more of the center’s core curricula appropriate to the operator’s needs;

7) Maintaining the center’s simulators and flight training devices in accordance with their qualification standards.

NOTE: If a SCIG has been developed for a particular simulator, and the training agreement with an operator includes simulator training, make sure the SCIG has been approved for operator’s use.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



8) Advising the operator whenever flight training equipment fails to meet required qualification standards and/or when maintenance problems will restrict training;

9) Ensuring required training records are appropriately maintained and remain readily available to both the Administrator and operator;

NOTE: Crew pairing policies and procedures may be found on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

10) Ensuring crew pairing policies and procedures are adhered to as it relates to the operator’s training and testing/checking; and

11) Advising operators of any proposed revisions to the center’s curricula that are being used partially or in total by the operator.

3-4414 OUTSOURCED TRAINING PROVIDER APPROVAL PROCESS.

A. Application to Outsource Required Crewmember Training.

1) Operators requesting approval to outsource a portion of their required flight crewmember training must submit an application in a form and manner prescribed by the Administrator. The application must contain sufficient detail to enable the Administrator to evaluate the applicant’s request. Applications must be submitted a minimum of 60 days prior to the proposed training and contain at least the following information:

a) A copy of the initial training center audit including an analysis of the training providers curricula, courseware, procedures, equipment, facilities, and personnel that will be used in the conduct of the operator’s training;

b) A detailed outline, by regulatory reference, of the training elements proposed to be outsourced;

c) If center personnel will be used as contract instructors to conduct the operator’s training the application must contain an appropriate training module developed to qualify centers instructors/TCEs on the operators curriculum;

d) If center personnel are being requested to act as contract check airmen the application must contain an appropriate training module developed to qualify centers instructors/TCEs as contract check airman for the operator. (The data required by paragraph B4) of this section must also be included)

e) A copy of the operator’s instructor/check airman standardization program

f) A copy of the operator’s proposed surveillance plan to ensure the center continues to provide the agreed training;

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



g) Proposed method to maintain required crewmember, contract instructors, and contract check airman training records including the methodology proposed to ensure curriculum revisions and an appropriate instructor/check airman read file are maintained;

h) Other data that the POI may require to evaluate the application;

NOTE: A sample application letter is located on AFS-210 part 142 training center Web site.

2) OpSpecs/MSpecs. The approval for an operator to use a part 142 training center or other provider in the conduct of their required training is authorized through the issuance of OpSpec/MSpec A031. OpSpec/MSpec A031 also requires the operator to conduct ongoing audits of the training center/provider to ensure the training center is continuing to provide training and checking in accordance with the operator’s approved program. An initial audit must be conducted by the operator and submitted to the POI before any training may be conducted. Ongoing audits will be conducted at least every 24 months in order for the operator to continue to use the training center/provider. Guidelines for the scope and content of the operator standardization and audit program are located on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site. If an operator does not conduct the required 24-month audit, their authorization to use the training center/provider will cease on the last day of the 24th month following their last audit date. Operators may reapply to use the training center/provider by completing the application process outlined in accordance with the provisions of this subparagraph.

3) A sample outline of the modules and elements of an operator’s curriculum that are typically contracted out to a training center can be found on AFS-210’s part 142 training centers Web site. These curriculum checklists have been developed to provide a guideline for the operator and center in determining which regulatory requirements the contracted training will be fulfilling.

B. Flight Training Equipment.

1) In order to receive credit for the use of a simulator or training device, the specific device must be a part of the operator’s approved curricula. The subject curricula and training device become a part of the outsourced training audit and must include a comparison of the aircraft being flown by the operator to the flight training equipment available at the training center. The comparison should encompass the make/model/series (and serial number, in some cases) of the aircraft and simulator and include a summary of the flight instrumentation, autopilot, long-range navigation/flight management system equipment, aircraft modifications (electrical system, hydraulic system, engines, propellers, thrust rev, heads-up display, etc.) applicable to each. Regulations require that the flight training equipment fully meet the requirements of the operator’s training program and accurately represent the make, model, and series of aircraft flown by the operator including installed equipment. If the equipment available at the training center does not meet all of the training requirements, the operator’s program must state how any differences between the aircraft and the simulator or training devices will be addressed and submit an appropriate differences training module.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



2) A TCPM’s approval of a center’s training devices (FTDs and simulators) for use within the center’s approved curricula does not authorize an operator to use the same devices within the operator’s curriculum. The TCPM’s approval only ensures that the training devices are approved to conduct the training, testing, and checking permitted under part 142. In order for an operator to use a center’s training devices in support of the operator’s curriculum, the operator must include the devices in its training program and have the devices approved by its POI. The operator’s POI will evaluate the requirements of the operator’s program and make a determination concerning the appropriateness of the center’s training devices and their qualification as it relates to the operator’s curriculum. POIs should request verification of the flight training equipment authorized for use by a training center by contacting the center’s TCPM.

3) To receive training credit for a particular simulator and/or training device, the device must first be qualified by the National Simulator Program team, AFS-205, and be assigned a specific level of qualification. TCPMs and POIs may than approve the device for use by a center or operator respectively, by specific maneuver(s), procedure(s), and crewmember function(s). Approval letters are generally issued to operators and centers specifying the device’s use within a specific curriculum. A sample simulator letter of approval is located on AFS-210s part 142 training center Web site. Operators are authorized the use of training devices through the inclusion of the device in their training program.

C. Approving a Center’s Core or Specialty Curriculum for Use by an Operator.

1) Training centers often submit programs to their TCPM for approval that are targeted for specific customers and/or operators. However, these curricula must meet part 142 requirements and are either “core” or “specialty” as defined by part 142. Once a curriculum is approved by the TCPM, it is listed in the center’s training specifications as either a core or a specialty curricula/course. For an operator to use a center-developed curriculum it must submit the curricula to its POI for approval. The procedure for approving a center-developed curriculum is exactly the same as if the operator had developed the curricula or paid a consultant to develop the curricula. The important point to remember is that when the subject curricula/course is approved by the operator’s POI, it becomes part of the operator’s approved training program and as it relates to the operator, it ceases to be either a core or a specialty curriculum.

2) Once the subject curricula/course is approved by the operator’s POI, the center, when conducting training for the operator, should refer to the subject curriculum by the name given to it by the operator. It is important to note that the training center should not refer to the operator’s program as a specialty curriculum. This naming convention is important to clarify oversight and ownership responsibilities for the subject curricula/course. An operator’s programs are approved by its POI in accordance with the appropriate operating rule. Training center curricula, both core and specialty, are approved in accordance with part 142. The curricula approved by a TCPM will meet certain training, testing, and checking requirements of airmen certification under part 61. The flight crewmember requirements of parts 91K, 121, and/or 135 differ in numerous respects to part 61 and the TCPM’s approval does not enable an operator to use such curricula without the specific approval of the operator’s POI.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



3) In order for an operator to request a training center’s approved curriculum to be incorporated into their program, the operator must first complete a comparison between the proposed center’s curricula to their approved curricula. All differences must be noted and a training module developed to bridge the differences. This training module will be used to qualify the center’s instructors and/or TCEs on the operator’s curriculum. It is the operator’s responsibility to ensure all center instructors and/or proposed contract check airmen receive training on the differences module(s) developed as a result of the curriculum comparison before they may be authorized as contract instructors or contract check airman for the operator.

4) The operator may find that a center’s curriculum may be used without change but that there may be minor differences in operating procedures and/or checklists. As part of the standardization and audit process, the operator must determine all differences between their curricula and the center’s. If the differences found are minor, the operator’s POI may authorize the operator to develop a suitable briefing guide outlining the differences as a suitable method to provide the training necessary to qualify the center’s personnel. Major differences between the curricula will require specialized differences or complete retraining of the center’s personnel. In all cases, the operator’s regulations require contract instructors and check airman to be trained in the approved methods, procedures, and limitations for performing required normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures appropriate to the curriculum segment.

5) Operators must have training policies and procedures in their operations manuals or training program that describe their standard operating procedures and type of operation(s). At a minimum, operators that apply to contract a portion of their required crewmember training to an authorized provider must have policies and procedures in place that clearly identify the:

a) Contract Instructor and Contract Check Airmen Duties, Functions, and Responsibilities. This portion of the operator’s program must clearly define these functions and their procedures to ensure adequate training is conducted and recorded.

b) Standard operating procedures, including but not limited to:

• Crew coordination and “call-outs”, • Maneuvers descriptions and aircraft configuration, • Cockpit “flows”, • Checklist procedures, • Autopilot use and crew coordination, • Crew resource management, and • Approach procedures (including approach charts, crew briefing, Electronic

Flight Bag use, etc.).

6) POIs and operators must be aware that training center-approved curricula are designed to meet the certification requirements of parts 61 and 63 are not required to include operator-specific items required by parts 91K, 121, or 135 training regulations. Part 142 training center-developed curricula are required to meet the certification requirements of parts 61 and/or 63 and the associated practical test standards. Consequently, part 142 training center curricula will not comply with the operating rules governing an air carrier and by default do not contain or

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



reference operator-specific requirements or the limitations/authorizations contained within an operator’s OpSpecs/MSpecs.

7) New Aircraft Introduction. If an operator is introducing a new aircraft and requesting the adoption of a center’s curriculum in support of the introduction, the operator is responsible for ensuring the proposed curriculum meets their operational requirements. Additionally the operator must:

a) Evaluate the proposed curriculum and submit it to their POI for approval/acceptance.

b) Developing a module(s) outlining any operator specific training required to qualify center personnel as contract instructors and or contract check airman based on the POI’s authorized curriculum.

c) If a contract check airman is being proposed the operator must provide the selected individual with any operator specific training identified during the curriculum approval process.

d) Submit an appropriate check airman request to their POI a minimum of 15 working days prior to the proposed use of the contract check airman.

8) Table 3-122A, Sample—Weight and Balance Curriculum Module Comparison Chart, provides an illustration of the differences that normally occur when an operator completes a comparison and evaluation of a weight and balance training module that was designed for a part 142 training center against one designed for an air carrier. The table also illustrates the complexities typically encountered by an operator when conducting a curriculum comparison between their approved training program and that of a training center.

9) Column A in Table 3-122A lists the elements normally associated with an approved part 142 weight and balance training module. Column B represents a typical part 135 weight and balance training module. These differences are a result of the requirements of part 135, § 135.293(a)(3), which require operators to train and check their pilots on their (the operator’s) method of determining compliance with weight and balance limitations. Part 142 requires the center’s curriculum to comply with § 61.155(c)(9), which is typically modeled after the manufacturer’s procedures. When confronted with these differences, an operator must decide to either:

a) Train and qualify the center’s instructors to enable them to conduct the operators approved weight and balance training module; or

b) Providing there is no negative training involved, permit the center to conduct the manufacturer’s weight and balance training and then conduct a specialized course designed to cover the differences between the center’s curricula and that of the operator. If the operator chooses to permit the center to conduct the center’s weight and balance module, the operator would than be required to convene a separate instructional period to train and test the differences between the center’s curricula and it (operator’s) weight and balance curricula. This differences training would be required prior to releasing any crewmember for line operations.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



c) As mentioned in subparagraph a), the operator could elect to provide weight and balance training to one of the center’s instructors in those elements of their curricula that are different from the center’s curriculum. It would then be possible for the qualified instructor to conduct the entire weight and balance module for the operator’s crewmembers. However, without specified training in the operator’s procedures, the center may only be authorized to provide training and testing in those subjects that are part of the center’s curriculum (lines 1–4). In either case, operators must develop a quality control program that will ensure all of their curricula is conducted in accordance with their approved procedures and conducted by qualified individuals. The Instructor /Check Airman Standardization Program located on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site has been designed to provide assistance in this area.

Table 3-122A, Sample—Weight and Balance Curriculum Module Comparison Chart

A. B. C. PART 142—MODULE AND

ELEMENTS [§ 61.155(C)(9)]

PART 135—MODULE & ELEMENTS [§ 135.293(A)(3)]

EQUIVALENT TRAINING

TRAINING CENTER’S CURRICULUM

OPERATOR’S CURRICULUM YES/NO

1 Aircraft Manufacturers Weight & Balance Procedures (AFM)

Aircraft Manufacturers Weight & Balance Procedures (AFM)

2 Definitions Definitions 3 Limitations Limitations 4 Load Shift/Fuel Management and Use Load Shift/Fuel Management and

Use

5 Operations Specifications (Paragraph A96, A97, A98)

No

6 FAA AC 120.27E No 7 Carry-on Baggage identification and

load and storage No

8 Passenger Weight determination—average, surveyed, actual

No

9 Baggage/cargo weight determination No 10 Cabin Configuration and loading No 11 Baggage Compartment loading and

security No

12 Air Carrier Computation method (computer)

No

13 Manifest preparation No 14 Testing Module Testing Module

ROW NUMBER: 1: Topic should comply with the operator’s approved curriculum. Differences evaluation required.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



2 through 4: Topic may comply with the operator’s approved curriculum. Differences evaluation required. 5 through 13: Topic does not conform to the operator’s curriculum. 14: Applicable to the particular curriculum. Differences evaluation required.

10) The curriculum an operator submits for approval to its POI must contain sufficient detail to assure all required training is addressed. The operator is responsible for submitting the subject curriculum to its POI for review, approval/acceptance, and subsequent inclusion in its training program, before any training may be accomplished.

11) Regulatory Compliance and Training Source Document. This document will be jointly developed by the training provider and the operator, and will specify the division of all required training and testing (or checking) tasks between the training provider and the operator. (Other equivalent methods that specify the division of tasks may be acceptable.) The operator bears the primary responsibility to ensure that all ground training required by their specific operating rule is conducted and appropriately evaluated. The POI’s oversight responsibility is to ensure that the operator’s compliance efforts are satisfactory. The POI should check sign-offs (certifications) of ground training and all testing for completeness, and should cross-check those sign-offs against the source document showing the division of tasks. For example, part 135 operators must ensure the training required by part 135 § 135.345 is conducted and all subjects required by part 135 §§ 135.293, 135.297, and 135.299 are evaluated. A properly executed standardization document between the operator and the training provider will provide guidance to both parties concerning the training and testing/checking obligations for each party. A sample Instructor/Check Airman Standardization Program is located on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

NOTE: Training centers are not certificated as air carriers or commercial operators and are not issued OpSpecs/MSpecs. The operator-specific requirements of an air carrier’s operating regulations make it impossible for a part 142 training center to have a training curriculum approved under those regulations. TCPMs may only approve training center curricula that comply with part 142. Training centers may develop curricula that are designed to comply with the operating rules of an air carrier; however, the curricula cannot be approved as “meeting” the requirements of those parts. Training center instructors and evaluators are likewise qualified in accordance with a center’s approved curricula and therefore cannot conduct an air operator’s training without first being qualified by an air operator before conducting any of the operator’s required training. (Reference part 91, §§ 91.1075, 91.1089, and 91.1093; part 121 §§ 121.411 through 121.414; part 135, §§ 135.337 through 135.310). Depending on the content of a particular center’s instructor/TCE training curriculum, an operator may be able to credit a portion of the center-provided training as meeting some of their required instructor/check airman training requirements.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



12) Examples of a sample curriculum and curriculum approval checklist are located on the AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site. The site also contains two charts, one representing part 121 pilot in command (PIC) training requirements and the other representing part 135 PIC training requirements. These charts provide a graphic depiction of the regulatory training requirements necessary to qualify an individual as a PIC for an air carrier.

13) Revisions to a center’s core or specialty curricula that were used, as the basis of an operator’s training curricula does not automatically create a revision to the operator’s POI-approved course. When a center revises one of the curricula that originally formed the basis of an operator’s approved/accepted curriculum, the center should advise the operator of the revision. Additionally, the center should advise the operator of all revisions made to curricula that are similar to or mirror one of the operator’s approved curricula. However, the adoption of such changes is subject to the operator’s evaluation and approval by its POI. Center revisions that are considered appropriate for the operator’s program may be incorporated by the operator if approved by the operator’s POI. Likewise, the operator may make changes to its curricula, in which case they must notify the center and ensure that all contract instructors and contract check airman are trained in the new procedures (differences). Operators must be especially vigilant to ensure that changes to the training center’s core or specialty curricula do not affect the training they receive.

D. Air Carrier Training At Multiple Training Centers.

1) Occasionally, an air carrier will request that training be conducted at two or more training centers. These centers may be owned by the same parent company, satellite centers of the same certificate holder, or may be training centers operated by different companies. It is common practice for training centers operated by different owners/companies to take varied approaches to curriculum design and development for the same aircraft make/model/series. These differences often include training equipment, training hours, maneuvers description, operating procedures, and checklists. When evaluated individually each variant may be perfectly acceptable for the specific aircraft; however, as training products for an air carrier these differences, although subtle, are not consistent with the standardization requirements demanded by air carrier regulations. To ensure standardized training is provided, it is essential that before authorizing the use of multiple sources of training, the air carrier and subsequently the POI determine that the same curriculum and syllabus, including courseware, flight training equipment, maneuver descriptions, procedures, checklists, etc., will be conducted by each provider.

2) Subtle differences between or among training provider’s may not create standardization difficulties for noncertificated operators. However, because air operators are required to have their own approved/accepted programs, differing curricula between or among training providers is not authorized. Additionally, an operator is only permitted to have one training program/curriculum for each aircraft type in its fleet; therefore, training conducted by different centers will present a standardization problem if not properly monitored and managed by the operator.

3) To qualify a center’s personnel to conduct an operator’s training curricula requires the operator to conduct an evaluation of the center’s curricula to determine what, if any,

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



differences exist between the two and provide center instructors and evaluators training in those differences. This process must be repeated for each center authorized to conduct training for the operator. If a contract check airman is requested, the additional training appropriate to the operator’s check airmen training will also have to be completed.

4) If POIs have reason to believe that multiple centers can provide the quality training required by the operator’s approved curriculum, they may authorize two or more facilities or training companies to conduct the subject training. However, if the POI suspects that an operator’s curriculum cannot be adequately presented at multiple centers due to differing delivery methods, FTDs, simulators, training hours, maneuver descriptions, qualified personnel, etc., and/or the operator’s ability to adequately monitor and audit the training being provided, the POI and the operator have the responsibility to limit the number of training providers.

E. Training Policy and Procedures.

1) Operators are required to develop and document, as part of their approved program, adequate procedures and policies to ensure all training providers conduct the operator’s crewmember training as approved. These procedures may be part of the operator’s manual that is used by the certificate holder’s flight personnel in conducting its operations and/or contained in the operator’s approved/accepted training program.

2) Operators must establish training policies and procedures to ensure crewmembers are trained and evaluated in accordance with the policies and procedures that represent the manner in which it conducts its aircraft operations. It is unacceptable to have differences between training/checking and actual aircraft operations or between individual crewmembers.

3) POIs are not to approve requests for outsourced training unless the operator’s program contains appropriate policies and procedures to ensure standardizing training is conducted by the authorized training provider(s).

NOTE: Operators must ensure that approved training providers are provided at least one copy of their operating manual(s), including the revision service for such manuals, which cover the particular areas that the training provider has been approved to conduct. The operator must also ensure the training provider maintains a “read file” specific to the operator that is available to all contract instructors, contract check airmen, and the operator’s crewmembers. This read file must contain information pertinent to their flight operations and crewmember operating procedures. See Instructor/Check Airman Standardization Program on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site for additional information.

4) An operator that determines a center-developed curriculum is suitable for its use must receive its POI’s approval to integrate the subject curriculum into its training program. See subparagraph 6)c) of this section for policies and procedures for the integration of a center’s curriculum into an operator’s program.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



5) Crew Pairing and Class Composition.

a) Crewmembers employed by certificated operators must be trained and checked in accordance with that operator’s approved program.

b) With respect to an operator’s flight training curriculum segments, only pilots from the same operator should be paired together for training and testing/checking. In some cases, an operator may not be able to assign a complete crew to attend required training. It is therefore essential that the operator have training policies and procedures to standardize and monitor who can train together during system integration training, flight training, and testing/checking. Because training and operating requirements may be different between organizations or pilots, scheduling a crewmember to train with another person that is not familiar with air carrier requirements, operating procedures, checklists, crew duties, etc., will not be productive. In the absence of other guidance, the training provider is required to supply a current and qualified crewmember to occupy the vacant crewmember position. The POI and operator must assure that the proper crew pairing will be accomplished when air carrier training is being conducted at a training center before outsourced training will be approved.

NOTE: Crew pairing requirements for flight training are detailed on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

6) Checklist Usage.

a) Certificated operators with approved or accepted checklists are required by regulation to use their approved/accepted checklists for all training and testing/checking.

b) Checklist policy and procedures for part 91 and/or noncertificated operators are available on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

F. Recordkeeping.

1) Regulations require an operator to maintain training and qualification records for each crewmember, flight instructor, and check airman. This requirement includes contract instructors and contract check airmen employed by training providers that are authorized to provide training and checking for the operator. The means and methodology of maintaining required crewmember records must include an acceptable process to record training, checking, and qualifications of the operator’s crewmember training conducted by an outsourced training provider. The operator’s training program should contain a description of their recordkeeping system as well as describing what records are to be used to comply with each regulatory requirement. If the operator wishes to use an electronic recordkeeping system, Advisory Circular (AC) 120-78, Acceptance and Use of Electronic Signatures, Electronic Recordkeeping Systems, and Electronic Manuals, provides guidance for the evaluation and approval of these systems.

2) Operators and training providers must establish and document procedures to ensure they have a clear understanding of their individual responsibilities for complying with required training and testing/checking recordkeeping requirements. These procedures must include identification of responsible personnel and approved location(s) where specific records will be maintained.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



3) Training conducted by center personnel must be documented in accordance with the operator’s approved system. Center personnel acting as contract instructors and/or contract check airman for the operator must also be trained in the operator’s records system.

4) Training centers are not required under part 142 to maintain an air carrier’s crewmember training records when the training was accomplished in accordance with the operator’s approved program. Training centers are only required to maintain the records required to support the training accomplished under part 142 that leads to airman certification or proficiency required by parts 61 or 63. Technically, an operator’s crewmembers are not trained and evaluated in accordance with part 142. They are trained and evaluated in accordance with the operator’s operating regulations and approved curricula and therefore the responsibility for record maintenance remains with the operator. Training centers that have been authorized to provide training for an operator are considered to be an integral part of that operator’s training program. In that context, FAA policy permits the center to be used as a suitable location for required records if approved by the operator’s POI. Many training centers provide a large portion of an operator’s training and in some cases are the sole providers of such training, which may make the center a logical location for such records.

5) Part 142 requires training centers to maintain the training records of their instructors and TCEs. When these individuals are also approved as contract instructors and/or contract check airman for an operator, it may also make sense for the operator to have its instructor and/or check airmen records maintained by the center. It is, however, the responsibility of the operator to ensure that all crewmember records are readily available for inspection as required by applicable regulations.

6) Operators must ensure that training records developed and maintained by their training providers are available in a timely manner. Records of crewmember training and checking are required to be furnished to the operator upon completion (within 24 hours) of any training and/or checking in order to enable the operator to determine qualifications for crew assignment(s). Training and qualification records for contract instructors and contract check airman must also be made readily available to the operator.

7) In many cases, the TCPM will be the best qualified individual to assist the POI with required inspections, proficiency checks, and observations of assigned operators. Properly maintained records will also enable the TCPM and training centers to provide information on instructors and TCEs to other operators that may need instructor and evaluator assistance.

8) A TCE who is authorized as a contract check airman may be approved by one or more POIs to conduct checks for multiple operators that have contracted with a training center. This may occur when multiple operators of the same aircraft type have contracted for training at the same center and are using essentially the same curriculum.

NOTE: Although not required, training centers that maintain contract check airman records for operators may be a good source of information for other operators who are evaluating center personnel as potential contract check airman.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



9) Training centers must have a process whereby they keep customers apprised of all training or checking being conducted on the operator’s behalf. Additionally, the center must notify the operator within 24 hours if there is a job functions status change with a TCE or instructor who is also a contract check airman or contract flight instructor for the operator that may affect the individual’s check airman or instructor status with the operator.

10) TCPMs are responsible for maintaining VIS information regarding the training center, its instructors and evaluators. POIs are responsible for maintaining VIS files pertaining to each training center employee authorized as a contract check airman.

3-4415 REQUIREMENTS TO AUTHORIZE CONTRACT FLIGHT INSTRUCTORS AND/OR CONTRACT CHECK AIRMEN FOR AN AIR OPERATOR.

A. Part 91K, § 91.1049; part 121, §§ 121.401(a)(4) and 121.402(b)(4); and part 135, §§ 135.323(a)(4) and 135.324(b)(4) require operators to provide enough flight instructors and check airmen to conduct the flight training and flight checks required by the applicable operating rules.

1) The determination of a “sufficient” number of contract check airman and/or contract instructors for a particular operator will require a careful evaluation of the following:

• Number of aircrew program designees authorized by the FAA and employed by the operator;

• Geographic location of the operator with respect to available FAA support; • The operators understanding that they are required to provide surveillance and

supervision of their contract instructors/check airman; • Availability of simulators and location relative to the operators crewmember

domiciles; and • Operators required crewmember training and evaluation workload.

2) There is no fixed formula that will definitively answer the question of how many contract check airman/instructors are appropriate. Maintaining an equitable balance between the operator’s ability to provide required management oversight and surveillance, while meeting their evaluation requirements without compromising standardization or safety, is a primary concern.

B. The qualification and training requirements for individuals to become contract flight instructors and/or contract check airmen for an air carrier are outlined in the specific regulations governing the type of operation (specifically, parts 91K, part 121, subpart N, and/or part 135, subpart H, as appropriate). Training center instructors and evaluators are trained and qualified under part 142, which does not mirror the instructor and/or check airmen qualification requirements of an air carrier. Although some of the instructor/evaluator training required by part 142 may be considered equivalent to the instructor/check airmen training required by an air carrier, the two currently do not align. The differences between these two regulatory requirements will generate additional training requirements for training center instructors and evaluators that are selected to provide training and checking services for operators.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



C. Consider the case of a part 142 training center flight instructor (simulator) who is qualified to provide instruction under the training center’s approved core curriculum for a particular aircraft.

1) In order for a training center instructor to serve as a flight instructor for an air carrier, the individual must be trained and qualified to instruct in each training segment, module, or element of the air carrier’s curriculum that the instructor will be responsible for providing to the air carrier’s crewmembers. Current policy does not require center instructors to complete the carrier’s entire approved training program or curriculum provided:

a) The individuals are limited to conducting only the training elements of the operator’s curriculum that they have been specifically trained and qualified to conduct and have been authorized by the operator; or

b) The individual has had previously received the same training, proficiency/competency checks, and observations in the same make/model/series aircraft for another air carrier operating under the same part.

2) Situations where an air carrier adopts a training center’s core or specialty curriculum(s) and the POI approves these curricula as part of the air carrier’s training program would also mitigate some of the training required by the operator to qualify the subject instructor. In this situation the only training the air carrier would be required to provide the center’s instructor(s) would be limited to any differences that exist between the training center’s curriculum(s) (as approved by the TCPM) and the air carrier’s training curriculum (as approved/accepted by the carrier’s POI).

NOTE: In such cases, it is the air carrier’s responsibility to identify each difference between the carrier’s approved training curriculum (including curriculum content, checklists, and procedures) and the training center’s curriculum. The air carrier must than develop and provide their POI a training module to qualify the center’s personnel on all noted differences. This differences training module must be approved/accepted by the POI prior to conducting the subject training.

3) The air carrier’s POI has the responsibility to determine if the manner and method proposed by the air carrier to train and qualify the center’s personnel on curriculum differences, will meet the operator’s training requirements.

D. To ensure the center’s personnel meet the operator’s check airman standards, the operator will need to review the individual’s training history and qualifications. Elements of the center’s instructor/TCE training curricula that the operator finds equivalent to their training program may, with the POI’s approval, be credited toward the completion of the operator’s instructor/check airmen curricula. If the center’s curriculum has been submitted to the POI for approval and is approved as meeting the requirements of the operator’s curricula, other than the operator-specific items, no additional training for the center’s personnel would be required. Any differences or deficiencies noted will require the operator to develop a training module to ensure all regulatory requirements are met in order to qualify the center’s personnel as contract check

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



airmen. AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site contains an equivalent training and continued qualification requirements table that provides guidelines for determining equivalency of training between various operating regulations and part 142.

1) In addition to the instructor qualification and testing requirements outlined in paragraphs B and C above, operators must accomplish the following to qualify an individual as a contract check airman:

a) Evaluate the instructor’s/TCE’s credentials to ensure he/she meets company requirements to become a contract check airmen.

NOTE: Individuals must have at least 1 year of experience as a center instructor or TCE in the make and model aircraft in order to be considered as a contract check airman for an operator. POIs are encouraged to contact the center’s TCPM for assistance with the review and potential approval of contract check airman. TCPMs are often the POI’s best source of information relating to a center’s operation and personnel.

b) Evaluate the center’s instructor and TCE training curriculum by comparing it to the operator’s check airman curriculum to determine the differences training required to qualify the center’s personnel as a contract check airman.

c) Develop an appropriate differences training module(s) to include the operator-specific elements of the check airmen qualification and training/checking regulations to qualify the center’s instructor/TCE as a contract check airman.

d) Submit the contract check airmen training module(s) to its POI for acceptance/approval.

e) If the training course is approved/accepted, ensure the course is provided to all contract check airmen candidates.

f) Provide the POI with complete training records and submit the individual’s name and résumé for review and approval in accordance with Order 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 20.

g) If the applicant is approved as a contract check airman the POI will make the necessary VIS entries.

NOTE: POIs should notify the center’s TCPM whenever they authorize one of the center’s personnel to act as a contract check airman. This may be accomplished by forwarding the TCPM a copy of the check airman’s LOA. A sample contract check airman LOA is located on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

E. The standard categories of authorization for check airmen currently shown in FAA Order 8900.1, Volume 3 do not provide the level of specificity required for the approval of contract check airmen. For example, an operator’s check airman, qualified as a line captain may be authorized as a simulator only check airman permitting them to administer both

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



§ 135.293(a)(1 through 8) as well as § 135.297 evaluations. A contract check airman who is only qualified in the aircraft-specific modules of an operator’s curriculum may be authorized to conduct simulator-only evaluations; however, he or she would be limited, due to his or her training, to evaluations of § 135.293(a)(2) and (b) and § 135.297 evaluations. Unless the contract airman is qualified in the operators complete curriculum for the specific aircraft, he or she may not be authorized to conduct the elements required by § 135.293(a)(1) or (a)(3 through 8). Other restrictions may also apply depending on the training and qualification provided by the operator. A sample contract check airmen LOA is located on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

F. Particular caution must be exercised when a training center’s personnel (instructors or evaluators) have never taught or conducted evaluations in an air carrier environment. With respect to the training of proposed contract instructors and check airmen in the non-aircraft-specific areas such as basic indoctrination, hazardous material, security, etc., these individuals would be required to complete the entire operator-specific basic indoctrination program for one carrier in order to fully meet the training and checking requirements of the regulations. Once a contract (center employee) instructor or check airmen has completed the initial training and qualification, as a flight instructor or check airman for one air carrier they may be considered qualified for other operators, certificated under the same part, by completing an appropriate differences training curricula, acceptable to the subsequent carrier’s POI. This process should preclude an individual from conducting training and checking in an air carrier environment without ever having had the benefit of, at a minimum, the training required to qualify an individual to act as PIC for an air carrier.

G. Because the typical training program offered by the training center currently does not include all of the ground training subjects contained in an operator’s curriculum it follows that neither the trainees nor the instructors and evaluators themselves receive training in those subjects. It is important to ensure all training center instructors and evaluators are trained and evaluated in all subjects that the center is contracted to conduct. For example, because the typical training program offered by the training center currently does not include ground training in the subjects contained in § 135.293(a)(1) and (a)(4–8), it follows that neither the trainees nor the instructors and evaluators themselves receive training in those subjects—which ignores the training requirements of §§ 135.337(b)(2) and 135.338(b)(2). Therefore, a training center evaluator typically is not qualified to evaluate subjects other than those contained in the center’s core curriculum which equates to § 135.293(a)(2) and potentially (3). Similarly, a trainee should not be evaluated in those subjects by any party until the training has been conducted and certified in his training file as complete and satisfactory by a ground instructor authorized and qualified in accordance with part 135.

NOTE: To preclude any confusion concerning a contract check airman’s authorization, the POI must specify in each contract check airman’s LOA what specific subjects the check airman is authorized to test and check.

H. The proficiency evaluations required by an air carrier to qualify and maintain the currency of its check airmen are also applicable to center personnel that are being nominated as contract check airmen for the operator.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



NOTE: TCPMs are only required to verify that the center’s TCEs receive annual training on the conduct of part 61 certification functions in accordance with part 142, subpart C, relating to the curricula that have been approved for the training center’s use. As outlined above, this training and checking does not qualify an individual to act as an operator’s check airman. Operators must complete a detailed comparison between its check airman curricula and that of the training center’s TCE curricula to determine the extent of the additional training they must provide to qualify the center’s personnel to act as a contract check airman on their behalf. If this comparison indicates that the operator’s training programs are identical, other than the operator specific items, no additional training for the center’s personnel is required. Any differences noted between the curricula will require the operator to develop a training module to qualify the center’s personnel as a check airman. This module must be presented to the operator’s POI for approval/acceptance.

I. Training center employees that have been qualified by an operator to serve as a contract instructor/contract check airman may be considered qualified to act in the same capacity for another operator provided that:

1) Both operators are certificated under the same 14 CFR part.

2) Both operators are operating the same make/model/series of aircraft with identical configurations.

3) Both operators are using identical training curricula, including checklist and operating procedures.

4) The requesting operator finds the subject individual acceptable as a contract instructor/check airmen.

5) The subject instructor/check airman has met the operating or observation experience requirements for at least one operator for which they are providing services. For example: if a training center instructor is qualified to provide instruction in a particular aircraft for three different operators, the instructor may be considered to have met the initial and recurrent line operating or observation requirements for all three by remaining qualified in one of the operator’s programs.

NOTE: In all cases, the acceptance of an instructor/check airmen’s qualification by another operator is subject to the approval of the requesting operator’s POI.

J. The POI should arrange to have the operator provide the POI with a periodic report of each check airman’s checking activities, including a pass/fail rate, to coincide with the POI’s periodic review (annual, semiannual, or other). POIs may arrange for these reports to arrive at a time that meets the POI’s needs. A contract check airman should be active enough to retain the required knowledge and skills. This activity level may vary depending on the contract check airman functions and other operators for which he/she is authorized check airmen activities, the size of the operator, and the number of approved check airmen. Usually a check airman should conduct at least eight authorized check airman activities during a 12-month period (including

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



supervision of OE). The POI should specifically re-assess the operator’s need for those check airmen whose records indicate low activity levels.

3-4416 OUTSOURCED TRAINING PROVIDER AUDITS AND ASSOCIATED OPSPEC/MSPEC PROCEDURES.

A. The FAA requires a mandatory self-audit program for operators certificated under the provisions of parts 119 and 91K who contract with a training provider to conduct a portion of their required crewmember training. Such training arrangements are informally known as outsourced training. POIs will use OpSpec/MSpec A031 to record FAA approval of these contract training arrangements.

B. The FAA is often limited in its ability to oversee an air carrier’s training operations conducted under contract by a training provider(s). This oversight is the primary responsibility not of the FAA but of the operator itself. The operator holds an air carrier certificate as a privilege granted by the Administrator on the presumption that the operator will continually maintain the highest safety standards, including flightcrew training standards. The operator must ensure that its flightcrew training conducted by a contractor continually meets the requirements set by regulations and the standards contemplated at the time of initial certification.

NOTE: AC 120-59, as revised, Air Carrier Internal Evaluation Programs, recommends a voluntary self-audit strategy for air carriers that may be readily adapted to continuing analysis and surveillance of outsourced flightcrew training.

C. The self-audit and summary report cycle outlined in this section may be used as the first phase of a plan to implement more effective operator-driven quality assurance where outsourced flightcrew training is concerned. The cycle must be conducted at least every 2 years in accordance with OpSpec/MSpec A031 (Authorized to Make Arrangements with Training Center(s), Air Agencies, and/or Other Organization(s) for Certificate Holder Training) and should be conducted at any time that a major change affects the operator’s outsourced flightcrew training.

D. POIs must verify that their operators arranging with training providers to conduct contract training for their crewmembers, otherwise known as outsourced training, will accomplish the following activities.

1) Self-Audit.

a) Training Program Components: Adherence to Approved Program. The operator must document that the training program delivered by the training provider is identical to the training program approved for the operator’s use by the POI. The documentation will address at least the following:

• Manuals; • The format and content of curricula, curriculum segments, training

modules, and documents depicting flight maneuvers and procedures;

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



• Courseware; • Facilities; and • Qualifications of instructors and check airmen.

b) Training Curricula: Adherence to Approved Program. The operator must audit curricula and document that those curricula presented by the training provider adhere to the curricula contained in its FAA-approved training program. The documentation must address at least the following, including ground training and flight training curriculum segments:

• Initial new-hire training; • Upgrade training; • Transition training; • Recurrent training; • Refresher training (121 only); • Initial equipment training; • Requalification training; and • All other approved training such as differences, hazmat, security, and crew

resource management, as appropriate.

c) Flight Training and Testing/Checking.: Adherence to Approved Program. The operator must observe all contract instructors and contract check airman who are conducting required instruction and evaluations on their behalf by center personnel. The operator must document that regulations contained in §§ 91.1089 through 91.1095, §§ 121.411 through 121.414, or §§ 135.337 through 135.340, as appropriate, are being met and that approved standards are being maintained. Documentation must address at least the following, as applicable:

• Certification flight checks; • Proficiency checks, and instrument proficiency checks (part 91 and 135

only); • Flight training in lieu of the proficiency check, including line-oriented

flight training; • Competency checks; • Maneuver validation (AQP); and • Line operational evaluations.

d) Training Records: Completion of All Approved Training. The operator must review required training and testing records to ensure compliance with their operating rule. This review must cover all of the operator’s crewmembers, including pilots, flight engineers, and flight attendants who have received outsourced training since the last review cycle. The operator must document that each crewmember has successfully completed all of the required components of training and checking comprised by its approved training program.

2) Summary Report. The operator must prepare a report, summarizing the findings of its self-audit. A sample report is on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site. This sample report form may be used to compile self-audit findings and to submit findings to the POI as a

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



summary report. Another form mutually acceptable to the operator and the POI may be used instead. The summary report must be signed by the operator’s director of operations. In all instances that discrepancies are found between the training program delivered by the training provider and that which is approved by the FAA, the operator must propose effective remedies. Those remedies must be included in the summary report and must be addressed under the following categories:

a) Immediate corrective action:

1. Action already taken, showing dates, and

2. Action planned, showing target dates.

b) Long-term corrective action, showing target dates; and

c) A strategy for ensuring continuing prevention of recurrence.

3) OpSpec/MSpec A031. All affected operators are required to be issued OpSpec/MSpec A031. Any training provider conducting contract training, within the meaning of this section, must be approved by the POI and recorded in OpSpec/MSpec A031.

E. An operator contracting for training must address any training program discrepancy and undertake corrective action as soon as the discrepancy becomes known. When the operator’s own remedies are insufficient, the POI must take additional steps as deemed necessary and appropriate, in accordance with applicable provisions of Title 49 of the United States Code (formerly the FAA Act of 1958), 14 CFR, FAA Order 8900.1, Flight Standards Information Management System, and FAA Order 2150.3A, Compliance and Enforcement Program.

NOTE: For guidance in accomplishing an Internal Evaluation Program evaluation, refer to AC 120-59, and Order 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 28.

F. When approving new outsourced training arrangements use the regular Program Tracking and Reporting Subsystem recording procedures for the appropriate job function and enter “Contract” in the “National Use” field.


05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9





Section 6 Part 142 Training Centers: Evaluate Training Programs, Curricula, Flight Training Equipment, and Recordkeeping Requirements

3-4433 GENERAL. The information in this section provides guidance for the approval of a center’s training program and associated curricula/courses. Regulatory requirements demand sufficient content and detail to enable a training center to meet the standards required to ensure the highest level of flight training is achieved. The successful development of program curricula and courses forms the basis of each center’s certificate. The successful evaluation of the curricula, syllabi, courseware, and flight training equipment is critical to the success of the program.

3-4434 COMPONENTS OF A TRAINING PROGRAM. A training program consists of all of the curricula, syllabi, supporting courseware and materials, facilities, flight training equipment, recordkeeping, and personnel necessary to accomplish a specific training objective(s) (e.g., a Boeing B-737-200 training program). A training program may include core curricula, specialty curricula, or both. Other curricula may be used to augment the training covered under a core or specialty curriculum. The technical evaluation of components of a training program must involve the assistance of a Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) inspector qualified in the particular aircraft. Should the Training Center Program Manager (TCPM) be unqualified in the aircraft or lack the expertise to conduct a review of this type, support should be requested form other national resource specialist.

Figure 3-147B, Components of a Training Program

A. Curricula submitted for approval must be presented in a format that describes the content of the proposed training in sufficient detail to enable a clear understanding of subject matter and events to be accomplished. The content of each curriculum or course segment is

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



outlined by listing the main subject areas. Each subject area contains individual training modules for each topic to be covered.

Figure 3-147C, Sample Curriculum Format

Curriculum/ Course

Initial Pilot in Command (PIC)—Gulf Stream 550 Type Rating

Modules/ Elements

G-550 Initial System

Training

General Operational

Subjects

FMS training

G-550 Differences

G-550 PIC Initial

Simulator Flight

Training

NOTE: Appropriate guidelines for the format and content of a curriculum, segments, modules, events, and elements may be found in 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 19.

NOTE: A sample curriculum that represents appropriate format and level of detail to be included in an approved curriculum has been posted on the Air Carrier Training Branch’s, AFS-210, part 142 training center Web site.

B. Training center curricula that are approved in accordance with part 142 are divided into two basic types: core (airman certification) or specialty (other regulatory training requirements).

1) A training center may also develop a third type of curriculum; that is, a curriculum that does not satisfy any specific requirement of Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 61 and 63. These curricula describe training that may be used to augment or supplement other required training (such as training in international flight procedures). Should a training center choose to seek approval for such a curriculum it may do so under the provisions of part 142, § 142.81. As a prerequisite for approval such a curriculum should include a statement saying that no requirements of part 61 are satisfied by its completion; however, it is acceptable to reference an advisory circular (AC) or other guidance around which the curriculum has been developed.

2) Curricula other than those listed above, which are not designed to satisfy any requirement of 14 CFR chapter 1, and for which the training center has not chosen to seek approval pursuant to § 142.81 do not require approval under part 142 and do not generate a surveillance requirement for the FAA.

C. General Characteristics of a Curriculum.

1) Each approved curriculum must be supported by a revision system that includes:

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



• Sufficient detail to evaluate the proposed revision including substantiation for the proposed revision and any associated instructor training and qualification requirements;

• Margin side-bars that mark changed areas; and • The revision number and date on each revised page.

NOTE: Except when required for safety reasons, revisions should be submitted a minimum of 60 days before the expected implementation date.

2) The curricula must represent the flight training equipment to be used by the training center. This must include training in systems (including installed equipment, modifications, and avionics), as well as maneuvers and procedures appropriate to the make, model, series, and in some cases, serial number of the aircraft represented by the flight training equipment. Training in other variants of the same make/model aircraft not represented by the flight training equipment should not be approved.

3) Curriculum terminology should be consistent with that used in FAA guidance documents and materials (part 142, Order 8900.1, practical test standards, etc.). Use of terminology such as “as required”, “as applicable” and other terms that indicate training in that topic is a variable is not acceptable for inclusion in training modules or elements.

4) Curricula must include an introduction that provides a general overview of the training to be accomplished and state a specific training objective. The objective should support the expected outcomes. Course objectives must identify the certification expected, what flight training equipment will be used, as well as the regulatory requirements that will be met. The objective should indicate which particular aircraft variant(s) will be covered.

5) The curricula must state the specific student prerequisites for entry into the curriculum. This should include specific flight experience (including currency), previous training, minimum pilot certification, and qualifications. Common errors include allowing an applicant with an airplane multiengine class rating that is limited to center-line thrust, to enroll in a 100 percent simulator course for a multiengine airplane type rating.

6) The curricula must specify in sufficient detail what ground training will be accomplished. The ground training segment of a curriculum that leads to airman certification or proficiency consists of training in general operational subjects, aircraft systems, and systems integration. Each module must list a sufficient number of elements to describe main topic areas to be covered within that module. Ground training must be predicated on the flight training equipment to be used in the course. The curricula must indicate what criteria and standard will be used to determine satisfactory completion (e.g., completion of a written test on systems and procedures with a grade of 80 percent, which will be corrected to 100 percent).

NOTE: Ground training conducted under a curriculum leading to airman certification must be satisfactorily completed before the start of flight training.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



NOTE: The curricula development guidelines in 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 19, Sections 1, 2, and 9, are the acceptable standards for training program development and should be followed to the maximum extent practical.

7) Part 142 does not specify programmed hours for flight crewmembers however, Volume 3, Chapter 19, Section 5, Table 3-52, Flightcrew Aircraft Ground Training Hours National Norms (Thresholds), provides guidelines for training times that should be considered when evaluating a training center’s curricula. When approving curriculum segments and their associated training hours as proposed by the training provider, TCPMs must consider the complexity of the operation and specific aircraft make, model, and series. For example, training hours for a complex operation may need to exceed national norms, while training hours below the national norms may be acceptable for a less complex type of operation. When granting approval of a core curriculum with training hours below the established threshold training hours, TCPMs must notify AFS-210, through the regional Flight Standards division, that such initial approval has been granted. This notification is necessary for tracking and standardization purposes on a national basis. This notification may be by letter or e-mail and should:

a) Describe the reasons resulting in the grant of the curriculum’s initial approval with fewer hours than the national norms or threshold hours;

b) Include a copy of the initially approved aircraft ground training curriculum segment; and

c) Include any additional supporting information provided by the operator.

NOTE: Briefing and/or debriefing times for flight or simulated flight sessions must not be considered part of the programmed instruction time to meet recommended national norms or threshold hours.

8) The curricula must provide an outline of the flight training (maneuvers and procedures) and practice that will be accomplished during each flight-training period. Flight training sessions/periods are referred to as training modules. Each module must be appropriate to the flight training equipment being used and reflect the specific maneuvers or procedures to be accomplished during that training session/period. The curricula must allow sufficient time for practice and review as well as provide the instructor sufficient opportunity to demonstrate the use of all equipment identified in the training session.

9) The curricula must indicate the individual maneuvers and procedures that will be practiced during each training period. It is common for a particular maneuver to appear in multiple training sessions depending on the maneuver’s complexity. The curricula must indicate what standards will be used to determine student progress. If an aircraft is used, indicate only those events that will be accomplished in the aircraft. Training in specific types of instrument approach procedures must be identified for each session to ensure adequate training in all equipment, procedures, and techniques.

10) A curriculum that provides training, testing, or checking to accomplish certification or proficiency requirements of part 61 must include all of the appropriate practical test standard (PTS)-required maneuvers. If the simulator or flight training device (FTD) is not

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



qualified and approved to accomplish a particular maneuver, for example a circling approach, the student training record must reflect that the maneuver was not accomplished.

11) Curricula may not include maneuvers or systems training in an area or event that the center does not have the courseware or training devices suitable for conducting the subject training. For example, global positioning system (GPS) approach training will not be approved for training if the center’s training devices (FTD or simulators) do not have an operable GPS installed.

12) The training, testing, and checking presented by the curricula must be specific to that make, model, series (serial number, if applicable), and variant of the aircraft represented by the flight training equipment to be used by the center. Differences training between or among variants of the same type are not required of all students but if a curriculum is to satisfy training requirements for different variants, it should identify how differences training will be accomplished. A center may address differences training by:

• Adding one or more modules to the core curricula, and allow for those modules in the programmed hours; or

• Create a separate specialty curricula.

NOTE: In some cases a separate core or specialty curriculum may be necessary to describe the training for a variant of an aircraft type when the differences have been determined to be so significant that ground training, flight training, and checking are required. Some series of aircraft can be operated under the same type rating but require a dedicated simulator to provide the training for that particular variant. For example; L-25 vs. L-35, B-737-200 vs. B-737-800, etc.

13) Curricula will also include qualification module(s) that state the basis and standards for satisfactory course completion and evaluation (testing/checking to be accomplished to what standard).

14) A detailed curricula evaluation checklist has been developed to provide assistance with the evaluation of curricula involving airman certification or proficiency (part 61, §§ 61.58 and 61.157). Refer to AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

3-4435 FLIGHT TRAINING EQUIPMENT (FTDS AND SIMULATORS). Training centers may use a variety of training devices in their approved curricula. However, each core curriculum must be supported by an advanced FTD (Level 6 or 7) or full flight simulator (Level A through D), which must be used to the maximum extent possible for all associated training and testing/checking.

A. Qualifying Flight Training Equipment. Flight training equipment that is to be used to accomplish the flight training, testing or checking requirements of a core or specialty curriculum must be qualified by the National Simulator Program Office (NSP), AFS-205. The NSP will evaluate and assign the appropriate training device “level” to each FTD or simulator. The awarded training device level may be used to determine the training maneuvers that are permitted to be accomplished in the device. Appendix 1 of the appropriate practical test standard

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



(except Private Pilot) identifies the tasks that may be credited through the use of an appropriately qualified training device.

B. Evaluating and Approving Training Equipment. Following the NSP, AFS-205’s qualification of a particular simulator or FTD, the TCPM must evaluate and approve the device for use in the center’s training program. This approval will include the specific curriculum, particular maneuver, procedure, and/or crewmember function permitted to be performed in the device. Part 142 requires the training center’s flight training equipment to be appropriate for and adequate to support the curriculum goals and each curriculum. The flight training equipment must represent the specific aircraft make, model, series, variant, and in some cases, serial number of the aircraft represented by the training device and curriculum. When describing flight-training equipment, the curriculum must use terminology consistent with the level of qualification authorized for the particular device.

NOTE: Each approved flight-training device must be listed in the center’s training specifications by the TCPM.

C. Flight Simulators.

1) Flight simulators are qualified by the NSP office as a Level A, B, C, or D flight simulator. Simulators approved for use in training, checking, and testing under an approved curriculum must represent the make, model, series, variant, and in some cases serial number range of the aircraft training described by the curriculum. The simulator must be equipped/modified to include mandatory aircraft modifications. Each simulator must meet and maintain the standards under which they were originally qualified (i.e., under the provisions of AC 120-40, current edition, Airplane Simulator Qualification).

NOTE: When 14 CFR part 60 becomes effective the provisions within that rule will be controlling.

2) Some curriculum modules or elements require a specific visual scene to accomplish a particular training event. These events may require an accurate representation of the airport, its lighting, the surrounding environment, etc. For example:

• Special airports and approaches, • Approach and landing using visual (ground or airport) references, • Surface Movement Guidance and Control System training, • Line-Oriented Flight Training (LOFT), • Circling approaches, or • Other special circumstances.

3) With respect to the circling approach, the NSP evaluates and qualifies the simulator’s ability to conduct the circling maneuver. However, the TCPM is responsible for evaluating and approving each proposed circling approach to be used for training, checking, or testing.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



NOTE: The criteria for performing a circling approach during a certification flight (i.e., PTS) are different from the criteria for establishing terminal instrument procedures (TERPS). The PTS requires evaluation of circling approaches to a landing runway heading that is at least 90 degrees to the final approach course. TERPS criteria requires publishing a circling approach when there is more than a 30 degrees course difference between the landing runway and the course at the final approach fix position.

a) Circling approach approval guidelines require:

1. The proposed airport scene to represent an accurate airport visual presentation of the airport layout and environment.

2. Only those combinations of instrument approach procedures and landing runway that meet the criteria of the airline transport pilot PTS (landing runway heading that is at least 90 degrees to the final approach course) to be approved for use in curriculum leading to airman certification or proficiency.

3. The approach to be flown at the appropriate approach speed by an airman qualified and current in the aircraft.

4. The aircraft should be at maximum landing weight and in the appropriate configuration.

5. Evaluate night and day scenes (if day is available) with emphasis on airport and runway lighting.

6. Ceiling and visibility should be set at the minimums for the aircrafts circling approach category.

7. The simulator should be frozen in a position the represents the minimum descent altitude and visibility minimums for the approach and observe the airport environment and lighting to determine the appropriateness of the simulator’s visual cues.

8. Conduct a circling maneuver by constant visual reference to the airport environment and to the landing runway. Freeze the simulator periodically as the maneuver is being accomplished to observe whether the airport environment, ceiling, and visibility are maintained.

9. Conduct the approach and circling maneuver again in “real time” (without pause) to determine if the procedure requires any unusual maneuvering and if it is a viable approach and landing.

b) Provided the evaluation parameters are acceptable, the TCPM will approve the simulator for the specific runway and circling approach combinations that may be used in the centers training curricula.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



4) In order for a training center to conduct training, testing, and checking with inoperative components, the center may elect to have an approved Simulator Component Inoperative Guide (SCIG). The SCIG outlines the training, checking, or testing that will not be permitted when a component is inoperative. Although similar in effect, the training center must not use an aircraft minimum equipment list (MEL) to determine the operational status of simulators or FTDs. If an SCIG is approved for use, the training center must develop as a part of the SCIG a management program for managing the repair of items, the use of the device in the degraded condition, and notification of the appropriate personnel. The SCIG management program must include procedures to ensure the reliability of the performance functions, and all other characteristics that were required for qualification for each flight simulator or FTD. SCIGs require the TCPMs approval in order to be used in an approved training curriculum. Once approved, the TCPM will authorize the use of an SCIG by entry in the center’s training specifications.

D. Flight Training Devices.

1) Advanced FTDs are those FTDs qualified as Level 6 or 7. These devices must meet and maintain the qualification standards set forth in AC 120-45, Airplane Flight Training Device Qualification, as amended. The NSP staff is responsible for all advanced FTD qualifications. Once the NSP qualifies the FTD, the TCPM may approve training, testing, and checking in those events that may be accomplished in that level of FTD in accordance with Appendix 1 of the appropriate PTS. The qualification and approval of an advanced FTD is the same process as that used to approve a simulator.

2) The process for granting approval to a simulator or Level 6 or 7 FTD for use in training, checking, and testing is a two-step process.

a) The first step requires the NSP to evaluate and qualify flight-training equipment in accordance with technical standards. Upon completion of an evaluation, the NSP reports its findings (qualifications and limitations) and recommendations to the TCPM. The NSP report does not constitute approval of a simulator or FTD.

b) The second step in the process requires the TCPM to evaluate the NSP report and recommendations. Before approval, the TCPM must determine if the flight training equipment is capable of performing each particular maneuver, procedure, or crewmember function required by the curriculum and that the equipment represents the specific category and class of aircraft, type of aircraft, and particular variation within the type of aircraft addressed by the curriculum. Training, testing, and checking in aircraft not of the same model, series, and variant (including, in some cases, similar serial numbers), and not equipped the same as the simulator or FTD must not be approved.

3) After determining that the flight training equipment is appropriately equipped and capable of accomplishing the curriculum requirements, the TCPM issues approval for the simulator or FTD to be used in a training program. The approval must specify any limitations that are appropriate. Approval to use a particular FTD (simulator or FTD) is authorized through the center’s training specifications.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



4) Levels 4 and 5 FTDs. These devices are qualified by the NSP in accordance with the qualification test guide submitted by the training center and accepted by the NSP. Each device must meet and maintain the qualification standards set forth in AC 120-45. These devices are limited in capability and may only be used to conduct those maneuvers identified in Appendix 1 of the appropriate PTS.

5) Levels 1 through 3 FTDs. These devices are approved by the General Aviation and Commercial Division AFS-800.

6) Daily Inspection Requirements. Each simulator or FTD must be given a functional preflight inspection each day before use. As part of the approval process, the TCPM must determine if the training center has a procedure for accomplishing and documenting required preflight inspections. Preflight inspections will be conducted in accordance with a predetermined list of inspection items that are acceptable to the TCPM and must include a method of logging deficiencies.

7) Operating Deficiencies (Simulator or FTD). Regulations require that each simulator and FTD have a method to log discrepancies and to advise instructors and evaluators that training must not be conducted in events that rely on the inoperative equipment. TCPMs must determine how the training center will identify, record, and resolve discrepancies. Training center must have in place a quality control system for discrepancies that provides instructors and evaluators with information on equipment status prior to the conduct of evaluations or instruction.

8) As part of the process for maintaining the FTDs/simulators qualification, the NSP also conducts periodic evaluations to insure standards and performance of the equipment are being maintained.

a) NSP evaluations may discover deficiencies that require a restriction to training, checking, or testing be imposed. A list of all deficiencies will be provided to the FTD’s sponsor and the TCPM. The TCPM will review all forwarded discrepancies and determine if the training approval for the device will need to be restricted until the training center resolves the discrepancies. TCPMs are responsible for the continued surveillance of the centers simulators and FTDs and may also place a limitation/restriction on training, testing, and testing at any time when deficiencies are noted.

b) The resolution of discrepancies is the responsibility of the sponsor. It is also the responsibility of the sponsor to advise the NSP and the TCPM in a timely manner that discrepancies, which have led to maneuver restrictions, have been repaired.

E. Aircraft Training.

1) Aircraft only training programs or core curricula will not be authorized or approved for use by a training center certificated under part 142. It is Flight Standards policy that when approving pilot training, checking, and testing under part 142, the primary form of flight training and testing/checking will be based on advanced FTDs (Level 6 and 7) or flight simulators Level A through D. An aircraft may only be approved for use to supplement the training, testing, or checking that cannot be accomplished in a simulator or advanced FTD.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



Limited training and testing as permitted by the regulations may be accomplished in an aircraft to avoid issuing a pilot certificate with limitations (e.g., supervised operating experience). If an aircraft is approved for use, each training center must insure that each aircraft is maintained and inspected in accordance with 14 CFR part 91 subpart E, an FAA-approved maintenance and inspection program, maintenance requirements approved by the country of registry, or air carrier approved maintenance program. Each training center certificate holder must ensure that each aircraft that it proposes to use is equipped and capable of conducting all maneuvers and procedures required by the approved training curriculum in which it is to be used.

2) Training centers that employ the use of an aircraft in their curricula as a means of completing required certification tests/checks, due to the use of training devices or simulators that do not qualify for 100 percent training/checking are not required to designate the aircraft as a training site. The aircraft and its location are considered a part of the principals or satellites center for the purposes of the regulation. The aircraft and or the facilities where the aircraft is located are not considered as an individual training site in the context of the rule and are not required to be individually designated as a remote training site. The facilities where an aircraft is located must, however, be suitable for pre- and post-briefings in the context of the regulation and must be appropriate for their intended purpose.

F. Line Operational Simulation (LOS)—AC 120-35, Line Operational Simulations: Line Oriented Flight Training, Special Purpose Operational Training, Line Operational Evaluation.

1) LOS is a broad classification of activities that can be accomplished in a simulator to represent/duplicate/validate real-life flight situations. LOS is an integral and necessary part of any training curriculum that leads to issuance of an initial pilot certificate or the addition of the type rating to an existing certificate entirely in a Level C or level D simulator. It is included in an airman certification curriculum as an alternative to flight time in the actual aircraft before qualification.

2) LOFT is a specific type of LOS. LOFT is designed to provide training and to transition the pilot from maneuver-oriented flight training (in which systems knowledge and operating skills are initially learned and practiced) to operational flying, which involves the application of skills and knowledge, crew coordination, and all other aspects of operating the aircraft in typical service. It provides the opportunity to observe crewmember actions, including areas such as Crew Resource Management (CRM), standard operating procedures (SOP), practical application of aircraft knowledge, and other training areas. LOFT provides a good opportunity to ensure training in the special-emphasis areas in the PTS and other FAA guidance is accomplished. It may also help determine if an airman requires additional training in a particular area.

a) A curriculum that is approved under part 142 and that accomplishes 100 percent of the required training and testing for initial airman certification or additional rating in a Level C or D simulator must contain LOFT. LOFT is not required if an actual aircraft is to be used for part of the practical test. LOFT is required on an annual basis for certain simulator instructors approved under part 142 and may be required to meet certain training and qualification requirements under part 121.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



b) LOFT is training; it is a learning experience in which errors will be made. It is not a checking program in which errors are unacceptable. To ensure that maximum benefit from LOFT is obtained, the session must be scheduled after satisfactory completion of the maneuvers-based portion of the curriculum and prior to the certification test and constructed in accordance with the guidelines in AC 120-35.

3) Characteristics of LOFT.

a) Training Time. A LOFT session should use realistic routing between airports so as to encompass a normal simulator training period (e.g., if the normal period is 2 hours per crewmember, the LOFT in the simulator should be 2 hours for each crewmember exclusive of any breaks). Comprehensive briefing and debriefing are essential to effective LOFT exercises. However, the briefing and debriefing time is not considered part of the flight training time. The preflight briefing time should be used to brief the applicant and allow the crewmembers to perform preflight planning. The planned hours of instruction specified in a curriculum/syllabus must exclude LOFT except for the time the applicant is participating in the flight portion of the LOFT. Because PIC duties, functions, and capabilities are the emphasis during LOFT, only time spent at controls during LOFT is creditable toward programmed curriculum time. Any LOFT conducted after airman certification cannot be credited toward the curriculum times.

b) Crew Qualifications. Participating crewmembers must be fully qualified in accordance with the requirements of part 142 and the curriculum being trained. They must be knowledgeable and proficient in all aspects of the training that is being taught by the center as part of the curriculum, including checklists and SOP.

c) Stated Objective. The LOFT must state training objectives. Objectives may be broad in scope such as CRM, workload management, etc., and/or can have a specific objective such as a specific area of operation that has been determined to require special emphasis. The problems presented during the LOFT scenario can be further categorized into two types:

1. A simple problem that has no further impact on the conduct of the flight once it has been diagnosed and corrected.

2. A complex problem that is not correctable and continues for the duration of the flight. LOFT requires the flight to continue to the ultimate outcome without stopping unless a crew action corrects the abnormal or emergency situation.

d) Scenario description. LOFT scenarios must be highly structured and simulate flight from startup to shutdown in real time without any freeze, slow motion, or other activity that might not be accomplished in an actual flight in an aircraft. LOFT should include the following:

1. The flight should represent the type of operations reflected in the training being conducted (e.g., applicants being trained under a part 61 curriculum would accomplish LOFT that represents part 91 operations, not air carrier).

2. LOFT should reflect training in knowledge and skills required by the training center’s approved core curricula—not those unique to a particular operator.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



3. A complete scripted scenario simulating total line operational environment must be developed by the training center. This would include a detailed script that includes all communications expected during the flight. Scenario communications should consider that the LOFT instructor is functionally not present in the simulator but is available for communications as ATC, maintenance, flight service, ground operations, etc.

4. LOFT scenarios should be designed based on the stated objectives and desired outcomes and must include normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures. If two PIC students train together, LOFT may consist of two segments in which one segment is conducted with normal procedures and a separate segment incorporates abnormal and emergency procedures. Alternatively, different scenarios may be developed for each student to prevent repetition. If the curriculum permits a single PIC student to train, LOFT may consist of one flight segment that contains normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures.

4) Preflight Planning and Briefing. Comprehensive preflight planning appropriate to the type of operations being conducted must be part of LOFT to enhance realism and represent actual aircraft operations. This will require a complete navigation and weather package, including Notices to Airmen that may affect the flight. This should include en route, alternate, and departure airports as well as destination weather. Flight planning for the LOFT must consider fuel planning, weight and balance, and aircraft performance for a realistic route from departure to destination airport and support the stated objective(s) of the LOFT.

5) Simulator Capability. LOFT may be conducted in Level C and level D simulators only. Dedicated airport scenes revised to represent current airport facilities, including runways/taxiways and navigation facilities must be used for realism (generic visual representation of airports is not acceptable). Both en route and terminal navigation facilities must agree with navigation charts. LOFT should be developed for the make, model, series, and modification status of the aircraft represented by the simulator.

6) Instructor Training. For LOFT to be a valuable training experience, instructors must be given specialized specific instruction on the scenarios, the techniques for conducting LOFT, and the post flight evaluation. The briefing/debriefing process is extremely important and requires special techniques and training for instructors. Instructor training programs must include documented training in these areas.

7) Approval. In accordance with FAA policy, all materials used to conduct LOFT as part of a part 142 curriculum will be evaluated and approved by the TCPM. Such items as instrument navigation charts (approach and en route) are not part of that approval since navigation procedures and airport facilities at an airport may change. Only current and accurate representation of airport and navigation facilities will be permitted during LOFT. The training center should periodically review and revise LOFT scenarios to prevent complacency or to accomplish a different objective.

3-4436 CREDITING DISTANCE LEARNING AS A COMPONENT OF GROUND TRAINING FOR FLIGHT CREWMEMBERS.

A. Background.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



1) Advancements in electronic media have made the presentation of educational information second hand to many of our educators. It has become the norm as opposed to the novelty it was just a few years ago. The aviation industry has been one of the largest benefactors of the revolution in digital presentations and interactive media. Systems now include modern training products, many of which are being effectively used in aviation courses conducted by accredited universities and in air carrier training programs approved by the FAA. Collectively, those products fall under a relatively new heading that has been called “distance learning” or “distance education.” As the quality of those products continues to improve, the training/learning process stands to benefit even more.

2) Previous FAA guidance seemed to presume that traditional classroom training was inherently superior to other delivery methods. Besides the proven effectiveness of modern training products, distance learning affords a low-cost alternative to classroom ground training, an alternative that is timely and appropriate in today’s challenging economic environment. The use of new technology and alternative training methods can, and often does, improve the quality of training. However, alternative training must meet or exceed the training standards that it is intended to replace.

B. Applicability.

1) Approval of distant learning methods for credit towards the completion of an approved core or specialty curriculum in excess of that granted by canceled Air Transportation Handbook Bulletin (HBAT) 98-09 may be applied for by the training center. This section applies only to flightcrew (pilots and flight engineers) training curricula/courses that have been approved by the center’s TCPM in accordance with the requirements of part 142 and/or 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 19, Section 2, Training Approval. Only cognitive or knowledge-based training is eligible for consideration under the provisions of this section.

NOTE: Currently approved training curricula/courses that have an integrated distance-learning module, which was approved in accordance with the guidance found in canceled HBAT 98-09 may continue to be acceptable provided the curriculum is and continues to meet the policy guidance outlined in canceled HBAT 98-09. Training curricula/courses that contain distance-learning module(s) that were approved prior to the issuance of Change 43 to FAA Order 8400.10 on 08/03/06 should be reviewed to ensure they are in compliance with the canceled HBAT. Those curricula/courses that are found to be inconsistent with previous guidance, regulatory or policy requirements or to be ineffective, must be appropriately modified by the training center, or the approval must be withdrawn in accordance with the guidance in 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 19, Section 2. Specific attention should be placed on the authorized curriculum/course and permitted hours and/or percent of time authorized as permitted by canceled HBAT 98-09 (8 hours not to exceed 50 percent of recurrent, requalification, or refresher training).

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



C. Application.

1) Training centers requesting the inclusion of distance learning must submit a curriculum module or element that qualifies for distance learning. All such request must include:

a) Specific detail outlining the curriculum module or element(s) proposed.

b) The center’s implementation and evaluation plan.

c) All training and study materials, including clearly defined training objectives, phase test, final exams, and the validation testing and methodology proposed for verifying the knowledge gained through approved distance learning modules.

NOTE: Each student that participates in an approved curriculum/course of training that incorporates distance learning must complete a “validation exam,” in person and under the supervision of a qualified instructor or the Administrator prior to the commencement of any flight- or skill-related training at the center. Validation exam(s) are used to verify the knowledge objectives of distance learning module(s) and are in addition to any testing that may have been a part of the distance-learning module. (Refer to subparagraph G2)c) for specific guidance on validation exam requirements.)

2) When a request is received from a center, the TCPM will observe the classroom module(s) for which the operator has requested a home study substitution. The purpose of this observation is to determine both the quality and quantity of the current training. Based on personal observations and review of the training materials, the TCPM will be better prepared to determine that the proposed home study will effectively duplicate the classroom training it has been designed to replace.

3) Distant learning will not be credited or considered for any required flight training modules/elements.

4) Scope of Creditability of Distance Learning. Distance learning credit is currently only available for knowledge and cognitive skill objectives. Creditability of distance learning for psychomotor skills outside of the provisions and limitations described in HBAT 98-09 are not authorized by this section.

D. Limits on Creditability of Distance Learning. The FAA recognizes the great training potential of distance learning that is well planned and effectively validated. That potential is already being exploited under the Advanced Qualification Program. Ground training developed in accordance with an implementation plan (described below) is subject to FAA approval. Distance learning may be as much 100 percent creditable toward the knowledge and cognitive skill training objectives defined in the ground training segment of a center’s approved curriculum(s).

NOTE: Initial implementation of distance learning by a training center should be approved cautiously. The substitution of ground training previously conducted in a classroom environment by the center in favor of distance learning modules

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



should be integrated into the center’s curriculum in steps that are based on the center’s demonstrated ability to design and implement a distance learning system. It is recommended that distance-learning modules be approved in phases or through an initial approval process followed by a trial period prior to issuing final approval. The initial versus final approval process for approving training programs is described in 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 2, Section 2.

E. Ground Training Media. The general nature and specific characteristics of training media used for distance learning vary widely. Examples include paper media, videotape, computer-based training, CDs, Web-based training, and virtual classroom. The media used should meet the requirements of the respective training objective. Validation of training effectiveness is one of the most important components of the implementation plan described below.

F. Implementation Plan. Any proposal for ground training to be accomplished by distance learning must include a plan for start-up, validation, operation, and maintenance of that training. This plan must include at least the following elements:

1) Startup. The start up phase must identify the knowledge and cognitive training objectives of the distance learning curriculum/course. Ground training objectives can be reduced to simple terms such as being able to:

• Recall, • Recognize, • Comprehend, • Apply, and • Identify the media to be used for ground training and testing.

2) Validation strategy. Centers must develop a distance learning validation strategy that addresses the effectiveness of the ground training itself, and the learning accomplished by each person trained. Key features of a satisfactory validation strategy include:

a) Measuring the effectiveness of the ground training being conducted.

1. Setting a Reference. One validation method is to establish a performance baseline from which to measure the effectiveness of the ground training proposed. Baselines exist in most on-going training programs. Examples of performance baselines include average ground training hours a trainee spends in learning a certain subject, average pass–fail rates for tests of ground training content, median scores, average pass–fail rates for flight checks, and many others. A performance baseline may be set by using an existing baseline or by referring to some other existing standard.

2. Maintaining the Currency of the Curriculum/Course. Validation depends upon maintaining the currency of the ground training to be conducted. A reliable method to do so is an essential part of a ground training proposal.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



3. Tracking. A method for keeping test results and tracking overall performance of the students.

b) Learning accomplished by each person trained.

1. A Strategy for Testing. Testing should be designed to determine that training objectives are being met by each trainee.

2. Integrity of Tests. A method should be developed to ensure integrity of tests, including integrity of test questions and test answers, and controlled access to tests and test results.

3. Tracking. A method for keeping test results and tracking each individual’s performance.

c) Validation Exam(s). Validation of the ground training objectives for distance learning will be accomplished through written exams. These exams must determine that the training proposed actually succeeds in meeting the performance objectives for the subject training.

NOTE: Validation exams should not be confused with the oral/written testing required by the appropriate PTS. Validation exams are intended to authenticate the effectiveness of approved distance learning modules. They are not a substitute for nor do they replace the required testing outlined in the appropriate PTS document.

1. The validation of a center’s distance learning module(s) must be designed to evaluate the student’s technical systems knowledge and cognitive skill (if appropriate). For example, a student’s ability to list the items that are considered appropriate when accomplishing a takeoff and/or landing performance calculation is a measure of the student’s technical knowledge. The appropriate use of those items in the calculation of a takeoff and/or landing performance problem is a measure of the student’s cognitive skill.

2. Validation exam procedures must be submitted to the TCPM and designed to:

• Collect data related to the student’s performance for the purposes of verifying the effectiveness of the training;

• Identify the specific questions taken and student responses to the validation exam; and

• Provide a basis for documenting that the distance learning module is as effective as the center’s previously used classroom training module, (if appropriate).

3. Passing Grade—80 Percent. The minimum passing score for all distance learning validation exams is 80 percent. Distance learning validation exams must be conducted in a proctored environment and observed by a qualified instructor or the Administrator. All students that meet or exceed the minimum grade of 80 percent will have their test corrected to

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



100 percent immediately following the exam. A score of less than 80 percent will require the student to be retrained and tested in the substandard areas by a qualified instructor in a proctored environment. Distance learning techniques or procedures may not be used to accomplish any required retraining resulting from an unsatisfactory exam. Subsequent reexamination will be accomplished using a random test generator to ensure the individual is not subjected to the same test that was originally taken. All training and testing must be satisfactorily accomplished before the student may continue their training course.

4. Integrity of Test Questions.

a. Scope. A library of questions should be developed that thoroughly cover the training objectives.

b. Multiple Questions. Multiple questions must be developed for each training objective. A question bank that includes at least five questions at the element level for each subject within the training module should be developed whenever practical.

NOTE: An element is a subgroup of related content within a training module. It is the fourth level of curriculum detail: curriculum, curriculum segment, training module, and element. For example, “Hydraulic System” is one training module; the yellow system, the green system, and the standby system are elements. In this example the center’s question bank would contain at least 15 questions relating to the hydraulic system (i.e., five for the yellow system, five for the green system, and five for the standby system).

c. Uniqueness. Tests must be generated by random selection of questions from the library, so that no two tests are alike. This uniqueness does not refer to merely switching the order of the answers to a particular question without changing the question itself. Random answers to the same question do not qualify the question as being different for the purposes of this requirement.

d. Currency. Test questions must be reviewed as often as necessary to assure their relevancy, and to incorporate new or changed material. The center must have a quality procedure in place to ensure currency of their question banks.

e. Integrity of Test Answers. Trainers must develop measures by which the identity of a person taking the test may be confirmed. Printed or electronic test answers must not be able to be reproduced and distributed among trainees so as to beat the test.

d) Operations and Maintenance. The operation and maintenance of the distance learning approval includes the quality control procedures for the collection, protection, and analysis of data for tracking ground training effectiveness; also, a strategy for equipment upgrade, program update, and program adjustments driven by data and feedback from trainers and trainees.

G. Interactivity. Training centers must provide for interactivity between trainees and authorized ground instructors, and between the trainees themselves when practical.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



1) When in the Field. In particular, a trainee should have ready access to an authorized ground instructor during normal business hours to resolve questions encountered during distance learning and associated testing.

2) When at a Centralized Training Location. Before flight training, trainees should be convened in a proctored classroom setting with an authorized ground instructor to resolve any remaining issues arising during distance learning. This interactivity is particularly beneficial in respect to the standardization of trainees enrolled in the same curriculum/course.

3-4437 COURSEWARE.

A. Courseware is the instructional material developed for each curriculum. It consists of lesson plans, instructor guides, computer-based training, audiovisual materials, training manuals, workbooks, aircraft operating manual(s), handouts, and any other materials used to support the training curriculum. Courseware must accurately represent and support the proposed training curriculum.

B. All courseware used to accomplish training must be evaluated by the TCPM as an integral part of the overall training program. When reviewing courseware, the TCPM should not accept the use of computerized and tabulated performance figures, proprietary weight and balance data, minimum equipment lists that require a call to a proprietary maintenance base, and use of a dispatch service that may not be available to the student upon completion of training at the training center.

C. Courseware must be acceptable to the FAA prior to and during the time curriculum approval is in effect, and must be identified (revision status) in a manner that ensures that only current materials are used to accomplish training. The training center must present courseware (including revisions) to the TCPM before use for review and approval. The TCPM must notify the training center in writing of any courseware that is determined to be unacceptable. Courseware is subject to the revision provisions of part 142, § 142.37(e) and (f).

D. Pictorial Aircraft Preflight Inspection Courseware.

1) The preferred method to accomplish aircraft preflight inspection training, testing, and checking is to use an actual aircraft. In situations when an aircraft is not available, a training center must have approved pictorial courseware for each curriculum to conduct training, checking, or testing. In situations when an aircraft is used to complete any training, checking, or testing, the actual aircraft must be used.

2) The TCPM must approve pictorial courseware for preflight training, checking, and testing. A review of the content must be accomplished with the assistance of an FAA inspector qualified in the aircraft.

3) In addition to Exemption 4901, which is specific to flight engineer certification requirements for pictorials, the following guidance for pictorial courseware will apply:

a) Strategy for Use of Pictorial Courseware. The strategies for training are different from the strategies for checking and testing when using pictorial courseware. The

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



optimum training results may be achieved through the use of video, interactive computer-based instruction, and pictorial displays of the make, model, and series of the aircraft represented by the flight training equipment being used. To allow for positive learning transfer, the trainee should view preflight items in the same configurations as they would be viewed when using a static airplane. However, it is also beneficial to discuss abnormal conditions in training.

b) For checking and testing, slides are effective pictorial courseware. When used during checking and testing, pictorials should include abnormal conditions in a sufficient number to permit a reliable evaluation of the applicant’s knowledge and ability to conduct a preflight inspection.

4) Required Content. The following are required to be part of an approved pictorial preflight inspection courseware:

a) Detailed pictures of each interior and exterior aircraft preflight checklist item, including pictorials of the overall aircraft and major sections of the aircraft, showing the location and relationship of specific inspection items.

b) Capability for random, rapid access to any picture.

c) The opening, closing, and securing of entrance or baggage/cargo doors. Video may be used to train in these or any areas that require an understanding of how a component operates.

d) Internal and external items and any preparatory or safety related items, such as positioning or securing landing gear doors or landing gear locks before or after the inspection, or cockpit safety check.

e) Pictures of each passenger compartment and each preflight inspection item.

f) Depiction of normal and abnormal conditions.

g) Sequence of pictures should match the sequence of the preflight inspection.

h) Use of models, mockups, components, cutaways, and expanded views to depict details or function of inspection items.

5) Specific Characteristics.

a) Pictorial courseware must contain pictures of each item on the aircraft preflight checklist.

b) The opening, closing, and securing of aircraft doors must be trained and evaluated.

c) The aircraft should be shown in a typical prior-to-flight condition, which may include the support people and equipment, (e.g., fueling, cleaning, and catering) normally associated with flight preparation.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



d) Nothing should obstruct the view of the preflight item (jetways, fuel trucks, workstands, etc.).

e) The pictorial series should feature the same or identical aircraft as represented by the flight training equipment be used for training. In some cases, use of a dissimilar aircraft may be justified to depict differences. Pictures should be representative of the specific aircraft in which the pilot certification will be conducted. For example, pictures of an LR-55 are not representative and should not be used for training or testing based on the LR-25 aircraft.

f) Text or voice manuscript should be available for and match each picture used for training when an instructor is not presenting the training.

g) The courseware should be high quality, and projection equipment should have random and rapid access capability. Examples of unacceptable quality include low-resolution copies of photographs, videotape systems without random and rapid access capability, or any other pictorial system that is markedly inferior to use of a static airplane.

h) For optimum effective training, the pictorial preflight courseware used in training should be different from that used during evaluation. Some of the pictures used for testing or checking should be different from those used for training. Abnormal conditions of preflight items must be introduced during evaluations and in sufficient number to permit a reliable evaluation of the applicant’s preflight ability.

i) For checking and testing, abnormal features should not be shown in pictures intended to depict normal aircraft conditions.

j) Pictures of abnormal conditions should be maintained to permit comprehensive coverage. In particular, pictures should include those abnormal conditions that are likely to be encountered during preflight inspection and those which are potentially unsafe.

k) Unless an abnormal condition is intentionally depicted for checking and testing, pictorials illustrate as follows:

1. All permanent parts should be in place and in normal condition, such as windows and doors, windshield wipers, antennas, panels, etc;

2. All removable parts, such as engine cowls and access panels, should be in place and in normal condition (engine inlets should be shown with covers removed);

3. Aerodynamic surfaces, wheel well doors, flaps, slats, and other devices should be in the configuration that they are normally before flight; and

4. People and equipment associated with assembly or maintenance work should not be in the illustration.

l) The preflight procedures contained in the FAA-approved Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) or Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) is the standard references for the preflight

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



visual inspection. They are primary for determining essential preflight items and the sequence in which those items should be inspected.

m) Approval is granted by the TCPM in writing. To ensure continuity, the TCPM must require pictorial courseware to be identified with a title and control number or revision to which an approval is tied. Pictorial preflight courseware is subject to the revision requirements of § 142.37(e) and (f).

E. Lesson Plans.

1) A lesson plan is a written, organized outline that provides detailed content of a single instructional period. It provides the instructor with a guide as to what specific knowledge or skills are to be taught as well as completion standards. It includes planned instruction time and sequence to ensure effective use of time.

NOTE: Some centers may develop and use other materials such as “Expanded Instructor Actions” to support the lesson plans. These materials typically provide additional support for the instructor and are considered as courseware, similar to lessons plans.

2) Each training center must have lesson plans to implement each curriculum and syllabus and must be developed by the training center to support the curriculum with appropriate content and programmed training times. Lesson plans must contain detailed information concerning the conduct of each flight or ground training session to ensure consistency of training throughout the training center and standardization among instructors. The lesson plans should provided detailed information on all elements and events specified in the curriculum and indicate training times that equal or exceed the times specified for the curriculum.

3) Lesson plans are courseware and are the indicators that the instruction will flow in a logical sequence and in concert with the other training aids and the approved curriculum. They must cover the same information as required by the curriculum and syllabus. Lesson plans must be reviewed as part of the courseware and must be acceptable to the FAA prior to issuing training specifications that authorize the curriculum to be taught. Deficient lesson plans are subject to the revision provisions of § 142.37(e) and (f).

NOTE: A job aid that may be used to compare individual lesson plans and curriculum content and assist with the lesson plan evaluation titled “Flight Training Maneuvers Job Aid” is located on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

F. Aircraft Operating Manuals, Checklists, and Quick Reference Handbooks.

1) The training center must use the FAA-approved AFM or RFM as the basic training reference for systems information, description, operation, performance planning, checklists, and weight and balance.

2) The training center must provide as part of the curriculum courseware any aircraft operating manuals, checklists, and quick reference handbooks (QRH) that will be used for

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



training, testing, and checking under a part 142 approved curriculum. As with any courseware, the checklist/QRH used for training, testing, or checking under an approved curriculum must be reviewed and accepted. The evaluation of a checklist or QRH proposed by the training center must be conducted by the TCPM using the AFM/RFM. A checklist or QRH that differs from the center’s accepted version may only be used in accordance with subparagraph 3) below.

3) The aircraft operating checklists used in flight simulators, FTDs, and aircraft, under approved training center programs must be reviewed and becomes a portion of the approved courseware for use in those programs. When training, testing or checking is being conducted under an approved curriculum, the following general guidelines should be followed:

4) Training centers that are conducting training for certificated air operators are required to follow that operator’s standard operating procedures during all training and checking on behalf of that operator. Certificated operators are required to use their approved/accepted checklist for all training and checking and as a result, their checklist policies and procedures are governed by their respective POI and not subject to revision by the operator or training center without specific approval. Checklists authorized for use in part 142 training courses must:

a) Be the checklist approved by the TCPM as a part of the training center’s approved curriculum for the specific aircraft make/model/series;

b) When used in a Level 1 through 7 FTD or level A through D full flight simulator (FFS) by noncertificated operators, accurately reflect the configuration and systems of the FTD or FFS and not deviate from the aircraft manufacturer’s current checklist or a checklist determined in compliance with requirements listed below; and

c) When used in an aircraft, is the aircraft manufacturer’s current checklist, a checklist approved by the aircraft manufacturer, or a checklist determined in compliance with requirements listed below.

5) Exceptions to the checklist requirements specified above may be made for training and evaluation of flight crewmembers of noncertificated operators conducted in an FTD or simulator. Pilots operating for noncertificated operators may obtain training and/or checking using checklists that differ from the training center’s approved checklist under the following conditions:

NOTE: The operator must determine before submission that the checklist matches the center’s equipment and is capable of meeting the center’s approved curriculum and training, testing, and checking requirements.

a) The operator must provide the training center a copy of the checklist and a written statement indicating that the operator has determined that the submitted checklist meets all the following performance standards:

1. The checklist satisfies the requirements of part 91, § 91.503;

2. The checklist is appropriate to the equipment in which the operator’s pilots are being trained and/or checked;

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



3. Areas of differences between the centers approved version of the checklist and the operators checklist are documented and appropriate training provided to the center personnel; and

4. The operator certifies that their checklist meets the applicable AFM requirements for the specific equipment.

NOTE: The operator’s certification must include a copy of the appropriate FAA/manufacturer letter of no objection to the proposed checklist. Certificated operators will need an acceptance/approval letter from their POI. Noncertificated operators will need a letter of acceptance/no objection from the FAA or manufacturer as appropriate.

b) The operator’s certification and proposed checklist must normally be presented to the center 15 days before any scheduled training/evaluations. A shorter time may be acceptable under certain conditions. However, the operator’s submission must be made in sufficient time to permit the center to conduct appropriate training and permit their instructor(s)/training center evaluator(s) (TCE) to become operationally familiar with the procedures contained in the checklist. All such training will be documented and become a part of the instructor(s) and TCE(s) training record. The center’s documentation must include at least the following information:

1. Date of the training or familiarization;

2. Name of instructor who conducted the training/familiarization;

3. Checklist revision status used for the training/familiarization;

4. Name of the operator; and

5. Aircraft make, model, and series.

c) Seven days before the subject training/evaluation, the training center must provide notification to the TCPM when an operator’s checklist has been received and the dates of intended use.

d) Checklists that fully meet the performance standards in this paragraph may be used in place of the checklist in the training center approved curriculum courseware.

6) Military flight crewmembers and crewmembers of public-use aircraft may use their organization’s checklist when attending a part 142 training center.

NOTE: Only one version of an approved checklist will be used by the crewmembers paired during training, testing, or checking in part 142 approved training courses. Crewmembers from different operators that have agreed to be paired for training, testing, and/or checking will determine which checklist will be followed throughout their training/evaluation process. The checklist being used must conform to the policy and procedures outlined above.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



G. Audiovisual Programs, Computer Software Programs, Training Manuals, Workbooks, Handouts, and Other Courseware.

1) These training materials are approved as an integral part of the overall training program subject to the revision provisions of § 142.37(e) and (f). They should be identified with a control date or other form of revision control.

2) The TCPM must evaluate all courseware used to accomplish training as an integral part of the overall training program. Courseware must be acceptable to the FAA prior to and during the time curriculum approval is in effect and should be identified in a manner to ensure that only current materials are used to accomplish training. Courseware must be presented to the TCPM before introduction (including revisions) for review and acceptance. The TCPM must notify the training center in writing of any courseware that is determined to be unacceptable. Courseware is subject to the revision provisions of § 142.37(e) and (f).

H. Facilities. Each training center and training center applicant must have a training room, training booth, or other space used for instructional purposes that is heated, lighted, and ventilated to conform to local building, sanitation, and health codes. Each training facility must provide students with an environment free from the distraction of other classrooms or flight and maintenance operations.

I. Maneuvers/Procedures Descriptions (Including SOP).

1) To facilitate learning, the training center must develop and provide to students descriptions (written and/or visual) of how to perform each maneuver or procedure to be accomplished during training. This should include SOPs that state the briefing procedures, crew callouts, etc. to be used in training, testing, and checking for each course involving flight-training events.

2) Descriptions of the maneuvers and procedures (also referred to as profiles, or flight maneuvers and procedures document) explain how these events will be performed. Descriptions must be provided for each training program. They should follow the guidelines in Volume 3, Chapter 19, Section 2. The descriptions must comply with all limitations of the AFM or RFM and be consistent with requirements and conditions of the PTS and the regulations.

3) SOPs should be developed and evaluated using the current edition of AC 120-71, Standard Operating Procedures for Flight Deck Crewmembers, as guidance.

4) The maneuvers/procedures descriptions and SOPs are courseware and must be developed and evaluated as part of the approval process for any new or revised curriculum. Maneuvers/procedures are knowledge and skills related to the transport of dangerous goods.

5) Security Procedures.

6) Recurrent training program including an examination to determine competence approved by the TCPM as an integral part of the overall training program and are subject to the revision provisions of § 142.37(e) and (f).

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



J. Training, Testing, and Checking.

1) Under part 142, training, testing, and checking can be accomplished in four categories:

a) Initial Training. This category includes initial training for an air transportation pilot certificate, a type rating, or initial training as second in command (SIC).

b) Upgrade Training. This category of training applies to an airman who is currently serving as an SIC who wishes to become PIC qualified on the same aircraft. This category of training may include foreign pilots with a foreign type rating applying for a U.S. certificate with an appropriate type rating.

NOTE: Designated examiners, including TCEs may only examine U.S. citizens or applicants trained under a training center’s approved program, or individuals employed as flight crewmembers of a part 121 or part 135 air carrier and trained under that operator’s approved training program.

c) Requalification Training. This category of training is for those airmen that are PIC (or SIC)-qualified, but who are not currently operating the aircraft, or whose PIC proficiency check has expired. Guidelines for the training times that should be used for a requalification curriculum can be found in Volume 3, Chapter 19, Section 11. Tables 3-75 through 3-77 should be used to determine the minimum ground and flight training time for the appropriate aircraft.

d) Recurrent Training. This category of training is for PICs (or SICs) who are currently operating the aircraft or have a valid PIC proficiency check.

2) Ground training time for airman certification may not include training in ground training subject areas that occur after the ground training course or segment has been completed and completion/qualification standards have been accomplished. Specifically, using briefing time preceding or following a simulator training session as programmed ground instruction time is not acceptable.

3) For any curriculum involving airman certification, the appropriate ground training modules or segment must be satisfactorily completed before start of the associated flight training lesson(s).

4) In addition, a legal interpretation of part, 142 § 142.49(c)(1), dated August 27, 1999, ruled in part that restricting instructors to “no more than 8 hours of instruction in any 24-consecutive hour period” applies only to flight instructors, flight simulator instructors, and FTD instructors while they are providing instruction in an aircraft, a flight simulator, an FTD, or any combination thereof. Consequently, instruction time has an impact on the maximum duty time per day for an instructor, except for time spent conducting briefing and debriefing associated with flight training.

5) Time spent completing or attempting to complete a practical test does not count toward the minimum programmed time.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



6) Training completed after the qualification segment of a curriculum has been completed may not be credited toward the curriculum programmed hours.

7) The time spent by the airman actually manipulating the controls from the PIC seat during LOFT may be a part of the minimum programmed hours.

8) Crew pairing for training and evaluations.

a) Training centers often provide services to air carriers, which are required to meet the operating rules of the particular operator. These training programs include checklists, callouts, profiles, approach procedures, and other features that are specifically approved for that carrier by its assigned POI. Occasionally an operator may not be able to assign a complete crew for their training and checking activities at training centers. When this situation occurs, the training center may provide other qualified crewmembers, subject to the criteria outlined below.

b) The FAA promotes the crew concept in air carrier training and checking to ensure that crew coordination and other flight management issues are adequately addressed. Flight training must address performance of duties as the pilot flying and as the pilot not flying, as described in the air carrier’s approved procedures. To meet both training needs, each required cockpit crew position must be occupied by a permissible crewmember as outlined below.

c) It is desirable that each flight training session be scheduled so that two pilots from the same air carrier may be trained during a single flight training session. The preferred crew pairing is a PIC and a SIC. Other acceptable crew pairings are two PICs or two SICs. In accordance with FAA safety policy, a pilot should have completed the appropriate aircraft ground training, including basic indoctrination, prior to beginning the flight-training segment.

d) Permissible Crew Pairings for Part 135. Part 135 air carriers often operate with small pilot rosters or with pilots who are widely dispersed. This policy allows crew pairings for flight training and/or checking in a simulator at a training center using an appropriate crewmember. An appropriate crewmember must be one of the following:

1. One of the air carrier’s line qualified pilots,

2. A contract flight instructor (airplane or simulator) or a contract check airman (airplane or simulator) who is authorized to serve in that air carrier’s training program or in an air carrier training program that is essentially similar.

NOTE: Training programs may be viewed as essentially similar when they include the same curriculum, the same checklists, and the same callouts and include cockpit configurations, operational procedures, and flight manuals which are compatible in the judgment of the TCPM and the appropriate POI.

3. A part 135 air carrier pilot being trained in a training program which is FAA-approved for another part 135 air carrier, but which is otherwise essentially similar. The following conditions apply:

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



a. Each air carrier pilot must be trained in accordance with the training program approved by the POI of his/her own air carrier.

b. Two pilots training for operations with different carriers may be paired provided their respective training programs are essentially similar. MELs, OpSpec/MSpec, and other features specific to each air carrier’s operations must be addressed during flight training. When the training curricula are not essentially similar, pilots may not be paired; similarly, when operational differences between carriers are too pronounced or too numerous, at the discretion of the POI or TCPM, pilots may not be paired.

c. When only one pilot is receiving flight training, the other pilot’s seat must be occupied by a person who is line qualified or line familiar in the specified duty position (refer to AC 120-35 for definition of terms), unless the flight training is being conducted for single-pilot operations.

4. Pilots must have completed the operator’s applicable ground training curriculum segments prior to starting the flight-training curriculum segments.

e) Pairing pilots in flight training and evaluation for operations under different parts. When pilots from different operators are paired in training programs that are essentially similar, the operator-specific features (e.g., as MELs and OpSpec/MSpec) of each operator must be addressed. Pilots in training for part 135 operations should not routinely be paired with pilots training for operations under part 91. These crew pairings should be avoided in favor of the pairings outlined in subparagraph 8) d) above. However, such crew pairings are permissible if the following conditions are met:

1. The part 91 pilot must conform to the training program of the part 135 pilot in every important respect. Specifically, checklists, profiles, approach procedures and callouts must be those used in the training program of the part 135 pilot (not vice versa), and the part 91 pilot must understand and apply CRM principles in accordance with the Air Transport Pilot Practical Test Standards.

2. Each certificated air carrier’s crewmember must complete the appropriate air carrier’s evaluation module. Part 135 pilots may support the part 91 pilot’s training activities as appropriate.

3. Part 91 pilots paired with an air carrier crewmember must use the air carrier’s approved curriculum. In these cases, the TCPM must concur with the part 91 pilot’s use of the air carrier’s curriculum to complete required training and currency.

4. The part 91 pilot must have received differences training in the features of the part 135 training curricula that distinguish it from part 91 training curricula. That training should also include the operator’s OpSpecs and operational control procedures.

NOTE: In crew pairings involving pilots of different part 135 operators or pilots operating under different operating rules (part 135 and part 91) POIs and TCPMs must be especially vigilant. The part 135 operator’s training program must not be distorted or diminished in order to accommodate dissimilar training needs. If the

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



integrity of the air carrier training program cannot be upheld the crew pairing must not be permitted.

3-4438 TRAINING FACILITIES. The training center must adequate facilities to assure that each training room or other space used for instructional purposes is heated, lighted, and ventilated to conform to local building, sanitation, and health codes. The training facility must also provides students with a learning environment free of distractions, such as instruction conducted in other rooms or flight and maintenance operations on an airport.

3-4439 PART 142 RECORDKEEPING.

A. A record is information preserved in a predetermined format as an account of the occurrence of an event. In general, a record must show what event occurred, when it occurred, who was involved, and proof of the event’s occurrence such as certification by individual signature.

1) Records of airman, instructor, and evaluator training and qualification are an integral part of any training program. A training center certificated under part 142 is required by regulation to produce and maintain certain records and to have an approved recordkeeping system. Each student, instructor, or evaluator record consists of all documentation that is required to be maintained on a specific individual. Those documents must be maintained in the same approved location.

2) The recordkeeping system must identify what records are to be used to meet each FAA and TSA regulatory requirement. The system must describe in detail the procedures and forms to be used by the training center for the generation and maintenance of required records. That description may be in an approved manual that is referenced in the training specifications or a detailed description of the records including specific forms must be entered into the training specifications. Each form on which a training or qualification record is kept must be identified by a control or revision number to identify that the current recordkeeping system is in use. Revisions to the recordkeeping system, including individual forms, must be approved by the TCPM.

3) A training center may elect to develop and use an electronic recordkeeping system. The system must be capable of generating and maintaining the required records.

B. Student Records. Recordkeeping requirements for students are stated in part 142, § 142.73 and should contain the following information:

1) Whether prerequisites were met prior to enrollment, including airman certificates and previous experience.

2) The curriculum in which the student is enrolled.

3) Results of each test or check.

4) Documentation of the student progress, daily flight training status, and curriculum/course completion.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



5) A requirement for each instructor who provides ground or flight instruction to record each student’s performance on each lesson (ground and flight). The record must also identify the name of the instructor as well as the training time accomplished.

6) Proof that the student is eligible to accomplish 100 percent training and testing in a simulator or a statement with the appropriate limiting language for the certificate being sought.

7) Recommended additional training in the event of an unsatisfactory test or check.

8) Record of additional training received and the satisfactory accomplishment of the training before retesting following an unsatisfactory test or check.

C. Instructor/Evaluator Records.

1) Recordkeeping requirements for instructors and evaluators are stated in § 142.73. These records must document the qualification, training, and checking requirements of part 142, §§ 142.13, 142.45, 142.47, 142.49, and 142.53. The system should contain the following information:

a) Eligibility requirements and prerequisites for the position § 142.47. This includes pilot certificates and detailed flight experience.

b) Completion of instructor/evaluator training (§§ 142.49 and 142.53), including documentation that reflects curriculum content. Instructor and evaluator training are subject to the requirement that each instructor who provides ground or flight instruction under an approved curriculum must record each student’s performance on each lesson (ground and flight). The record must also indicate the name of the instructor as well as the training time. The program must include the initial and recurrent training and testing requirements of part 142, subpart C. Training time must be identified.

c) Completion of the appropriate training curriculum or course in which that individual will instruct.

d) Satisfactory completion of written testing requirements.

e) Designation as an instructor to instruct in each approved course. The records must identify each and every course or curriculum assignment and document the duties of each instructor (e.g., ground instructor: Learjet initial and recurrent; differences; simulator instructor: PIC/SIC initial and recurrent, etc.). Designation should not just identify an aircraft type.

f) Satisfactory completion of written testing requirements.

g) Annual flight experience or line/flight observation, including verification by flightcrew of participation and time and LOFT.

2) The center’s record keeping system must include a method to ensure instructors and/or TCEs are not scheduled to exceed 8 hours of instruction and/or evaluation duties in any continuous 24-hour period, excluding briefings and debriefings. This system must also identify

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



the method the training center will use to prevent an instructor or TCE from being scheduled or accepting duty periods that will exceed the maximum allowed instruction and evaluation time in any continuous 24-hour period. (Refer to §§ 142.49 and 142.55).

NOTE: For example, a TCE assigned to instruct 4 hours of flight training followed by a 3-hour simulator evaluation will be considered to have accumulated 7 hours of time toward the 8-hour maximum permitted by the applicable regulation.

3) The initial and annual instructor proficiency check must have been satisfactorily completed. The regulations require that each instructor must be checked annually “...in a representative segment of each curriculum (not aircraft type) for which that instructor is designated to instruct....”

4) The records must show the initial and annual evaluation of instructional ability. An instructor authorized to instruct in multiple curricula must be evaluated and checked annually in each of those curricula for which he/she is authorized to provide instruction. Each curriculum may be evaluated separately or concurrently with another curriculum if the TCPM determines that there is sufficient commonality between the curricula to warrant crediting instruction in one as equivalent to the other. The records must, however, document that the instructor has been evaluated for each of the assigned curricula.

NOTE: Regulations require that air carriers keep adequate training records for instructors and check airmen at their principal place of business or other locations as approved by their POIs. Training centers that are providing training on behalf of an operator are considered part of the operator’s program and therefore are reasonable locations for an operator to maintain applicable training records. The records, however, must be maintained in compliance with the operator’s approved program and must be made available to the operator and/or the Administrator upon request. Records of crewmember training and checking are required to be furnished to the operator upon completion (within 24 hours) of any course of training and/or testing/checking in order to enable the operator to determine qualifications for crew assignment(s).

5) If the training center provides air carrier training and checking and has agreed to maintain the contract check airman and/or contract instructor training records for the customer, the center’s recordkeeping system will need to accommodate the requirements of the customer’s operating rules which will vary from the center’s requirements. The training center is only required to maintain records in support of its (the training center’s) approved programs. Part 142, subpart E, requires training centers to maintain records for trainees, instructors, and evaluators for courses “…approved in accordance with subpart B of this part.” An air carrier may contract with the center and may have included a provision wherein the center will maintain certain portions of the operator’s training records. If the center has been approved to maintain the operator’s training records, it is being done under an agreement with the operator and the operator remains responsible for the accuracy and quality of the subject records. The fact that the center has agreed to maintain the subject records will require the center to keep an additional set of records to comply with the operator’s requirements. This becomes especially important when

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



the operator is requesting the center to provide contract instructors and check airmen who are also employed by the center as instructors and/or TCEs.

6) If the center will be providing contract instructors or contract check airmen to the operator, required instructor and TCE records will form the basis for qualifying those individuals as contract instructors and check airmen for the operator and will need to be available for review by the air carrier and its POI.

7) Prior to approving the center’s record keeping system, the TCPM must review part 142 regulatory requirements for qualification, training, testing, and checking and ensure the proposed method(s) of recordkeeping meets applicable regulatory requirements. The location of required records as well as the person responsible for their management must also be identified.

8) A job aid titled “Training Center Instructor Eligibility and Training Records” has been developed to assist the TCPM in determining if an instructor/evaluator training and record keeping system meets regulatory requirements. This is available AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

D. Permissible Crew Pairing During Training, Testing, or Checking.

1) During testing, checking, or LOS conducted under a part 142-approved curricula; each crewmember seat will be occupied by:

a) An airman who is FAA-qualified in the same aircraft category, class, and type. This could be a training center instructor who is not providing instruction, or another airman who is qualified in the particular curriculum/course requirements and procedures.

b) A student who is enrolled in the same specific course (PIC initial training and SIC initial training for the same aircraft may not be the same specific course).

2) The same crewmember pairing requirements should be used during training in view of the requirement that all training in the simulator or aircraft will be accomplished using the curriculum’s approved checklist/QRH. For standardization and effective training, all crewmembers should be using the same maneuvers/procedures, and operating procedures (including CRM) during a training session. Additional guidelines and acceptable crew pairing procedures are located on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

3-4440 CURRICULUM APPROVAL.

A. Part 142 requires training centers to obtain approval of a new curriculum or a revision to a currently approved curriculum before the subject curriculum may be conducted. Inherent in the approval process is the FAA’s responsibility to deny approval of any training which does not meet regulatory requirements or which has been found deficient. Training curricula that have been granted approval and later found to be in conflict with regulatory requirements or to be ineffective must be appropriately modified by the center, or FAA approval must be withdrawn.

B. The TCPM should discuss with the training center the sequence and timing of events which occur in the development and the granting of initial and final approval of a training

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



curricula. If the center’s proposal involves complex operations, the TCPM should consult the appropriate sections of this handbook and other relevant documents and also determine whether assistance from an FAA specialist will be necessary.

C. Training center curricula will be approved following a two-step process: initial and final.

1) Initial Approval. Initial approval is granted by letter. Initial approval letters must include at least the following information:

• Specific identification of the curricula and/or curriculum segments (ground or flight) initially approved, including page numbers and revision control dates;

• A statement that initial approval is granted, including the effective and expiration dates;

• Any specific conditions affecting the initial approval, if applicable; and • A request for advance notice of training schedules so that training may be

evaluated in accordance with part 142, as appropriate.

a) An initial approval letter serves as the primary record of curriculum or curriculum segment pages that are being approved. The TCPM and training center may agree to include the curriculum’s list of effective pages (LOEP) as an attachment to the approval letter in lieu of listing each page number in the body of the approval letter. If this method is used, the LOEP must be stamped or signed by the TCPM clearly indicating the initial approval date and expiration date.

b) The original pages of the approved curriculum must be returned to the center with the transmittal letter. These documents must be retained by the center as their official record of the curriculum being initially approved. A copy of the training curriculum or curriculum segment, with a copy of the transmittal letter granting initial approval attached, must be maintained on file in the certificate-holding district office (CHDO) by the TCPM during the period that the initial approval is valid. This file must also include any additional relevant supporting information.

2) Final Approval. Final approval may be granted following the center’s demonstration of their ability to successfully conduct the subject curriculum and evaluation of the curriculum’s effectiveness. Final approval is granted by letter and stamping the curriculum’s LOEP as shown in paragraph b) below. The final approval letter must contain at least the following information:

• Specific identification of the curricula and/or curriculum segments (ground or flight) to be approved;

• A statement that final approval is granted, including the effective date; and • Any specific conditions affecting the final approval, if applicable.

NOTE: If the TCPM is authorizing a reduction in the hours specified by part 61, a statement concerning the basis for reduction must also be included.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 9



a) Based on the results of evaluations conducted during the curriculum’s initial approval phase, the TCPM must determine whether to grant or deny final approval of a training curriculum. This determination must be made before the expiration date of the initial approval. If the TCPM decides not to grant final approval, he/she must make reasonable efforts to convince the center to make the necessary revisions. If the center fails to comply within a reasonable time, the TCPM must withdraw the centers initial approval for the subject curriculum. (Refer to volume 3, chapter 19 for guidance on terminating or failing to issue final approval for a curriculum.)

b) Final approval of the training curriculum will be granted and documented by letter and stamping each page of the curricula LOEP as shown in Figure 3-147D.

c) The original stamped LOEP and associated curriculum must be transmitted to the training center with an approval letter signed by the TCPM. This letter must specifically identify the curriculum or curriculum segment, contain a statement that final approval is granted, and provide the effective date of approval. This letter must also state that final approval must remain in effect until otherwise notified by the FAA that a revision is necessary in accordance with part 142 subpart B provided the center continues to train in accordance with the approved curriculum. If the TCPM is authorizing a reduction in the hours specified by part 61, the letter must contain a statement concerning the basis for reduction. A copy of the stamped LOEP and a copy of the approval letter must be kept on file in the CHDO by the TCPM. Sample approval letters are located on AFS-210’s part 142 training center Web site.

Figure 3-147D, FAA Final Approval

OFFICE DESIGNATOR:

EFFECTIVE DATE:

NAME:

SIGNATURE:


04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



VOLUME 4 AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT AND OPERATIONAL AUTHORIZATIONS

CHAPTER 9 SELECTED FIELD APPROVALS

Section 1 Perform Field Approval of Major Repairs and Major Alterations

4-1176 PROGRAM TRACKING AND REPORTING SUBSYSTEM (PTRS) ACTIVITY CODES

A. Maintenance. 3414, 3416, and 3446.

B. Avionics. 5414, 5416, and 5446.

4-1177 OBJECTIVE. This section provides guidance in determining the category of a repair or alteration and ensuring that the aircraft, engine, or accessory can be returned to service in accordance with (IAW) the field approval process, regardless of the rules under which the aircraft is operated.

4-1178 GENERAL.

A. Definitions.

1) Acceptable Data. The drawings and specifications necessary to define the configuration and design features of the repair or alteration. These drawings and specifications include information on weight, balance, operating limitations, flight characteristics, dimensions, materials, and processes that are necessary to define the repair or alteration. The following are examples of acceptable data and may be used as a basis for developing approved data to substantiate repairs or alterations:

a) Manufacturer’s manuals are acceptable data that may be used as a basis for developing approved data for major alterations.

b) Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) Form 337, Major Repair and Alteration, when the specified data has been previously approved as a one-time alteration or repair, is acceptable data that may be used as a basis for developing approved data for subsequent alterations.

c) If it is not FAA-approved, data contained in a Structural Repair Manual (SRM); and current editions of Advisory Circular (AC) 43.13-2, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices—Aircraft Alterations, and AC 43.13-1, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices—Aircraft Inspection and Repair, are acceptable.

NOTE: NOTE: The Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) SRM is a preferred manual even though the SRM is not FAA-approved.

2) Alter. To change or modify.

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



3) Approval for return to service. The approval given by an appropriately rated person that enables an aircraft to be returned to service.

4) Approved Data. Substantiating and descriptive technical data, used to make a major repair or alteration, that is approved by the Administrator. The following list, although not all-inclusive, contains sources of approved data:

a) Type certificate data sheets (TCDS).

b) Supplemental Type Certificate (STC) data, provided it specifically applies to the item being repaired/altered. Such data may be used in whole or part as included within the design data associated with the STC.

c) Appliance manufacturer’s manuals or instructions, unless specifically not approved by the Administrator, are approved for major repairs.

d) Airworthiness Directives (AD).

e) FAA Form 337, which has been used to approve multiple identical aircraft (only by the original modifier).

NOTE: NOTE: Aviation safety inspectors (ASI) no longer approve data for use on multiple aircraft.

f) U.S. Civil Aviation Authority (CAA) Form 337, dated before October 1, 1955.

g) FAA-approved portions of SRMs.

h) Designated Engineering Representative (DER)-approved data, only when approval is authorized under his/her specific delegation.

i) Designated Alteration Station (DAS) FAA-approved data, when the major alteration is performed specific to the authorization granted.

j) Data in the form of an Appliance Type Approval issued by the Minister of Transport Canada for those parts or appliances for which there is no current Technical Standard Order (TSO) available. The installation manual provided with the appliance includes the Transport Canada certificate (see paragraph 4-1182, below) as well as the date of issuance and an environmental qualification statement.

k) Foreign bulletins, for use on U.S.-certificated foreign aircraft, when approved by the foreign authority.

l) Data describing an article or appliance used in an alteration which is FAA-approved under a TSO. As such, the conditions and tests required for TSO approval of an article are minimum performance standards. The article may be installed only if further

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



evaluation by the operator (applicant) documents an acceptable installation which may be approved by the Administrator.

m) Data describing a part or appliance used in an alteration which is FAA-approved under a Parts Manufacturer Approval (PMA). An STC may be required to obtain a PMA as a means of assessing airworthiness and/or performance of the part.

NOTE: NOTE: Installation eligibility for subsequent installation or reinstallation of such part or appliance in a type certificated (TC) aircraft, other than the aircraft for which airworthiness was originally demonstrated, is acceptable, provided the part or appliance meets its performance requirements and is environmentally and operationally compatible for installation. The operator/applicant must provide evidence of previously approved installation by TC, STC, or field approval on FAA Form 337 that will serve as a basis for follow-on field approval.

n) Any FAA-approved Service Bulletins (SB) and letters or similar documents, including DER approvals.

o) Foreign bulletins as applied to use on a U.S.-certificated product made by a foreign manufacturer located within a country with whom a Bilateral Agreement (BA) is in place and by letter of specific authorization issued by the foreign civil air authority.

p) Other data approved by the Administrator.

q) AC 43.13-1, current edition, for FAA-approved major repairs on non-pressurized areas of aircraft only when the user determines that it is:

• Appropriate to the product being repaired; • Directly applicable to the repair being made; and • Not contrary to the airframe, engine, propeller, product, or appliance

manufacturer’s data.

5) Field Approval. One of the means used by the FAA to approve technical data used to accomplish a major repair or major alteration. It is an approval by the Administrator, through an authorized ASI (airworthiness), of technical data and/or installations used to accomplish a major repair or major alteration. Technical data so approved becomes technical data approved by the Administrator. This type of approval may be accomplished for one-time approval.

6) Follow-on Approval. Approval of equipment of the same make and model on an aircraft using data from the initial approval. The make and model of the aircraft may be different if the installation is similar.

7) Initial Approval. The first approval of equipment of a given make and model.

8) Major/minor Repair/alterations. See Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 1 and part 43, appendix A.

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



9) Major/minor Type Design Changes. See part 21, §§ 21.93 and 21.113.

10) Minimum Standards Established in a TSO. This means that the equipment need not have TSO approval, but only meet requirements set by the TSO.

11) Return to Service. The action of making an aircraft operational, after an appropriately rated person grants approval.

12) Substantiating. To support and verify with proof or evidence.

NOTE: NOTE: For other definitions, see Volume 1, Chapter 1, Section 1, General Information.

B. ASI Qualifications and Responsibilities. The ASI must be authorized, experienced, and/or trained in the methods, techniques, and materials involved in the major repair/major alteration.

1) The ASI must determine if, by granting a field approval, the affected product can be expected to result in safe operation and conform to regulatory requirements.

2) If the ASI is not thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the alteration or repair, or has any doubt about the expected airworthiness, an airworthiness determination must not be given. He or she will seek assistance to the extent necessary to enable him or her to reach a clear decision before approval or denial is given.

3) The Flight Standards District Offices (FSDO) must ensure that an ASI’s lack of experience or qualifications does not necessarily stop the approval process. The ASI’s lack of qualifications does not mean the FSDO should deny a field approval and tell the applicant that they need an STC. The ASI can seek assistance from another ASI or FSDO, as appropriate.

4) ASIs occasionally receive requests to approve alterations or repairs that do not require a field approval. These requests should be denied. Typically, these requests fall into one of two categories: minor alterations or repairs, or alterations or repairs that already have adequate approved data.

a) Minor alterations and repairs do not need approved data and, therefore, should not receive field approvals.

b) Alterations and repairs that are supported by sufficient previously approved DER-approved data may not require further approval.

c) ASIs should review the data packages for each requested approval to ensure that a field approval is needed and is appropriate. ASIs who deny field approval requests to operators for alterations or repairs that do not need or qualify for field approvals should explain to the operator the reason for the denial and, if requested, provide the reason(s) in writing or via e-mail. The operator can then retain this as part of the aircraft records for future reference.

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



C. DER. If the applicant employs an appropriately authorized DER to provide supporting data for a field approval, then the ASI should coordinate activities with both the applicant and the DER. If the data addresses the entire alteration or repair, and all of the requirements of part 21 and part 43 are met, there is no requirement for any further approval by the ASI. The DER may be limited to technical areas that do not fully cover the entire project.

1) For specific DER authorizations and limitations, see the current editions of:

• FAA Order 8110.37, Designated Engineering Representative Guidance Handbook;

• FAA Order 8110.45, Use of Data Approved by Designated Engineering Representatives to Support Major Alterations; and

• AC 183.29-1, Designated Engineering Representatives Directory.

2) The FAA must evaluate any area not covered by this approval.

D. DER Data. FAA Orders 8110.37 and 8110.45 address field approvals by reinforcing that although DERs are not authorized to approve alterations/repairs via a block 3 entry in FAA Form 337, DER data may still be used as the basis for an alteration in support of FAA Form 337. They also recommend inclusion of a note in the body of FAA Form 8110-3, Statement of Compliance with the Federal Aviation Regulations, stating, “This approval is for engineering design data only and is not an installation approval.”

1) DER data is not a field approval, but is approved data which, like other approved data, can be used to perform major alterations or repairs without further approval.

2) DER data can also be included in the data package to support a field approval request.

E. Part 121 Air Carriers. Aircraft operated by part 121 air carriers, although not specifically prohibited from receiving field approvals, are not generally eligible for them. Field approvals may be performed on part 121 aircraft in rare instances for extenuating circumstances, and each request must be evaluated on a case-by-case basis. If an ASI from a FSDO/certificate management office (CMO)/International Field Office (IFO) believes that a field approval request is appropriate, the FSDO/CMO/IFO will obtain concurrence from the Flight Standards Division regional office prior to performing the approval.

1) The Flight Standards Division regional office will maintain a database of part 121 field approvals that it concurred or non-concurred with. This database will contain:

• A unique control number for each instance, • The date of concurrence or nonconcurrence, • The name of the ASI assigned to field approve the alteration/repair, • The FSDO/CMO/IFO’s routing symbol, • An indication of concurrence or nonconcurrence, • The air carrier identifier, • The make/model of the aircraft, and

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• A brief description of the requested approval.

2) Annually, the Flight Standards Division regional office will forward a report of the above information to the Aircraft Maintenance Division, AFS-300, by October 15.

4-1179 REPLACEMENT AND MODIFICATION PARTS. Parts or appliances developed, manufactured, and shipped before the dates established by the policy published in the Federal Register on February 27, 1995, 60 FR 10480/10482, and installed or intended for installation in TC’d aircraft by TC, STC, or field approval process, may continue to be considered approved upon removal from the aircraft in which it was originally approved, for the purpose of repair or resale, including installation in a different TC’d aircraft. The intent of this paragraph is to protect the used value of previously installed parts that were installed and approved through the field approval process prior to the Federal Register notice.

4-1180 ALTERATIONS THAT MAY REQUIRE ENGINEERING EVALUATION, AIRCRAFT CERTIFICATION OFFICE (ACO) ASSISTANCE, OR STCS.

A. Major Alterations. The list in Figure 4-68, Major Alterations Job Aid, describes methods of approval for typical major alterations. This list is not all-inclusive, and each project should be examined on a case-by-case basis. If an alteration is not identified on the list, it is eligible for a field approval unless the project is determined to be beyond the scope of the field approval process.

B. Alternative. An alternative to the field approval process is the use of FAA DER-approved data on FAA Form 8110-3 (with data). If all the data supporting compliance with applicable airworthiness regulations is DER-approved, then the product can be altered IAW those data. The person(s) signing blocks 6 and 7 of FAA Form 337, not the DER, is then responsible for conforming and approving the installation. Refer to FAA Order 8110.45 for further details.

4-1181 INCOMPLETE AND/OR INCREMENTAL INSTALLATIONS.

A. Incomplete or Incremental Installation. Incomplete or incremental installation field approvals are intended to approve partial-major alterations on aircraft that will be operated for an unspecified period of time. Aircraft having an incomplete equipment installation may be released for service only if the following have been accomplished:

• The alteration data has been FAA approved; • The incomplete/incremental alteration has been determined to not affect the safe

operation of the aircraft; • The equipment installed remains deactivated and has placards affixed to prevent

use; • The weight and balance reflects the incomplete installation; and • The maintenance records, including the logbooks and Form 337, have been

completed and signed for the work that was actually accomplished.

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



NOTE: NOTE: In order to maintain an effective Airworthiness Certificate, the approval for return to service must be accomplished by an authorized person as defined in part 43, § 43.7.

B. Conformity Inspection. The applicant must conduct a conformity inspection on the completed alteration. FAA approval of the incremental installation may provide for use of installed equipment if it can be determined that such equipment can be used safely (i.e., may require placards, Flight Manual Supplements, crew training.)

4-1182 MAJOR REPAIR DESIGN APPROVALS BY TRANSPORT CANADA CIVIL AVIATION (TCCA) AND CANADIAN DESIGN APPROVAL REPRESENTATIVE (DAR) (CANADIAN EQUIVALENT TO A U.S. DER). The FAA and TCCA have agreed in a memorandum of understanding (MOU) that certain TCCA and TCCA-delegated repair design approvals are considered to be FAA-approved data. The following information is provided for reference, but the MOU should be reviewed if additional guidance is required. The MOU is available at http://www.tc.gc.ca/civilaviation/certification/int/memoranda/usa.htm.

A. U.S.-Held TCs. For U.S.-held TCs, only repair design approvals issued by TCCA are considered to be approved data. Repair design approvals issued solely by a TCCA delegate are not approved data and, to be used as such, require TCCA approval or direct approval by the FAA or FAA designee.

B. Canadian-Held TCs. For Canadian-held TCs, repair design approvals issued by either TCCA or a TCCA delegate are considered to be approved data.

C. All Other Countries. For TCs held by all other countries, TCCA or TCCA-delegated repair design approvals are not considered to be approved data.

D. TCCA Repair Design Certificate. A TCCA Repair Design Certificate (equivalent to FAA Form 8110-3) can accompany data and can be signed by either a TCCA-approved Design Approval Representative or TCCA airworthiness authority.

4-1183 USE OF MANAGEMENT DESIGNATED AIRWORTHINESS REPRESENTATIVES (DAR, FUNCTION CODE 50).

A. Representatives of the Administrator. Management DARs serve as representatives of the Administrator. They review and certify alteration data packages for modifications to determine that:

• STC approval is not required, • All regulatory aspects of the alteration(s) are addressed, • Data approvals by DERs are within the scope and limitations of the DER’s

authority, • Appropriate approvals exist for data that encompasses the entire alteration, and • Instructions for continued airworthiness (ICA) requirements are met.

B. Task Accomplishment. To accomplish this task, the management DAR must:

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Determine the data package is complete with all FAA-approved data; • If the data package is not complete, recommend completion of data approval by

DERs, the ACO, or FSDO, as appropriate; • Coordinate with the applicant and the FSDO when the alteration does not meet

airworthiness requirements; • If the data package meets all FAA requirements, complete Form 337, block 3, for

certification of completeness; • Return the package to the applicant for alteration completion; and • Maintain records of the work completed for review by the designee managing

office.

C. Entries. Make the following entry in Form 337, block 3, for certification of completeness: The alteration identified herein has been reviewed and found to be complete with appropriate DER approvals. All aspects of the alteration(s) are compatible and eligible for use on the above described aircraft, subject to conformity inspection by a person authorized in § 43.7.

4-1184 FLIGHT TEST/OPERATIONAL CHECK REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS.

A. Alteration Requiring a Part 21, § 21.191(b) Flight Test. An alteration requiring a part 21, § 21.191(b) flight test to show compliance with the regulations must be coordinated with the appropriate engineering office or flight test DER. An Experimental Airworthiness Certificate to show compliance must be authorized by the Manufacturing Inspection District Office (MIDO) IAW the current edition of FAA Order 8130.2, Airworthiness Certification of Aircraft and Related Products. If the flight test is unsatisfactory, the applicant must develop additional data.

B. Alterations Requiring a Flight Manual Supplement. Alterations requiring a flight manual supplement or operations limitations changes must be coordinated with the ACO, unless the Flight Standards inspector has been specifically authorized by Flight Standards to sign the document(s).

C. Change to the Aircraft Flight Characteristics. Any alteration or repair that will appreciably change the aircraft flight characteristics or substantially affect its operation in flight must be operationally checked IAW part 91, § 91.407, and the results recorded in the aircraft records.

4-1185 FAA FORM 337, MAJOR REPAIR AND ALTERATION.

A. Types of Field Approval Data/Alteration Approvals.

1) Data/alteration approvals issued for one aircraft are applicable only to the aircraft described in block 1 of FAA Form 337. The data/alteration may be used as acceptable data as a basis for obtaining approval on other aircraft.

NOTE: NOTE: ASIs must not approve data for use on multiple aircraft.

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



2) Data based on inspection or testing, such as approval of technical data by physical inspection (see paragraph 4-1189, below).

B. Recording Data Deviations. Alterations that use data that does not differ appreciably from previously approved data do not require new or additional approval. Minor deviations that have no bearing on safety are acceptable without formal approval and without submission of a formal application by the applicant. A field approval is not required; however, the deviation should be recorded on FAA Form 337.

C. Disposition of FAA Form 337. Upon receipt of a completed FAA Form 337, accomplish the following:

• Review the form to ensure that all airworthiness requirements are met; • Ensure that all applicable sections, signatures, and dates are affixed to the form; • Ensure that the office identifier and the inspector’s initials are entered in the place

provided, in the upper right-hand corner of the form; and • Mail the form to Civil Aviation Registry, AFS-700, Oklahoma City, OK 73169.

D. Alterations to Fuel Tanks and/or Systems. Within 24 hours of receipt of an FAA Form 337 that describes a modification to an aircraft fuel system or shows additional fuel tanks installed in the passenger or baggage compartment, review and mail as in subparagraph 4-1185C above.

NOTE: NOTE: Military aircraft without a civil TC, foreign-registered aircraft, and component parts not installed on an aircraft cannot have FAA Form 337 submitted to AFS-700. This is because they cannot be identified by aircraft make, model, serial number, and U.S. Registration Number.

4-1186 ICA.

A. Field Approval Data Package. The Administrator has determined that the field approval data package must include ICAs. The purpose of the ICA is to provide instructions on how to maintain aircraft that are altered and appliances that are installed IAW a field-approved major alteration.

1) The ICA Checklist (Figure 4-66) is a guide for both the applicant who creates the ICA and the FAA Flight Standards inspector who accepts the ICA. The ICA developed IAW this guidance constitutes methods, techniques, and practices acceptable to the Administrator.

2) If the ICA for the submitted field approval major alteration is not acceptable to the FAA inspector, that inspector should not sign block 3 of the applicant’s FAA Form 337.

B. ICA.

1) The ICA provides the aircraft owner/operator with the following advantages when included in block 8 of Form 337:

• The major alteration and reference to ICA is contained in one document;

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• The ICA becomes a permanent aircraft record as required by part 91, § 91.417(a)(2)(vi); and

• The owner/operator can contact FAA registry for a replacement FAA Form 337 if the ICA is lost or destroyed.

2) The additional reference to the presence of ICA as part of the major alteration in the aircraft’s maintenance entry will ensure that maintenance personnel appropriately address ICAs during future inspections.

C. Develop the ICA. The applicant is to develop the ICA and present it in conjunction with the field approval request.

1) The FAA inspector accepts the ICA if it meets the applicable requirements in:

• Part 23, § 23.1529; • Part 25, § 25.1529; • Part 27, § 27.1529; • Part 29, § 29.1529; • Part 31, § 31.82; • Part 33, § 33.4; and • Part 35, § 35.4.

2) The checklist in Figure 4-66 is a guide so the applicant can be assured that all applicable requirements are met.

D. Field-Approved Major Alterations. For field-approved major alterations to aircraft, engines, and propellers certificated under the Civil Air Regulations (CAR), the ICA must meet the original type design requirements. In cases where the major alteration is a total new design, or a substantial complete redesign which the CAR did not address, the major alteration must meet the applicable 14 CFR requirements. The checklist in Figure 4-66 provides acceptable guidance for these types of installations.

E. ICA Requirements. The ICA requirements are the same for a field approval or STC. The vast majority of field-approved major alterations are simplistic in design and execution. Therefore, the applicant’s ICA may not need as much detail as an ICA required for a complicated STC. If the manufacturers’ instructions are not available, the applicant may use FAA publications such as AC 43.13-1 and AC 43.13-2, current editions; appendix D of part 43, current edition; or other applicable aviation standards to develop the ICA.

F. Major Alterations. Major alterations approved before October 7, 1998, were not required to have ICAs. However, if an owner/operator wishes to formally incorporate an ICA for existing field-approved major alterations, they may do so using the revision process in checklist item number 16 in Figure 4-66.

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0




A. Prerequisites:

• Knowledge of the regulatory requirements of 14 CFR parts 21, 43, and 65. • Successful completion of the Airworthiness Inspector Indoctrination course(s) or

equivalent. • Successful completion of the Aircraft Alterations and Repair Course. • Identification and authorization to perform field approvals by the FSDO office

manager and the regional Flight Standards manager in the form of a signed statement of authorization placed in the ASI’s file or in the office manual (the authorization will state that the ASI is authorized to perform field approvals).

B. Coordination. This task may require coordination or assistance from FAA engineering, other technical personnel, and the operator. Direct communication between field personnel to permit a rapid exchange of technical information is recommended.



• 14 CFR parts 1, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 36, 39, 43, and 91. • Applicable Special Federal Aviation Regulations (SFAR). • FAA Order 8000.50, Repair Station Production of Replacement or Modification

Parts. • FAA Order 8100.8, Designee Management Handbook. • FAA Order 8100.9, DAS, DOA, and SFAR 36 Authorization Procedures. • FAA Order 8110.37, Designated Engineering Representative (DER) Guidance

Handbook. • FAA Order 8110.45, Use of Data Approved by Designated Engineering

Representatives to Support Major Alterations. • FAA Order 8110.54, Instructions for Continued Airworthiness Responsibilities,

Requirements, and Contents. • FAA Order 8130.2, Airworthiness Certification of Aircraft and Related Products. • FAA Order 8310.6, Airworthiness Compliance Check Sheet Handbook. • FAA Order 8340.1, Maintenance Bulletins. • AC 20-114, Manufacturers’ Service Documents. • AC 23-17, Systems and Equipment Guide for Certification of Part 23 Airplanes. • AC 33.4-1, Instructions for Continued Airworthiness. • AC 43-9, Maintenance Records. • AC 43-210, Standardized Procedures for Requesting Fiedl Approval of Data,

Major Alterations, and Repairs. • AC 43.9-1, Instructions for Completion of FAA Form 337 (OMB No.

2120-0020), Major Repair and Alteration (Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or Appliance).

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• AC 43.13-1, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices—Aircraft Inspection and Repair.

• AC 43.13-2, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices—Aircraft Alterations

• CAR 3, 4a, 4b, 6, 7, and 8. • Aeronautics Bulletins 7A, 7H, and 8. • TCDS. • ATOS Element: 1.2.2.

B. Forms:

• FAA Form 337, Major Repair and Alteration. • FAA Form 8110-3, Statement of Compliance with the Federal Aviation

Regulations. • FAA Form 8110-12, Application for Type Certificate, Production Certificate, or

Supplemental Type Certificate.

C. Job Aids:

• FAA Order 8310.6. • Figure 4-66, ICA Checklist. • Figure 4-67, Decision Flow Chart for Field Approval Process. • Figure 4-68, Major Alterations Job Aid. • Job Task Analyses (JTA): 3.2.4, 4.8.11.

4-1189 PROCEDURES.

A. Review the Applicant’s Request for a Field Approval. Ensure that the information supplied is complete enough and is appropriate to proceed with the field approval process for the proposed alteration or repair. The applicant should specify the certification rule used as a basis for the field approval (see part 21, § 21.101).

1) Review and evaluate the following before the operator starts the actual work, as applicable:

a) A formal request submitted on one of the following:

• FAA Form 337 completed in duplicate (in triplicate for extended range fuel tanks), or

• Other administrative forms used by a manufacturer or operator that are acceptable to the Administrator, such as engineering orders.

b) Proposed Flight Manual Supplements.

c) FAA Form 8110-3.

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



d) The description of the proposed alteration or repair to ensure that it correctly and accurately describes the alteration or repair.

e) Methods, sketches, drawings, stress analyses, photographs, electrical load analyses, etc., to ensure that the operator has considered all applicable design standards and has analyses to substantiate the findings in this regard. The inspector must consider at least the following:

• The certification basis, including special conditions (fail safe, damage tolerance, etc.),

• The structural requirements that may be affected by the alteration or repair,

• Any hazards that may affect the aircraft or its occupants, • Weight and balance computations, • Operating limitations, and • Any other factors affecting safety or airworthiness.

f) Ensure that all ground and flight tests and operational checks meet applicable certification requirements to substantiate the alteration or repair.

g) ICAs.

2) If data is not complete, the operator must supply any additional information needed.

B. Evaluate the Proposal. Determine if the applicant has conducted a conformity evaluation to ensure that the proposed alteration will not impact the airworthiness of the aircraft. The applicant will provide verification that he or she has inspected the aircraft and reviewed the aircraft records to ensure compatibility of this alteration or repair with previously approved modifications.

C. Evaluate Data Package.

1) If a determination is made that the proposed alteration is beyond the scope of a field approval, advise the applicant that an STC is necessary. Assistance to the applicant will include the following:

• Furnishing FAA Form 8110-12, and • Advising that supporting data must be attached.

2) If assistance from an ACO is needed for approving a major alteration/repair, the ASI, not the applicant, should make the request for engineering evaluation/assistance and/or approval of non-approved engineering data for the field approval. This request should be made through the Flight Standards regional office. A memorandum from the ASI’s office to the ACO through the regional office should accompany the file. The memorandum should provide pertinent and detailed information, such as the ASI’s recommendations and specific requests for advice. The regional office should forward the request to the ACO. After the ACO has

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



completed its evaluation, the file should be returned to the ASI through the regional office. Coordination with the applicant will include the following:

a) Request that the applicant provide all supporting data.

b) Caution against proceeding with the alteration/repair before receiving engineering approval.

c) Provide the applicant with a proposed schedule for completion of the project that is consistent with available resources.

d) Specific authorization:

• Flight Manual Supplement signature authority may be authorized by ACs, bulletins, or other written documentation,

• Interior compliance inspections as authorized by an ACO, and • Other written authorizations as requested by the ACO and MIDO during

the coordination process.

D. Data Package Accepted for Field Approval.

1) ACO Concurrence. If engineering assistance was requested, written ACO concurrence (e.g., memo or email) becomes an attachment to FAA Form 337.

2) Approval for Data Only. If the repair or alteration data complies with regulations, record data approval by entering the appropriate statement and signing block 3 of FAA Form 337; return both copies to the applicant. When recording FAA approval in block 3, use the following statement for approval of technical data by examination of the data for use on only one aircraft: The technical data identified herein has been found to comply with applicable airworthiness requirements and is hereby approved for use only on the above described aircraft, subject to conformity inspection by a person authorized in § 43.7.

3) Approval of Technical Data by Physical Inspection. Schedule a physical inspection with the applicant to verify workmanship and compliance of the data submitted. If the repair or alteration complies with regulations, record alteration approval by entering the appropriate statement and signing block 3 of FAA Form 337, and return copies to the applicant. When recording FAA approval in block 3, use the following statement: The alteration or repair identified herein complies with the applicable airworthiness requirements and is approved for use only on the above described aircraft, subject to conformity inspection by a person authorized in § 43.7.

NOTE: ASIs must not approve data for use on multiple aircraft.

4) Denial of Proposed Alteration/Repair. If the applicant is unwilling or unable to comply with the requirements to obtain the requested field approval, terminate the process by notification in writing to the applicant. This notification should include the reason for denial. The applicant should be given the opportunity to make corrections as necessary.

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



E. ICAs. ASIs will ensure that each major alteration that requires additional maintenance or inspections not covered by original manufacturer’s instructions approved under the field approval process will have ICAs prepared IAW:

• Section 23.1529, • Section 25.1529, • Section 27.1529, • Section 29.1529, • Section 31.82, • Section 33.4, or • Section 35.4, as applicable.

1) The ICA will be documented on FAA Form 337.

2) The ASI will advise the applicant that the entry for the major alteration in the aircraft’s maintenance records required by part 43, § 43.9 will also include a reference to the ICA and identify FAA Form 337 where the instructions are documented. The form will be kept in the aircraft’s permanent records IAW § 91.417a(2)(vi).

3) The checklist in Figure 4-66 is a guide so the applicant can be assured that all applicable requirements are met.



B. Approval of Data. Completion of this task can result in the approval of the data, alteration, or repair; reference to the ACO for an STC; or denial of a request for a field approval.

4-1191 FUTURE ACTIVITIES. None.


Figure 1–1, ICA Checklist

A/C Make_____________ Model____________ S/N____________ Reg. #N__________ Revision:_______________ Date:____________ System:_______________ ITEM SUBJECT 1. Introduction: This section briefly describes the aircraft, engine, propeller, or

component that has been altered. Include any other information on the content, scope, purpose, arrangement, applicability, definitions, abbreviations, precautions, units of measurement, referenced publications, and distribution of the ICA as applicable.

2. Description: Of the major alteration, its functions, including an explanation of its interface with other systems, if any.

3. Control, operation information: Or special procedures, if any.

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



4. Servicing information: Such as types of fluids used, servicing points, and location of access panels, as appropriate.

5. Maintenance instructions: Such as recommended inspection/maintenance periods in which each of the major alteration components are inspected, cleaned, lubricated, adjusted, and tested, including applicable wear tolerances and work recommended at each scheduled maintenance period. This section can refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for the equipment installed where appropriate (e.g., functional checks, repairs, inspections). It should also include any special notes, cautions, or warnings, as applicable.

6. Troubleshooting information: Information describing probable malfunctions, how to recognize those malfunctions, and the remedial actions to be taken.

7. Removal and replacement information: This section describes the order and method of removing and replacing products, parts, and any necessary precautions. This section should also describe or refer to manufacturer’s instructions to make required tests, trim checks, alignment, calibrations, center of gravity changes, lifting or shoring, etc., if any.

8. Diagrams: Of access plates and information, if needed, to gain access for inspection. 9. Special inspection requirements: Such as X-ray, ultrasonic testing, or magnetic

particle inspection, if required. 10. Application of protective treatments: To the affected area after inspection and/or

maintenance, if any. 11. Data: Relative to structural fasteners such as type, torque, and installation

requirements, if any. 12. List of special tools: Special tools that are required, if any. 13. For commuter category aircraft: The following additional information must be

furnished, as applicable: A. Electrical loads. B. Methods of balancing flight controls. C. Identification of primary and secondary structures. D. Special repair methods applicable to the aircraft.

14. Recommended overhaul periods: Are required to be noted on the ICA when an overhaul period has been set by the manufacturer of a component or equipment. If there is no overhaul period, the ICA should state for item 14: No additional overhaul time limitations.

15. Airworthiness limitation section: Include any approved airworthiness limitations identified by the manufacturer or FAA Type Certificate Holding Office (e.g., an STC incorporated in a larger field-approved major alteration may have an airworthiness limitation). The FAA inspector shall not establish, alter, or cancel airworthiness limitations without coordinating with the appropriate FAA Type Certificate Holding Office. If there are no changes to the airworthiness limitations, the ICA should state for item 15: No additional airworthiness limitations or Not Applicable.

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



16. Revision: This section should include information on how to revise the ICA. For example, a letter will be submitted to the local FSDO with a copy of the revised FAA Form 337 and revised ICA. The FAA inspector accepts the change by signing block 3 and including the following statement: The attached revised/new Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (date_____) for the above aircraft or component major alteration have been accepted by the FAA, superseding the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (date_____). Once the revision has been accepted, a maintenance record entry will be made, identifying the revision, its location, and date of the Form 337.

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Figure 1–2, Decision Flow Chart for Field Approval Process

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Figure 1–3, Major Alterations Job Aid

NOTE: *NOTE: ASIs should see guidance in Figure 4-68 to determine when additional coordination with a DER or the ACO may be necessary.

The following lists indicate which method(s) may be used for approving major alterations to TC’d and STC’d products. These lists are not all-inclusive, and each alteration should be evaluated on a case-by-case basis. Consult each section that concerns your product. Additionally, ASIs should review current bulletins, ACs, etc., for specific types of installations that have been identified as candidates for field approval. The legend is as follows:

Items with the letters STC require an STC.

Items with the letters EVL may be eligible for approval by means other than an STC, depending on the scope and complexity of the alteration. These items will not automatically qualify for a field approval; they require evaluation and review of guidance to determine if the field approval process may be used.

Items with the letters ENG may be eligible for approval by means other than an STC, but require either supporting DER engineering data or concurrence from the ACO for field approval.

GENERAL AVIATION AIRCRAFT The following list applies to aircraft certificated under 14 CFR parts 23 and 31 (or the earlier equivalents), SFAR 41, or Joint Aviation Regulation (JAR) 22. Weight and Balance. Changes that increase the certificated maximum weight limits (increases in the maximum gross weight, maximum take-off, or landing weights).

STC

Changes in the certificated center of gravity range limits (for example, decreasing the forward limit or increasing the aft limit).

STC

Changes that increase the operational limits (maximum speed limits, such as VA, VFE, VNE; minimum speed limitations, such as stall speed; increases in service ceiling; and so forth).

STC

Structural Strength. Changing primary structures (structure that carries flight, ground, or pressure loads as defined in AC 25.571-1, Damage Tolerance and Fatigue Evaluation of Structure, as amended).

ENG

Substituting airframe primary structural materials. STC Substituting an engine or propeller (such as replacing a reciprocating engine with a turbine engine).

STC

Substituting or altering a reciprocating engine such that the net result is an increase of more than 10 percent greater horsepower.

STC

Substituting blind fasteners in primary load structures. ENG All field approvals for blind fasteners (Cherry Max, or equivalent) in primary load structures must be coordinated with the ACO or supported by DER-approved data. Altering passenger-carrying aircraft to an all-cargo or combination configuration. STC

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Reliability. Changes to manifolding, air induction systems or air intake doors, engine cowling, or baffle that affect the flow of engine cooling air and carburetor/fire ignition heat rises.

ENG

Changes to the basic engine or propeller design, controls, and operating limitations. ENG Changes that include engine/propeller adjustments and settings limitations that affect power output.

ENG

Modifications to approved avionics equipment that affect reliability or airworthiness, such as changes: Deviating from the design environment performance. STC Deviating from the component manufacturer’s operating limitations. STC To software other than navigation and terrain databases. STC To wire shielding that may affect High Intensity Radiated Fields (HIRF) and Electromagnetic Interference (EMI).

EVL

Operational Characteristics. Changes or relocation of system components (including hydraulic, oil, and fuel systems components) and equipment that affect structural integrity, flight, ground handling characteristics, or noise/acoustics of the aircraft.

ENG

Changes that alter the movable control surfaces that affect the dynamic and/or static balance, alter the aerodynamic contour of movable control surfaces, or change the weight distribution.

STC

Changes in control surface travel, control system mechanical advantage, location of control system component parts, or direction of motion.

STC

Changes in basic dimensions or external aerodynamic contour/configuration of the aircraft such as wing and tail planform or incidence angles, canopy, contour or radii, the location of wing and tail fairings, winglets, wing lift struts, tiptanks, windows, and doors.

STC

Changes in canopies, windows, and doors on unpressurized aircraft. EVL Changes in engine cowlings. ENG Changes to flight-critical electrical/electronic systems such as electronic flight controls or the engine control system, Full Authority Digital Engine Control (FADEC), fly-by-wire, and so forth.

STC

Changes that affect aircraft performance, drag, engine power, revolutions per minute (RPM), or exhaust muffler.

EVL

Changes affecting noise. ENG Changes affecting flight characteristics. ENG Installation of: Avionics systems performing critical functions or involving complex interfaces to other systems.

STC

Heads up displays, Enhanced Flight Vision Systems, or Synthetic Vision Systems used for primary navigation.

STC

Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance Systems I (TCAS I) or Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) (see relevant bulletins(s)).

EVL

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance Systems II (TCAS II). STC Autopilots. STC Flight data recorders (FDR). STC Ground proximity warning systems (GPWS). STC Electronic flight instrument systems (EFIS) (see relevant bulletin(s)). STC Terrain Awareness and Warning Systems (TAWS-A) (see relevant bulletin(s)). EVL Terrain Awareness and Warning Systems (TAWS-B) (see relevant bulletin(s)). EVL Emergency Vision Assurance Systems (EVAS). STC Global positioning system (GPS) or GNSS (see relevant bulletin(s)). EVL ASIs should also review current guidance for specific types of installations that have been identified as candidates for field approval. Changes that increase the differential pressure limits of an atmospheric or climatic control system of aircraft interior compartments.

ENG

Changes in engine and propeller combination (vibration approval). ENG Any alteration that requires flight testing to show compliance with the regulations (not applicable to operational flights conducted under § 91.407(b)).

ENG

Anti-terrorism countermeasures, including flares. STC Airworthiness. Changes to landing gear and related components, such as internal parts of shock struts, length, geometry of members, brake and brake systems, or additions.

EVL

Changes to systems that affect aircraft airworthiness, such as: Relocation of exterior fuel vents, fuel drains, or battery vents. (Applicable to components not attached to the basic engine.)

EVL

Crew or passenger liquid oxygen (LOX) or on-board generating systems. ENG External critical access doors, Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) ram air, nacelle blowout doors, fuel drain.

ENG

Changes to oil, hydraulic, pneumatic, and fuel lines, or systems that affect their operation or installation and flammability requirements, such as: New types of hoses and/or hose fittings that may not meet installation requirements, such as flow rate and flammability requirements.

ENG

Changes to fuel dump valves. EVL New oil/fuel/hydraulic line materials beyond the scope of AC 43.13-1, latest edition. EVL Change to, or addition of, permanent fuel tanks or fuel system components, including sealants.

EVL

Changes in fixed fire extinguisher or detector systems that affect the system’s effectiveness or reliability, such as: Relocating discharge nozzles, detector units, or fixed fire extinguisher bottles. ENG Using new or different detector components. ENG Decreasing the amount or changing the type of extinguishing agents. ENG Changes that include substituting airframe materials that affect structural integrity, lightning protection, or flight characteristics.

ENG

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Alterations or repairs that include: Use of synthetic covering materials. EVL New titanium applications. ENG Ceramic coatings. ENG Use of synthetic coatings. ENG Use of new plated coatings. ENG Crashworthiness. Changes to the aircraft structure, cabin interiors, or equipment relocation. EVL Changes that affect emergency exits (i.e., emergency medical services, sport parachute jumping).

ENG

ROTORCRAFT. The following section applies to aircraft with a certification basis of 14 CFR parts 27, 29, or the earlier equivalents. Weight and Balance. Changes that increase the certificated maximum weight limits affecting structural, performance, handling qualities, and so forth (for example, increases in the maximum gross weight, maximum takeoff weight, or landing weight).

STC


STC

Changes that increase the operational limits (maximum speed limits, such as VA, VFE, VNE; minimum speed limitations, such as stall speed; increases in service ceiling; and so forth).

STC

Structural Strength. Changing primary structures (structures that carry flight, ground, or pressure loads as defined in AC 25.571-1) as well as the following additional modifications or structural members: Installation of significant structure and/or appliances to the exterior of the aircraft (i.e., Forward Looking Infrared (FLIR), cameras, firefighting, and spray/dusting equipment).

ENG

Changes to landing gear and related system and structural components, including wheels, brakes, and tires.

EVL

Internal frame, longeron, or structural members. STC Consideration of flutter and vibration for any of the aforementioned changes. STC Substituting engine, propeller, rotor, or airframe primary structure materials. STC Substituting blind fasteners in primary load structures. ENG All field approvals for blind fasteners (Cherry Max, or equivalent) in primary load structures must be coordinated with the ACO or supported by DER-approved data. Changing the structural panels and load-bearing components that could affect service life.

STC

Installing Health Usage Monitoring Systems (HUMS). STC Installing systems that extract power from drive systems, such as air conditioning power drawn from the tail rotor driveshaft.

STC

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Reliability. Changes to manifolding, air induction systems or air intake doors, engine cowling, or baffle that affect the flow of engine cooling air and carburetor/fire ignition heat rises.

STC

Change to the basic engine, rotor or propeller design, controls, or operating limitations.

STC

Changes that include engine/propeller adjustments and setting limitations that affect power output.

STC

Modifications to approved avionics equipment that affect reliability or airworthiness, such as changes: Deviating from the design environment performance. STC Deviating from the component manufacturer’s operating limitations. STC To software other than navigation and terrain databases. STC To wire shielding that may affect High Intensity Radiated Fields (HIRF) and Electromagnetic Interference (EMI).

EVL

Operational Characteristics. Changes or relocation of systems (including hydraulic, oil, and fuel systems) and equipment that affect structural integrity, flight, ground handling characteristics, or noise/acoustics of the aircraft.

STC

Changes that alter the movable control surfaces that affect the dynamic and/or static balance, alter the aerodynamic contour of movable control surfaces, or change the weight distribution.

STC

Changes in control surface travel, control system mechanical advantage, location of control system components parts, or direction of motion.

STC

Changes in basic dimensions or external aerodynamic contour/configuration of the aircraft such as wing and tail planform or incidence angles, canopy, cowlings, contour or radii, the location of wing and tail fairings, winglets, wing lift struts, and tiptanks.

STC

Changes in basic dimensions or external aerodynamic contour/configuration of the aircraft, windows, and doors.

ENG

Changes to flight-critical electrical/electronic systems such as electronic flight controls or the engine control system, FADEC, fly-by-wire, and so forth.

STC

Installation of: Avionics systems that perform critical functions or involve complex interfaces to other systems.

STC

Heads up displays, Enhanced Flight Vision System, or Synthetic Vision Systems used for primary navigation.

STC

Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance Systems I (TCAS I) or Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) (see relevant bulletin(s)).

EVL

Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance Systems II (TCAS II). STC Autopilots. STC Flight data recorders (FDR). STC Ground proximity warning systems (GPWS). STC Electronic flight instrument systems (EFIS) (see relevant bulletin(s)). EVL

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Terrain Awareness and Warning Systems (TAWS-A) (see relevant bulletin(s)). EVL Terrain Awareness and Warning Systems (TAWS-B) (see relevant bulletin(s)). EVL Emergency Vision Assurance Systems (EVAS). STC GPS or GNSS (see relevant bulletin(s)). EVL ASIs should also review current guidance for specific types of installations that have been identified as candidates for field approval. Changes that affect aircraft performance, drag, engine power, RPM, or exhaust muffler.

EVL

Changes affecting noise. ENG Changes affecting flight characteristics. ENG Any alteration that requires flight testing to show compliance with the regulations (not applicable to operational flights conducted under § 91.407(b)).

ENG

Anti-terrorism countermeasures, including flares. STC Airworthiness. Changes to systems, such as: Relocation of exterior fuel vents or battery vents. EVL Crew or passenger liquid oxygen (LOX) or on-board generating systems. ENG External critical access doors, APU ram air, nacelle blowout doors, and fuel drain. ENG Changes to oil, hydraulic, pneumatic, and fuel lines, or systems or their components that affect their operation or installation and flammability requirements, such as: New types of hoses and/or hose fittings that may not meet installation requirements, such as those of flow rate and flammability.

ENG

Changes to fuel dump valves. EVL New oil/fuel/hydraulic line materials. EVL New fuel tanks or fuel system components, including sealants. EVL Changes in fixed fire extinguisher or detector systems that affect the system’s effectiveness or reliability, such as: Relocating discharge nozzle, detector units, or fixed fire extinguisher bottles. ENG Using new or different detectors. ENG Decreasing the amount or changing the type of extinguishing agents. ENG Changes that include substituting rotor/airframe materials that affect structural integrity, lightning protection, or flight characteristics.

ENG

Changes that alter dynamic components of rotorcraft, such as loads, vibration, fatigue, damage tolerance, flaw tolerance, characteristics of main or tail rotor system, transmission system, gearbox, driveshafts, driveshaft support bearings, and main and tail rotor blades.

STC

Installation of a new or modification of an existing icing protection system. ENG Changes to a critical or life-limited part, including engine/APU rotating parts. STC Alteration of passenger-carrying aircraft to an all-cargo or combination configuration. STC

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Additional items include: Changes that may require a human factors compliance finding (for example, in flight deck instrumentation and controls).

STC

Flight deck lighting changes to support night vision goggle use, or any approvals related to night vision goggles.

STC

Changing or substituting engine/aircraft instrumentation required by a unique characteristic of the particular type design.

STC

RPM changes of main and tail rotor may affect handling performance characteristics and/or noise or acoustics. Alterations or repairs that include: Use of synthetic covering materials. EVL New titanium applications. ENG Ceramic coatings. ENG Use of synthetic coatings. ENG Use of new plating coatings. ENG Crashworthiness. Changes to the aircraft structure, cabin interiors, or equipment relocation that affect crashworthiness and/or emergency evacuation. This includes initial installation or relocation of seats or litter systems.

STC

Changes that affect emergency exits (e.g., emergency medical services, sport parachute jumping).

ENG

TRANSPORT AIRPLANES. The following list applies to airplanes certificated under 14 CFR part 25 (or the earlier equivalents). Weight and Balance. Changes that increase the certificated maximum weight limits (maximum gross weight, maximum takeoff or landing weights, and maximum zero fuel weight).

STC


STC

Changes that increase the operational limits (e.g., maximum speed limits, such as VA, VFE, VNE, VMO, and VMO/MMO; minimum speed limitations, such as stall speed; and increases in service ceiling).

STC

Structural Strength. Changes to principal or primary structural elements (principal elements that carry flight, ground, or pressure loads) defined by AC 25.571-1, as amended.

STC

Substitution of engine, propeller, or airframe primary structure materials. STC Substitution of blind fasteners in primary load structures. ENG All field approvals for blind fasteners (Cherry Max, or equivalent) in primary load structures must be coordinated with the ACO or supported by DER-approved data. Alteration of passenger-carrying aircraft to an all-cargo or combination configuration. STC

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Reliability. Significant changes to manifolding, air induction systems or intake doors, engine cowling, or baffle that affect the flow of engine cooling air.

STC

Changes to the basic engine or propeller design, controls, and operating limitations. STC Changes that include engine/propeller changes to the adjustments and setting limitations.

STC

Modifications to approved avionics equipment that affect reliability or airworthiness, such as changes: Deviating from the design environmental performance. STC Deviating from the component manufacturer’s operating limitations. STC To software other than navigation and terrain databases. STC To wire shielding that may affect High Intensity Radiated Fields (HIRF) and Electromagnetic Interference (EMI).

EVL

Operational Characteristics. Changes or relocation of systems (including hydraulic, oil, and fuel systems) and equipment that affect structural integrity, flight, and ground handling characteristics of the aircraft.

STC

Significant changes to the movable control surfaces that affect the dynamic and/or static balance, alter the aerodynamic contour of movable control surfaces, or change the weight distribution.

STC

Changes to control surface travel, method of control system mechanical advantage, or direction of motion.

STC

Changes in basic dimensions or external aerodynamic contour/configuration of the aircraft, such as wing and tail planform or incidence angles, canopy, cowlings, contour or radii, the location of wing and tail fairings, winglets, wing lift struts, tiptanks, windows, and doors that would require flight or performance revalidation.

STC

Installation of new flight-critical electrical/electronic systems, electronic flight controls, or engine control systems such as FADEC and fly-by-wire.

STC

Changes that affect aircraft performance, drag, engine power, RPM, or exhaust muffler.

STC

Changes that alter the aerodynamic contour that affect noise or flight characteristics. ENG Installation of: Avionics systems performing critical functions or involving complex interfaces to other systems.

STC

Heads up displays used for primary navigation. STC Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance Systems I (TCAS I) or Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) (see relevant bulletin(s)).

EVL

Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance Systems II (TCAS II). STC Autopilots. STC Flight data recorders (FDR). STC Ground proximity warning systems (GPWS). STC Electronic flight instrument systems (EFIS) (see relevant bulletin(s)). EVL

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Terrain Awareness and Warning Systems (TAWS-A) (see relevant bulletin(s)). EVL Terrain Awareness and Warning Systems (TAWS-B) (see relevant bulletin(s)). EVL Emergency Vision Assurance Systems (EVAS). STC GPS or GNSS (see relevant bulletin(s)). EVL ASIs should also review current guidance for specific types of installations that have been identified as candidates for field approval. Any alteration that requires flight testing to show compliance with the regulations (not applicable to operational flights conducted under § 91.407(b)).

ENG

Anti-terrorism countermeasures, including flares. STC Airworthiness. Changes to landing gear and related components, such as internal parts of shock struts, length, geometry of members, brake and brake systems, or additions.

ENG

Changes to systems, such as: Relocation of fuel vents or drains. EVL Crew or passenger liquid oxygen (LOX) or on-board generating systems. ENG External critical access doors, APU ram air, nacelle blowout doors, and fuel drain. ENG Changes to oil, hydraulic, pneumatic, and fuel lines, or systems or their components that affect their operation or installation and flammability requirements, such as: New types of hoses and/or hose fittings that may not meet the installation requirements, such as flow rate and flammability requirements.

ENG

Changes to fuel dump valves. ENG New oil/fuel/hydraulic line materials. ENG New flammable fluid tanks or system components. STC Change to, or addition of, permanent fuel tanks or fuel system components, including sealants.

ENG

Changes in fixed fire extinguisher or detector systems that affect the system effectiveness or reliability, such as: Relocation of discharge nozzle, detector units, or fixed fire extinguisher bottles. ENG Using new or different detector components (including TSO-approved detectors in new or existing circuit arrangements).

ENG

Decreasing the amount or changing the type of extinguishing agents. ENG Changes that include the substitution of airframe materials that affect structural integrity, lightning protection, or flight characteristics.

ENG

Installation of new systems that affect their operation or installation and flammability requirements, such as: Changing or adding permanent fuel tanks or fuel system components. STC Emergency backup electrical power sources. STC Crew or passenger oxygen systems. STC Auxiliary Power Unit (APU). STC Installing new fire extinguisher or detector systems or changing the type of extinguisher agents.

STC

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Changes to critical or life-limited parts. STC Installation of a new or modification of an existing icing protection system. STC Changes that alter critical or life-limited parts, including engine/APU rotating parts. STC Changes that increase the differential pressure limits of an atmospheric or climatic control system of the aircraft and aircraft interior compartments.

STC

Alterations or repairs that include: Use of synthetic covering materials. ENG New titanium applications. ENG Ceramic coatings. ENG Use of synthetic coatings. ENG Use of new plating coatings. ENG Crashworthiness. Changes to the aircraft structure, cabin interiors, or equipment relocation that affect crashworthiness and/or emergency evacuation. This includes initial installation or relocation of seats.

ENG

Changes that affect emergency exits (i.e., emergency medical services, sport parachute jumping).

ENG

ENGINES, PROPELLERS, AND APUS. The following list applies to engines certificated under 14 CFR parts 33, 34, and 36 or JAR E, propellers certificated under 14 CFR part 35 or JAR P, or APUs approved under TSO-C77a or b. Weight and Balance. Changes that increase or decrease the certificated weight or center of gravity.

STC

Structural Strength. Changes to an engine, APU, or propeller’s primary or critical structure.

STC

Reliability and Airworthiness. Changes to the approved ratings or operational or installation limits. STC Changes to the engine, propeller, or APU control system. STC Changes to engine, propeller, or APU adjustments and setting limitations that have an affect on power output or control functions or operability.

STC

Changes that alter the aerodynamic contour of any blades, vanes, or internal or external aerodynamic surfaces.

STC

Changes affecting engine or propeller performance, power, or RPM. ENG Changes to inlet induction or exhaust components. STC Changes to components, assemblies, or systems, such as: Relocation of fuel vents or drains. ENG Using new or different alternators, generators, starters, vacuum pumps, or magnetos. EVL Using new or different hydraulic components, pumps, or turbo or superchargers. STC Pressure fuel lines and oil lines. ENG External critical access doors, APU ram air, nacelle blowout doors, bleed ports and doors, and so forth.

STC

04/22/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Installing new or modifying existing icing protection systems. STC Changes that include substituting engine/APU/propeller materials that affect structural integrity, lightning protection, operating characteristics, fire protection, or noise/acoustics.

STC

Major alterations to propellers. STC Changes to critical or life-limited parts. STC New propeller and engine combinations (vibration approval). STC Modification to approved electrical equipment, such as: Deviating from the design environmental performance compliance requirements. STC Deviating from the component manufacturer’s operating limitations. STC Changing wire shielding or components that may affect HIRF, EMI, or lightning compliance.

STC

Changing flight-critical electrical/electronic systems, such as electronic controls or engine, propeller, or APU control systems such as FADEC.

STC

Changing or substituting engine, propeller, or APU instrumentation. EVL Changes that do not conform to the minimum standards in a TSO under which a particular component or appliance is manufactured (see relevant bulletin(s)).

EVL

Changes to or relocation of any systems (including hydraulic, oil, and fuel systems) and equipment that affect structural integrity, operating characteristics, noise/acoustics, fire protection, or emissions and fuel venting.

STC

Changes affecting the Airworthiness Limitations section (i.e., Chapter 4 or 5) of the ICAs.

STC

Other Considerations. Changes affecting exhaust emissions (14 CFR part 34). STC Changes affecting engine noise (14 CFR part 36). STC

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



VOLUME 5 AIRMAN CERTIFICATION

CHAPTER 2 TITLE 14 CFR PART 61 CERTIFICATION OF PILOTS AND FLIGHT INSTRUCTORS

Section 5 Miscellaneous Part 61 Certification Information

5-311 GENERAL. The information in this section is supplemental and does not always apply directly to the actual certification of airmen. Some of the information is safety-related. Aviation safety inspectors (ASI) should be aware of this information and relate it to examiners or flight instructors. Other information notes items to consider during surveillance of airmen, instructors, or examiners.

5-312 USE OF FLIGHT SIMULATORS OR FLIGHT TRAINING DEVICES APPROVED ACCORDING TO AC 120-40 TO CONDUCT § 61.58 PILOT-IN-COMMAND PROFICIENCY CHECKS. Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 61, § 61.58 requires that to serve as pilot in command (PIC) of an aircraft certificated for more than one pilot, the PIC must have completed a proficiency check in the particular type aircraft since the beginning of the 24th calendar-month before the month in which the pilot acts as PIC. However, the PIC proficiency checks of § 61.58 may be performed in a flight simulator or flight training device (FTD) in accordance with (IAW) the applicable provisions set forth in § 61.58(e).

A. Recent FTD Technology. Recent breakthroughs in computer technology have permitted development of highly-sophisticated computerized electronics and computer-generated visual imagery in aircraft FTDs. Authority for the increased use of simulators and training devices has been incorporated in the various regulations relating to the certification of pilots. However, all devices must be approved specifically by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) for use under the existing regulations.

B. Expanded Use of Simulators. The FAA has indicated its commitment to permit the expanded use of simulators and training devices, in connection with the training and practical testing of pilots, as state-of-the-art technology develops and as public interest dictates. The simulator approval criteria contained in Advisory Circular (AC) 120-40, Airplane Simulator Qualification, are periodically updated along with simulator technology to ensure maximum transfer in flightcrew training and to ensure that the simulator or training device factually represents the aircraft and flight environment.

C. ASI Familiarity with Exemptions. Each Flight Standards District Office (FSDO) will take necessary action to ensure that the simulator approval criteria outlined in AC 120-40 is followed closely. ASIs should be familiar with exemptions issued to ensure that trainees receive the required training from the exemption holder and the conditions and limitations of the exemptions are strictly observed.

5-313 USE OF AN AIRPLANE SIMULATOR OR FTD IAW § 61.157. Section 61.157 permits applicants for an airline transport pilot (ATP) certificate or an additional type rating to use an approved flight simulator or FTD during the practical test. Review § 61.157 and the ATP practical test guide to determine the permitted usage of the flight simulator and FTD.

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



5-314 COMPLIANCE WITH ENGLISH LANGUAGE REQUIREMENTS OF PART 61 FOR PILOT CERTIFICATION. Sections 61.65, 61.75, 61.83, 61.96, 61.103, 61.123, 61.153, and 61.183 have requirements governing competency in the English language as an eligibility requirement for all grades of pilot certificates issued under part 61. All applicants must be able to read, speak, write, and understand the English language. Only an applicant who is unable to meet one of these requirements due to medical reasons (e.g., hearing impaired) is permitted to be issued a pilot or flight instructor certificate. In this case, the administrator may place such operating limitations on the applicant’s certificate that are necessary for the safe operation of the aircraft. For example, the limitation “NOT VALID FOR FLIGHTS REQUIRING THE USE OF RADIOS” may be placed on the applicant’s certificate. Only an FAA ASI is authorized to remove the limitation from a certificate. Examiners may not do so unless specifically authorized by the supervising FSDO.

NOTE: A limitation is given only if the inability to meet the requirements is due to a medical condition/disability. It does not apply to applicants unable to meet the requirements due to lack of fluency, inadequate articulation and/or comprehension of the English language, or accent to the degree that speech is not clearly understood; those applicants may not be issued a U.S. pilot certificate.

A. Standards and Testing. Several questions have been raised concerning the standards and the testing to determine whether an applicant can read, speak, write, and understand the English language (see AC 60-28, English Language Skill Standards Required by 14 CFR Parts 61, 63, and 65). While there are no practical test standards (PTS) established to ascertain the applicant’s English language ability, the following examples may be used as guidelines in this evaluation:

1) An ASI may ask the applicant to listen to a tape recording of an air traffic control clearance or instructions, then ask the applicant to speak and explain the clearance or instructions back to the examiner in the English language.

2) An applicant may be asked to write down in English the meaning of an air traffic control (ATC) clearance, instructions, or a weather report, then asked to speak and explain the clearance, instructions, or weather report back to the ASI in the English language.

NOTE: The intent is not to require the applicant to read, speak, write, and understand the English language at college level standards. A common sense approach should be used in evaluating an applicant for this requirement.

B. Aviation Standard. The English language has been accepted as the international standard by the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO). However, the effectiveness of part 61 regarding the English competency of pilots of all nationalities depends on compliance with, and enforcement of, the English language competency requirements.

C. Information to Disseminate. ASIs should ensure that the following information is disseminated during contacts with flight and ground instructors, approved schools, the aviation community, and designated pilot examiners (DPE).

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



1) ASIs should require positive personal identification from each applicant for a pilot certificate under the regulations.

2) All applicants must be able to read, speak, write, and understand the English language. Only an applicant who is unable to meet these requirements due to medical reasons (e.g., hearing impairment, speech impairment due to medical reasons) is permitted to be issued a pilot or flight instructor certificate with the limitation “NOT VALID FOR FLIGHTS REQUIRING THE USE OF ENGLISH.”

3) Under § 61.75, applications for a pilot certificate may not be accepted by an ASI through the mail. An application presented in person at the FSDO may be processed and an appropriate certificate issued. The certificate will not bear an English language limitation only when the FAA has verified that the applicant is able to read, speak, write, and understand the English language sufficiently. An English language limitation may be removed when the person demonstrates competency in the English language (see Volume 5, Chapter 1, Section 5).

4) If the holder of a pilot certificate without an English language operating limitation cannot demonstrate compliance with the English language competency requirements for the grade of pilot certificate held, ASIs should initiate action IAW Volume 7, Chapter 6 and the current edition of FAA Order 2150.3, FAA Compliance and Enforcement Program. Under Title 49 of the United States Code (49 U.S.C.), this could result in suspension, revocation, or reissuance of the pilot certificate with an appropriate operating limitation.

5-315 PILOT CERTIFICATE REQUIREMENTS AND THE LOGGING OF FLIGHT TIME IN HANG GLIDERS, ULTRALIGHTS, POWERED (MOTORIZED) GLIDERS, AND OTHER VEHICLES. The following guidance is designed to clarify issues concerning the logging of flight time and minimum pilot certificate requirements for hang gliders, ultralights, and similar vehicles.

A. Noncertificated Vehicles. Title 14 CFR part 103, § 103.7(b), does not require airman certification of operators of certain ultralight vehicles.

B. Logging Time. Unless the vehicle is type-certificated (TC) as an aircraft in a category listed in § 61.5(b)(1) or as an experimental aircraft, or otherwise holds an airworthiness certificate, flight time acquired in such a vehicle may not be used to meet requirements of part 61 for a certificate or rating or to meet recency of experience requirements.

C. Minimum Certificate Requirements. To operate a small aircraft with an experimental airworthiness certificate, at least a student pilot certificate is required. The certificate must be properly endorsed IAW § 61.87, except in the case of an aircraft operating limitation that requires the PIC to hold an appropriate category/class rating. In that case, the pilot must hold at least a private pilot certificate.

D. Logging Time in Powered Gliders. Flight time in a powered glider cannot be logged as required airplane pilot flight time unless the aircraft is TC as an airplane. Flight time used to meet recency of experience requirements or the requirements for a certificate or rating may only be logged according to the category in which the aircraft is TC (airplane, glider, etc.). Powered gliders may be TC either as gliders or airplanes.

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



5-316 PILOT TYPE RATING REQUIREMENTS IN AIRCRAFT CERTIFICATED UNDER SPECIAL FEDERAL AVIATION REGULATION (SFAR) 41. SFAR 41 was adopted to allow certain small propeller-driven, multiengine airplanes originally TC IAW 14 CFR part 23 before October 17, 1979, to be operated at a maximum TC takeoff weight exceeding 12,500 pounds. These airplanes may also be configured with more than 10 passenger seats.

A. Air Taxi and Commercial Operators. Requirements for air taxi and commercial operators under part 135 were amended to allow the operation of airplanes certificated under SFAR 41. Since the adoption of SFAR 41, operation of these airplanes is routinely conducted under 14 CFR parts 91 and 135. Among the first aircraft to be certificated under SFAR 41 were certain models of Swearingen turboprop airplanes, the first of which was certificated on September 25, 1980.

B. Type Ratings. Under § 61.31(a), a pilot may not act as PIC of a large airplane (more than 12,500 pounds maximum certificated takeoff weight) unless the pilot holds a type rating for that airplane. Section 61.63(d) provides the requirements for issuance of type ratings. The FAA, through its aircraft TC process, concluded that a type rating could be issued for the operation of Swearingen-Fairchild SA-226/SA-277 aircraft. Thus, a single pilot type rating (SA-227) was established and listed in the current edition of AC 61-89, Pilot Certificates: Aircraft Type Ratings, for pilot type rating reference.

1) Because of the similarity of the SFAR 41 aircraft to the predecessor model aircraft, the unavailability of the SFAR 41 aircraft, the economic burden connected with placing these aircraft into service, and the sophistication of FAA-approved simulator equipment, which permits training and checking to be conducted simulating the more than 12,500-pound maximum takeoff gross weight version, the regulations permitted the type rating check for the Swearingen-Fairchild SFAR 41 aircraft to be given in the non-SFAR 41 aircraft, which required no type rating.

2) It is considered appropriate to allow pilots of part 135 operations who were fully qualified in the non-SFAR 41 version of this aircraft, and who had satisfactorily completed the FAA-approved differences ground training course and a knowledge or oral test for the SFAR 41 aircraft, to operate that aircraft in part 135 operations without a type rating until the pilot’s next regularly scheduled instrument proficiency check. This action was accomplished by exemption. A continuation of the above procedure was also deemed appropriate in the case of the Embraer Bandieranti Model 110P1 and P2 aircraft subsequently approved for retrofit under SFAR 41.

C. Second in Command (SIC). Part 91, § 91.531(a)(1) provides that no person may operate a large airplane without a pilot who is designated as a SIC. However, under an amendment to part 91, this section was revised to allow SFAR 41 airplanes to be operated without a pilot who is designated as an SIC if that airplane is TC for operations with only one pilot crewmember.

D. ASI Information. Office managers should ensure that all FSDO certification personnel are informed of the above information and are guided by the following instructions concerning the operation of SFAR 41 aircraft.

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



1) The training, testing, and certification of pilots in a series of aircraft TC under SFAR 41 should be accomplished IAW the procedures described herein and with appropriate provisions of the operating rules under which the aircraft is to be placed in service. However, the Flight Standardization Board (FSB) responsible for a particular SFAR 41 aircraft may, through its evaluation, determine that a separate type rating is appropriate.

2) Because of increased availability of SFAR 41 aircraft, grants of exemption are no longer considered to be in the public interest for the identified aircraft and, when terminated, will not be reissued.

5-317 EXCHANGE OF VALID PILOT CERTIFICATES.

A. Field Reissuance. Valid pilot certificates and ratings may be reissued or exchanged by ASIs in the field. A certificate issued or last reissued on or after July 1, 1945, may be reissued by applying on FAA Form 8710-1, Airman Certificate and/or Rating Application. The dates of valid pilot certificates are found in § 61.11.

B. Pre-1945 Certificates. Private or commercial certificates issued before July 1, 1945, have expired and cannot be reissued. Certificates issued between January 1, 1942, and July 1, 1945, could have been exchanged without further showing of competence until August 23, 1956. A person who did not use the exchange privilege is considered to be the same as a person who has never held a certificate. That person must meet the requirements of part 61, including the need for knowledge and practical tests. Flight time accumulated with the previously-held certificate can be credited toward the present requirements for a certificate or rating.

C. Changes to Personal Data. A person applying for any change to the personal data on their pilot certificate must present, to an FAA ASI, appropriate documentation acceptable to the Administrator, which substantiates the validity of the requested change. The purpose of this documentation is to preclude reissuance of an invalid pilot certificate.

1) The following items typify the kind of changes that require such documentation:

• Change of name. • Change of nationality (requires a U.S. Passport, copy of the Naturalization

document). • Change of gender. • Change in date of birth.

NOTE: For a change of nationality, if the applicant does not wish to have the Naturalization document copied and included in the FAA file, then the applicant must sign a separate piece of paper that lists the petition number of the U.S. nationality document, name of the court and location where the hearing occurred, and the date of the nationality hearing.

2) The applicant should fill out an FAA Form 8710-1 for reissuance.

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



3) After examining and verifying the documentation, the ASI issues FAA Form 8060-4, Temporary Airman Certificate, reflecting the appropriate change. The ASI fills out the Inspector’s Report section on the application (Form 8710-1) and forwards the application, the superseded certificate, and a copy of the temporary certificate to the Airmen Certification Branch, AFS-760.

D. Change of Gender. For a change of gender on an airman certificate, the original copies of two documents must be provided to the certifying ASI. After examining and verifying these documents, the ASI photocopies the documents and attaches the photocopies to Form 8710-1. In Block I, under Other, the ASI notes gender change reissue. The file is then forwarded to AFS-760 for processing. The required documents are:

1) A court order, issued by a court of the United States or its territories, stating that the individual has changed his/her gender to ___, or a court order stating that the individual’s gender is ___; and

2) A physician’s statement clearly indicating that the individual is physically the gender noted on the court order.

5-318 VOLUNTARY SURRENDER OF CERTIFICATE OR RATING. Application for voluntary surrender, or “downgrading,” of a pilot certificate or rating may be accepted by an ASI only IAW § 61.27. No certificate or rating shall be accepted for surrender or downgrading unless the applicant submits a request in writing and fully understands that he or she has no reinstatement rights.

A. Conditions for Surrender. There are four basic conditions for the surrender of an airman certificate or rating:

1) Voluntary surrender unrelated to an enforcement case;

2) Voluntary surrender in anticipation of FAA certificate action;

3) Voluntary, temporary deposit of an airman’s certificate to the custody of the FSDO when an airman’s competency has been questioned by the FAA and the enforcement action or reexamination is justifiably delayed; and

4) Surrender at Regional Counsel’s request.

B. Reason for Surrender. No airman certificate may be accepted by an FAA ASI unless the reason for surrender is identified. Surrender of that certificate must be IAW procedures described in this handbook. Under no circumstance shall a pilot certificate be accepted for voluntary surrender unless the ASI immediately contacts the Regional Counsel and explains the facts and circumstances concerning the surrender. The airman’s certificate may be accepted only with the concurrence of, and IAW, directions of the Regional Counsel. Legal enforcement cases involving the surrender of an airman certificate shall be forwarded to the regional office for processing no later than five days after the date of certificate surrender.

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



1) If no enforcement action is pending or being contemplated under § 61.27, an airman may, for personal reasons, voluntarily surrender the certificate to the FAA for the purpose of cancellation of the certificate, reissuance of the certificate at a lower grade, or reissuance of the certificate with specific ratings deleted.

a) An airman may have many reasons for voluntarily surrendering or exchanging a certificate. One reason could be that the FAA has questioned the pilot’s competency, and the airman is to be reexamined under 49 U.S.C. In this instance, the airman may elect to surrender the certificate or rating, in writing, in lieu of submitting to reexamination (Figure 5-22).

b) When an airman elects to surrender the certificate as described above, the ASI may accept the certificate, along with a letter of surrender signed by the airman. The certificate, a copy of the temporary airman certificate, the application for the issuance of a modified certificate (FAA Form 8710-1), and the letter of surrender should be forwarded to AFS-760. A copy of the complete file should be forwarded to the regional operations branch for review.

c) The surrender letter must clearly spell out the incident or event and the airman’s involvement. The letter should state that the airman has been apprised of his/her legal rights and clearly state the voluntary nature of the surrender in view of these rights. The letter shall not be conditional and must be patterned after Figure 5-23.

2) An airman may surrender a pilot certificate to the FAA at any stage of an investigation (see the current edition of FAA Order 2150.3. Great care must be exercised when accepting an airman certificate for surrender when enforcement action is pending.

a) The eventual action of the FAA could possibly be other than certificate action. In addition, the Regional Counsel’s office may be unable to provide priority handling of such cases (the failure to issue promptly an Order of Suspension or Order of Revocation may impose an undue sanction on the airman).

b) Not only must the surrender be voluntary, it must also be documented as such. It must be absolutely clear that no FAA coercion was used. For example, if an FAA ASI, during an investigation, told an airman that the airman had violated a regulation, then accepted the certificate for surrender, the action would not appear voluntary. In a legal enforcement case, no FAA ASI has either the authority or responsibility to make such a statement; this is a function of the Regional Counsel.

c) The airman shall be told that any statement the airman makes can and may be used against the airman in legal proceedings and that the airman need not make any statement without being represented by legal counsel.

d) The airman shall be apprised of FAA legal enforcement procedures as described in 14 CFR part 13, §§ 13.15 and 13.19.

3) An airman may temporarily deposit an airman certificate voluntarily in the custody of a FSDO (for a maximum of 30 days at a time) while the airman is preparing for a reexamination of competence. The airman must be informed, in the presence of a third person, that the airman is not required to deposit the airman certificate with the FSDO or to sign any

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



statement. This procedure can also be used for an airman convalescing from an accident or an illness, or for a person having the aircraft repaired that is intended to be used for the reexamination flight check.

a) Temporary deposit shall never be used to resolve a violation of the regulations (i.e., reexamination is not used as a punishment or as a substitute for enforcement action). A temporary airman certificate with the original certificate number affixed may be issued to the airman to allow solo practice to prepare for reexamination or to continue flying with limitations. In this case “passenger carrying prohibited” or other appropriate limitations should be included (see Figure 5-24). For example, if instrument competency is questioned, the temporary airman certificate should omit the instrument rating. The same procedure could be used with any rating questioned. In no case should a student pilot certificate be issued to the holder of another student (or other) pilot certificate. The temporary airman certificate issued and the letter of temporary deposit to the FSDO (Figures 5-25 and 5-26) must have the same expiration date. The ASI may issue a new temporary airman certificate for an additional period of 30 days, provided the airman agrees to such action and submits a new letter of temporary deposit to the FSDO with the appropriate expiration date as described above.

b) If at the end of the expiration date, the airman has not passed the reexamination test, fails to appear, or has not made other acceptable arrangements, immediate legal enforcement action (emergency suspension) shall be taken to suspend the permanent airman certificate or rating in question until the airman demonstrates competency to hold that certificate.

4) Surrender at the request of Regional Counsel is an action taken as the result of an Order of Suspension or Order of Revocation issued by Regional Counsel. From time to time, the Regional Counsel requests the FSDO to pick up a certificate when an airman fails to surrender the certificate as a result of a Regional Counsel Order. The following actions should be taken by the ASIs:

a) The specific Regional Counsel instructions should be followed. In most cases, it is requested that an ASI contact the airman to be sure the airman understands that the order demands the surrender of the certificate.

b) The ASI shall review the Order of Suspension or Order of Revocation so that the ASI is familiar with the allegations. The ASI should then arrange a meeting with the airman. The ASI should take to the meeting a copy of the Order of Suspension or Order of Revocation, a Loss of Certificate Affidavit (Figure 5-27), and a franked envelope addressed to Regional Counsel.

c) When meeting the airman, the ASI should present official identification and inquire if the airman has received the Order of Suspension or Order of Revocation. If the airman has not received a copy, present the airman with a copy. The ASI should point out the action taken in the order and offer to accept the certificate for surrender to the FAA. The ASI shall not enter into a discussion as to the authenticity of the facts, evidence, or the propriety of the sanction. The ASI should advise the airman that failure to surrender the certificate within the period of time specified in the order would make the airman subject to additional action.

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



d) If the airman states that the certificate is lost, the ASI should give the airman the affidavit form and the franked envelope addressed to the Regional Counsel. The ASI should instruct the airman to complete the affidavit and forward it in lieu of the lost certificate.

e) If the airman does not wish to surrender the certificate to the ASI, the ASI should give the airman the franked envelope addressed to the Regional Counsel so the airman can forward the certificate to the proper office.

f) If at any time the ASI has any reason to believe that a hostile or dangerous confrontation is likely, the matter shall be discussed with the Regional Counsel before taking the action. When a potentially hazardous confrontation is expected, the ASI can be accompanied to the meeting with the airman by a U.S. Marshal.

C. Issuing a Certificate or Rating to an Airman Who is under an Order of Revocation.

1) An ASI planning to issue a certificate or rating to an airman who is under an Order of Revocation should arrange a meeting with the airman and review FAA Order 2150.3, paragraph 1307, and §§ 61.13 and 61.19(e). At this meeting, the ASI will examine the Order of Revocation and become familiar with its contents to ensure that an application from the airman is not accepted prior to the expiration of the periods specified in the previously-mentioned sections or as authorized in the Order of Revocation. If found ineligible, the ASI will advise the airman of the reasons.

2) An ASI who receives an application for an airman certificate from an airman whose certificate has been revoked and who is found ineligible, will disapprove the application and issue an FAA Form 8060-5, Notice of Disapproval of Application, indicating the reasons for disapproval and using verbiage such as “Applicant disapproved because. . . .”

5-319 EMERGENCY ISSUANCE OF REPLACEMENT CERTIFICATE. In an emergency, an ASI may issue a temporary pilot certificate to replace a lost or destroyed certificate.

A. Condition of Emergency Issuance.

1) The pilot must show that an immediate replacement of the lost certificate is necessary for either the return flight to base, to continue an extended flight, or to continue employment as a pilot.

2) The pilot must show that he or she is unable, or that it is not feasible, to obtain a facsimile IAW § 61.29(c).

3) The pilot must either be personally known to the ASI or must present, in person, acceptable evidence of identity.

4) The ASI must confirm the validity, grade, and ratings of the lost certificate by telephoning AFS-760.

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



B. Temporary Certificate. The temporary certificate issued should be clearly marked “EMERGENCY FIELD ISSUANCE” (see Figure 5-25) and be limited to reasonable duration necessary for the pilot to obtain a duplicate certificate from AFS-760 by the most expeditious means. In no case shall the temporary certificate be issued for more than 60 days.

5-320 “BLUE SEAL” PILOT CERTIFICATES. Since 1961, pilot certificates bearing blue seals have been issued to applicants who have demonstrated their ability to control an airplane by reference to instruments.

A. Blue Seal Incentive. This seal conveys no additional privileges but was intended as an incentive to holders of other pilot certificates to obtain instrument instruction.

B. Blue Seal Eligibility. The following pilots may obtain Blue Seal certificates from ASIs:

• Private pilots who originally demonstrated their instrument competence on their private pilot practical tests,

• The holder of a private pilot certificate who has not previously demonstrated instrument ability by passing a practical test on the instruction required by § 61.107(b)(6),

• Commercial pilots with airplane category ratings whose certificates do not bear ICAO instrument limitations,

• The holder of a commercial pilot certificate that bears a ICAO limitation may obtain a Blue Seal certificate by obtaining the flight experience required by § 61.129(b)(2)(ii) and passing a practical test on the control and maneuvering of an airplane solely by reference to instruments,

• Holders of instrument ratings, and • ATPs.

C. Applying for a Blue Seal Certificate. A pilot who meets the requirements for a Blue Seal certificate may apply on FAA Form 8710-1. The applicant must clearly mark the application “APPLICATION FOR BLUE SEAL CERTIFICATE” (see Figure 5-28).

1) The applicant should present the application, the pilot certificate, logbooks, and any other pertinent documentary evidence to an ASI for issuance of the certificate.

2) When the ASI has determined the applicant’s eligibility, the ASI should prepare FAA Form 8060-4 and complete the certification file in the usual manner, noting on the application the basis for issuance.

3) An applicant who is tested for a Blue Seal certificate and found unsatisfactory shall be issued FAA Form 8060-5 in the usual manner and have the original pilot certificate returned. Any corrective action taken should be completely informal and advisory, unless immediate action is necessary for safety.

5-321 LOST LOGBOOKS OR FLIGHT RECORDS. Aeronautical experience requirements must be shown for a person to be eligible for the issuance or to exercise the

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



privileges of a pilot certificate. A pilot who has lost logbooks or flight time records should be reminded that any fraudulent or intentional false statements concerning aeronautical experience are a basis for suspension or revocation of any certificate or rating held. The pilot who has this problem may, at the discretion of the ASI accepting the application for a pilot certificate or rating, use a signed and notarized statement of previous flight time as the basis for starting a new flight time record. Such a statement should be substantiated by all available evidence, such as aircraft logbooks, receipts for aircraft rentals, and statements of flight operators.

5-322 AUTHENTICATION OF OLD AND NEW AIRMAN CERTIFICATES TO IDENTIFY FORGERIES OR COUNTERFEITS. ASIs are occasionally required to determine the authenticity of an airman certificate. ASIs should be able to recognize legitimate certificates during surveillance or certification activities. Additionally, law enforcement officers or drug enforcement agents may ask for assistance in identifying counterfeit or forged certificates.

A. New Security-Enhanced Airman Certificates. On July 31, 2003, AFS-760 began issuing new, security-enhanced airman certificates.

1) The new, durable, credit card-sized certificates are made from high-quality composite polyvinyl chloride media card stock. They incorporate new security features, such as a hologram of the FAA seal, microprinting, and ultraviolet ink printing.

2) The certificate will be issued to all new and existing airmen as they achieve higher certificate levels or additional ratings and will replace certificates that have been lost or damaged. It is expected that all active airmen will be able to replace their certificates over a 3- to 4-year period.

3) The new certificates feature graphics of the Wright Brothers, 1902 Wright Glider, 1903 Wright Flyer, a Boeing Jet aircraft, Department of Transportation seal, and a hologram of the FAA seal.

4) The “old style” certificate is still valid. The “new style” certificate will be issued to all airmen and will be issued with the appropriate seal color. A $2 fee is still required to receive a replacement certificate.

B. Suspected Counterfeiting. Any contact with suspected counterfeit or forged airman certificates should be reported immediately to the Regional Office Civil Aviation Security Division, Investigations and Internal Security Branch. Under no circumstances should an ASI attempt to confiscate a suspected forged or counterfeit certificate.

5-323 CLASS B AIRSPACE ENDORSEMENTS FOR STUDENT PILOTS. Section 61.95 specifies certain requirements for student pilots operating in Class B airspace.

A. Solo Flight in Class B Airspace. Section 61.95(a) prohibits student pilots from operating on a solo flight in Class B airspace unless the requirements of § 61.95(a)(1) through (3) have been met.

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



B. Solo Flight to, from, or at an Airport in Class B Airspace. Section 61.95(b) prohibits student pilots from operating on a solo flight to, from, or at an airport within Class B airspace unless the requirements of § 61.95(b)(1) through (3) have been met.

NOTE: Sample endorsements specifying that student pilots have received ground and flight instruction and have been found competent to operate in Class B airspace are found in Figure 5-29.

5-324 CONDUCT OF TRAINING AND TESTING, SFAR 41 AIRPLANES, BY PILOTS WITH A “SECOND-IN-COMMAND REQUIRED” LIMITATION ON THEIR TYPE RATING.

A. An SIC Required. The SA-227, EMB-110, BE-300/1900, and certain other SFAR 41 airplanes are TC for single pilot operations. However, depending on the type of operation conducted (e.g., part 135 passenger service), an SIC may be required.

B. Limitation. Applicants for a type rating practical test in certain SFAR 41 airplanes may opt to complete the practical test as a single pilot or by using an SIC. If the single-pilot option is elected, the applicant will receive a type rating without limitation upon satisfactory completion of the practical test. When an applicant satisfactorily completes a practical test using an SIC, the applicant will be issued a type rating with the limitation “SECOND-IN-COMMAND REQUIRED.” To enhance crew complement flexibility, there is a need to establish guidelines for the training and flight testing of applicants for type ratings in SFAR 41 aircraft. These guidelines are intended to apply to the following:

• Certificated flight instructors (CFI), • ATPs conducting instruction in air transportation service, • Certificated ground instructors associated with a training center that holds

exemption authority, • ASIs, • DPEs, aircraft and simulator only, • Pilot proficiency examiners, and • Part 135 air carrier check airmen and instructors.

C. Ground Instruction. The ground instruction required by §§ 61.63(d)(6) and 61.157(f) may be given by an appropriately rated flight instructor who holds a type rating (with or without a “SECOND-IN-COMMAND REQUIRED” limitation) on his/her pilot certificate for the associated airplane. The ground instruction required by §§ 61.63(d)(6)(ii) and 61.157(f)(2) for employees of a part 135 certificate holder may be given by an instructor authorized by a part 135 approved training program.

D. Simulator Instruction. Instructors who conduct training in an FAA-approved flight simulator or an FAA-approved FTD toward the issuance of a type rating must be qualified IAW one of the following categories.

1) Hold a valid flight instructor certificate with airplane multiengine and instrument airplane ratings and have a type rating for the airplane on his/her pilot certificate. A pilot who

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



has the limitation “SECOND-IN-COMMAND REQUIRED” on the type rating may only instruct an applicant seeking the same privileges and limitation. A pilot with an unrestricted type rating may conduct simulator instruction for both limited and unrestricted ratings.

2) A ground instructor with a training center.

3) An ATP with the appropriate type rating on his/her pilot certificate, instructing in air transportation. The ATP can only instruct within the limitations of his/her pilot certificate as defined in subparagraph B above.

E. Flight Instruction. Flight instruction may only be conducted within the limitations and authorizations of the flight instructor certificate, pilot certificate, and type ratings.

1) Instructors who hold an unrestricted type rating on their pilot certificates may conduct flight training required by §§ 61.89(b), 61.157(f), 135.339(c), 135.347, and 135.351(c) for an applicant seeking an unrestricted type rating or single-pilot operating privileges, or for an applicant seeking a type rating with the limitation “SECOND-IN-COMMAND REQUIRED.”

2) Instructors who hold a type rating with a “SECOND-IN-COMMAND REQUIRED” limitation may only give flight instruction to applicants seeking operating privileges for a crew of two or a type rating with a “SECOND-IN-COMMAND REQUIRED” limitation. Section 61.55(d)(3) provides for an instructor to act as PIC with an SIC who is not qualified IAW § 61.55(a) and (b).

F. Qualification to Conduct Flight Tests. ASIs, examiners, and check airmen who hold unrestricted type ratings in SFAR 41 airplanes may conduct practical tests in these aircraft leading to the issuance of type ratings with or without a “SECOND-IN-COMMAND REQUIRED” limitation, or operating privileges for single- or two-pilot operations, as appropriate. ASIs, examiners, and check airmen who hold a type rating with a “SECOND-IN-COMMAND REQUIRED” limitation may only conduct practical tests leading to the issuance of type ratings with a “SECOND-IN-COMMAND REQUIRED” limitation, or operating privileges for two-pilot operations, as appropriate. Oral testing may be conducted by an ASI, examiner, or check airman who is rated in the aircraft, regardless of a “SECOND-IN-COMMAND REQUIRED” limitation.

G. Removal of the “Second-In-Command Required” Limitation from a Type Rating. To remove the limitation, it is not necessary to complete an entire practical test (oral and flight) as a single-pilot operation. All maneuvers approved for a flight simulator may be accomplished in that flight simulator for the purpose of removing this limitation. This does not change any flight simulator requirements for the original issuance of the type rating. A pilot who holds a type rating with a “SECOND-IN-COMMAND REQUIRED” limitation, or who wishes to upgrade a pilot certificate to authorize single-pilot privileges (CE-525 to CE-525S) and wishes to remove the limitation and have an unrestricted type rating or single-pilot privileges, must complete a practical test IAW FAA-S-8081-5 that satisfactorily demonstrates single-pilot competency, and must include testing on areas of operation and additional areas.

1) Topics for areas of operation include:

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



• Preflight preparation tasks: None, • Preflight procedures tasks: All, • Takeoff and departure phase tasks: All, • In-flight maneuvers tasks: C, E, F, • Instrument procedures tasks: All, • Landings and approaches to landing tasks: All, • Normal and abnormal procedures, • Emergency procedures, and • Postflight procedures tasks: All.

2) Topics for additional areas include:

• Collision avoidance, • Communication management, and • IFR cross-country flight plan avionics loading.

a) RESERVED. Paragraphs 5-325 through 5-340.

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Figure 1–1, Letter of Surrender (In Lieu of a Reexamination)

[date]

I hereby voluntarily surrender my [type] pilot certificate [number] to the FAA for [reason, e.g., cancellation]. I understand that this constitutes unequivocal abandonment of the certificate and that an FAA airman certificate or rating may not be reissued to me unless I again pass all the tests prescribed for its issue.

[Signature]

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Figure 1–2, Letter of Surrender (Pending Enforcement Action)

[date]

As the result of the occurrence at ______________________________ on ____________________________, [the airman must explain in full, in his or her own language, the occurrence and his or her involvement].

I hereby voluntarily surrender my pilot certificate [number] for whatever action the FAA may deem necessary. My rights to be heard as to why my certificate should not be amended, suspended, or revoked have been fully explained to me and are hereby waived.

[Signature]

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Figure 1–3, FAA Form 8060-4, Showing Passenger Carry Limitation

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Figure 1–4, FAA Form 8060-4, Emergency Field Issuance

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Figure 1–5, Letter of Temporary Deposit

[date]

As a result of the occurrence at _______________________________________ on _______________________, I hereby voluntarily surrender my [pilot, mechanic, flight engineer, etc.] certificate [number] for temporary deposit in the ___________________________ District Office of the FAA until [date]. If, by that date, I have not demonstrated the airman competence to hold that/those rating(s) to the FAA or received an extension of time within which to take the reexamination, I understand that legal enforcement action will be taken to suspend the privileges of my airman certificate (or rating) until I demonstrate the competence prescribed in the Federal aviation regulations for its original issuance.

[Signature]

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Figure 1–6, Loss of Certificate Affidavit

STATE OF ___________________________________

COUNTY OF _________________________________

Mr. _____________________________, being duly sworn, says:

1. On _________, the only airman certificate held by me was No. ________, with ___________________ privileges and ______________________ ratings.

2. By Order of Suspension (or revocation) dated ______________, my airman certificate was suspended (or revoked) effective ________________ for a period of ______ months (or days) (if revocation, leave period out).

3. I have made a thorough search of the places where my airman certificate could or might be found. Notwithstanding the search, I have not been able to find such certificate. I do not know where such certificate presently is nor where it may be found; I believe it to be lost.

4. For the above reason, I am unable to surrender my airman certificate number _________________; however, if and when such certificate is found while suspended, I will surrender it to the FAA.

Airman’s Signature

SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO before me this ________ day of _______________, ______

[Seal]

Notary Public in and for

County

State of __________________________________________________

My Commission expires on __________________________________

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Figure 1–7, FAA Form 8710-1, Application for a Blue Seal Certificate

06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



06/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0



Figure 1–8, Samples of Student Pilot Class B Airspace Endorsements

14 CFR § 61.95(a)

I certify that [name of student pilot] has received ground instruction on operations in [name of specific Class B airspace]. I have given flight instruction to [name of student pilot] on operation in [name of specific Class B airspace] and have found him/her competent to conduct solo flight in [name of specific Class B airspace, e.g., Washington Class B airspace] only.

[Date of endorsement, flight instructor’s name, certificate number, and expiration date.]

14 CFR § 61.95(b)

I certify that [name of student] has received ground instruction on operations at [name of airport in Class B airspace]. I have given flight instruction on operations at [name of airport in Class B airspace] to [name of student pilot] and have found him/her competent to conduct solo flight at [name of airport in Class B airspace, e.g., Washington Executive Airport].

[Date of endorsement, flight instructor’s name, certificate number, expiration date.]

04/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0

313

VOLUME 6 SURVEILANCE

CHAPTER 2 PART 121, 135, AND 91 SUBPART K INSPECTIONS

Section 14 Air Carrier Crew and Dispatcher Records Inspections for Parts 121 and 135 (PTRS Code 1627)

6-489 GENERAL. This section provides direction and guidance to operations inspectors for the inspection of crew and dispatcher qualification, training, and currency records of Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 121 or 135 operators. The objective of a crew and dispatcher records inspection is to determine whether or not the operator’s records provide documentation that the operator has complied with regulatory training and qualification requirements. The inspection shall establish whether or not the operator is keeping the required records and whether or not the required training and qualification events are being conducted. Before conducting a records inspection, inspectors must be thoroughly familiar with Order 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 31, Section 1, Operator Recordkeeping for Part 121 and 135 Certificate Holders; part 121, §§ 121.401(c) and 121.683 or part 135, § 135.63 as applicable; and this section.

6-490 PROCEDURES FOR CONDUCTING A RECORDS INSPECTION. This paragraph contains a general description of the procedures inspectors will use when conducting records inspections. Inspectors may modify these guidelines to meet local conditions.

A. Location. Inspectors normally conduct a records inspection at the place where the operator maintains the records. The inspection process does not require that the operator surrender records, even temporarily, and records may not be removed from the operator’s premises without the operator’s permission. Should an agreement be reached for inspectors to remove records, the operator must be given an itemized receipt for all records.

B. Preparation and Initial Briefing. Normally, advance notice, to the operator, of a planned records inspection is appropriate.

1) An introduction and initial briefing should be given to the operator. The briefing should describe the purpose of the inspection, what records will be required, and that a debriefing will take place at the conclusion of the inspection.

2) Prior to conducting any records inspections, inspectors must become familiar with the operator’s system of recordkeeping and become familiar with which specific records are available at the facility. This familiarization is particularly important when the operator is using a computer based recordkeeping system as detailed in 8900.1, Volume 3, Chapter 31, Section 4.

3) Prior to their arrival, inspectors should prepare a list of records to be inspected since a records inspection uses the operator’s work space and usually takes time away from an employee’s assigned duties. Preplanning and preparation for a records inspection reflect positively on the professionalism of the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) and should result in as little disruption to the operator’s work routine as possible.

04/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0

314

NOTE: Information from previous records inspections that are contained in the Program Tracking and Reporting Subsystem (PTRS) should be accessed to aid the inspector in determining the strategy and scope of the inspection.

C. Records Selection. Before conducting a records inspection, inspectors must determine the number of records to be examined, which categories of the records that will be inspected, and to what depth records will be scrutinized.

1) Section 1 of this chapter provides general guidance to inspectors for determining the actual number of records to examine.

2) Inspectors may obtain information on crewmember and dispatcher population from the Vital Information Subsystem (VIS).

D. Records Handling. Care should be taken to keep records as intact as the operator presents them. The preferred procedure is for inspectors to take only a few records at a time, examine them, then return that batch to the operator before starting on another batch. If it is necessary or desirable to obtain a copy of a record, the operator may not be willing or able to provide it. In this case, inspectors must make arrangements for copies.

E. Errors or Omissions in Records. A records inspection is not an investigation, yet inspectors may find errors or omissions in an operator’s records. Minor errors and omissions may not constitute a lack of compliance on the part of the operator and may not require the inspector to initiate enforcement action. Some errors or omissions, though, may require further action. For example, a crewmember training record may be found that does not indicate that required recurrent training was accomplished.

1) Further investigation may produce evidence that the training actually was completed. This omission may easily be corrected on the spot by the operator and may preclude the need for the inspector to initiate enforcement action. In this case, the inspector should record in the PTRS that the problem occurred, was brought to the operator’s attention, and was corrected on the spot by the operator. The inspector should discuss, with the operator, methods for preventing a repetition of the problem and should record, in the PTRS, the operator’s intended fix.

2) If the operator cannot produce evidence that the training was conducted, the inspector shall record the facts so that an investigation can later be opened according to FAA Order 2150.3, Compliance and Enforcement. The inspector who discovers the discrepancy is responsible for recording the finding in the PTRS and initiating an investigation.

6-491 CATEGORIES OF RECORDS. This paragraph lists the airman and dispatcher records required by §§ 135.63 and 121.683. Some or all of the categories are required for pilots, flight engineers, flight navigators, flight attendants, flight and ground instructors, designated examiners, check airmen and aircraft dispatchers. Volume 3, Chapter 31, Section 3 gives guidance as to the retention period for each of these categories of records.

A. Airman Training and Qualification Records. The operator’s recordkeeping procedures should be reviewed to ensure that the training and qualification required for the

04/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0

315

individual’s present duty assignment is documented. Individual records should be reviewed according to the sampling plan to verify that the operator is correctly managing the training and qualification program.

1) The training and qualification requirements of parts 121 and 135 can be complex (see Volume 3, Chapter 19, Section 7).

2) Sections 121.401(c) and 135.323(c) require that the documentation of ground, flight, or qualification segments contain a certification by the instructor, supervisor, or check airman that the crewmember or dispatcher is knowledgeable and proficient. In an electronic recordkeeping system, the certification does not have to be made by means of a signature.

B. Medical Qualification Records. Inspectors should observe that any required medical certificates are current and appropriate to the applicable airman certificate.

C. Route, Special Airport, Area Qualification Records. Inspectors must ensure that operators have documented that the pilot in command (PIC) has met the special currency requirements of §§121.443, 121.445, or 135.299. Inspectors must also ensure that operators with the authority to conduct flights requiring Class II navigation or to operate in special use airspace (such as minimum navigation performance specification (MNPS), North Pacific (NOPAC), or Central East Pacific (CEPAC)) document the successful completion of required training and qualification for each flight crewmember.

D. Operating Experience or Operating Familiarization Records. Documentation should verify that operating experience or operating familiarization has been accomplished.

1) All part 121 crewmembers and part 135 PICs in commuter operations must have completed the required operating experience prior to being assigned unsupervised duty in revenue service.

2) Part 121 PICs who have completed initial upgrade training for an operator that uses approved simulator training under § 121.409(c) must have been observed by an FAA inspector during operating experience.

3) Aircraft dispatchers must have completed operating familiarization.

E. Recency of Experience Records. This category refers to events, other than required checks, that operators must accomplish within a specified time period to remain qualified to serve in revenue operations.

1) Pilots must complete 3 takeoffs and landings each 90 days. Section 121.439 requires that the landings be made in type. Section 135.247 requires that the landings be made in category and class and, if a type rating is required, in type. Section 135.247 also requires that a pilot complete 3 night landings within the previous 90 days to be eligible to serve at night. Training in night landings is required by part 121, appendix E.

2) Flight engineers must have acquired 50 hours or a proficiency check within the past 6 months.

04/11/08 8900.1 CHG 0

316

F. Check Airman, Aircrew Program Designee (APD), and Designated Examiner Records. Operator records should verify that check airmen have completed appropriate training, have maintained currency in the crew position they are evaluating, and that letters of authorization or designation have been maintained. The inspector should observe that operators record the number of qualification functions being performed by check airmen.

G. Special Training and Testing Requirements. The inspector should observe that operators that conduct such operations as air ambulance operations keep records of specialized training.

H. Employment History. Inspectors should ensure that the operator’s flight crewmember records document action taken concerning an individual’s release from employment for physical or professional disqualification as required by § 121.683(a)(2) or 135.63(a)(4)(ix).

6-492 PTRS INPUT. The inspector must record any inspection of airman records or any category of the records in the PTRS by using activity code 1627.


04/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0



VOLUME 6 SURVEILLANCE

CHAPTER 9 PART 145 INSPECTIONS

Section 7 Inspect a Part 145 Repair Station’s Technical Data


A. Maintenance. 3656.

B. Avionics. 5656.

6-1777 OBJECTIVE. This section provides guidance for inspecting the technical data that the repair station uses. The review will confirm its:

• Availability, • Currency, and • Appropriateness for the work performed.

6-1778 GENERAL. The repair station manual (RSM)/Quality Control Manual (QCM) must contain the procedures for ensuring that current technical data is available for the scope of maintenance the repair station is performing.


A. Prerequisites.

• Knowledge of the regulatory requirements of Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) parts 43 and 145.

• Successful completion of appropriate Airworthiness Indoctrination course(s). • Previous experience with certification or surveillance of part 145 repair stations.

B. Coordination. If the repair station has an assigned principal maintenance inspector (PMI) and a principal avionics inspector (PAI), coordinate this inspection between both inspectors.



• Parts 43 and 145. • Volume 2, Chapter 11, Section 1, Introduction to Part 145 Repair Stations. • Volume 6, Chapter 9, Section 3, Inspect a Repair Station’s Record System. • Special Federal Aviation Regulation (SFAR) 36.

B. Forms. None.

04/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0



C. Job Aids. None.

6-1781 PROCEDURES.

A. Review Applicable Information. Before reviewing the technical data, the principal inspector (PI) should carefully review the:

• RSM/QCM; • Safety Performance Analysis System (SPAS) repair station analytical model

(RSAM); • Certificate-holding district office (CHDO) file; and • Operations specifications (OpSpecs), process specifications, and SFAR 36 data.

B. Review Technical Data. The PI should review a representative sample of maintenance records or work orders by the repair station in order to verify the following items.

1) The technical data used by repair stations could include any of the following:

NOTE: When the repair station is providing maintenance under the provisions of part 145, § 145.205, the repair station must follow the air carrier’s or commercial operator’s program and applicable sections of its maintenance manual. Any deviation from that program must be authorized by the air carrier. This includes technical data used for repairs or alterations. The repair station should have documentation of how and when the repair station will notify the air carrier or commercial operator if it needs to deviate from the air carrier’s or commercial operator’s program.

a) Manufacturer’s Manuals/Data. Manufacturer’s manuals/data may be approved or may be acceptable data. If the repair or alteration is not covered in the manufacturer’s manuals, then a determination must be made if the repair or alteration is major. If the repair station is providing maintenance for an air carrier, then the air carrier must make that determination. The repair station may have other data that has been approved, but the air carrier must authorize the repair station to use that data if the repair station is providing maintenance for the air carrier.

b) Airworthiness Directives (AD). When the repair station is providing maintenance based on an AD, the AD is approved data. However, if the repair station is providing maintenance using an AD with an alternative method of compliance (AMOC) within the AD, then the repair station should have something that documents that the AMOC has been approved.

c) Designee Approved Data. This is Designated Engineering Representative (DER)-approved data or data developed by the repair station and approved by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) SFAR 36 data.

d) Air Carrier’s Approved/Accepted Data. Each air carrier will have a process to approve data for major repairs or alterations. The air carrier has the responsibility to determine if the repair or alteration is major. Once the maintenance is determined to be major, the air carrier

04/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0



should provide the repair station with documentation that the repair or alteration has approved data.

e) Process Specifications. The repair stations may have a rating for specialized service. The air carrier should provide documentation authorizing the repair station to use its approved process specification on the air carrier product.

2) Verify that the technical data is appropriate for the maintenance or alterations to be performed.

3) Verify that the data is current, accurate, and complete.

a) The RSM procedure should describe how the revised technical data will be inserted into existing documents and how the appropriate individuals in the repair station will be notified about revisions.

b) If the repair stations use computer software for component testing, verify whether the revisions/updates are made and the current software is distributed.

4) Verify that the data is in the certificate holder’s possession and easily accessible to all personnel. Ensure that the technical data is distributed throughout the company in accordance with the RSM.

5) For electronic technical data/manual(s), review the following concerns during the inspection.

a) Security and Access. Determine whether:

• Only authorized personnel are making changes to the manual, • Unauthorized personnel are capable of making changes to the manual, • Access to the manuals is protected by passwords, • The employees have been trained to access the manual on the network, • Unauthorized access is possible on the network or internet, and • All of the supervisors and inspectors have access to the manual.

b) Revisions. Determine the following:

• How the manuals are revised with their system (CD-ROM or Internet), • How the revisions are distributed, • If the user knows that the manual has been revised and what content was

changed, and • If personnel verify the currency of individual disks before use.

c) Additional Guidance. See section 3 of this chapter.

6) Verify that the controlled documents are distributed in accordance with the RSM/QCM to include distribution, accountability, and availability.

04/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0



7) Verify that all technical data (e.g., operator’s instructions for continued airworthiness (ICA), manufacturer’s maintenance manuals, or type certificate holder’s continuous airworthiness data) the repair station uses is retained in English. This includes all alteration records, logbook entries, return to service records, or any other maintenance or inspection record entries that demonstrate compliance with the requirements of part 43, § 43.9 or 43.11.

a) The FAA recognizes the national language of the country where the repair station is located. The repair station may convert technical data (e.g., operator’s ICA, manufacturer’s maintenance manuals, or type certificate holder’s continuous airworthiness data) into the national language. Internal documents (e.g., workcards, worksheets, and shop travelers) may be produced and maintained in the national language. Dual language (English/national language) internal documents are acceptable.

b) All technical data translated into the national language and used to meet the requirements of part 43 should be current and accurate in translation.

NOTE: Customers who wish to receive English language copies of any internal documents, such as those listed above, should address that requirement in their contractual agreement.

NOTE: The repair station must establish procedures in its RSM/QCM that ensure that its English-language copy of technical data and any internal documents developed from this technical data are current and complete. The English-language copy of the technical data should be retained at the main base of the repair station and must be made available to the FAA upon request.

c) Repair stations that are associated with or part of a production approval holder facility often use the manufacturer’s drawings and data to perform maintenance. This data may not meet the requirements of § 43.13(a). Caution these repair stations that parts manufactured by the production side of the facility must be FAA-approved through a Parts Manufacturer Approval (PMA), Technical Standard Order (TSO), type certificate (TC), or other means.

C. Analyze Findings. Upon completion of the inspection, record all deficiencies and determine the appropriate corrective action(s).

D. Conduct Debriefing. Brief the certificate holder on the inspection results. Discuss any deficiencies and possible corrective actions.



1) Section IV of the PTRS Record. Enter an “E” in the Primary Area block. List all deficiencies, findings, and irregularities noted during the inspection, using the appropriate keywords that are allowed in the drop-down menu of the Keyword block. For each keyword used, write a brief description of the concern in the Comment block.

04/23/08 8900.1 CHG 0



2) PTRS Activity Code 3656/5656 (Overall Subsystem Evaluation). In Section I, the Assessment block, select the appropriate word picture number 1–10 in the drop-down menu that best describes the condition of the repair station for the completed inspection.

B. Complete the Task. Completion of this task will result in one of the following:

• Sending a letter to the operator confirming result of the inspection and initiating an Enforcement Investigation Report (EIR), if necessary; or

• A satisfactory inspection with no deficiencies.

C. Document Task. File all supporting paperwork in the certificate holder’s office file. Update the Vital Information Subsystem (VIS) as required.

6-1783 FUTURE ACTIVITIES. Schedule and conduct followup inspections as applicable.


05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 0



VOLUME 6 SURVIELLANCE

CHAPTER 12 RESERVED

Section 1 Reserved


5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



VOLUME 11 FLIGHT STANDARDS PROGRAMS

CHAPTER 9 AIR TOUR MANAGEMENT PLANS

Section 1 Air Tour Management Plans: Background and General Information

11-400 APPLICABILITY. This chapter contains information, direction, and guidance for aviation safety inspectors (ASI) that pertain to the development and facilitation of air tour management plans (ATMP) in accordance with the National Parks Air Tour Management Act of 2000 (NPATMA) and Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 136, National Parks Air Tour Management.

11-401 BACKGROUND.

A. The National Parks Air Tour Management Act of 2000. This act was signed into law on April 5, 2000. The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) codified the provisions of Title VIII of the Wendell H. Ford Aviation Investment and Reform Act for the 21st Century (referred to as AIR 21) within part 136 on October 25, 2002. The NPATMA and part 136 establish a process for the development of an ATMP for any “commercial air tour operation” that occurs below 5000 feet above ground level (AGL), and occurs over or within ½ mile of a unit of the national park system or adjacent tribal lands.

B. Air Tour Management Plan. The objective of an ATMP is to develop acceptable and effective measures to mitigate or prevent the significant adverse impacts, if any, of commercial air tour operations upon the natural and cultural resources, visitor experiences, and tribal lands. The NPATMA requires the Administrator, in cooperation with the National Park Service (NPS) Director, to develop a specific plan to govern commercial air tour operations over national parks. The FAA and NPS are tasked with developing ATMPs through a public process. Each ATMP will be developed with particular consideration given to the uniqueness of each park. This final ATMP may contain any number of specific restrictions or no restrictions at all. Some examples of the types of restrictions that could be included in an ATMP are:

• Limits on the number and frequency of commercial air tour operations over a park;

• Establishment of routes over a park; and • Exclusion of specific areas within a park for air tour operations.

C. Agency Responsibilities.

1) AIR 21 was signed into public law (P.L. 106-181) on April 5, 2000. Title VIII of AIR 21, called the National Parks Air Tour Management Act of 2000, regulates commercial air tour operations over units of the National Park System through ATMPs. NPATMA requires that the Administrator of the FAA establish ATMPs in cooperation with the NPS director. For purposes of complying with the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA) and agency planning regulations in the development of ATMPs, the NPATMA identifies the FAA as the lead agency and the NPS as a cooperating agency. Furthermore, the FAA and NPS will solicit the

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 22



participation of Indian tribes whose abutting tribal lands are, or may be, overflown by commercial air tour operations over the park or tribal lands as a cooperating agency.

a) In establishing an ATMP, the FAA Administrator and the NPS Director will sign an environmental decision document as required by Section 102 of NEPA (Title 42 of the United States Code (42 U.S.C.) § 4332). This environmental document may:

• Include a finding of no significant impact (FONSI); or • State the need for an environmental assessment (EA); or • State the need for an environmental impact statement (EIS), and the

record of decision for the ATMP.

b) The FAA placed the responsibility of executing this national ATMP program with the Western-Pacific Regional Administrator (AWP-1). In response, AWP created the Air Tour Management Plan Program Office (ATMP PO) under the direction of AWP’s Executive Resource Staff (AWP-4).

2) The FAA has sole authority to control airspace over the United States. The NPATMA further authorizes the FAA to preserve, protect, and enhance the environment by minimizing, mitigating, or preventing any significant adverse effects of aircraft overflights of national parks and abutting tribal lands. The NPS has the responsibility of conserving the scenery and natural and historic objects and wildlife in national parks and providing for the enjoyment of the national parks in ways that leave the parks unimpaired for future generations.

3) The National Parks Overflights Act of 1987 (P.L. 100-91), herein referred to as the Grand Canyon Act, requires actions by the Department of the Interior (DOI)/NPS and the FAA to provide for substantial restoration of the natural quiet and experience of Grand Canyon National Park (GNCP) and for protection of public health and safety from adverse effects associated with aircraft overflights. Actions have been taken over the years to improve aviation safety and reduce noise, but a final overflights plan—including routes or corridors for quiet technology aircraft—is still to be completed. A Presidential memorandum, dated April 22, 1996, directs that a plan must ensure that the restoration of natural quiet required by the Grand Canyon Act is completed no later than April 22, 2008. The NPS and FAA are providing joint Federal leadership to complete this task with the participation of stakeholders and tribal governments. The ATMP PO is the FAA’s lead for implementing NEPA associated with GNCP overflights.

4) The Western Pacific Flight Standards Division, AWP-200 will assume all Flight Standards responsibilities for the development and implementation of the appropriate policies, procedures, and guidance related to commercial air tours including overflights of all National Parks including Grand Canyon National Park.

5) Once an ATMP has been established for a specific park, AWP-200 in coordination with the Flight Standards Service Director (AFS-1) is responsible for monitoring and enforcing each ATMP (see Volume 11, Chapter 8, Section 5, Air Tour Management Plans: Operating Authority and Federal Aviation Administration Oversight/Surveillance, for oversight/surveillance guidance).

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



11-402 INTERIM OPERATING AUTHORITY (IOA) FOR EXISTING COMMERCIAL AIR TOUR OPERATORS. Before January 23, 2003, any existing 14 CFR part 121 or 135 air tour operator, or part 91 operator pursuing certification, must have applied for and received IOA from the FAA in order to conduct air tour operations over units of the National Park System and abutting tribal lands. Applications from certificated operators must have been filed with their certificate-holding district office (CHDO), while all other applications must have been made with the Flight Standards District Office (FSDO) that has geographic surveillance responsibility over a particular unit of the National Park System and abutting tribal lands. Upon application for operating authority, the FAA is responsible for issuing IOA in accordance with part 136, § 136.11(c). Submission of an application may trigger the FAA and the NPS to initiate development of an ATMP for the requested national park unit and abutting tribal land(s).

NOTE: All requests for IOA after January 23, 2003 are new entrant requests and must be approved by the FAA and NPS at the national level. See the paragraph on new entrants in Volume 11, Chapter 8, Section 3, Air Tour Management Plans: Interim Operating Authority for New Entrant Commercial Air Tour Operators.

A. Number of Flights. The IOA is subject to a limit on the annual number of commercial air tour operations that may be conducted on an interim basis pending issuance of the ATMP for a specific park. Determination on the number of commercial air tour operations that may be conducted is based upon the greater of the following criteria:

• The number of flights used by the operator to provide the commercial air tour operations within the 12-month period before April 5, 2000; or

• The average number of flights per 12-month period used by the operator to provide such operations within the 36-month period before April 5, 2000; or

• For seasonal operations, the number of commercial air tour operations that occurred during the season or seasons covered by the 12-month period before April 5, 2000.

B. Requirements and Limitations. The issuance of an IOA is subject to the following:

• May not provide for an increase in the number of commercial air tours conducted during any time period by the commercial air tour operator above the number the air tour operator was originally granted, unless the FAA and NPS reached such an agreement;

• Will be published in the Federal Register to provide notice and opportunity for comment (Published on 06/23/05 at 70 FR 36456);

• May be revoked by the FAA for cause; • Will terminate 180 days after the date on which an ATMP is established for a

specific park or abutting tribal land; • Will promote protection of national park resources, visitor experiences, and tribal

lands; • Will promote safe commercial air tour operations; • Will promote the adoption and use of quiet technology, as appropriate; and

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 22



• Will allow for modifications based on experience if the modification improves protection of national park resources and values and of tribal lands.

C. FAA Approval Process.

1) All requests for IOA/letter of agreement (LOA) and/or a change in existing IOA/LOA must be coordinated with and approved by AWP-200 for coordination with the NPS.

a) Operators are issued IOA in operations specification (OpSpec) B057, National Parks Air Tour Management Operations—Under 14 CFR Part 136.

b) Part 91 operators that have applied for air carrier certification under part 119 prior to January 23, 2003 were issued a LOA also located in template B057 of the operations specification safety system.

c) Part 91 operators that wish to remain under part 91 and operate under exemption 40128(a)(3) are issued a letter of agreement and must first secure a letter of agreement from the national park superintendent for each unit of the National Park System where air tours are requested. The LOA must describe the conditions under which the operations will be conducted. Principal operations inspectors (POI) must obtain a copy of the operator’s LOA from the park superintendent, annotate receipt of that document, and attach that letter to LOA B057 prior to issuing LOA.

d) Only operators conducting commercial air tours over designated units of the National Park System are eligible to receive IOA. POIs must select the park name in the B057 template exactly as that name appears in the National Park Unit list.

2) Tribal Lands.

a) Tribal lands that are within or abutting a unit of the National Park System require IOA ONLY if commercial air tour operation flights also fly over, or within one-half mile of a national park unit.

b) NPATMA is not intended to apply the requirements of an ATMP to tribal lands that are not within or abutting a national park.

c) NPATMA’s requirement to establish an ATMP is triggered by an application for authority to conduct a commercial air tour operation “over the park.” NPATMA specifically sets out the contents that may be included in an ATMP for a “national park.” No such provision exists for tribal lands.

d) The term “tribal land” is specifically defined to only include “Indian country” (as defined in 18 U.S.C. § 1151) that is within or abutting a national park.

e) The 1/2-mile boundary was implemented so that air tours could not be conducted just outside the park boundary without operating authority. Thus if tribal lands are within or abutting a unit of the National Park System and an application for operating authority for the park unit is received, then operating authority over those tribal lands is required.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



11-403 DEFINITIONS.

A. AVS ATMP Development Representative. A person appointed by AWP-200 manager, responsible for Flight Standards participation in the development of a particular ATMP and for performing any technical analysis and/or safety analysis needed.

B. AVS Grand Canyon National Park Working Group Representative. A person appointed by the AWP-200 manager, responsible for Flight Standards participation in the Grand Canyon Working Group and for performing any technical analysis and/or safety analysis needed.

C. Air Tour Management Plan. A plan required by the NPATMA designed to mitigate or prevent the significant adverse impacts, if any, of commercial air tour operations upon the natural and cultural resources, visitor experience, and tribal lands. The ATMP establishes conditions for the conduct of commercial air tour operations below 5000 feet AGL and within one-half mile outside the boundary of a national park, and may include, but is not limited to, such characteristics as:

• Commercial air tour routes; • Maximum number of flights per unit of time; • Maximum and minimum altitudes; • Time of day restrictions; • Restrictions for particular events; • Intrusions of privacy on tribal lands; or • Mitigation of noise, visual, or other impacts.

D. ATMP Working Group. An ATMP working group consists of: an AWP-4 representative, an AWP-200 representative, an Office of Environment and Energy (AEE) representative, the Chief Counsel’s Office representatives, and the NPS Regional Director and/or designated staff. Air Traffic and Airports Division Specialists may be used as needed. This group/and or its delegates will develop the draft ATMPs and applicable NEPA compliance documents.

E. Certificate-Holding District Office. The CHDO is the FSDO responsible for managing an air carrier or commercial operator’s certificate. These offices are also responsible for issuing, monitoring, compliance, and enforcement of IOA and LOAs regarding ATMPs for national park units within their geographical office boundaries.

F. Commercial Air Tour Operator. Any person who conducts a commercial air tour operation.

G. Commercial Air Tour Operation.

1) Any flight, conducted for compensation or hire in a powered aircraft where a purpose of the flight is sightseeing within one-half mile outside the boundary of any national park or over abutting tribal lands, during which the aircraft flies:

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 22



a) Below 5,000 feet AGL (except solely for the purposes of takeoff or landing, or necessary for safe operation of an aircraft as determined under the rules and regulations of the FAA requiring the pilot-in-command to take action to ensure the safe operation of the aircraft); or

b) Less than 1 mile laterally from any geographic feature within the park (unless more than one-half mile outside the boundary).

2) In making a determination of whether a flight is a commercial air tour operation for purposes of this section, the Administrator may consider:

a) Whether there was a holding out to the public of willingness to conduct a sightseeing flight for compensation or hire;

b) Whether a narrative that referring to areas or points of interest on the surface below the route of the flight was provided by the person offering the flight;

c) The area of operation;

d) The frequency of flights conducted by the person offering the flight;

e) The route of the flight;

f) The inclusion of sightseeing flights as part of any travel arrangement package offered by the person offering the flight;

g) Whether the flight would have been canceled based on poor visibility of the surface below the route of the flight; and

h) Any other factors that the Administrator and the Director consider appropriate.

H. Director. The Director of the NPS.

I. Existing Commercial Air Tour Operator. A commercial air tour operator that was actively engaged in the business of providing commercial air tour operations over a national park at any time during the 12-month period ending on the date of enactment of the NPATMA (i.e., April 5, 2000).

J. Operating Authority. Permission to conduct commercial air tour operations over a national park, or tribal lands, in compliance with an established ATMP.

K. Geographic Flight Standards District Office (GEO FSDO). The FSDO whose district boundaries contain a specific unit or units of the National Park System and/or tribal lands.

L. IOA. A temporary operating authority issued to existing Commercial Air Tour operators who applied for operating authority before the effective date of the final rule

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



implementing NPATMA. IOA remains in effect for 180 days after an ATMP is established. An IOA also may be issued to a New Entrant Commercial Air Tour Operator by the Administrator in cooperation with the NPS Director, if the Administrator determines the authority is necessary to ensure competition in the provision of commercial air tour operations over the park or tribal lands.

M. LOA. Letters describing the conditions under which commercial air tour operations will be conducted. One is secured from the National Park Superintendent and one from the Administrator (B057) for each relevant national park unit, issued to a part 91 commercial air tour operator permitting commercial air tour operations over a national park. The total number of such operations over each park is limited to five flights during any 30-day period for part 91 operators (that did not apply for air carrier certification prior to January 23, 2003) operating under a LOA for a given park.

N. National Park. Any unit of the National Park System, including national monuments. This list is available in the B057 template.

O. National Park Overflights Advisory Group (NPOAG). An advisory group created by NPATMA that is composed of a balanced group of representatives from general aviation, commercial air tour operators, environmental concerns, Indian Tribes, the FAA, and the NPS, which provides continuing advice and counsel with respect to commercial air tour operations over and near national parks.

P. NPATMA. NPATMA is a part of Public Law 106-181 signed into law on April 5, 2000. NPATMA establishes provisions governing overflights of national parks. Portions of NPATMA include a public process for the development of ATMPs in cooperation with the NPS, procedures for granting IOA, requirements for existing and new entrant commercial air tour operations and conditions and limitations for conducting commercial air tour operations over or near any unit of the National Park System or tribal lands.

Q. New Entrant Commercial Air Tour Operator. A commercial air tour operator that:

• Applies for operating authority as a commercial air tour operator for a national park or tribal lands;

• Is an existing commercial air tour operator and applies for new operating authority for national park (s) not previously conducted; and

• Is an existing commercial air tour operator and applies for an increase of operating authority numbers of air tours for currently approved national parks.

R. Part 91 Commercial Air Tour Operator. A part 91 operator with LOA conducting commercial air tour operations over a national park or tribal lands under 14 CFR part 119, § 119(e)(2).

S. Part 91 Operator (applied for air carrier certification). A part 91 existing commercial air tour operator granted IOA while pursuing certification as an air carrier under part 119.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 22



T. Person. An individual, firm, partnership, corporation, company, association, joint-stock association, or governmental entity. It includes a trustee, receiver, assignee, or similar representative of any of the aforementioned parties.

U. Superintendent. The duly appointed representative of the NPS for a particular unit of the National Park System.

V. Tribal Lands. Indian Country (as defined in 18 U.S.C. § 1151) that is within or abutting a national park.


5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22





Section 2 Air Tour Management Plans: Flight Operations Subject to Interim Operating Authority and Air Tour Management Plans

11-420 APPLICABILITY. This section prescribes the conditions a flight operation must include to be a commercial air tour operation subject to interim operating authority (IOA) and air tour management plans (ATMP). This section will assist Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) inspectors in determining whether an operation qualifies as a commercial air tour operation (as defined in the National Parks Air Tour Management Act of 2000 (NPATMA)).

A. Conditions of Flight. All of the following conditions must be met for the operation to be considered a commercial air tour:

1) The flight is conducted for compensation or hire;

2) The aircraft used is a powered aircraft;

3) A purpose of the flight is sightseeing; and

4) The flight is conducted below 5,000 feet above ground level (AGL) in any of the following places (exception, see paragraph 11-287):

• Over a unit of the national park system, • Within one-half nautical mile (NM) outside the boundary of a National Park

unit, • Over tribal lands, or • Less than one NM laterally from any geographic feature within the park

(unless more than one-half NM outside the boundary).

B. Determining if a Purpose of the Flight is Sightseeing.

1) The determination of whether sightseeing comprises a purpose of a particular operation is dependent upon several variables. In cases where situations are not expressly covered here, inspectors should consult with Flight Standards, Western Pacific Region, AWP-200, who will have the latest policy guidance and ensure its uniform application. For related environmental issues AWP-200 will consult with AWP-4 for the latest National Park policy guidance.

2) NPATMA provides that any of the following factors may be considered:

a) Is there a holding out to the public of a willingness to conduct a sightseeing flight for compensation or hire? This can be shown by pamphlets, Web sites, or other advertising.

05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 22



b) Did the flight include a narrative that referred to areas or points of interest on the surface below the route of flight?

c) Is the area of operation near a unit of the National Park System?

d) Does the operator conduct these types of flights on a frequent basis?

e) Is the flight(s) planned route for the purpose of sightseeing over a unit of the National Park System?

f) Is the inclusion of sightseeing flights a part of a travel arrangement package offered by the person offering the flight?

g) Would the flight have been canceled because of poor visibility of the surface below the route of flight?

h) Any other factors that the Administrator and the Director of the National Park Service consider appropriate.

11-421 EXCEPTIONS. The following flight operations are not regulated by NPATMA:

A. Takeoff or Landing. A flight that operates below 5,000 feet AGL over a unit of the national park system or over tribal lands or within 1/2 NM outside the boundary of a national park, solely for the purpose of takeoff or landing.

B. Safe Operation of the Aircraft. This phrase encompasses the discretionary action of a pilot who descends below 5,000 ft AGL over or within 1/2 NM outside the boundary of a national park, where the descent is necessary for the safe operation of the aircraft. This is determined by FAA regulations requiring the pilot in command to take whatever action necessary to ensure the safe operation of the aircraft.

C. Grand Canyon National Park. Commercial air tour operations over Grand Canyon National Park (GCNP) (see SFAR 50-2 and part 93).

D. Tribal Lands Within or Abutting GCNP. A Commercial air tour operation over that portion of tribal lands within or abutting the GCNP.

E. Alaska. A commercial air tour operation over lands or waters located in the State of Alaska.

F. Lake Mead. Any air tour operator while flying over or near the Lake Mead National Recreational Area (LMNRA), solely as a transportation route, to conduct an air tour over the GCNP. An air tour operator flying over the Hoover Dam in the LMNRA en route to the GCNP is deemed to be flying solely as a transportation route.

1) A large portion of the commercial air tours to GCNP originate in Las Vegas, Nevada, and as such, transit over LMNRA en route to/from the Grand Canyon. It was never the intent of NPATMA to capture these operations, since they are already regulated through

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



SFAR 50-2 and Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 93, unless they also are commercial air tour operations of LMNRA.

2) All commercial air tour operators flying over or near LMNRA, solely as a transportation route, to conduct a commercial air tour over GCNP are exempt from the provisions of the NPATMA, and from the IOA requirements of 14 CFR part 136.

3) Principal operations inspectors (POI) having oversight responsibilities relating to commercial air tour operators are required to review (with the operator) all flight operations which transit LMNRA. If it is determined that all of the operator’s flights for which IOA was issued are solely transiting LMNRA en route to/from GCNP for the purpose of conducting a commercial air tour of GCNP, then that operator does not require the issuance of operations specification (OpSpec) B057, National Park Air Tour Management Operations-Under 14 CFR Part 136. If the operator is conducting a commercial air tour of the LMNRA for some or all of the flights, then the operator will need OpSpec B057 for those flights.

4) If it is determined that the number of operations in OpSpec B057 is incorrect, or that the entire OpSpec B057 was issued in error, the POI should amend or rescind OpSpec B057 authority, as appropriate, and send a letter to the operator stating why the OpSpec authority is being amended or why the authorization is being rescinded. If the operator requests at a later date to conduct air tours of Lake Mead then the operator must apply as a new entrant.

11-422 PROHIBITED FLIGHTS. A commercial air tour operation in the airspace over the Rocky Mountain National Park is prohibited.


05/01/08 8900.1 CHG 22





Section 4 Air Tour Management Plans: Part 91 Commercial Air Tour Operators

11-455 APPLICABILITY. The National Parks Air Tour Management Act of 2000 (NPATMA) provides for Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 91 commercial air tour operators to conduct limited air tour operations over national parks notwithstanding the air tour management plan (ATMP) process. Part 91 commercial air tour operators are allowed to conduct very limited commercial air tour operations over a given park unit or abutting tribal land. For each National Park unit, the operator must first secure a letter of agreement (LOA) from the National Park Service (NPS) park superintendent and the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) to conduct such operations under the conditions specified in the LOA.

11-456 LIMITATIONS.

A. Regulatory Compliance. An LOA may only be issued for commercial air tour operations conducted in accordance with 14 CFR part 119, § 119.1(e)(2) and part 135, § 135.1(a)(5).

B. Limitations on Operations. In accordance with part 136, § 136.7(g)(3), part 91 commercial air tour operators may conduct commercial air tour operations over a park unit limited to not more than five flights by all part 91 commercial air tour operators in any 30-day period.

11-457 APPLICATION FOR LOA.

A. For an LOA to be granted, a part 91 commercial air tour operator must submit a written LOA application letter to the Flight Standards District Office (FSDO) whose boundaries include the requested park unit(s). The application letter must include the following:

• Company name, mailing address, responsible party, and phone numbers; • Address of the principal base where operations will be conducted; • Proposed startup date; • Number of flights proposed each 30-day period per park unit(s); • Number and type of aircraft to be used; and • National park, tribal land, or geographic area of intended operations.

B. The FSDO will consult with the Flight Standards Western Pacific Region (AWP-200) regarding any safety evaluations that may be needed prior to issuing the LOA.

11-458 LETTER OF AGREEMENT. After coordinating with the park superintendent, obtaining a copy of the NPS LOA from the applicant for each National Park Unit requested, coordinating with AWP-200, and completing any safety review, the FSDO may issue a LOA template B057 to the operator from the Automated Operations Safety System (OPSS).

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



NOTE: In coordinating an LOA with the NPS for each park unit requested, an LOA must be secured from each park superintendent stating any conditions applicable to the proposed air tour operations. This letter will then be attached to each operator’s FAA LOA and constitute the NPS’s signature authorization. The FSDO must retain copies of each NPS LOA in the operators’ permanent file and send copies of all LOAs to AWP-200.

A. Contents. The LOA will contain the following items, as applicable:

• Name and operating address of the operator, • Number of commercial air tour operations authorized for that operator in any

30-day period, • Any limitations or conditions needed for safety, • Any limitations or conditions required by the park superintendent (must be an

attached letter), and • Notice that the LOA is not a property interest, but rather an operating privilege

that can be modified or revoked by the FAA.

B. Issuance and Distribution. LOAs may be issued when all requirements and coordination approvals have been met and amended as needed. A copy of each LOA will be sent to AWP-200 and the Western-Pacific Executive Resource Staff, AWP-4.


5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22





Section 5 Air Tour Management Plans: Operating Authority and Federal Aviation Administration Oversight/Surveillance

11-474 OPERATING AUTHORITY.

A. Issuance. Operating authority is granted to commercial air tour operators as the result of an established air tour management plan (ATMP) that prescribes a limited number of commercial air tours over a park unit or abutting tribal land. When issued for any given park unit, operating authority will become effective 180 days after completion of the ATMP. Operating authority is granted by issuing template B057, part (b) as described in Volume 3, Chapter 18, Section 4, Operations Specifications: Part B Operations Specifications—En Route Authorizations and Limitations.

B. Amendments. It may be necessary to amend the operating authority of a particular commercial air tour operator in order to accommodate internal or operational changes. Operators should submit requests for amendments to their operating authority to their respective certificate-holding district office (CHDO). It is in the operator’s interest to present full justification with the request, including representations as to the possible impact on safety. All requests for operating authority amendments must be coordinated through the Flight Standards Western Pacific Region (AWP-200).

11-475 OPERATOR REQUEST FOR AN INCREASE IN COMMERCIAL AIR TOURS.

A. Operators that have been granted operating authority on their template B057 may request an increase in commercial air tour operations. Inspectors must coordinate the request with AWP-200.

B. AWP-200 will coordinate the request with the Western-Pacific Region Executive Resource Staff, AWP-4 and the National Park Service (NPS). If approved, AWP-200 will coordinate with the CHDO for OpSpec B057, part(b) reissuance.

11-476 MERGERS, ACQUISITIONS, AND BANKRUPTCIES.

A. Mergers and Acquisitions. If air tour operators merge operations, acquire operational assets of another air tour operator, or change ownership, commercial air tour operating authority may be reallocated by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) on a case-by-case basis, and subject to all of the following conditions:

• Operating authority is not effective until the CHDO reissues the OpSpec/LOA reflecting the authorization;

• An air tour operator must notify its respective CHDO in writing with a request to reallocate operating authority with justification explaining the similarities

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



between the previous and current operations (for example: personnel, aircraft, park units, routes);

• The notification must identify both the names of the parties and the number of operating authorities per unit of national park involved; and

• Prior coordination with and approval of AWP-200 is required.

NOTE: See Volume 3, Chapter 34, Section 1, Air Carrier Mergers and Acquisition of Air Carrier Operational Assets, for additional guidance.

B. Bankruptcies. If an operator surrenders its operating certificate or goes out of business, air tour operating authorities are NOT transferable to another operator without approval from AWP-200. These air tour-operating authorities will revert back to the FAA.

11-477 ATMP AMENDMENTS. Under certain circumstances it may be necessary to amend an ATMP. For example, updates of the park general management plan that propose significant changes in park use may require concurrent reevaluation of the ATMP. Any interested party may request amendments to an existing ATMP. The National Parks Air Tour Management Act of 2000 (NPATMA) and Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 136 allow for such amendments through the rulemaking process. Inquiries regarding amendments to ATMPs should be directed to AWP-4.

11-478 FAA OVERSIGHT AND SURVEILLANCE. FAA Flight Standards Service is responsible for oversight and surveillance of all commercial air tour operators. Each office with part 136 surveillance responsibilities must develop a safety and surveillance plan. (See Figure 11-19 for a sample air tour safety plan.)

A. A minimum of one planned item per air tour operator should be included in all principal operations inspectors’ work plans that have responsibility for commercial air tour operators.

B. Flight Standards District Office (FSDO) management personnel should also contact each National Park Unit Superintendent within their area of jurisdiction at least once a year to discuss mutual air tour issues.

11-479 ENFORCEMENTS.

A. Responsibility. The local CHDO or FSDO is responsible for enforcing the applicable sections of 14 CFR as they apply to commercial air tour operations and the specific provisions contained in all types of operating authority, including Letters of Agreement and ATMPs.

B. Investigations. All investigations will be conducted according to the procedures set forth in FAA Order 2150.3, Compliance and Enforcement Program, as revised.

C. Coordination. Investigations into possible violations of the provisions of NPATMA, a specific ATMP, or other part 136 requirements require notification and coordination with AWP-200.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



D. Safety Issues. Investigations of possible violations of safety regulations require no coordination, but it is recommended that AWP-200 be advised of any such occurrences.


5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



Figure 11-19, Sample Air Tour Safety Plan

FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION

AIR TOUR OPERATION PLAN

[XXXX]

FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE

Address

Phone

AIR TOUR OPERATIONS PLAN

[XXXX]

Flight Standards District Office

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



Figure 11-19, Sample Air Tour Safety Plan (Continued)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Record of Revisions

Air Tour Operations Plan

Attachment 1: Operator 1 Safety Plan





5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22




RECORD OF REVISIONS

Number Date By Comments

Original

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22




AIR TOUR OPERATIONS PLAN

XXXX

FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE

INTRODUCTION. The purpose of this operations plan is to provide a guide and procedures for pilots to enhance safety while operating aircraft on air tours. The plan will include, as a minimum, the location of airports/heliports, standard routes and altitudes and common radio frequencies to be used by the participants. In addition, safety procedures for high altitude operations and rescue may also be included for operator use, if applicable.

PARTICIPATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES.

A. Participation in the safety plan is required by all operators and their employees. Pilots are ultimately responsible for the safety of the aircraft and passengers at all times during operation. Ground personnel should be responsible for safety during ground operations including loading and unloading passengers and escorting people to and from the aircraft. All of the above personnel should be trained in precautions to take during refueling operations.

B. Each participating agency should designate one primary and one alternate representative to the council. These personnel should be the point of contact for coordinating safety and operations procedures adopted for this plan. These personnel should be given the authority to establish and enforce safety procedures within each entity commensurate with this plan.

FLIGHT ACTIVITIES. This plan addresses air tour flight activities conducted under visual flight rules (VFR) addressed in Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) part 91. The following regulations are included for reference:

A. Operating Near Other Aircraft (part 91, § 91.111).

• No person may operate an aircraft so close to another aircraft as to create a collision hazard.

• No person may operate an aircraft in formation flight except by arrangement with the pilot in command of each aircraft in the formation.

• No person may operate an aircraft carrying passengers for hire in formation flight.

B. Right-of-Way Rules (part 91, § 91.113).

1) General. When weather conditions permit, regardless of whether an operation is conducted under instrument flight rules (IFR) or VFR rules, vigilance shall be maintained by each person operating an aircraft so as to see and avoid other aircraft. When a rule of this section gives another aircraft right-of-way, the pilot shall give way to that aircraft and may not pass over, under, or ahead of it unless well clear.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



2) In distress. An aircraft in distress has the right-of-way over all other aircraft.

3) Converging. When aircraft of the same category are converging at approximately the same altitude (except head on, or nearly so), the aircraft to the other's right has the right-of-way.

4) Approaching head-on. When aircraft are approaching each other head-on, or nearly so, each pilot of each aircraft shall alter course to the right.

5) Overtaking. Each aircraft that is being overtaken has the right-of-way and each pilot of an overtaking aircraft shall alter course to the right and pass well clear.

6) Landing. Aircraft, while on final approach to land or while landing, have the right-of-way over other aircraft in flight or operating on the surface, except that they shall not take advantage of this rule to force an aircraft off the runway surface which has already landed and is attempting to make way for an aircraft on final approach. When two or more aircraft are approaching to land, the aircraft at the lower altitude has the right-of-way, but it shall not take advantage of this rule to cut in front of another aircraft which is on final approach to land or to overtake that aircraft.

C. Minimum Safe Altitudes (part 91, § 91.119). Except when necessary for takeoff or landing, no person may operate an aircraft below the following altitudes:

1) Anywhere. An altitude allowing, if a power unit fails, an emergency landing without undue hazard to persons or property on the surface

2) Over congested areas. Over any congested area of a city, town, settlement, or over any open air assembly of persons, an altitude of 1,000 feet above the highest obstacle with a horizontal radius of 2,000 feet from the aircraft

3) Over other than congested areas. An altitude of 500 feet above the surface, except over open water or sparsely populated areas. In those cases, the aircraft may not be operated closer than 500 feet to any person, vessel, or structure

4) Helicopters. Helicopters may be operated at less than the minimums prescribed in paragraph B or C of this section if the operation is conducted without hazard to persons or property on the surface. In addition, each person operating a helicopter shall comply with any routes or altitudes specifically prescribed for helicopters by the administrator

D. Flight Routes and Check Points. Standard flight routes are established in such a manner that aircraft traversing the route generally fly in the same direction and avoid potential head-on situations. Aerial checkpoints, identified by ground reference points, are established at each location where two or more aircraft might enter a route.

NOTE: Noise sensitive areas within the area of influence have specific requirements regarding distance from geographic points. The minimum distance to be flown near these attractions is indicated on the attached maps.

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



E. Radio Frequencies.

1) Each air tour pilot should monitor frequency xxx.x in the xxxx area, and announce intentions on this frequency prior to entering a route. A secondary frequency should be available in the event the primary frequency becomes inoperable. In this case, the operator with the defective frequency should call the other operators and alert them to change to the secondary frequency. When the primary frequency is again operable, a call should be made to switch back to the primary frequency.

2) Each operator should use a separate discrete frequency to communicate with his or her base heliport/airport during takeoff and landing. It is recommended that each heliport/airport use a separate frequency to avoid confusion during takeoff and landing and switch to frequency xxx.x when airborne.

F. Area(s) of Operation.

1) List Park Units and Tribal Lands in FSDO’s area of jurisdiction

2) Air tour routes are shown by operator on the enclosed maps and include: xxx, xxx, and xxx Parks and Tribal Lands

G. Air Traffic Control (ATC) Services Available.

1) XXX Radar Approach Control (RAPCON) is the primary ATC facility providing IFR and Basic VFR services to the surrounding area to include the area of influence described in this Operations Plan.

2) When in communication with VFR sightseeing aircraft, XXX approach suggests an altitude of xxxx ft. mean sea level (m.s.l.) vertically and xxxx ft. laterally from the monument. XXX Approach advises said aircraft of the availability of frequency xxx.x to advise other tour operators of their location and intentions.

3) Tour operators are encouraged to contact xxx Approach on frequency xxx.x for traffic advisories when operating outside the area of operations or at high altitudes.

H. In-Flight or Ground Emergencies.

1) In an emergency situation, immediate transmit type of aircraft, call sign (tail number), location, nature of emergency and pilot's desires. This radio transmission may be relayed over frequency XXX.X, the operator's base station frequency, or ATC emergency frequency 121.5 for relay and coordination of emergency response.

2) The following agencies are available in the event of an in-flight or ground emergency requiring the need of emergency response agencies or vehicles:

3) XXXX Hospital’s Rescue Helicopter: (XXX) XXX-XXXX.

4) XXX Fire Department: 911 (XXX) XXX-XXXX

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



5) XXX Ambulance Service: 911 or (XXX) XXX-XXXX

6) XXX Police Department: 911 or (XXX) XXX-XXXX

7) XXX County Sheriff's office: 911 or (XXX) XXX-XXXX

ATTACHMENTS.

• Operator Safety Plans • Map (s) of National Parks & tribal lands depicting routes for each operator

Operator, Inc.

Address

Phone

Air Tour Safety Plan

Each Safety Plan should include at minimum the following items. Operator and/or Park specific topics may be added to further tailor the air tour safety plan to each unique operation.

Fire protection procedures

Overdue aircraft procedures

Loader/Escort duties and passenger briefing

Refueling procedures

Protection of passengers embarking and debarking the aircraft

Any conditions the Park Superintendent requests

Minimum Altitudes over specified areas

Noise abatement procedures, if applicable

Specified Routes

Time of day restrictions, if any

Reference to applicable when completed

Copy of each operators B057 authorization/LOA as applicable

5/1/08 8900.1 CHG 22



I certify that I have read, understand, and agree to comply with this safety program.

Name Title Date

AERIAL TOUR CONTACT LIST.

NAME

COMPANY 1

ADDRESS

PHONE

NAME

COMPANY 2

ADDRESS

PHONE

NAME

COMPANY 3

ADDRESS

PHONE

VOLUME 2 AIR OPERATOR AND AIR AGENCY CERTIFICATION … history... · 2010. 11. 24. ·...

Documents

Transcript of VOLUME 2 AIR OPERATOR AND AIR AGENCY CERTIFICATION … history... · 2010. 11. 24. ·...